New Delhi, July 31: This month, many new cars and bikes were launched, unveiled, or rumoured to arrive soon in the Indian market. However, some of the cars and bikes that were expected to launch in July 2025 were not introduced or delayed. On the other hand, Kia Carens Clavis EV, MG M9 EV, MG Cyberster, and many other cars were launched in India this month. In August 2025, several new vehicles will be introduced in various price segments and categories.
This month, two-wheeler manufacturers also launched models like the Hero Vida VX2, TVS NTORQ 125 Super Soldier Edition, Honda CB125 Hornet, Honda Shine 100 DX, and many others. Most notably, Tesla launched its first-ever EV, theTesla Model Y, in India this month and opened a showroom at the BKC complex in Mumbai. VinFast, a Vietnamese electric vehicle maker, opened its first showroom in Gujarat’s Surat and will sell the upcoming VinFast VF 6 and VinFast VF 7 models from there. BYD Atto 2 Launch Expected Soon in India, Upcoming Compact Electric SUV May Offer 380 to 402 Kilometre Range; Check Expected Specifications and Features.
Upcoming Car Launches in August 2025
The 2025 Volvo XC60 Facelift is set to launch in India on August 1, 2025 (tomorrow). It is expected to come with an 11.2-inch touchscreen, upgraded headlights, and a 2.0-litre turbo-petrol engine mated to an eight-speed transmission. It may cost INR 72 lakh (ex-showroom).
The Mercedes-AMG CLE 53 Coupe will likely be launched on August 12, 2025, in the sedan segment. It may have dual-zone climate control, a wireless charger, and wireless and multiple driving modes. It may have a 3.0-litre twin-turbo petrol straight-6 engine mated with a nine-speed DCT transmission capable of generating 449 hp power. The Mercedes-AMG CLE 53 Coupe may be launched at INR 2 crore.
Mahindra’s New SUV is also expected to launch in August 2025 with C-shaped LED headlamps, a new front and bumper design, and bold looks. Reports indicated that the model would likely be different from the Bolero and XUV 3XO range. It is expected that the Bolero Neo Facelift may launch, or a Thar Roxx-like model may launch. It may have 1.2- or 1.5-litre diesel engine options.
VinFast VF 6 and VinFast VF 7 will be launched at the end of August 2025. Both will be electric and offer a 450—to 500 km range on a single charge. VF 7 may have a 70.8kWh battery and offer 450 km range. VF 7 will have a smaller 59.6kWh battery that will offer 480 km range. Pre-bookings have already been open in India since July 15, 2025.
Upcoming Bike Launches in July 2025
Triumph Thruxton 400 will launch in India on August 6, 2025, with a 399cc liquid-cooled DOHC single-cylinder engine offering 39.5 bhp power and 37.5 Nm of peak torque. It may launch between INR 2.90 and INR 3 lakh.
The TVS Apache RTX 300 is expected to launch in August 2025 with a 299cc liquid-cooled single-cylinder engine. It may be priced between INR 2.60 and INR 2.90 lakh.
KTM 160 Duke may launch in India next month with a price range of INR 1.70 to INR 1.80 lakh. It may have a 160cc engine.
Suzuki E Access may be launched in August. It will likely have a 3.0kWh battery offering 95 km IDC range and various other unique features. It may be priced between INR 1 and 1.20 lakh.
KTM 390 Adventure X Plus may debut in India next month. It will have a 398cc engine and a price tag of INR 3.10 to INR 3.20 lakh. Tesla Valuation Can Reach USD 20 Trillion in Future With ‘Extreme Execution’: CEO Elon Musk.
Besides these models, many new cars and bikes may launch in India in August 2025. Some models may have been announced a few days ago. All the rumoured prices mentioned here are ex-showroom prices, and they may differ from the actual announcement. Actual prices may be revealed next month.
(The above story first appeared on LatestLY on Jul 31, 2025 06:43 PM IST. For more news and updates on politics, world, sports, entertainment and lifestyle, log on to our website latestly.com).
Having mined 215 bitcoin between its April launch and May 31, American Bitcoin rounds out the Trump family’s crypto business portfolio. As of July 1, it raised $220 million from investors, which it plans to put toward buying bitcoin and mining equipment. Together with the Trumps’ past crypto plays—which include a meme coin, stablecoin, and $2.5 billion bitcoin treasury investment for Trump Media & Technology Group, which includes Truth Social—American Bitcoin’s helping further consolidate the family’s influence over this growing, and increasingly institution- and government-tied, financial ecosystem.
The Trumps’ crypto activities had reportedly contributed around $2.9 billion to the family’s wealth as of mid-March. American Bitcoin could add via its primary objective—accumulating bitcoin. First, it’s mining to generate bitcoin below market cost (since miners get rewarded for their work, they get bitcoin at a better value than those buying on exchanges). Then it will buy more bitcoin to create its own strategic reserve.
As of June 18, Prusak told Wired he “can’t disclose” when the company will start buying nor through what exchange, but Coinbase Prime currently serves as the company’s “primary market.” (Its CEO, Brian Armstrong, has reportedly met with President Trump to help shape US crypto policy.)
When Hut8 announced its joining with the Trump brothers to create American Bitcoin, others in the crypto mining industry were “caught off guard,” says Foxley. While meme coins like Trump Coin constitute flashy, headline-generating cash grabs, bitcoin mining is what Foxley deems the “backwater of crypto”—unsexy, and underreported on, save articles lambasting its extensive energy use.
But, with the Trump administration pushing an “energy first approach for the US,” Foxley adds, it makes sense. The president met with some of the US’s biggest miners while campaigning at Mar-a-Lago in June 2024, where they discussed how the US should be “number one” in bitcoin mining, an agenda Trump echoed the following month at the Bitcoin Conference in Nashville.
The crypto industry poured $135 million into 2024 elections, and it maintained political influence by lobbying Congress and gaining the president’s ear. President Trump has made sure to personally benefit from the profits while working to tie the industry’s success to the US government, encouraging crypto-friendly legislation and planning a federal strategic bitcoin reserve.
While President Trump’s proposed tariffs on Chinese mining equipment were bad news for the crypto mining industry in the US, they have so far not come into play. On May 12, American Bitcoin announced its plan to go public through a merger with the NASDAQ-traded Gryphon Digital Mining, which per its SEC filing “operates approximately 5,880 bitcoin mining computers” at a third-party’s mining center in Pennsylvania. The computers come from Chinese company Bitmain.
After American Bitcoin accumulates ample bitcoin through mining and buying, the company’s ultimate goal, per American Bitcoin’s SEC filing, is to “lead the ecosystem,” which could include supporting bitcoin developments and encouraging its adoption.
Like everything done under the Trump family name, American Bitcoin has “the goal to be the biggest,” Eric said in a May interview at blockchain conference Consensus. The company’s planned merger with Gryphon, per the latter’s SEC filing, will create a public entity “focused on building the world’s largest, most efficient pure-play Bitcoin miner.” After the merger, the company’s five directors will be Ho, Prusak (who’s also founder and partner at Defense Angels, a venture firm that per its website “invests in the future of national security”), and three non-employees—FabFitFun cofounder Michael Broukhim, Tinder cofounder Justin Mateen, and Genoot.
As part of the July Nintendo Direct, Square Enix announced Octopath Traveler 0. The newest entry in the HD-2D series launches for Nintendo Switch and Nintendo Switch 2 on December 4. It remains to be seen if the game is headed to other platforms beyond Switch. You can check out the reveal trailer below.
It’s called Octopath Traveler 0 because players “start from zero” and go on a quest for “restoration and retribution.” Along the way, players will “confront powerful villains and rebuild your hometown.”
The original Octopath Traveler came out in 2018 for Switch before leaping to PC in 2019, Stadia in 2020, Xbox in 2021, and then PlayStation in 2024. Octopath Traveler II was released in 2023.
The July Nintendo Direct included other announcements, including Monster Hunter Stories 3: Twisted Reflection and Once Upon a Katamari, along with details about the Switch versions of Madden 26, Apex Legends, and Just Dance 2026, among others. Check out the gallery below to see all the big reveals.
Scientists at UC San Francisco and Gladstone Institutes have identified cancer drugs that promise to reverse the changes that occur in the brain during Alzheimer’s, potentially slowing or even reversing its symptoms.
The study first analyzed how Alzheimer’s disease altered gene expression in single cells in the human brain. Then, researchers looked for existing drugs that were already approved by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) and cause the opposite changes to gene expression.
They were looking specifically for drugs that would reverse the gene expression changes in neurons and in other types of brain cells called glia, all of which are damaged or altered in Alzheimer’s disease.
Next, the researchers analyzed millions of electronic medical records to show that patients who took some of these drugs as part of their treatment for other conditions were less likely to get Alzheimer’s disease.
When they tested a combination of the two top drugs — both of which are cancer medications — in a mouse model of Alzheimer’s, it reduced brain degeneration in the mice, and even restored their ability to remember.
“Alzheimer’s disease comes with complex changes to the brain, which has made it tough to study and treat, but our computational tools opened up the possibility of tackling the complexity directly,” said Marina Sirota, PhD, the interim director of the UCSF Bakar Computational Health Sciences Institute, professor of pediatrics, and co-senior author of the paper. “We’re excited that our computational approach led us to a potential combination therapy for Alzheimer’s based on existing FDA-approved medications.”
The findings appeared in Cell on July 21. The research was funded in part by the National Institutes of Health and the National Science Foundation.
Big data from patients and cells points to a new Alzheimer’s therapy
Alzheimer’s disease affects 7 million people in the U.S. and causes a relentless decline in cognition, learning, and memory. Yet decades of research have only produced two FDA-approved drugs, neither of which can meaningfully slow this decline.
“Alzheimer’s is likely the result of numerous alterations in many genes and proteins that, together, disrupt brain health,” said Yadong Huang, MD, PhD, senior investigator and director of the Center for Translational Advancement at Gladstone, professor of neurology and pathology at UCSF, and co-senior author of the paper. “This makes it very challenging for drug development — which traditionally produces one drug for a single gene or protein that drives disease.”
The team took publicly available data from three studies of the Alzheimer’s brain that measured single-cell gene expression in brain cells from deceased donors with or without Alzheimer’s disease. They used this data to produce gene expression signatures for Alzheimer’s disease in neurons and glia.
The researchers compared these signatures with those found in the Connectivity Map, a database of results from testing the effects of thousands of drugs on gene expression in human cells.
Out of 1,300 drugs, 86 reversed the Alzheimer’s disease gene expression signature in one cell type, and 25 reversed the signature in several cell types in the brain. But just 10 had already been approved by the FDA for use in humans.
Poring through records housed in the UC Health Data Warehouse, which includes anonymized health information on 1.4 million people over the age of 65, the group found that several of these drugs seemed to have reduced the risk of developing Alzheimer’s disease over time.
“Thanks to all these existing data sources, we went from 1,300 drugs, to 86, to 10, to just 5,” said Yaqiao Li, PhD, a former UCSF graduate student in Sirota’s lab who is now a postdoctoral scholar in Huang’s lab at Gladstone and the lead author of the paper. “In particular, the rich data collected by all the UC health centers pointed us straight to the most promising drugs. It’s kind of like a mock clinical trial.”
A combination therapy poised for primetime
Li, Huang, and Sirota chose 2 cancer drugs out of the top 5 drug candidates for laboratory testing. They predicted one drug, letrozole, would remedy Alzheimer’s in neurons; and another, irinotecan, would help glia. Letrozole is usually used to treat breast cancer; irinotecan is usually used to treat colon and lung cancer.
The team used a mouse model of aggressive Alzheimer’s disease with multiple disease-related mutations. As the mice aged, symptoms resembling Alzheimer’s emerged, and they were treated with one or both drugs.
The combination of the two cancer drugs reversed multiple aspects of Alzheimer’s in the animal model. It undid the gene expression signatures in neurons and glia that had emerged as the disease progressed. It reduced both the formation of toxic clumps of proteins and brain degeneration. And, importantly, it restored memory.
“It’s so exciting to see the validation of the computational data in a widely used Alzheimer’s mouse model,” Huang said. He expects the research to advance soon to a clinical trial so the team can directly test the combination therapy in Alzheimer’s patients.
“If completely independent data sources, such as single-cell expression data and clinical records, guide us to the same pathways and the same drugs, and then resolve Alzheimer’s in a genetic model, then maybe we’re onto something,” Sirota said. “We’re hopeful this can be swiftly translated into a real solution for millions of patients with Alzheimer’s.”
Authors: Other UCSF authors are Carlota Pereda Serras, MS, Jessica Blumenfeld, Xinyu Tang, PhD, Antara Rao, PhD, Sarah Woldemariam, PhD, Alice Tang, PhD, Tomiko Oskotsky, MD, and Michael J Keiser, PhD. Other Gladstone Institutes authors are Min Xie, PhD, Yanxia Hao, Elise Deng, You Young Chun, Julia Holtzman, Alice An, Seo Yeon Yoon, MBA, Alex Zhang, Jeffrey Simms, MA, and Iris Lo.
Funding: This study was supported by the National Institute on Aging (R01AG060393, R01AG057683, RF1AG076647, R01AG078164, and P01AG073082), the National Science Foundation (2034836), and the Dolby Family Fund.
The Department of Law, Manipal University Jaipur, offers B.A. LL.B. (Hons.), B.B.A. LL.B. (Hons.), and LL.B. programmes designed under a Choice-Based Credit System (CBCS), aligned with NEP and BCI guidelines. The department fosters outcome-based learning and aims to develop ethically grounded and socially responsible legal professionals. Green Horizon Club is an environmental initiative of MUJ promoting sustainability, conservation, and eco-conscious legal action through student-led events and outreach.
About the Competition
The 2nd International Client Counselling Competition 2025 is a hybrid event offering law students an opportunity to simulate real-world client interviews, legal analysis, and ethical counselling. Following the success of ICCC 1.0, this edition builds on experiential learning, teamwork, and professionalism.
Who is it for / Eligibility
Open to law students enrolled in 3-year or 5-year law degree courses at any recognized institution.
Each institution can register up to three teams.
Each team must consist of two members.
LL.M., diploma, part-time law students are not eligible.
Location
Preliminary to Semi-Final Rounds: Online via Google Meet
Final Round: Offline at Manipal University Jaipur, Rajasthan, India
Important Dates
Preliminary Round: 25 August 2025 (Online)
Quarter-Final & Semi-Final Rounds: 26 August 2025 (Online)
Final Round: 4 September 2025 (Offline at MUJ)
How to Register?
Interested candidates can apply online via the link given at the end of the post.
Registration Fee
INR 3,500 per team (non-refundable)
Accommodation for finalists will be available separately at an additional cost (includes stay, food, local transport)
JJ Valaya closed the Hyundai India Couture Week 2025 with his collection titled East.
The Hyundai India Couture Week 2025 came to a close with a spectacular showcase by the czar of Indian couture, JJ Valaya, presenting his collection, East.
Rasha Thadani and Ibrahim Ali Khan walk the ramp for JJ Valaya.
The fashion show dazzled with over 300 guests in attendance, turning the evening into a truly star-studded affair. India cricketer Abhishek Sharma kicked off the showcase in an embroidered floral kurta paired with a bundi adorned with intricate cutdana work. Actor Rahul Dev made an appearance on the ramp alongside his wife, actor Mugdha Godse.
The spectacular finale had actor Rasha Thadani command attention as the showstopper with her flawless walk, while actor Ibrahim Ali Khan set pulses racing with his magnetic presence.
Mini veils stole the spotlight on the ramp, adding an alluring edge to lehengas and anarkalis. Female models also sported turbans, adding a bold twist to traditional silhouettes. Each look was cinematic, a visual spectacle that crafted from rich fabrics and opulent embroidery, a testament to incredible craftsmanship.
This 60-piece collection was thoughtfully designed for brides seeking a lighter, more understated alternative to traditional, larger-than-life veils.
Valaya completes 33 years in fashion this year, and East was a befitting finale to this week of culture and style.
Vinay Prasad’s sudden resignation from the Food and Drug Administration Tuesday once again leaves the biopharmaceutical industry, which has spent much of the year in turmoil, wondering what to expect from its principal regulator.
Prasad’s brief stint as director of the Centers for Biologics Evaluation and Research and apparent right-hand man to Commissioner Martin Makary included several high-profile decisions that seemed indicative of shifting approval standards. Others appeared to run against Makary’s aim to make the FDA more flexible. His departure might be seen by some in industry as removing a contrarian viewpoint clouding the regulatory paths of a variety of medicines, from vaccines and gene therapies to certain cancer drugs.
His exit is “a net positive for the sector, as many of our conversations have been overwhelmingly focused on regulatory risk and what he may or may not do,” wrote Leerink Partners analyst Joseph Schwartz.
Since he was appointed, Prasad set a stricter framework for COVID-19 vaccine approvals and overruled fellow reviewers in decisions involving shots from Moderna and Novavax. The agency also rejected a Duchenne muscular dystrophy cell therapy from Capricor Therapeutics and a melanoma drug from Replimune. In both cases, the companies claimed they were turned back because of issues that hadn’t come up in earlier FDA meetings, which multiple analysts attributed to Prasad’s growing influence and higher standards for supporting evidence.
While every drug rejection has its “own nuances,” recent ones seemed to show “Dr. Prasad is not going to be a pushover,” Stifel analyst Paul Matteis wrote in a note published Wednesday.
Matteis added how the recent rejections led investors to question the “realness” of flexible regulatory agreements that companies had previously reached. Share prices of Capricor, Replimune and gene therapy developer Sarepta Therapeutics, all of which have been in Prasad’s crosshairs, rose in Wednesday trading. So did stock indices correlated with the broader sector.
With Prasad gone, one of the FDA’s top review offices is again without a leader — at a time when layoffs and the departure of many experienced top officials have raised doubts about the regulator’s ability to function efficiently. Despite Makary’s assertions publicly that the “trains are running on time,” a handful of approval deadlines have been missed. An analysis by the team at RBC Capital Markets in late June found “concerning signals of greater missed target dates,” leading them to believe there’s a higher risk of approval delays moving forward.
“The lack of continuity in senior leadership at CBER is concerning as it could impact the agency’s ability to meet review timelines and could lead to inconsistencies in the regulation of products under CBER,” wrote William Blair analyst Sami Corwin on Wednesday.
The abruptness of Prasad’s resignation suggests political forces and patient pressure may play a larger role in agency decisionmaking than in the past. Prasad faced attacks from conservativeoutlets and right-wing influencers in the days preceding his departure, with criticisms levied against his political views, review standards for rare diseases and, most recently, the agency’s standoff with Sarepta over the company’s Duchenne gene therapy Elevidys. The FDA specifically cited the Duchenne patient community’s input when it relented Monday on its demand that Sarepta stop shipping Elevidys to all patients.
The situation “makes us wonder if the FDA is more prone to being influenced by external factors,” such as patient advocacy groups, politics or news headlines, wrote Jefferies’ Andrew Tsai.
Some Wall Street analysts speculated Prasad’s departure could portend a change in policy to better align with Trump administration orthodoxy. Future CBER leadership may adopt a more “libertarian” stance “emphasizing patient autonomy over government control,” wrote Roger Song, another Jefferies analyst, in a separate note.
“We wonder if his departure could signal a shift towards the more permissive, patient advocacy centered ‘right to try’ wing of the MAHA movement vis-à-vis rare disease indications,” Leerink’s Schwartz added.
That may come down to who has the most say in naming Prasad’s successor. Makary was a “vocal supporter” of Prasad, noted William Blair’s Corwin. Prasad was quickly given a broad role within the FDA, and appeared often with Makary and other FDA leaders in YouTube livestreams. Multiple analysts expressed support for a more traditional pick, though it’s not clear “how much the appointment is up to Dr. Makary [versus] others at HHS,” wrote Stifel’s Matteis.
A new CBER head with more industry familiarity or drug development experience could benefit biotech, but if those credentials come with “prominent political ties,” it could also “undermine agency credibility,” wrote RBC’s Brian Abrahams.
An update to the FDA website on Wednesday showed that George Tidmarsh, who earlier this month was named the head of the FDA’s other primary drug review office, will serve as CBER’s acting director for the time being. In predicting who might replace Prasad, several analysts pointed to the type of background Tidmarsh has as a biotech industry veteran and Makary ally.
Editor’s note: This story was updated with detail regarding George Tidmarsh.
A well-prepared space supports both safety and supervision in a home setting
Paperwork and planning build trust and keep your service compliant
Consistent routines help children thrive and make your day smoother
Ongoing learning keeps your service current and ready for growth
Running childcare from home can feel like the perfect blend of purpose and practicality. You’re in your own space, setting your own pace, offering something meaningful to families who value a more personal touch. But once the idea moves beyond casual babysitting and into registered service territory, the demands shift quickly. There’s more structure, more regulation, and more at stake. If you’re setting up for the first time or upgrading what you’ve already built, the early stages matter.
You don’t need every shiny product on the market or the most expensive setup, but you do need systems that work. The right mix of safety measures, daily routines, and clear admin helps you deliver care that feels consistent and professional. It also protects your time, your energy, and the trust parents place in you.
Setting Up the Physical Space
Your home isn’t just your workplace now—it’s where small children will play, nap, eat, learn and, most importantly, feel secure. That shift requires you to view your environment in a different light. Safety has to be visible and proactive. Consider sightlines, soft surfaces, and secure furniture. Doors and gates should limit access to areas that aren’t child-safe, and open-plan layouts can help with easier supervision.
Age matters, too. What works for a 12-month-old won’t necessarily be appropriate for a three-year-old. Infants require soft floor zones for tummy time, safe sleep spaces, and hands-on support, while toddlers need more freedom to explore, but within clear boundaries. Most Australian regulations require specific ratios of space per child, both indoors and outdoors. That includes shaded play areas and fencing that meets height and latch requirements.
Noise is another part of the planning. Shared walls, apartment settings or close neighbours might affect how you handle outdoor time or nap schedules. Simple sound-dampening materials, clear communication with neighbours, and limiting group sizes can help you avoid complaints down the line.
Tip: Having a dedicated entrance, or at least a tidy drop-off zone, helps parents feel like they’re entering a professional space. Even if it’s just a corner of your living room, clean lines, visible safety features, and well-organised resources all signal that this is a space built for children, safely and intentionally.
Understanding the Administrative Side
Behind every calm, creative daycare space is a stack of paperwork, most of which needs to be sorted before your first family walks through the door. Registration processes vary depending on your state or territory, but most include working with children checks, first aid certification, home assessments, and registration through an approved service or coordination scheme. This part takes time, and there’s not much room for shortcuts.
You’ll also need an ABN, even if you’re only working with a few children, and a clear contract that sets out fees, hours, holiday periods, and procedures for illness or withdrawal. These protect both you and the families you work with, especially when hard conversations arise.
It’s also worth thinking about the broader risks. While your home is familiar, it becomes a workplace the moment you’re running a service from it. Having home daycare insurance in place helps cover you for things like accidental injury or property damage. It’s not just about compliance—it’s about knowing you’re protected when unpredictable things happen. Most providers also ask for proof of this cover during registration, so it’s not something you can skip or delay.
Note: Documentation doesn’t end once you’re approved. Attendance logs, daily routines, incident reports, and permission slips must be tracked and stored. Setting up a simple system now, whether digital or on paper, can save you hours later when it’s time for audits or parent queries.
Structuring Your Daily Operations
Once the room is set and the paperwork’s handled, your focus shifts to the rhythm of the day. Children respond best to consistency, and that’s just as important in a home-based setup as it is in a centre. Predictable routines around meals, naps, play, and learning help children feel secure and provide a framework for managing multiple needs simultaneously.
You’ll find that transitions are often the trickiest part. Getting three toddlers to wind down for nap time after outdoor play isn’t just about tone—it’s about how smoothly you’ve prepared that moment. Visual cues, music, or simple stories can help move the group between activities without chaos. Over time, you’ll pick up on each child’s natural rhythm and adjust accordingly, but having a baseline routine gives everyone a starting point.
Parents will expect updates, and it’s helpful to work out in advance how you’ll handle that. Some educators use daily report sheets or childcare apps, while others prefer verbal handovers at pickup. Either way, keeping a basic record of meals, sleep, moods, and activities helps you track patterns and support parents in managing behaviour or development concerns.
Programming doesn’t have to look like a classroom. One of the strengths of home-based care is its ability to respond flexibly to children’s interests. That said, you’ll still need to demonstrate intentional learning opportunities. Rotate books, set up themed play areas, or introduce simple sensory activities that suit different age groups. Having a loose weekly plan gives your days purpose and keeps things from slipping into passive supervision.
Communication with Families
Parents aren’t just handing over their child each morning—they’re trusting you with the parts of the day they can’t see. Strong communication is the glue that holds that trust together, especially when you’re working alone and decisions fall entirely on you.
Start with a clear enrolment conversation. Walk parents through your philosophy, policies, and procedures for handling aspects such as screen time, discipline, and food. Some topics might feel awkward at first, but setting expectations now prevents bigger problems later. Being upfront about your hours, sick leave policies, and holiday closures helps avoid assumptions that you’re always available just because you’re home.
Over time, the everyday updates matter just as much. Parents want to know how their child is adjusting, what they enjoyed, and if anything seemed off. Regular chats at pickup, simple journals, or even photo updates can go a long way in keeping them involved. If you use an app, ensure it’s secure and that you’re not overloading yourself with updates that consume your downtime.
There will be days when you need to raise a concern or handle a complaint. Staying calm, specific, and child-focused makes a huge difference. You’re not just working with children—you’re managing adult relationships too, and that emotional load is often underestimated. Some educators find it helpful to set a boundary around response times, so that late-night texts or weekend questions don’t encroach on personal time.
Note: Having a professional tone doesn’t mean being stiff; it means being articulate and concise. It means being reliable, respectful, and open to feedback, while still maintaining the structure you need to run your day smoothly. The better the communication, the easier it is to weather the hard days together.
Keeping Up with Regulations and Growth
Once you’re into a steady rhythm, it’s easy to slip into autopilot. But running a home-based childcare service isn’t something you can just set and forget. Regulations shift, best practices evolve, and what worked for three children might not hold up once your waitlist starts growing.
In Australia, regular audits and reviews are part of maintaining your approval. That means staying across changes to safety standards, supervision ratios, and record-keeping requirements. It also means being prepared for occasional spot checks, even if you’ve had a spotless record to date. Spending a few hours each term reviewing your setup, updating documentation, and checking compliance points can save you headaches later.
Professional development isn’t just a requirement—it’s often where the best ideas come from. Workshops, webinars, and online communities can provide you with practical ways to manage challenging behaviours, refresh your programming skills, or enhance your communication skills. Many schemes offer subsidised training, and staying connected helps reduce the isolation that sometimes comes with working solo.
If demand grows, so do your responsibilities. You may want to consider increasing your capacity, hiring an assistant, or partnering with another educator to share resources. These are big steps, but planning for them early keeps your options open. Even something as simple as reviewing your fee structure or updating your daily schedule can help future-proof your service.
Note: Running care from your home offers flexibility, connection, and autonomy—but it also comes with constant responsibility. The more prepared you are to adapt and improve, the more sustainable your work becomes.
About Guest Expert Apart from our regular team of experts, we frequently publish commentary from guest contributors who are authorities in their field.
You can plug more than just Ethernet cables into the back of your router. Most modern routers have a USB port on the back, which can turn them into the ultimate backup hub for your home.
You Can Plug USB Storage Into Your Router
Depending on your router’s make and model, its USB port likely supports external USB flash drives or even hard drives, provided they’re using file systems such as FAT32, NTFS, or exFAT. While there are even more devices you can plug into your router’s USB port, USB storage is often the intended purpose.
Pankil Shah/MakeUseOf
Setup is simple. Simply plug the USB drive into the router’s USB port, head to your router’s admin page, and activate the feature (it may be under a heading like USB Application or similar). Your router’s firmware is generally accessible by entering the local IP address of the router, such as 192.168.1.1, into your browser’s address bar.
You’ll usually find the default login credentials and IP address on a label at the back of the router, though you should change these credentials for your security if you haven’t already. Our router beginner’s guide explains more if you need help logging in.
Once you’re set up, your drives should appear as a network drive on Windows or macOS. For Android, iPhone, and other devices, you can use a third-party FTP-compatible file explorer (like FTPManager on iPhone or Solid Explorer on Android) to access your files. You can even set up your router to let you access your drive over the internet, which will likely be an option in the same settings menu if available.
Is Using USB Storage With Your Router a Good Idea?
Depending on the kinds of files you want to share across your network and their size, turning your router into a basic NAS can save you a lot of time and money. Another method to avoid buying a NAS is to convert an old PC or laptop into one, but you won’t be able to use it for anything else without taking the NAS offline.
Your router, on the other hand, is up and running 24/7. This means your storage is also available all the time, without taking up space or hogging an otherwise good PC. If you want a simple but effective storage solution that’s accessible from any device that can connect to your router, using USB storage is the way to go.
Some routers even support scheduled or real-time backups of network shares to the attached USB drive. Your data is also protected since the network drive acts as your personal “cloud storage”, with all data staying on-premises without paying any subscription fees.
Jayric Maning / MakeUseOf
There are, however, drawbacks to this approach. Most routers have slow USB 2.0 ports, meaning data transfer speeds max out at 20 to 30 MB/s. You can get better speeds if your router has a USB 3.0 port, but they’ll never be the same as a dedicated NAS or directly plugging the drive into your PC or smartphone.
Additionally, transferring heavy files constantly across the network can drop the performance for other devices trying to access the storage. Router CPUs are generally optimized for networking, and USB storage is a secondary function. You can also face reliability issues with this approach. USB drives tend to pull more current than your router’s USB port might be able to provide under load, which could result in disconnections or even file corruption during data transfer.
Then there are file system limitations. Not all routers support every file system, so while FAT32, NTFS, and exFAT may be supported, more niche formats like Linux’s EXT3 or EXT4 may not work. This is often simply a matter of reformatting your drive in a compatible file system and won’t affect data transfers or drive visibility. We’ve got a detailed explainer on file systems to help you out if you’re stumped.
If you set up your drive to be accessible via the internet, you face the risk of a hacker invading your network. You can protect against these issues using a firewall, strong passwords, dedicated sharing accounts, and keeping your router updated. You need to confirm your home network is secure, even if you think it already is.
Related
You Only Need a USB Drive to Build a NAS—Here’s How I Did It
Your Wi-Fi router is hiding a secret that could unlock your network storage.
Finally, this makeshift “cloud storage” solution is not a proper off-site backup. If the only backup copy of files you have is the USB drive attached to your router, a disaster like a fire, flood, or theft could result in you losing both the original data and the backup. A true off-site backup needs to be located outside your home.
In summary, your router’s USB port is not a NAS replacement, but it’s good enough to share smaller files across devices. This isn’t necessarily a problem, as frequent backups keep file sizes to a minimum and resolve most of your storage woes. That said, you need to be aware of the limitations that come with this approach.
How to Turn Your Router Into a Backup Solution
To set up USB storage on your router, first format your storage drive in a supported file system. I would recommend using NTFS, as it works with drives of almost all sizes and most routers, but you can check your router’s manual for more information.
I’m using an 8GB USB flash drive formatted to NTFS with a TP-Link Archer C5 router. The exact steps can vary based on your router’s make and model, but the overall process remains the same:
Plug your USB drive into your router’s USB port and open the admin interface in your browser (for example, 192.168.0.1).
Once open, click the USB Sharing tab.
Under Device Settings, click the Scan button to ensure your router detects the USB drive.
Under Sharing Account, select the Use New Account option. Type the username and password for the new account and click Save. You can use the default account (same as your router’s login credentials) if you’re using the storage by yourself. But if you’re sharing this storage or intend to expose it to the internet, a dedicated account is recommended.
Under Sharing Settings, make sure Media Server, Network Neighborhood, and FTP Server are enabled. If you want the drive to be accessible over the internet, enable FTP (via internet) as well. You can also change the media server name by editing the Network/Media Server Name field.
Now your USB drive is accessible over your router’s Wi-Fi or Ethernet connection. There are multiple ways to access your drive, but I’ve found FTP to be the most reliable. If you’re on Windows, follow these steps:
Open File Explorer and click the Network option in the left-side panel.
You’ll be prompted to enable Network discovery and file sharing. Click the prompt to do so.
Head back to This PC, right-click any empty space, and select Add a network location.
Click Next on the Add Network Location wizard.
Select Choose a custom network location. Click Next to proceed.
Enter the drive address, which you’ll find under the sharing settings in your router’s admin interface. By default, this is the local IP address of your router followed by the FTP port. If you haven’t changed this, following our example, your drive address should be ftp://192.168.0.1:21.
On the next screen, uncheck the Log on anonymously option and enter the username you created for the sharing account on your router.
Type a name for the drive and click Next. Click Finish on the next screen.
You should now be able to access the drive without any issues. If prompted, enter your password and you’re good to go.
Using the USB port on your router to make a storage drive accessible to all devices in your home is a quick and convenient way of replicating a NAS, whether it’s for file sharing or making backups. It might not be the fastest way of sharing files over a network, but it’s easy to set up, doesn’t require you to spend extra on hardware, and can work wonders for quick backups.
China has significantly broadened its global travel reach during the 14th Five-Year Plan period (2021–2025), enhancing both inbound and outbound mobility for travelers.
An immigration official announced on Wednesday that China has introduced unilateral visa-free entry and mutual visa exemption agreements with 75 countries. The number of countries eligible for visa-free transit to China has expanded to 55, with 60 designated entry ports now available across 24 provinces, autonomous regions and municipalities. The permitted duration of visa-free transit stays has also been extended to 240 hours, making short-term visits more convenient for international travelers.
Outbound travel by Chinese citizens has seen rapid growth during the same period. Since 2021, over 300 million entry and exit documents have been issued, and the number of valid ordinary passports has surpassed 160 million. Currently, Chinese passport holders can travel visa-free or obtain visas on arrival in more than 90 countries and regions worldwide. According to international rankings, China’s passport mobility score has climbed from 72nd in 2021 to 60th.
Skeletal babies. Starving families shot down while waiting in line for food. Images and video of the famine in Gaza are now everywhere, and they’ve done in a few weeks what 21 months of war could not: squeeze empathy for Palestinians out of MAGA.
This week, Marjorie Taylor Greene of Georgia became the first House Republican to publicly use the term “genocide” to describe Israel’s actions in Gaza and the humanitarian crisis now gripping the Palestinian enclave. “It’s the most truthful and easiest thing to say that Oct. 7 in Israel was horrific and all hostages must be returned, but so is the genocide, humanitarian crisis, and starvation happening in Gaza,” Greene said in a social media post on her X account Monday evening.
More than 125 people have died because of malnutrition, including 85 children, the Hamas-run Gaza Health Ministry said over the weekend. According to the United Nations, more than 875 people have been killed in recent weeks, most by Israeli troops, while trying to access food and aid at Gaza Humanitarian Foundation distribution centers. On Monday alone, Israeli strikes or gunfire killed at least 78 Palestinians across the Gaza Strip.
Greene’s comments coincide with growing global outrage over reports of mass starvation in Gaza since Israel first cut off supplies to the enclave in March, then reopened aid lines in May but with new restrictions. In recent days, photographs and videos of emaciated children and dying infants have proliferated across news and social media, as have videos of desperate Palestinians killed while waiting in line for food.
Israel’s prime minister, Benjamin Netanyahu, said on Sunday that “there is no starvation in Gaza.” And commanding officer Effie Defrin, a spokesman for the Israel Defense Force, told reporters that most of the images were fake and distributed by Hamas. “It’s a campaign,” he said. “Unfortunately, some of the Israeli media, including some of the international media, is distributing this information and those false pictures, and creating an image of starvation which doesn’t exist.”
But even President Trump, a staunch supporter of Israel and Netanyahu, had to concede when asked about the crisis. “That’s real starvation stuff — I see it, and you can’t fake that,” he said Monday while in Scotland, where he met with European leaders and fielded questions about a crisis of another sort (his relationship with sex trafficker Jeffrey Epstein). “We have to get the kids fed.”
The undeniable horror in Gaza has hit an inflection point, and while the spike in compassion among the MAGA set may be momentary, other world leaders are seeking solutions to the suffering with or without U.S. support. Late Tuesday, France and 14 other Western nations called on other countries to move toward recognizing a Palestinian state. The statement was signed by the foreign ministers of Andorra, Australia, Canada, Finland, France, Iceland, Ireland, Luxembourg, Malta, New Zealand, Norway, Portugal, San Marino, Slovenia and Spain.
Greene’s use of the word “genocide” is her strongest condemnation yet of Israel’s war conduct, and it deviates from the Republican party line of unconditional support for the Jewish state. But she has also targeted pro-Palestinian lawmakers such as representatives Ilhan Omar (D-Minn.), Rashida Tlaib (D-Mich.), accusing them of “antisemitic activity” and “sympathizing with terrorists” when they called for Israel to lift its blockade of humanitarian aid for Gazans.
Greene’s comments about Gaza were in part a rebuke to a Republican representative, Randy Fine of Florida. Last week, he said the images of skin-and-bones children in Gaza were “Muslim terror propaganda” and posted, “Release the hostages. Until then, starve away.” The New York Times reported that Fine’s remarks were made the same day he was promoted to a seat on the House Foreign Affairs Committee where he would focus on international policy.
Greene posted Sunday that she “can unequivocally say that what happened to innocent people in Israel on Oct 7th was horrific. Just as I can unequivocally say that what has been happening to innocent people and children in Gaza is horrific.”
Recently, the IDF announced it would pause action in certain parts of Gaza for hours each day and increase aid drops. The death toll from the war in Gaza has topped 60,000, with more likely buried under rubble from nearly two years of fighting. Hamas killed an estimated 1,200 people in an attack on Israel on Oct. 7, 2023.
Though there has been an outcry over the staggering number of civilian deaths since the start of the war, increasingly graphic coverage of the Gaza famine has engendered new levels of outrage on both sides of the political spectrum. Too bad it’s taken the unspeakable suffering of babies, families and innocents to get us here.
Mumbai, July 30: Following reports that Tata Motors is in advanced negotiations to purchase the truck division of Italy’s Iveco Group in a possible $4.5 billion deal, the company’s shares experienced significant pressure on Wednesday. They fell by almost 4 per cent in early trading. Tata Motors’ stock was down 3.08 per cent from the previous close at Rs 671.85, as of 11:23 A.M.
The drop is a result of investor apprehension about the scope and consequences of what might turn out to be the second-largest foreign acquisition for the Tata Group after its $12.9 billion acquisition of Corus Steel in 2007. The talks with Iveco, which is owned by the Agnelli family, are reportedly centred on purchasing its Defence and commercial truck businesses. Iveco has admitted to looking into the possibility of selling its industrial vehicle division, but no firm decision has been made as of yet. Bitcoin Price Today, July 30, 2025: BTC Price Back at USD 1,18,079 Mark, Recovers After Recent Fall to USD 1,17,452.
However, it has been reported that the deal may receive Board-level approvals as early as today. If completed, the deal would be Tata Motors’ largest acquisition since its 2008 $2.3 billion acquisition of Jaguar Land Rover and could greatly increase the company’s presence in the global commercial vehicle market. The timing is notable, as Tata Motors is spinning off its commercial vehicle business into a separate entity, a process expected to conclude by December 2025. Adani Power Share Price Today, July 30: Adani Power Stock Trades Lower As Board To Consider First-Ever Stock Split on August 1, Check Latest Price on NSE.
In India, that division has a 30 per cent market share for light commercial vehicles (LCVs) and a 49 per cent market share for heavy commercial vehicles (HCVs). It generated Rs 75,000 crore in revenue in the previous fiscal year. The foundation of Iveco’s industrial operations is its truck business, which generates 70 per cent of total industrial revenue. The company’s bus and powertrain divisions each contribute 15 per cent. Iveco maintained an 8–9 per cent presence in the medium and heavy truck segment and a 13.3 per cent share in the European LCV market in 2024.
(The above story first appeared on LatestLY on Jul 30, 2025 01:37 PM IST. For more news and updates on politics, world, sports, entertainment and lifestyle, log on to our website latestly.com).
Meta CEO Mark Zuckerberg told investors that the newly formed Meta Superintelligence Labs is focused on building AI models that can self-improve—meaning they can learn from themselves without as much human input. The remarks came during a second-quarter earnings call on Wednesday.
“At some level, [it’s] not just going to be learning from people, because you want to build something that is fundamentally smarter than people,” Zuckerberg said. “So…you’re going to develop a way for it to improve itself. That is a very fundamental thing that’s going to have broad implications for how we build products and how we run the company.”
It’s one of a handful of comments the CEO has made during the past 12 hours that gesture at how Meta’s new research lab plans to compete with rivals like OpenAI, Google DeepMind, and Anthropic.
Early this morning, Zuckerberg posted a letter online and shared a video to Instagram Reels in which he said that Meta’s superintelligence efforts would center on building “personal superintelligence” that would give people tools for their own empowerment and to better the world. “This is distinct from others in the industry who believe superintelligence should be directed centrally towards automating all valuable work, and then humanity will live on a dole of its output,” he said.
Another key piece of Meta’s AI strategy is smartglasses, which Zuckerberg said he believes “are basically going to be the ideal form factor for AI.” Since they debuted in 2023, Meta has sold two million pairs of smart sunglasses made in partnership with Ray-Ban. Last September, the company showed off a futuristic prototype of augmented reality glasses, too. (The prototype, called Orion, isn’t expected to ship to consumers, but Meta has said it plans to build new devices over the next few years based on Orion research.)
For now, Meta appears to be making some distinction between AI that powers the monetization of its core products, like Instagram and WhatsApp, and superintelligent AI that could one day help power humanity’s future.
Zuckerberg’s remarks about superintelligence came on the heels of a better-than-expected earnings report. The company, which has lagged behind its competitors in the AI race, is spending billions of dollars to build out a small but mighty superintelligence lab that will focus on building frontier AI models.
Since publicly announcing the lab last month, Meta has been on an aggressive recruiting spree, bringing in key Silicon Valley operatives like Alexandr Wang, Nat Friedman and Daniel Gross, and offering AI researchers compensation packages as high as nine figures in order to lure them over to the lab. Wang was a part of an “acqu-hire” deal struck with Scale AI, an AI data-labeling startup that he cofounded. Former OpenAI researcher Shengjia Zhao has been named the head of Meta’s new research lab.
Meta revised its expectations for its capital expenditures for the year, increasing its forecast to $69 billion. Employee compensation is one of the biggest drivers of that, Meta’s chief financial officer Susan Li has said, as well as AI infrastructure. Despite the amount the company is spending on building out its AI products, it’s also forecasting a better-than-expected outlook for the third quarter, anticipating between $47.5 billion and $50.5 billion in revenue.
The Legend of Zelda: Tears of the Kingdom fans can grab the recently restocked Link Figma for $85.35 at Amazon. Made by Good Smile and released on June 24 for $90, this premium, customizable action figure had been sold out for many months after preorders first opened way back in March 2024. Good Smile also released a DX Edition with extra accessories in May, but that $136 model sold out fast when Amazon replenished its inventory.
Figma figures of Princess Zelda and Ganondorf based on their appearances in Tears of the Kingdom are also in the works. Unfortunately, both of the figures remain sold out as of July 30.
The DX Edition includes all of the gear from the standard edition as well as a bunch of extra accessories. Here’s the full list of exclusive gear:
Paraglider
Rocket with effect parts
Construct Bow
Arrows
Ascend ability effect parts
Traveler’s Shield
Rock Hammer
King Rauru’s Right Arm
Both Link figures feature the same overall design–a colorful and sharp sculpt from the talented hands of Shinji Koshinuma at Max Factory–and you can essentially make Link do any pose you want thanks to the wealth of joints on this figure. Want him to glide around your room, kneel on a rock to survey the land around him, or have him swing the Master Sword around to clear the space around him? You can do just that and more, especially with the DX Edition.
The new Tears of the Kingdom Link figure isn’t the only premium Zelda collectible available on Amazon. Bandai Namco’s Tamashii Nations collectible brand released a beautiful replica of the Master Sword late last year. The 41-inch Master Sword Proplica comes with a blue-and-gold sheath and display stand. You can get your own Master Sword for $186 (was $200) from Amazon.
More Gaming, Tech, and Entertainment Deals & Preorders
Researchers from Columbia Engineering have established a framework for the design of bioactive injectable hydrogels formulated with extracellular vesicles (EVs) for tissue engineering and regenerative medicine applications.
Published on July 25 in Matter, Santiago Correa, assistant professor of biomedical engineering at Columbia Engineering, and his collaborators describe an injectable hydrogel platform that uses EVs from milk to address longstanding barriers in the development of biomaterials for regenerative medicine. EVs are particles naturally secreted by cells and carry hundreds of biological signals, like proteins and genetic material, enabling sophisticated cellular communication that synthetic materials cannot easily replicate.
In this study, Correa and colleagues designed a hydrogel system where EVs play a dual role: they act as bioactive cargo but also serve as essential structural building blocks, by crosslinking biocompatible polymers to form an injectable material. Using an unconventional approach that leveraged milk EVs from yogurt, the team was able to overcome yield constraints that hinder the development of EV-based biomaterials. The yogurt EVs enabled the hydrogel to both mimic the mechanics of living tissue and actively engage surrounding cells, promoting healing and tissue regeneration without the need for additional chemical additives.
“This project started as a basic question about how to build EV-based hydrogels. Yogurt EVs gave us a practical tool for that, but they turned out to be more than a model,” said Correa who led the study with Artemis Margaronis, an NSF graduate research fellow in the Correa lab. “We found that they have inherent regenerative potential, which opens the door to new, accessible therapeutic materials.”
Correa directs the Nanoscale Immunoengineering Lab at Columbia University, where his research focuses on drug delivery and immunoengineering. He is also a member of the Herbert Irving Comprehensive Cancer Center and collaborated on this project with Kam Leong, a fellow Columbia Engineering faculty member. The study was further strengthened through international collaboration with researchers from the University of Padova, including Elisa Cimetta (Department of Industrial Engineering) and graduate student Caterina Piunti. By combining Padova team’s expertise in agricultural EV sourcing with the Correa lab’s experience in nanomaterials and polymer-based hydrogels, the team demonstrated the power of cross-disciplinary, global partnerships in advancing biomaterials innovation.
By using yogurt-derived EVs, the team defined a design space for generating hydrogels that incorporate EVs as both structural and biological elements. They further validated the approach using EVs derived from mammalian cells and bacteria, demonstrating that the platform is modular and compatible with diverse vesicle sources. This could open the door to advanced applications in wound healing and regenerative medicine, where current treatments often fall short in promoting long-term tissue repair. By integrating EVs directly into the hydrogel structure, the material enables sustained delivery of their bioactive signals. Because the hydrogel is injectable, it can also be delivered locally to damaged tissue.
Early experiments show that yogurt EV hydrogels are biocompatible and drive potent angiogenic activity within one week in immunocompetent mice, demonstrating that agricultural EVs not only enable fundamental biomaterials research but also hold therapeutic potential as a next-generation biotechnology. In mice, the material showed no signs of adverse reaction and instead promoted the formation of new blood vessels, a key step in effective tissue regeneration. Correa’s team also observed that the hydrogel creates a unique immune environment enriched in anti-inflammatory cell types, which may contribute to the observed tissue repair processes. The team is now exploring how this immune response could help guide tissue regeneration.
“Being able to design a material that closely mimics the body’s natural environment while also speed up the healing process opens a new world of possibilities for regenerative medicine,” said Margaronis. “Moments like these remind me why the research field in biomedical engineering is always on the cusp of something exciting.”
This is the story of airline that leads the industry from ground to clouds. The global cast of over 100,000+ hero characters are each on a journey to be a force for good for our customers, the planet and each other. Come be part of this story.
Job Overview
The primary role of Contract Specialist – Global Procurement is to support the contract management team in India and in the US by optimally partnering to implement the lifecycle of procurement contracts. This individual will be responsible for reading, drafting, negotiation of contracts and executing contracts to enhance supplier relationship management.
The individual will support cross-functional teams to get contracts executed with third party suppliers across multiple categories such as, Technology, Shared Services, Hotels, Airport Services, etc.
Eligibility
Required:
Bachelor’s degree in Finance, Law, Engineering, Economics, Supply Chain Management or another relevant field
At least 2 years of procurement, finance, or contracting experience
Analytical with excellent problem-solving skills
Excellent oral communication and people skills
Must be familiar with Microsoft Word, Outlook, Excel, and PowerPoint
Organized, detail-oriented, thorough, and professional
Must be legally authorized to work in India for any employer without sponsorship
Must be fluent in English (written and spoken)
Successful completion of interview required to meet job qualification
Reliable, punctual attendance is an essential function of the position
Preferred:
Master’s degree
Experience in contract management, negotiations
Knowledge of procurement / strategic sourcing process
Experience working in the transportation or airline industry
Experience working on any of the procurement categories: Technology.
Responsibilities
This role will ensure contracts and documentation are organized and uploaded and may implement automation where needed.
Play a key role in reading and negotiating procurement contracts, including oversight of the drafting, review, and revision process across the enterprise, to meet company objectives and legal requirements
Proactively communication to resolve procurement-related issues including delays, discrepancies, or contract concerns
Play a key role in supplier risk management and supervise contract compliance across all contracts and actively lead procurement risk, including routine improvements to agreements, communication of demand/volume changes, updating contracts and sharing end-user feedback
Ensure alignment, anticipate changes, and drive activities based on supply market changes and recommendations of task forces
Lead contract expirations and renewals, ensuring timely renewals or renegotiations
How to Apply?
Interested candidates can apply online via the link given at the end of the post.
Disclaimer: Charging money from students for internships or from job applicants is unethical and can result in blacklisting. We strongly discourage requesting any kind of payment from interns, including processing fees or charges for certificates. If you have any concerns, please contact us at [email protected]
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/lifestyle/health/cult-fit-founder-shares-realistic-weight-loss-advice-6-things-you-need-to-know-its-all-about-how-active-you-are-101753865120221.html” on this server.
Today, a brief rundown of news involving Madrigal Pharmaceuticals and Viridian Therapeutics, as well as updates from Apellis Pharmaceuticals, PTC Therapeutics and Arrowhead Pharmaceuticals that you may have missed.
Seeking to expand treatment of the liver disease MASH, Madrigal Pharmaceuticals is paying $120 million to Hong Kong-based drugmaker CSPC Pharmaceutical Group for global rights to an oral GLP-1 drug in preclinical development. The deal offers CSPC potentially $2 billion in additional payments if certain development, regulatory and commercial milestones are achieved. Madrigal executives said they plan on combining the CSPC drug, called SYH2086, with the company’s MASH drug Rezdiffra in a once-daily pill. They envision treatment could combine the benefits of weight loss from a GLP-1 pill with the antifibrotic and fat reducing qualities of Rezdiffra to give people with MASH additional disease control. — Jonathan Gardner
Kissei Pharmaceutical is paying $70 million upfront and offering up to $315 million in milestone payments to Viridian Therapeuticsfor Japanese rights to two antibody drugs for thyroid eye disease. Viridian has already announced positive Phase 3 study data for the most advanced drug in the deal, called veligrotug. The second, called VRDN-003, is in ongoing Phase 3 testing. The company hopes to compete with Amgen’s marketed drug for thyroid eye disease, Tepezza, by offering a more convenient dosing regimen.— Jonathan Gardner
The Food and Drug Administration on Monday approved broader use of Apellis Pharmaceuticals’ rare disease drug Empaveli, clearing it for the kidney diseases C3 glomerulopathy or primary immune complex membranoproliferative glomerulonephritis in people 12 years of age or older. In testing, treatment with Empaveli reduced urine protein levels by significantly more than placebo and stabilized kidney function. Earlier this year, Novartiswon FDA approval of its drug Fabhalta for use in adults with C3G. — Ned Pagliarulo
People with the rare disease phenylketonuria, or PKU, have a new treatment option after the FDA on Monday approved the drug Sephience from PTC Therapeutics. In a statement, the company highlighted what it described as a broad label that includes all disease subtypes in people who are 1 month of age or older. News of the approval sent shares in PTC higher by nearly 10% this week. The company is also awaiting agency decisions on drugs for
Friedrich’s ataxia and Duchenne muscular dystrophy. — Ned Pagliarulo
Arrowhead Pharmaceuticalssaid Monday that it had earned a $100 million milestone payment from Sarepta Therapeutics under their research alliance, after meeting a patient enrollment target in a Phase 1/2 trial of its treatment for myotonic muscular dystrophy. Such fees are part of the normal course of business in biotech, but payment by Sarepta had suddenly become in doubt after the company’s standoff with the FDA over whether it could continue selling its gene therapy Elevidys. The Duchenne treatment is vital to Sarepta’s financial future, so the prospect of it being removed from market sparked concerns Sarepta might reach a point when it would no longer be able to meet its obligations. That risk appears to have receded for now, after the FDA relented Tuesday. Arrowhead expects to receive the $100 million within 60 days. — Ned Pagliarulo
Headline CPI for the June quarter dropped to 2.1% annually, down from 2.4%.
Trimmed mean inflation (the RBA’s preferred measure) is now 2.7%, also falling from 2.9%.
This marks the second consecutive quarter inflation has returned to the RBA’s 2–3% target range.
It’s the lowest trimmed mean reading since December 2021, showing inflation is cooling meaningfully and sustainably.
With the trimmed mean inside the band, the RBA has the data it needs to justify a rate cut at its 12 August meeting.
Australia’s inflation is back in the RBA’s target band, and that’s not just good news for borrowers, it’s potentially the trigger the Reserve Bank needs to pull the lever on another cash rate cut in August.
According to Canstar, “Trimmed mean inflation is back into the RBA’s target band for the second quarter in a row, all but confirming Australia’s third cash rate cut on 12 August” .
So, is it time to breathe a little easier? Let’s break down what the latest data means, and what’s likely to come next.
Inflation is falling in the right places
The ABS June quarter CPI figures show headline inflation has eased to 2.1% annually, down from 2.4% last quarter.
More significantly, the trimmed mean inflation, the measure the RBA actually focuses on—has dropped to 2.7%, down from 2.9%.
Canstar notes this is “the lowest level since December 2021” and more importantly, that “key areas of concern for the RBA are tracking nicely.”
That includes a sharp drop in services inflation to 3.3% (from 3.7%) and rental inflation slowing from 5.5% to 4.5%.
Insurance costs, which had been climbing steeply, also moderated from 7.6% down to 3.9%.
New dwelling inflation, often a key concern for property watchers like us, has almost vanished.
Annual growth is now just 0.7%, down from 1.4% and well off the peak of 20.7% in 2022.
The RBA’s green light for an August cut
With the CPI data delivering exactly what the RBA was looking for, all eyes are now on the 12 August board meeting.
Canstar’s release puts it plainly:
“Today’s results deliver the key piece of data the RBA has been waiting for to consider a cash rate cut, with trimmed mean inflation… confidently tracking towards the midpoint of the target band”
The big four banks are all forecasting a 0.25% rate cut in August.
While they diverge on how many more cuts might follow, they all agree: a cut is now firmly on the cards.
CBA and ANZ forecast two cuts, ending at a 3.35% cash rate.
NAB sees three cuts, finishing at 3.10%.
Westpac expects the most aggressive easing, with four cuts down to 2.85%.
So, while the forecasts vary in length, the direction is the same—down.
What this means for borrowers (and investors)
If you’re an owner-occupier with a $600,000 loan, a 0.25% rate cut could reduce your monthly repayments by $90, assuming your lender passes the cut on in full.
On a $1 million loan, that’s around $150 in savings.
Potential impact of an August RBA cash rate cut
New minimum monthly repayments
Difference
$600,000
$3,703
-$90
$750,000
$4,628
-$113
$1,000,000
$6,171
-$150
While this may seem modest, it signals a shift.
And for property investors, the psychology of falling rates matters.
Lower borrowing costs boost confidence, and that alone can stoke fresh interest in the market, especially when rental yields remain high and property supply is tight.
The bigger picture for the property market
This inflation drop is more than a win for household budgets—it may mark a turning point in the economic cycle.
“Inflation is cooling in key categories that have been cause for concern for the central bank,” says Canstar’s data insights director Sally Tindall. “Services inflation is still too high… but it’s now at the lowest level since June 2022”.
She also points out the sharp decline in rental inflation is “a significant drop,” though she rightly notes affordability is still a challenge.
That’s exactly what I’ve been saying for some time now, slowing rental growth doesn’t mean rents are falling.
It just means they’re not rising as fast, which is cold comfort for many tenants.
Still, with inflation easing and unemployment nudging up slightly (to 4.3%), the RBA now has cover to support the economy without appearing premature.
And that means more breathing space for borrowers, and potentially more fuel for housing prices.
Final thoughts
If the RBA follows through with a rate cut in August, as looks very likely, this will be the third cut this year.
The narrative has shifted. From fighting inflation to carefully supporting growth, the RBA is changing gears.
The key for property investors is to stay ahead of the curve.
We know how sensitive the Australian housing market is to interest rate movements.
And when rates fall, activity picks up, especially with underlying fundamentals like population growth and tight supply still in play.
So, the message is simple: don’t get caught flat-footed. The next leg of the property cycle could already be underway.
About Joseph Ballota Joseph is a Property Coach who put hundreds of people on the road towards wiping away their mortgage in under 5 years through expert Property Investment Plans.
After Arc’s slow fade into maintenance mode, I was curious to see what The Browser Company would do next. I was hoping for the next great browser, but what I got instead was something far less exciting.
What Is Dia?
Dia is the brand-new Chromium-based browser from the same people who built Arc, and it’s supposed to be the next big thing in browsers. But instead of focusing on productivity and slick design like Arc did, Dia has jumped headfirst onto the AI hype train. This time around, The Browser Company wants your browser to be less about organization and more about conversation.
The main positive Dia has going for it is how you talk to the browser. No matter what you’re looking at, Dia tries to understand the context and lets you ask questions about it through an AI sidebar. It uses a large language model (LLM) to answer questions about your current tab—or even multiple tabs at once. You can also upload documents from your computer, which Dia can use to add more context to its responses or help you generate new content based on what you’re working on.
There’s also a feature called Skills, which are essentially community-created prompts you can add to Dia to customize what the LLM can do. If you’re curious, check out Dia’s Skills page to see some examples.
It can also detect when you’re performing a search, then determines whether your query is better answered by a traditional search engine or an AI assistant. You’ll see results from either Google or the LLM accordingly.
There are also ways to fine-tune the AI’s personality: you can tell Dia how you want it to write for you, or what kind of tone and formatting you prefer. If you’re generating code in your browser’s sidebar (for some reason), you can set preferences for that too.
You get the vibe—this is a browser built entirely around generative AI. And that’s precisely where it starts to crumble, because beyond the AI, there isn’t much else going on.
Related
One of the Best Chrome Alternatives Is Dead, but You Have Other Options
Arc was bold and full of promise—until it wasn’t.
Dia Offers Nothing That Made Arc So Good
As someone who has been using Arc since its beta days and fell in love with it the moment I tried it, Dia is frustrating. It’s completely devoid of the magic that made me stick with Arc. It feels stripped of almost every single element that made Arc the perfect browser for me. There are so many Arc features that other browsers should copy, and Dia has none of those.
The biggest loss is the sidebar, because Arc’s sidebar was easily its best feature. You could pin tabs, create folders, organize everything neatly, and switch between spaces and profiles effortlessly. It was the smartest and most fluid take on a vertical tab system I’ve ever used. But Dia threw it all away.
Yes, Dia technically does have a sidebar if you prefer vertical tabs, but it’s just a plain list of open tabs. Nothing like Arc’s thoughtful and flexible layout; it might as well be Safari at that point.
And that’s just the beginning. Little Arc, the separate mini window that opened when you clicked links from other apps, is gone. The way Arc let you search without losing your current tab is gone. All those subtle, delightful touches that made browsing better have simply vanished.
In return, you get Dia’s AI suite. But every one of these features could have been integrated into Arc. There was no need to build a whole new browser just to showcase them.
The most confusing part is that Arc already had great AI features! It automatically organized your tabs into categories, suggested cleanup actions, and performed all kinds of other useful tasks.
Yet somehow, none of that carried over into the new “AI-first” browser. They tossed out genuinely helpful AI tools and replaced them with… an LLM wrapper? Generative AI is already ruining social media, and now it’s here to make the entire internet worse.
Related
I Tried Vertical Browser Tabs but Am Going Back to Horizontal: Here’s Why
Vertical tabs are useful, and I want them to work. But ultimately, I’m heading back to the tried-and-tested horizontal tabs.
I’d Rather Just Use Safari (or Any Other Browser)
Unfortunately, as much as I want to keep using Arc, it doesn’t make sense to anymore. It’s only getting basic maintenance and Chromium updates, and over time, it has become noticeably slower. I often run into performance issues, so it’s time for me to move on to something else.
But that something else is definitely not going to be Dia. In the big picture, it doesn’t offer much. Even though it performs slightly better than Arc, it still lags behind other browsers like Safari or even Chrome, which is already known for being heavy on memory.
Mahnoor Faisal/MakeUseOf
Dia’s entire idea and direction feel unstable. The Browser Company is stepping away from the productivity niche and trying to compete directly with tech giants like Microsoft and Google. That’s a tough sell. Microsoft has already announced Copilot Mode in Edge, which basically accomplishes the same goal Dia is aiming for. I wouldn’t be surprised if Chrome adds something similar with Gemini.
The heavy focus on LLMs also raises another concern. These models are expensive to run, so I won’t be surprised if Dia ends up locking features behind a subscription down the road.
More than anything, I don’t trust The Browser Company anymore. Even if Dia was the perfect browser, I have no confidence that the team would stick with it long-term. They could just as easily abandon it like Arc the moment the next trend in tech shows up.
If you’re in the same boat as me, I’d suggest giving Zen a try because it’s probably the closest alternative to Arc right now. That said, I haven’t fully switched to it myself since streaming DRM-protected content doesn’t always work.
Needless to say, I’m pretty disappointed, and it’s time for me to start looking for a new browser. For now, I’m planning to stick with Safari, but it still feels like a step down from what Arc used to offer.
By continuing to browse our site you agree to our use of cookies, revised Privacy Policy and Terms of Use. You can change your cookie settings through your browser.
A New Mexico judge has dismissed Alec Baldwin’s lawsuit alleging that he was maliciously prosecuted — one year after the actor-producer was cleared of a criminal charge in the “Rust” shooting death of the film’s cinematographer.
Baldwin alleged in a January lawsuit that he was the victim of overzealous New Mexico prosecutors and law enforcement. Baldwin claimed he had become the state’s celebrity scapegoat for the accidental on-set shooting of director of photography Halyna Hutchins.
The lawsuit came six months after a judge dismissed the involuntary manslaughter charge that Baldwin had been facing.
Former New Mexico 1st Judicial District Court Judge Mary Marlowe Sommer ended Baldwin’s trial last July after learning prosecutors withheld potential evidence from Baldwin’s legal team.
Baldwin’s subsequent suit targeted special prosecutor Kari T. Morrissey, 1st Judicial Dist. Atty. Mary Carmack-Altwies, Santa Fe County sheriff’s deputies and Santa Fe County Commissioners.
The defendants were “blinded by their desire to convict Alec Baldwin for all the wrong reasons, and at any cost,” his lawsuit claimed.
On Tuesday, a different judge dismissed Baldwin’s claims against the state, citing a lack of activity in the case.
Third Judicial Dist. Judge Casey B. Fitch wrote that it had been six months since any “significant action” had been filed in Baldwin’s case. Fitch gave the lawyers 30 days to file a motion to keep the lawsuit moving.
The ruling comes as legal proceedings in the “Rust” shooting saga are winding down.
In May, weapons handler Hannah Gutierrez was freed from prison after serving 14 months for her felony conviction of involuntary manslaughter in Hutchins’ October 2021 death on the New Mexico film set.
Baldwin’s case was dismissed a year ago by a Marlowe Sommer, who has since retired, on what was supposed to be the third day of the actor’s high-profile trial.
Instead, his defense attorneys raised serious questions over how New Mexico law enforcement officers and prosecutors handled evidence as they mounted their prosecution.
Baldwin’s attorneys accused the state of misconduct, pointing to a batch of unexamined bullets that a potential witness turned over to sheriff’s investigators in March 2024. Marlowe Sommer appeared furious over the handling of the evidence, which was not given to the defense, and dismissed the single charge against Baldwin.
Earlier this year, when Baldwin’s suit was filed, Morrissey said prosecutors had long been aware of Baldwin’s plans to sue New Mexico. She added: “We look forward to our day in court.”
Mumbai, July 30: Mahindra and Mahindra’s net profit for the first quarter of the current financial year (Q1 FY26) stood at Rs 4,083 crore, up 24 per cent year-on-year, according to an exchange filing on Wednesday. The company posted a consolidated net profit of Rs 3,283 crore in the corresponding quarter a year ago. The net profit for the quarter under review also significantly ascended quarter-on-quarter from Rs 3,541.85 crore in Q4 FY25.
Meanwhile, the company’s income from operations in the April-June quarter rose 22 per cent to Rs 45,529 crore from Rs 37,218 crore in the same quarter a year earlier. The automotive section (Rs 25,998 crore) remained the top contributor in terms of revenue, followed by farm equipment (Rs 10,891.5 crore). Financial services put Rs 4,973 crore, and Industrial business and consumer services contributed Rs 4,900 crore in total revenue. Tesla-Samsung Deal: Elon Musk Says He Discussed Details of Semiconductor Supply Deal With Samsung Electronics Chairman Lee Jae-yong.
The total consolidated expenses for Q1 rose 19 per cent to Rs 41,280 crore year-on-year from Rs 33,330 crore. Auto and farm continue to deliver on growth and margins with profits up 20 per cent, said Mahindra & Mahindra.
Meanwhile, the financial services AUM of the company also grew by 15 per cent. Amongst our growth entities, Mahindra Logistics showed strong revenue momentum with 14 per cent growth, and MHRIL has expanded room inventory by 10 per cent, the exchange filing said.
“Q1 F26 has been an excellent quarter, with broad-based growth across all our businesses. The operating excellence in our Auto and Farm businesses is evident in continued market share gains and margin expansion,” said Anish Shah, Group CEO and Managing Director, M&M Ltd. Tesla New OTA Update: Elon Musk’s EV Company Rolls Out New 2025.26 Software Update Bringing New ‘Light Sync’ Feature; Check Details.
Tech Mahindra is witnessing momentum on deal wins, sustaining cost discipline and is moving steadily towards its F27 margin objectives, he added. Meanwhile, the shares of the company closed in positive territory on Wednesday. The stock ended the session at Rs 3,225.0, up 0.80 per cent.
(The above story first appeared on LatestLY on Jul 30, 2025 07:30 PM IST. For more news and updates on politics, world, sports, entertainment and lifestyle, log on to our website latestly.com).
Since February, multiplenewsreports have alleged that a significant number of agents at Homeland Security Investigations (HSI)—the Department of Homeland Security’s investigative wing that focuses on transnational crimes like child exploitation, human trafficking, and drug cartels—have been pulled from child exploitation cases and reassigned to immigration enforcement and arrests.
US senator Ron Wyden urged DHS Inspector General Joseph Cuffari on Tuesday to “promptly” launch an investigation into the veracity and extent of these reports about HSI, in a letter shared exclusively with WIRED. Inspector General Cuffari has the authority to conduct audits or investigations into any activities or operations at DHS.
“Instead of locking up rapists, child predators and other violent criminals, [US president Donald] Trump appears to be diverting investigators to target cooks, farm workers and students,” Wyden says in the letter. “Congress and the American people will not tolerate the Trump administration ignoring the ongoing sexual abuse of vulnerable children. Accordingly, we urge you to promptly investigate these troubling reports.”
Wyden told WIRED in a written statement that there is “no excuse for pulling investigators away from the most heinous cases involving child exploitation,” adding that “nothing should be a higher priority than protecting kids in danger.”
WIRED contacted several US-based child welfare and advocacy organizations to provide a comment for this article, however, they did not reply or declined to comment on the record. An official from one of these organizations, who requested anonymity, claimed that their organization could not provide a comment for this story due to fear of retribution from the Trump administration.
In February, USA Today reported that the “entire investigations division” of HSI would be shifting its focus primarily to immigration arrests and deportations, as opposed to its typical range of work. Then, Reuters in March reported that HSI agents had been actively “reassigned” from cases they had been working on related to child exploitation, money laundering cases, drug trafficking, and tax fraud. They were then tasked with immigration enforcement. At the time, Democratic senator Dick Durbin told the outlet that this shift was “wasteful, misguided diversion of resources” that was “making America less safe.”
The Atlantic reported in July that a veteran HSI agent said the division was putting major criminal investigations on hold, and sometimes choosing not to take on new cases—including drug cases, human trafficking cases, and child exploitation cases—in order to make agents available for routine predawn raids for immigration enforcement.
HSI’s reported shift in priorities comes after the National Center for Missing and Exploited Children (NCMEC) said that it had received 20.5 million tips of suspected child sexual exploitation in 2024.
The risk to children involving AI-generated abuse material—which is also the domain of HSI—could also be reaching crisis levels. In 2024, NCMEC received about 67,000 tips about suspected AI-generated abuse material—a 1,325 percent increase from 2023, when it received 4,700 of these tips.
The next Switch 2 exclusive, Drag x Drive, arrives soon on August 14. Ahead of its release, Nintendo has uploaded a new gameplay trailer revealing more details and reminding players of the upcoming Global Jam demo.
This will kick off on August 9 and runs through August 10, but the catch here is that you’ll need an active Switch Online membership to access it. If you’re interested, the demo will be available to download later today and the sessions will take place at the following times:
Drag x Drive Global Jam playtest times
August 9
3 AM – 7 AM PT / 6 AM ET – 10 AM ET
5 PM – 9 PM PT / 8 PM ET – 12 AM ET
August 10
9 AM – 1 PM PT / 12 PM ET – 4 PM ET
As mentioned above, the new overview trailer also provided plenty of details on how to play Drag x Drive. The Joy-Con 2 controllers are used to control each wheel on the wheelchair via mouse controls, and you can swipe forward or backward to control your momentum and direction. While a table is probably best for using these controls, Nintendo added that “most” flat surfaces–like your legs–will do just fine in a pinch. I’ve also tried the mouse controls on my oblivious cat as he naps on my bed next to me, and his squishy body worked surprisingly well as an impromptu mousepad while creating art in Donkey Kong Bananza.
Drag x Drive is one of two big releases for the Switch 2 in August. An upgraded version of Kirby and the Forgotten Land launches on August 28, and it’ll include a brand-new expansion alongside updated graphics.
Pokemon Legends: Z-A is also out in October, and Nintendo announced a new Direct livestream for July 31. The company says there’ll be “roughly 25 minutes of information” on upcoming games to expect here, so it’ll be interesting to see if Metroid Prime 4: Beyond gets a proper release-date confirmation.
High levels of a hormone found in cells in the gut could underlie many cases of chronic diarrhea and help explain up to 40% of cases of patients with irritable bowel syndrome with diarrhea, according to a new study led by scientists at the University of Cambridge.
The research, published in the journal Gut, could help in the development of a blood test and points towards a potential new treatment.
When we eat, the liver releases bile acid to break down fats so that they can be absorbed into the body. Bile acid is released into the top end of the small intestine and then absorbed back into the body at the lower end.
However, around one person in every 100 is affected by a condition known as bile acid diarrhea (also known as bile acid malabsorption), whereby the bile acid is not properly re-absorbed and makes its way into the large intestine (colon). It can trigger urgent and watery diarrhea, and patients can risk episodes of incontinence.
Bile acid diarrhea can be difficult to diagnose as there are currently no routine clinical blood tests. Many individuals are given a diagnosis of irritable bowel syndrome (IBS), an umbrella term for a range of conditions. As many as one in 20 people is thought to have IBS, of which an estimated one in three patients with diarrhea as their main symptom have undiagnosed bile acid diarrhea.
Studies in mice have previously suggested that the gut hormone known as Insulin-Like Peptide 5 (INSL5) – present in cells at the far end of the colon and rectum – may play a role in chronic diarrhea. INSL5 is released by these cells when irritated by bile acid.
Researchers at the Institute of Metabolic Science, University of Cambridge, have been exploring whether this hormone might also underlie chronic diarrhea in humans. This has been possible thanks to a new antibody test developed by pharmaceutical company Eli Lilly, with whom the team is collaborating, which allows them to measure tiny amounts of INSL5.
A study at the University of Adelaide looking at ways to trigger release of the gut hormone GLP-1 – the hormone upon which weight-loss drugs are based – previously found that giving a bile acid enema to healthy volunteers triggered release of GLP-1, but had the unintended consequence of causing diarrhea. When the Cambridge team analyzed samples from this study, they found that the bile acid enema caused levels of INSL5 to shoot up temporarily – and the higher the INSL5 levels, the faster the volunteers needed to use the toilet. This confirmed that INSL5 is likely to play a role in chronic cases of diarrhea.
When the team analyzed samples obtained from Professor Julian Walters at Imperial College London, which include samples from patients with bile acid diarrhea, they found that while levels of INSL5 were almost undetectable in healthy volunteers, they were much higher in patients with bile acid diarrhea. In addition, the higher the INSL5 level, the more watery their stool samples.
Dr Chris Bannon from the University of Cambridge, the study’s first author, said: “This was a very exciting finding because it showed us that this hormone could be playing a big part in symptoms of this misunderstood condition. It also meant it might allow us to develop a blood test to help diagnose bile acid diarrhea if INSL5 levels are only high in these individuals.
“When you go to the doctor with chronic diarrhea, it’s likely they’ll test for food intolerances, rule out an infection or look for signs of inflammation. There has been significant research interest in the microbiome, but gut hormones have been neglected. But it’s becoming increasingly clear that gut hormones play an important role in things like gut health and weight management.”
INSL5 also provides a potential target for treatment. Dr Bannon and colleagues obtained further samples from Professor Robin Spiller at the University of Nottingham, who had given the anti-sickness medication ondansetron – known to block the action of INSL5 in mice – to patients with IBS. Analysis of these samples by the Cambridge team showed that around 40% of these patients had raised levels of INSL5, even though they had had bile acid malabsorption ruled out, and these patients responded best to ondansetron.
Exactly why ondansetron is effective is currently unclear, though a known side effect of the drug is constipation. The team will now be investigating this further, hopeful that it will allow them either to repurpose the drug or to develop even better treatments. Bile acid diarrhea is usually treated with so-called bile acid sequestrants, but these are only effective in around two-thirds of patients.
Dr Bannon added: “I often get asked why we would have a hormone that gives you diarrhea. I think of it as a kind of poison sensor. Bile acids aren’t meant to be in the colon – they’re an irritant to the colon and they’re toxic to the microbiome. It makes sense that you would have something that detects toxins and helps the body rid itself of them. But a problem develops if it’s always being triggered by bile acid, causing very dramatic symptoms.”
Dr Bannon is a clinical fellow in the group led by Professors Fiona Gribble and Frank Reimann at the Institute of Metabolic Science, University of Cambridge.
The research was supported by the Medical Research Council and Wellcome, with additional support from the National Institute for Health and Care Research Cambridge Biomedical Research Centre.
The Centre for Skill Development is dedicated to enhancing the skills of students by organising various competitions and training sessions. It aims to bridge the gap between academic knowledge and professional competence through structured, hands-on learning programs. Advocates’ Legion is the Moot Court Committee of Vivekananda School of Law and Legal Studies, Vivekananda Institute of Professional Studies – Technical Campus, affiliated with Guru Gobind Singh Indraprastha University.
It organises a wide array of events throughout the academic year to enhance legal understanding and offer students an immersive courtroom experience. Among its flagship events, the VIPS International Law Moot Court Competition stands as a cornerstone of mooting excellence at the institution.
About the Event
In its tenth edition, the VIPS 10th Moot Court Competition 2025 on International Law continues its tradition of fostering a high-standard competitive platform for law students across the globe. The competition will be conducted in a two-stage format in a hybrid mode— commences with a memorial evaluation round, followed by oral rounds, including the Preliminary Rounds (Online Mode), Quarter-Finals, Semi- Finals, and Finals (On-site), which shall take place on campus at Vivekananda Institute of Professional Studies – Technical Campus, New Delhi.
The moot proposition will revolve around pressing and contemporary issues in Public International Law and its diverse branches, compelling participants to undertake comprehensive legal research, develop well-structured arguments, and present their case with precision and professionalism.
Eligibility
The Competition is open to all bona fide regular students enrolled in any Law Course (LL. B/ LL.M) or its (equivalent international) program in any University or Institute within or outside India recognized by the Bar Council or State Government or Central Government as the case may be.
Each team shall comprise a minimum of two members i.e., two speakers, and a maximum of three members i.e., two speakers and one researcher. Thus, each team shall be composed of Two Speakers (Compulsory) and a Researcher (if any). A maximum of two teams are allowed to participate in the competition from one institute.
How to Register?
Interested candidates can register online via the link given at the end of the post.
Fee
The participation fees shall be :-
Preliminary Round Fee: ₹3,500/- per team
Advanced Round Fee (if qualified): ₹1,500/- per team
Accommodation shall be provided to teams qualifying for the oral rounds on a chargeable basis. A maximum of two rooms shall be allotted for each team. Charges shall be applicable accordingly.
The payment shall be to Ms. Shreya Goyal, Treasurer, Advocates’ Legion, VSLLS, VIPS-TC at: Account number :- 033101512661 Bank Name :- ICICI BANK Account holder’s name :- SHREYA GOYAL IFSC Code :- ICIC0007242
Important dates
Opening of General Registration – 9th July, 2025
Closing of General Registration – 11th August, 2025
Deadline for Memorial Submission (Soft Copies) – 1st September, 2025
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/lifestyle/health/high-performers-at-workplace-suffer-fatigue-too-experts-describe-high-functioning-burnout-and-how-to-prevent-a-meltdown-101753868886055.html” on this server.
Vinay Prasad, the controversial head of the Food and Drug Administration office that oversees vaccines and gene therapy, has abruptly left the agency after less than three months on the job.
Andrew Nixon, a spokesperson for the Department of Health and Human Services, confirmed Prasad’s departure in an emailed statement Tuesday. “Dr. Prasad did not want to be a distraction to the great work of the FDA in the Trump administration and has decided to return to California to be with his family,” Nixon wrote. “We thank him for his service and the many reforms he was able to achieve in his time at the FDA.”
The news was reported earlier by the Pink Sheet and Endpoints News.
Prasad’s exit marks a sudden end to his tumultuous tenure as director of the FDA’s Center for Biologics Evaluation and Research, with in addition to vaccines and some genetic medicines also reviews blood products.
A prolific academic and longtime critic of U.S. drug policies, Prasad was appointed as the head of CBER on May 6. At the time, Commissioner Martin Makary called his hiring a “significant step forward” for CBER, as Prasad brought the “scientific rigor, independence and transparency” the office needed, he claimed.
Prasad was a vocal opponent of his predecessor Peter Marks, who ran CBER for nearly a decade before resigning in March after a dispute with HHS Secretary Robert F. Kennedy Jr. Marks championed regulatory flexibility while at the FDA and, as head of CBER, oversaw the review and approvals of COVID-19 vaccines as well as dozens of cell and gene therapies. Prasad previously criticized many of those decisions and, notably, had castigated Marks for overruling FDA reviewers in clearing Sarepta Therapeutics’ Duchenne muscular dystrophy gene therapy Elevidys.
Prasad’s appointment had raised questions among many biotech companies and investors that FDA standards might be shifting. After joining the FDA, Prasad quickly worked with Makary to establish stricter approval guidelines for COVID-19 vaccines. He also three times stepped in to overrule other agency reviewers in issuing narrower-than-requested clearances for COVID shots developed by Moderna and Novavax.
At a round table meeting hosted by the FDA in early June, Prasad attempted to ease concerns CBER might be less flexible under his watch in regulating gene therapies for rare conditions. “We understand that progress is not always made in a single leap,” he said. “We will consider incremental steps forward, because those add up.”
A month later, the FDA rejected a Duchenne cell therapy from Capricor Therapeutics that Prasad reportedly scrutinized. Shortly afterwards, the FDA engaged in an unusual public standoff with Sarepta over its Duchenne gene therapy Elevidys. Following the deaths of two Elevidys recipients — as well as the death of a study volunteer who received a different gene therapy — the agency asked Sarepta to halt all shipments of its treatment. After initially defying the request, Sarepta agreed, and publishedreports suggested the company might need new safety data before the FDA would allow Elevidys back on the market.
But in the ensuing days, Prasad was targeted by right-wing influencer Laura Loomer, other conservative commentators and in op-eds published in The Wall Street Journal. One Journal op-ed criticized him as being a “Bernie Sanders acolyte in MAHA drag” and a “one-man death panel.” Another argued his decisionmaking suggested he believes “people can’t be trusted to make their own decisions about risks and benefits.”
When the FDA suddenly allowed Sarepta to resume some shipments of Elevidys on Monday, some Wall Street analysts speculated higher-ups within the Trump administration had stepped in.
“We wouldn’t be surprised to see a resignation in the short term,” Baird analyst Brian Skorney wrote in a note to investors on Monday.
Intervertebral Disc Disease (IVDD) can be hard for any dog and owner to face. Beagles, known for their cheerful energy, are sadly among the breeds more likely to have IVDD. Knowing how this condition works, how to spot it early, and how to help your Beagle stay comfortable and active can make a big difference.
Below, you will find clear answers to common questions owners ask about IVDD in Beagles, along with tips for caring for dogs that may need extra support to walk and play.
How common is IVDD in Beagles?
IVDD is one of the more common spinal problems in Beagles. This breed has a long back and short legs, which puts extra pressure on the spine. Studies suggest that Beagles, along with Dachshunds and Cocker Spaniels, have a higher risk of IVDD because of this body shape.
The risk usually goes up as the dog gets older, with most cases happening between 3 and 7 years of age. Genetics also play a role, so if a Beagle’s parents had IVDD, there is a bigger chance the puppy might develop it too.
What causes IVDD in Beagles?
IVDD happens when the discs between the bones in the spine break down or move out of place. A healthy disc acts like a small cushion that keeps the bones from rubbing together. When these discs get weak or tear, they can press on the spinal cord and nerves. This causes pain, weakness, and sometimes trouble walking.
In Beagles, disc wear and tear happens faster because of their body structure and genes. Even a small jump or twist can make a disc slip if it’s already weak.
What are early signs of IVDD in Beagles?
Early signs can be easy to miss. Some Beagles may just seem tired or stiff. Watch for these signs:
Difficulty jumping onto furniture
Holding the neck or back stiffly
Crying out when picked up
Shaking or trembling
Wobbly walking or dragging paws
Avoiding stairs or play
Spotting these signs early means you can get help fast, which can prevent things from getting worse.
What are the stages of IVDD in Beagles?
IVDD in dogs is often grouped into five stages. Knowing the stages helps you and your vet decide what treatment is best.
Stage 1: Mild pain only. Your Beagle might cry when you touch its back or pick it up.
Stage 2: Moderate pain and weak back legs. Walking may look shaky.
Stage 3: Loss of coordination. Your Beagle may fall over or drag its back feet.
Stage 4: Can’t walk but can still feel its back legs when touched.
Stage 5: No feeling in back legs and loss of bladder or bowel control.
How is IVDD diagnosed in Beagles?
A vet will start with a physical exam to check your Beagle’s movement, pain level, and reflexes. If IVDD is likely, they may suggest X-rays or an MRI to see the spine clearly. An MRI shows which disc is damaged and if the spinal cord is under pressure.
What treatments help Beagles with IVDD?
Treatment depends on the stage of IVDD. Mild cases often improve with rest and medicine. Dogs need strict crate rest for 4 to 6 weeks. Vets may give pain medicine and muscle relaxers to help your Beagle stay comfortable.
For more serious cases, surgery may be needed. The vet will remove the part of the disc pressing on the spinal cord. Dogs often recover well if surgery happens early.
Some Beagles need physical therapy. Gentle exercises, water therapy, or massage can help rebuild strength.
Can a Beagle with IVDD walk again?
Many Beagles walk again after IVDD if they get the right care. Some recover fully with rest and medicine alone. Others may still have weak legs even after surgery. In these cases, dog wheelchairs can help dogs stay active.
Walkin’ Pets wheelchairs are made for dogs with back leg weakness or paralysis. They support your Beagle’s back end, helping them walk, play, and enjoy outdoor time safely. Many dogs use them while they heal. Others use them long-term if they cannot walk on their own.
How can you care for a Beagle with IVDD at home?
At-home care is very important. Limit jumping and running during healing. Use ramps for furniture or cars. Keep your Beagle’s weight healthy to ease pressure on the spine. Soft bedding helps too.
If your dog has trouble walking, a wheelchair can stop further injury. It also keeps your Beagle’s muscles working, which is good for the heart and mind too.
What is the life expectancy of a Beagle with IVDD?
Most Beagles with IVDD live normal lives if they get care on time. Dogs with mild cases can fully recover. Dogs with severe IVDD may have lasting weakness, but they often live many happy years with help.
Using a wheelchair, harness, or sling can give your Beagle freedom to move. Many owners find their dogs adjust well and still enjoy walks, toys, and family time.
How can you prevent IVDD in Beagles?
While you can’t always prevent IVDD, you can lower the risk:
Keep your Beagle at a healthy weight.
Stop them from jumping off high places.
Use ramps for beds and couches.
Walk them often to keep muscles strong.
Check for early signs and see the vet quickly.
Responsible breeding also helps. If you plan to get a Beagle puppy, ask the breeder about IVDD in the parents.
Helping your Beagle live well with IVDD
IVDD can feel scary, but many Beagles keep wagging their tails with the right support. Spotting signs early, getting good vet care, and using tools like dog wheelchairs when needed can keep your dog happy and mobile.
At Walkin’ Pets, we help dogs keep moving when they need extra help. Our dog wheelchairs give many Beagles the chance to enjoy life, even if their legs can’t keep up like before.
With good care, your Beagle can still chase smells, nap in sunbeams, and stay part of the family fun for years to come.
Around 70% of Aussie businesses are family owned, and 40% of those are run by couples.
That means hundreds of thousands of Australians are navigating both personal and professional lives with the same person.
It’s a powerful economic force—but not without its complexities.
Couple-run businesses often fail to plan succession because the attachment is personal.
Mark Creedon told of couples who missed the chance to sell and will now lose businesses with strong goodwill.
With Boomers retiring, Simon Kuestenmacher warns this will worsen—young buyers face barriers to entry, including financing and asset gaps.
It’s estimated that about 70% of businesses in Australia are family owned, and of those, roughly 40% are run by couples.
That’s hundreds of thousands of Aussies sharing not just a home, but also a business, and all the triumphs and tribulations that come with it.
Now, the idea of building a business with your partner might sound idyllic.
Shared values. A common vision. Growing wealth together. It’s the stuff business dreams are made of, right?
Well, yes, and no.
Because while couple-run businesses have unique strengths that can’t be replicated in traditional business partnerships, they also come with a set of challenges that can’t be ignored.
Stress, burnout, role confusion, emotional overload, and even resentment are all common if not appropriately managed.
So how do some couples make it work while others fall apart under the pressure?
That’s what we explored in depth in the latest Demographics Decoded episode with Metropole CEO and long-time business coach Mark Creedon, who has not only advised countless couple-run businesses, but runs one himself alongside his wife Caroline.
My co-host demographer Simon Kuestenmacher joined me to unpack how this phenomenon intersects with demographic shifts, generational differences, and business succession in Australia.
For weekly insights and strategic advice, subscribe to the Demographics Decoded podcast, where we will continue to explore these trends and their implications in greater detail.
Subscribe now on your favourite Podcast player:
Why do so many couples start businesses together?
According to Simon Kuestenmacher, family businesses dominate the SME landscape in Australia, and couple-led ventures are a significant part of that ecosystem.
So why do so many life partners end up as business partners?
Mark explains it’s often by default, not design.
In trade-based businesses, for instance, the husband might be a plumber, electrician, or builder, while the wife handles the books, scheduling, and administration.
“They start helping out and eventually, they’re fully in the business. It wasn’t a decision, it just happened.”
But some couples choose this route for more strategic reasons.
“They share a vision. They’ve got the same values. And they trust each other,” says Mark. “Trust is huge. In fact, it’s often what holds couple businesses together. If you don’t trust your business partner, you’re in trouble. And who do you trust more than the person you’ve committed your life to?”
Still, that doesn’t make the journey any easier.
Strengths: shared vision, built-in trust, and loyalty
Couple-run businesses often enjoy enormous advantages:
Shared goals and aligned values: You’re rowing in the same direction.
Built-in trust: Unlike traditional business partnerships, where betrayal can shatter everything, romantic partners are often more loyal and committed to one another.
Commitment to the long game: Both partners tend to be invested emotionally and financially for the long haul.
Mutual support during tough times: When things get hard, you’ve got a teammate who truly gets it.
And yet, those same strengths can become stressors under pressure.
The challenges: blurred boundaries, emotional overload & burnout
The top challenge Mark sees in couple-run businesses? Blurred boundaries.
“In a typical business partnership,” Mark says, “you can hash it out and move on. With your spouse, it’s more complicated. It’s harder to separate personal emotions from professional disagreements.”
And those boundaries don’t just affect your day; they can impact your health, relationships and even your family life.
“We had couples who’d say, ‘We talk business at breakfast, lunch, dinner, before bed.’ That’s not communication, that’s overload.”
Simon pointed out a vital mental health angle: when both partners have a bad day, there’s no emotional offset.
In traditional relationships, one partner may be able to support the other through challenges.
But when both are in the business and experiencing stress simultaneously, there’s no buffer.
You magnify the pressure. You both crash.
And sometimes, it leads to silent sacrifices. “One partner often protects the other from stress by taking it all on themselves,” Mark notes. “That’s noble, but it can build resentment. Especially if the effort isn’t recognised.”
The recognition gap: resentment, power imbalances and public perception
A surprisingly common source of tension is external recognition, or lack of it.
Mark shared how Caroline, despite being an experienced accountability coach and co-director, is still sometimes referred to as “Mark’s wife” rather than as a business leader in her own right.
“This happens more than people realise. One partner is seen as the ‘face’ of the business, while the other becomes invisible, despite making an equal or even greater contribution.”
When these roles aren’t properly communicated to clients, staff, or even the broader market, it creates an internal power imbalance that slowly breeds resentment.
That’s why defining public-facing roles is crucial.
“At Metropole, everyone knows Michael is the property expert. But they also know who to speak to for operations, finances, or coaching. We make it crystal clear.”
The importance of role clarity and communication systems
According to Mark, most couple-run businesses don’t fall apart because of a lack of love.
They struggle because they have never defined their roles or built systems to support their dual responsibilities.
“You can’t run a proper business with random conversations at the dinner table. You need a weekly meeting. You need to set clear boundaries. And when you clock off from work, you really clock off.”
He even admits that early on in his business journey with Caroline, he had to learn to literally ignore work questions once the workday ended. “We had to create those boundaries for sanity.”
And let’s be clear, this isn’t about striving for perfect work-life balance. That concept is a myth.
“I prefer work-life harmony,” says Mark. “Sometimes the balance is 90% work, 10% home. Other times, the opposite. It’s about knowing which takes priority at which time, and adjusting accordingly.”
Succession planning: when you build a business together, how do you let go?
Succession is already a tricky issue in business.
In couple-run businesses, it’s even more emotionally charged.
There’s emotional attachment. There’s shared history. And often, there’s a deep reluctance to pass the baton.
“It’s like handing over your firstborn,” says Mark. “You’ve built this thing together for 20+ years. Now you’re supposed to just let it go? That’s hard enough when it’s one person. When it’s two, it’s twice as hard.”
He shared a story about a couple who refused succession planning advice years ago.
They had strong employees who could’ve bought into the business over time.
But they resisted. Now, they can’t sell, and they’ll likely have to close a business with serious goodwill, simply because they didn’t plan early enough.
Simon added a demographic twist: With many baby boomer business owners now approaching retirement, the problem is only going to worsen.
Buyers are fewer. Financing is harder. And without assets to back a purchase, many young entrepreneurs are priced out.
Practical advice for couples starting a business together
If you’re in the early stages of building a business with your partner, Mark offers three golden pieces of advice:
Build it like a bigger business from day one. Even if it’s just the two of you, define roles, put communication structures in place, and act like a company with a CEO and leadership team.
Get external help. A business coach isn’t a luxury; it’s a necessity. Not just for strategy, but to serve as a neutral sounding board. As Mark puts it: “You can’t see your own blind spots.”
Protect your relationship and identity. That means prioritising self-care, maintaining separate hobbies, and cultivating individual social circles. Caroline paints. Mark drums. I play bridge and enjoy magic while Pam plays Golf and Mahjong. These aren’t distractions, they’re protective factors.
Simon shared a sobering demographic insight here: “Men are more likely to lose their friendship networks in retirement because their social lives are tied to work. When that falls away, they have nothing left but their partner’s friends. That’s dangerous.”
Final thoughts: couple businesses are a cornerstone of Australia’s economy, but they require intentional design
Couple-run businesses aren’t just a niche; they’re a cornerstone of the Australian economy.
They fuel local communities, employ thousands, and contribute meaningfully to household wealth.
But success in these businesses doesn’t come from love alone.
It stems from structure, clarity, discipline, and, above all, effective communication.
So whether you’re already running a business with your partner or you’re just exploring the idea, remember: the strength of your relationship doesn’t automatically translate into business success.
It needs systems. It needs support. And it needs space, so that both of you can be equal, valued, and heard.
With those in place, you really can have the best of both worlds: a thriving business and a strong, loving relationship.
Why not share the same business coach that I do?
When you’re ready to build a business, not just a job, here are 5 ways Mark Creedon can help you:
Grab a copy of a white paper:“The top 5 reasons why you need to join a Mastermind Group NOW” – click here to download it.
Grab a copy of Mark’s book.It’s a road map to creating a business that doesn’t rely on you, and you have a business & not just a job – click here
Keep up to date with Mark’s Podcast.If you want to learn simple strategies to help you double your revenue and work half your current time your business – Listen here.
Join the Business Mastermind group. It’s our new Facebook community where smart business people learn to get more income, impact & independence – click here
Work with Mark and his team privately.If you would like to work directly with Mark and his team to take your business to a Level 3 Business… Just send a message to [email protected] and put the work “Private” in the subject line.
If you found this discussion helpful, don’t forget to subscribe to our podcast and share it with others who might benefit.
Subscribe now on your favourite Podcast player:
About Michael Yardney Michael is the founder of Metropole Property Strategists who help their clients grow, protect and pass on their wealth through independent, unbiased property advice and advocacy. He’s once again been voted Australia’s leading property investment adviser and one of Australia’s 50 most influential Thought Leaders. His opinions are regularly featured in the media.
When was the last time you and your partner had a truly fun conversation on date night—the kind that left you both laughing, blushing, or feeling newly connected? It’s easy to fall into routines, where dinner dates or cozy nights blur into the same old small talk. But the right fun date night questions can flip the script, creating an opportunity for you to connect with your partner in fresh, exciting, and intimate ways.
We’ve carefully curated this ultimate guide of such fun date night questions for couples who want to flirt, laugh, and dive deeper into their connection. Whether you’re looking for light-hearted humor, romantic questions to ask on a date, or date night conversation starters that go beyond the usual, this list has something for every mood.
Sprinkle these into your next dinner date or use them as date night conversation starters when you’re relaxing on the couch or sharing a late-night snack, and unlock the gates to better understanding and connection. Ready to skip the boring small talk and ask questions that make your partner light up? Let’s dive in!
101 Fun Date Night Questions To Keep The Conversation Flowing
A date night is a lot more than just the food, the setting, or even the wine. It’s about the connection you build across the table. Asking fun date night questions can transform an ordinary evening into a playful, intimate experience. Here’s our carefully curated list, divided into themes to help you mix things up. You’ll find fun questions for couples that are flirty, silly, deep, or just plain surprising, all designed to spark conversation and create memories.
Flirty questions to ask on a date night
These romantic questions to ask on a date will spark playful chemistry and remind you why you’re attracted to each other. Perfect for adding a little teasing, a little blushing, and a lot of fun to your time together. Whether it’s your first dinner date or a regular night in, flirty exchanges keep the romance alive.
Turn up the charm and make them blush tonight
What’s one thing you find irresistible about me?
If we had to sneak away right now, where would we go?
What outfit of mine do you secretly love the most?
Do you remember the first time you thought, “I want to kiss them”?
What’s the most romantic dream you’ve had about me?
If I kissed you unexpectedly right now, what would you do?
What’s something you’ve always wanted to try with me but haven’t said out loud?
How do you feel when I look at you from across the room?
What’s one compliment you wish I gave you more often?
What’s your idea of the perfect romantic surprise?
If we were in a romance movie, what would our most iconic scene be?
Which song would you dance to with me in the rain?
What’s the cheesiest romantic thing you’d do for me?
If we had our own couple hashtag, what would it be?
What part of me do you think is my best-kept secret?
Related Reading: 50 Questions To Ask Your Significant Other To Know Them Better
Funny things to ask your boyfriend or girlfriend
Want to share belly laughs? These funny things to ask your boyfriend/girlfriend bring out your quirky, light-hearted side. Great for dinner date conversation starters or when you’re lounging together, they help create funny memories and inside jokes you’ll carry for years.
Laugh together, love stronger
16. If you were a flavor of ice cream, what would you be? 17. What’s the silliest thing you believed as a child? 18. Who’s your celebrity look alike (be honest!)? 19. If animals could talk, which would be the sassiest? 20. What’s your secret dance move when nobody’s watching? 21. Have you ever had an awkward date story? 22. If you could have a useless superpower, what would it be? 23. What’s your go-to karaoke song, even if you can’t sing? 24. Which cartoon character do you secretly relate to? 25. What’s the weirdest food combo you actually enjoy? 26. If you were a meme, which one would you be? 27. What’s your guilty-pleasure TV show? 28. What’s the weirdest dream you’ve ever had? 29. If we were famous, what would we be famous for? 30. What would you do if a bird pooped on you during a romantic walk?
Related Reading: 55 Intimate Questions To Ask Your Partner
Deep fun questions for couples who crave connection
Sometimes, you crave more than small talk. These deep fun questions for couples help you open up, reflect on your emotions, and discover each other’s dreams, fears, and inner worlds. They’re perfect as late night relationship questions to build emotional intimacy and stimulate heart-to-heart conversations.
Share your heart, deepen your bond
31. What’s one moment in your life you’ll never forget? 32. What does love mean to you right now? 33. How have you grown since we first met? 34. What’s something you’re scared to tell most people? 35. When do you feel most supported by me? 36. What’s one goal you want us to achieve together? 37. What does “home” mean to you? 38. How do you handle feeling overwhelmed or stressed? 39. What’s one way we’ve made each other better? 40. If you could go back and relive one day, which would it be? 41. What’s a value or belief you hold close that you want me to understand? 42. What’s one thing about our future that excites you most? 43. How do you think love changes over time? 44. What do you think is the most meaningful thing we’ve done together? 45. What legacy do you want to leave behind?
We’ve been doing late night relationship questions once a week, usually on Fridays when the kids are asleep. It’s such a simple thing, but asking deep or even silly stuff keeps us connected. Last week, I learned my wife’s dream as a kid was to be a pirate. Who knew?” — u/SailorAtHeart
Hypothetical “What if” scenarios to spark playful date night questions
Let your imagination run wild with these playful date night questions that dive into fun, fantastical “what if” scenarios. Whether you’re dreaming about alternate lives, silly superpowers, or adventurous futures, these prompts are perfect for couples who love exploring creative, unexpected conversations together.
Dream big, imagine wild—explore the ‘what ifs’
46. What if we won the lottery tomorrow, what’s the first thing we’d buy? 47. What if we woke up in a movie world, which one would be the most fun? 48.If we could switch lives for a day, what do you think you’d learn? 49. What would you do if you could read my mind for an hour? 50. If aliens landed and asked for a tour, where would you take them? 51. What if we opened a business together — what would it be? 52. If we could teleport anywhere for dinner tonight, where would we go? 53. What’s one invention you wish existed just for couples? 54. If we could live in any decade, which one would you pick? 55. What if we had to plan a wedding in 48 hours — how would we pull it off? 56. If we were stranded on an island, what’s the first thing you’d do? 57. If you had a time machine, would you visit your past or our future? 58. If you were invisible for a day, what’s the first thing you’d do? 59. If we made a couple’s bucket list, what’s #1? 60. If you could instantly master a skill, what would it be?
Related Reading: 100+ Epic Hypothetical Questions For Couples
Playful date night questions to keep things fresh
Keep things light and spontaneous with these playful date night conversation starters that help you break routine and surprise each other. Whether you’re over dinner or curled up on the couch, these fun prompts spark laughter, creativity, and maybe even a little mischief.
Keep it light, keep it playful — surprise each other every time
61. What’s one thing you think we do really well as a couple? 62. How can I make you feel more loved right now? 63. What’s your favorite memory from our relationship so far? 64. What’s something we should celebrate more often? 65. How do you think we’ve changed each other? 66. What’s your love language — has it shifted over time? 67. What does a perfect “us” day look like to you? 68. How can we handle disagreements more gently? 69. What’s one habit we should pick up together? 70. What’s something small I do that makes you smile? 71. How do you picture us five years from now? 72. What’s something we should prioritize more as a couple? 73. How do you know when you feel happiest with me? 74. What’s one thing you wish we did more often? 75. What advice would you give another couple?
Related Reading: 35 Serious Relationship Questions To Know Where You Stand
Dinner date conversation starters to avoid small talk
Tired of the usual, “How was your day?” conversations? Feel like there is a lack of communication in your relationship because you’re running out of things to talk about? Use these alternatives to liven up your dinner date conversations. They’re the kind of fun questions to ask each other over dinner that turn even a regular weeknight meal into a memorable date.
Fast questions, fun answers, nonstop smiles
76. Dogs or cats? 77. Beach vacation or mountain retreat? 78. Sweet or savory snacks? 79. Sunrise or sunset? 80. Road trip or plane ride? 81. Books or movies? 82. Fancy date or cozy night in? 83. Early bird or night owl? 84. Text or call? 85. Dancing or singing? 86. Pizza or pasta? 87. Horror movies or comedies? 88. Stay up late or wake up early?
Related Reading: The 36 Questions That Lead To Love
Cute couple questions for date night memories
These cute couple questions for date night invite you to reflect on your favorite shared memories, from first impressions to silly moments. Perfect as fun relationship questions to ask your partner, they help you celebrate the small, sweet details that make your love story unique.
Look back, smile, and relive your sweetest memories
89. What was your first impression of me? 90. What’s the first concert or event you ever went to? 91. What’s your happiest childhood memory? 92. When did you first feel like we were in a serious relationship? 93. What song reminds you of us? 94. What was your biggest teenage crush? 95. Do you remember your first big adventure? 96. What’s a holiday memory you cherish? 97. Who was your childhood hero? 98. What’s something nostalgic you want to share with me? 99. What was your favorite childhood game or toy? 100. What’s a memory from our relationship that still makes you laugh? 101. What was your first dream job as a kid?
FAQs
1. Why ask questions on date night?
Asking questions to ask your partner on date night keeps the connection alive and prevents you from falling into a routine. It’s not about quizzing each other but about staying curious, playful, and emotionally engaged.
2. What are good topics for date night conversations?
Good topics include dreams, memories, future plans, relationship check-ins, romantic questions to ask on a date, and lively date night conversation starters. Mix light topics with deeper ones to balance laughter and meaning.
3. How do I keep things light but meaningful on a date night?
Blend playful date night questions with thoughtful prompts. For example, pair fun questions to ask each other over dinner with late-night relationship questions that touch on feelings or hopes. Keep it natural — let curiosity lead the way, not pressure.
Final Thoughts
Date nights are a chance to press pause on the rush of life and tune back into each other. Treat them as such, and not merely as an event on the calendar. These fun date night questions allow you to engage with each other intentionally and make sure you’re not just filling the silence or killing time.
Whether you’re sharing stories over a candlelit dinner, cuddled up on the couch, or sneaking in late-night talks after a long day, these playful and meaningful conversations can deepen your bond in ways that no fancy restaurant or big romantic gesture ever could. So go ahead, pour that glass of wine, pull up these questions, and let the conversation lead you back to what matters most: each other.
21 Expert-Backed Compatibility Questions For Couples
85 Get To Know Me Questions To Connect — New 2025 List
40 New Relationship Questions You Should Surely Ask
Your contribution does not constitute a charitable donation. It will allow Bonobology to continue bringing you new and up-to-date information in our pursuit of helping anyone in the world to learn how to do anything.
Share Feedback
What is your feedback?
Subscribe to Our Newsletter
Get your weekly dose of insightful articles straight to your inbox.
OLED laptops look gorgeous, but all that visual fidelity comes at a cost. OLED burn-in can hit your laptop hard, so it’s best to take preventive action before your panel kicks the bucket.
What Is OLED Burn-In and Why You Should Care
Unlike LCD panels that require a backlight, OLED or Organic Light-Emitting Diode panels illuminate each pixel individually. This yields near-infinite contrast and much better color reproduction, but these individual pixels degrade over time, especially when displaying the same high-contrast colors for extended periods.
When certain pixels on your display panel show the same, high-contrast image elements such as static UI, logos, toolbars, or more, they degrade faster than surrounding pixels. This results in a faint but permanent shift in the pixel’s colors, leaving behind what seems like a ghost of a static image called OLED burn-in. If you want a more detailed explanation, I’d recommend reading our detailed OLED burn-in explainer.
Zarif Ali / MakeUseOf
While burn-in won’t stop your panel from working, having a constant static overlay will render your display practically useless, as color reproduction and brightness will suffer. Additionally, this can also cause visibility issues if the problem is too severe.
Burn-in isn’t reversible either. Once the organic compounds in the pixels degrade unevenly, no amount of refresh cycles will restore them to their original luminance. Laptop manufacturers rate OLED display lifespans at tens of thousands of hours, but under varied use. When displaying static UIs and images for extended periods—a likely event in daily use—burn-in accelerates significantly.
Burn-in doesn’t kick in suddenly. Instead, it slowly creeps in, sometimes over hundreds of hours of usage. You might not notice signs of burn-in during daily usage like browsing the web, editing documents, or streaming, but even subtle image retention can deteriorate your display panel over time.
How to Prevent OLED Burn-In on Your Laptop
If you’ve never checked your OLED display for burn-in, I’d recommend doing so right away. Tons of YouTube videos and websites show test patterns or solid colors, which can reveal any image retention patterns on your display. FixBurnIN and Black Screen Test have some easy-to-use OLED burn-in tests you can try out.
Yadullah Abidi / MakeUseOf
As for preventing burn-in, there are quite a few simple methods you can use to protect your display. For starters, resist the urge to crank up the brightness. I know bright, colorful OLED panels look great, but that high brightness can accelerate pixel degradation.
1. Lower the Screen Brightness
It’s recommended that you keep the display brightness between 40 to 60% or enable any auto or adaptive brightness features your laptop might have. I use my laptop’s display at 60% brightness most of the time, and it’s yet to show any signs of burn-in even after nearly a year of heavy use.
2. Turn On Dark Mode
Next up, switch to dark mode. Apart from easing the strain on your eyes, using dark mode in your OS or applications can also reduce the workload on your display pixels. When backgrounds and menus use deeper shades, fewer pixels light up with high intensity, slowing organic degradation that eventually leads to burn-in.
3. Avoid Static Images
The longer your display shows a static image, the higher the risk of burn-in. It’s best to keep your display moving and reduce idle time as much as possible. This involves auto-hiding your taskbar and docks in your OS, using a dynamic screen saver that kicks in within a few minutes of idle time, and rearranging desktop icons and shortcuts every few weeks so a single region of pixels doesn’t get overworked.
4. Keep Your Laptop Cool
You also need to keep your panel, and by extension, your laptop cool. Apart from thermal throttling your CPU/GPU and reducing performance, internal heat from your laptop can also speed up OLED burn-in.
With laptop internals regularly getting more powerful, laptops are running hotter than ever. However, this problem is relatively easy to solve. Just make sure your fan vents are nice and clean, your laptop gets good airflow, use a cooling pad if required, and adjust settings to keep your laptop cool.
5. Run Pixel Refresh Tools
Last but not least, laptops with OLED displays often come with vendor utilities designed to run calibration cycles that redistribute pixel wear. This doesn’t fix or reverse burn-in, but makes its effects less visible. You can also use third-party tools such as OLED Guard Pro or OLEDShift, but their effectiveness can vary.
The OLED Burn-In Protection Checklist
Changing how you use your laptop to make sure your display doesn’t get damaged can be challenging. Most OLED burn-in preventions are small things that you may often forget, or even prefer not to do. Here’s a quick OLED burn-in protection checklist to help you ensure you’re doing all you can to protect your display:
Protective Measure
Action
Keep Brightness Reasonable
Keep display brightness between 40 to 60% and enable auto brightness if available.
Use Dark Mode
Use dark mode in your OS and programs to reduce pixel power draw.
Keep Content Moving
Frequently shift windows and toolbars, avoid static windows or HUDs on screen for extended durations.
Auto-Hide Static UI
Enable auto-hide for any OS taskbars, docks, and menu bars to avoid persistent pixels being illuminated.
Use Dynamic Screen Savers
Choose moving screensavers and set them to start within 2 to 5 minutes of screen inactivity. Alternatively, use animated wallpapers.
Use OLED Calibration Apps
Using vendor-provided or third-party OLED calibration apps can reduce the effects of burn-in and prevent it from happening.
Keep the Panel Cool
Heat can accelerate burn-in. Keep your laptop cool and work on firm surfaces to ensure good airflow.
Items like auto-hiding OS elements, and using dark mode might not align with your personal preferences. On relatively newer panels, the risk of burn-in is less, so you can stick with some of your visual preferences. However, it’s best if you stick to as many burn-in preventions as you can.
OLED burn-in can be an expensive issue to fix, especially on laptops, which are more susceptible and far less repairable. Thankfully, sticking to a few simple preventions can ensure your display runs long without losing its colors.
In the sizzling heat of July in Wuhu, Anhui Province, the city kicked off its third crayfish food festival, drawing crowds with irresistible flavors and vibrant nightlife. Running until July 31, the event brings together leading local crayfish brands to serve up spicy, garlic, and pepper-salt variations freshly cooked on-site by master chefs.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-29/Wuhu-s-crayfish-festival-boosts-night-economy-with-flavor-and-fun-1FoOBsNuvg4/img/fcdc9fd4abc54a09a8b3a3657f6c5666/fcdc9fd4abc54a09a8b3a3657f6c5666.jpeg'A dish of crayfish is set out at the food festival in Wuhu, Anhui Province, on July 26, 2025. /IC
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-29/Wuhu-s-crayfish-festival-boosts-night-economy-with-flavor-and-fun-1FoOBsNuvg4/img/fcdc9fd4abc54a09a8b3a3657f6c5666/fcdc9fd4abc54a09a8b3a3657f6c5666.jpeg'A dish of crayfish is set out at the food festival in Wuhu, Anhui Province, on July 26, 2025. /IC
More than just a food event, the festival is a summer celebration that blends culinary delights with cultural performances and entertainment. Visitors can stroll through a network of gourmet stalls, enjoy live music performances, and engage in interactive experiences.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-29/Wuhu-s-crayfish-festival-boosts-night-economy-with-flavor-and-fun-1FoOBsNuvg4/img/c70c5ef7e8e0412c94777bd2f0e9ba35/c70c5ef7e8e0412c94777bd2f0e9ba35.jpeg'Visitors soak up the atmosphere at the crayfish food festival in Wuhu, Anhui Province, on July 26, 2025. /IC
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-29/Wuhu-s-crayfish-festival-boosts-night-economy-with-flavor-and-fun-1FoOBsNuvg4/img/c70c5ef7e8e0412c94777bd2f0e9ba35/c70c5ef7e8e0412c94777bd2f0e9ba35.jpeg'Visitors soak up the atmosphere at the crayfish food festival in Wuhu, Anhui Province, on July 26, 2025. /IC
Wuhu is also offering thousands of consumer vouchers to boost spending. The festival is part of the city’s broader push to energize the nighttime economy and revitalize the local economy.
On a recent Saturday in Inglewood, about a dozen acclaimed music producers including Dahi — who’s worked with the likes of Kendrick Lamar, J. Cole and Drake — and DJ Khalil — who has collaborated with artists like Dr. Dre, Kanye West and Eminem — gathered with 80 students to geek out on the art of beat making.
The free three-day workshop, called the Audio Affect Series, was co-hosted by TEC Leimert, a South L.A.-based nonprofit that aims to bridge the gap between technology and entertainment, Serato (DJ and music production software company) and beloved street wear retailer Undefeated. The purpose of the event, which took place July 25-27, was to bring Black and brown producers of all skill levels together for hands-on instruction designed to help them level up their skills.
The idea for the workshop manifested a few years ago when TEC Leimert hosted a music production activation during its annual conference in the Leimert Park Plaza. Hours after the conference was over, attendees were still huddled in a small tent where a few producers were doing live beat making sessions and offering tips.
Share via
“It was like 8 p.m. and they were still going,” recalls TEC Leimert Executive Director Paris McCoy. “It was just so clear that this was the type of space that artists wanted to be in, so I was just like, “We got to make it happen.” By the time her nonprofit reached out to the Serato team about collaborating on a beat making program, they were eager to get involved because they were already in talks about doing something similar, McCoy says.
“We started to realize that there was a gap between some folks who were trying to get into the music production space but didn’t have the [tools] and/or, depending on where they are, access to mentors who can help them kind of walk through things,” adds OP Miller, who is a DJ and head of artist relations for Serato.
Roughly 80 rising Black and brown producers participated in the three-day workshop hosted by TEC Leimert, Serato and Undefeated.
(Genaro Molina/Los Angeles Times)
The first official Audio Affect Series took place in 2023 at Serato’s studio in L.A.’s Arts District. It featured four separate workshops that took place over the course of several months. About 35 people participated in each of the intimate sessions, which were beginner-friendly and were led by L.A.-based artists like Lyric Jones, Georgia Ann Muldrow and Dahi.
This year’s event, which was held at Volume Studios in Inglewood, was even larger. Roughly 80 out of 200 applicants were selected for the program. Undefeated provided merchandise for the workshop, including a hoodie that many attendees wore throughout the weekend.
The participants, who ranged from teens to Gen-Xers, were dispersed in various studios inside the massive multi-production studio. With their headphones on, they bobbed their heads to the beats they were cooking up and watched intently as sound waves danced across their laptop screens.
The workshop, which was designed for intermediate to advanced skill levels, covered topics such as how to discover your personal sound as a producer, how to sample and clear tracks and how to create a strong online presence. Throughout the weekend, participants watched live demos from speakers and they were given time to cook up beats of their own. On the final day, each student was given the aux to play their beat for the entire group.
“This is a necessary program to have for people who are interested in making music,” says Linafornia.
(Halline Overby)
Among the speakers were pioneering funk artist and TEC Leimert board member Dām-Funk; Watts-born rapper and producer Dibiase; Inglewood-born musician and event curator Thurz; and multi-instrumentalist and singer Amber Navran.
Erika Jasper, a longtime DJ and self-proclaimed “novice producer,” attended the first Audio Affect Series in 2023 and decided to come back because she wanted to build her confidence as a female producer.
“I figured it would be nice to learn from some of the best producers in the game,” says Jasper, who goes by the artist name q.sol. “Plus, Serato always does a phenomenal job at providing the best instruction, step by step.”
After making beats for roughly 25 years, Thomas Phillips says he wanted to participate in the program because he’s trying to take his music more seriously now. “I’m a software engineer, but I want to switch over to audio [engineering],” says Phillips, who brought along his 7-year-old son, who was making beats of his own. “So I’m just putting a lot more attention to my craft and being more intentional instead of just doing it in my spare time as a hobby.”
Linafornia, a producer and DJ from Leimert Park, says being able to participate in an event like the Audio Affect Series would’ve been helpful for her when she started making beats after high school.
“This is a necessary program to have for people who are interested in making music and they get to hear perspectives from people who look like them, who are around their age,” says Linafornia, who led a talk on the history of L.A.’s sound, ranging from jazz to G funk and hip-hop. “I didn’t have that growing up. I wish they had programs like this when I was a teenager.”
Dahi, an Inglewood-born producer who won a Grammy for his production on J. Cole and 21 Savage’s song “A Lot,” spoke at the first Audio Affect Series and was eager to return.
“Showing people the tools to make better music is something that I’m always championing and I think that is something that we need to do more of,” says Dahi, who walked students through his creative process when it comes to making beats. “I think a lot of times, people complain about what they don’t like now and that it’s not good, and I’m just like “Help the youth. Help people who want to get better.”
Many attendees said they could relate to Navran’s presentation about finding her own sound after years of singing and playing woodwind instruments, then finally taking the deep dive into music production years later.
The class of students for this year’s Audio Affect series pose for a group photo.
(Halline Overby)
“I didn’t produce for a long time because I thought I couldn’t,” says Navran, who is also a member of the L.A.-based band Moonchild. But after “receiving encouragement from friends, seeing other people do it and getting a starter kit of how different people approach stuff was such a nice way to jump into it.”
Like Linafornia, Navran wishes that a program like the Audio Affect Series existed at the start of her journey. “To be surrounded by producers, people you can meet, collaborate with and be inspired by is so powerful,” she adds.
To wrap up the workshop, each of the participants will be given about two months to complete and submit a beat to be considered for the Audio Affect Series’ compilation project. Legendary producer and DJ Battlecat will be curating the project, which will be released on vinyl next year.
After receiving positive feedback for the program, McCoy says she and her team want to make it an annual event so more people can experience it.
She says, “There is a real hunger and need for this kind of space.”
The school year starts soon for many students, and ChatGPT has announced a new “study mode” that aims to prevent—or at least, encourage against—students taking homework shortcuts.
The mode is designed around the Socratic method, so when activated, OpenAI’s generative AI chatbot rejects direct requests for answers, instead guiding the user with open-ended questions. The new study mode is available to most logged-in users of ChatGPT, including those on the free version.
OpenAI has significantly disrupted the education system over the past few years, with students becoming some of the earliest adopters of ChatGPT. Even so, OpenAI claims the bot is currently an overall boon to learners—if asked to roleplay as a synthetic tutor.
“When ChatGPT is prompted to teach or tutor, it can significantly improve academic performance,” says Leah Belsky, a vice president of education at OpenAI, “but when it’s just used as an answer machine, it can hinder learning.”
The problem is, no matter how engaging ChatGPT’s study mode becomes as OpenAI iterates on this feature, it exists just a toggle click away from ChatGPT, with direct answers (and potential fabrications) about whatever class you’re working on. That could be quite hard to resist for younger users still developing their frontal lobe.
It’s true that students on the hunt for easy ways to avoid engaging with the substance of a course have always had resources available to them, like the CliffNotes series of literature summaries. Still, the immediacy and personalized nature of chatbots feels like an escalation. Multiple AI-focused smartphone apps that can solve homework problems with just a snapshot, like ByteDance’s Gauth, rocket in popularity whenever the school year gets back into session. Many educators have recently raised concerns about the continued, and often secretive, use of AI by students.
OpenAI CEO Sam Altman doesn’t buy it. “I remember when I was in school—junior high—Google first came out and all the teachers freaked out,” Altman said on a recent podcast. Similar to the internet and the calculator, Altman sees AI as a tool capable of helping you “think better.”
Durante dos décadas, la pediatra Lanre Falusi, de Washington D.C., ha asesorado a los padres sobre el calendario de vacunas que deben recibir sus hijos, la seguridad de la vacunación y sus efectos secundarios.
Pero dijo que este año las charlas han cambiado.
“Por primera vez, los padres de recién nacidos me preguntan si en el futuro sus bebés podrán seguir recibiendo las vacunas”, contó Falusi.
A lo largo del país, pediatras dicen que padres ansiosos están preocupados por si continuará habiendo acceso a las vacunas infantiles de rutina. Los más intranquilos son aquellos con hijos en Medicaid, el programa del gobierno que ofrece seguro médico para familias de bajos ingresos y personas con discapacidades.
Medicaid cubre a 4 de cada 10 niños en el país.
“El problema realmente surgió cuando RFK Jr. asumió el cargo de secretario de Salud y Servicios Humanos (HHS)”, afirmó Deborah Greenhouse, pediatra de Carolina del Sur.
La preocupación aumentó tras la reestructuración, en el mes de junio, de un órgano asesor clave sobre vacunas de los Centros para el Control y Prevención de Enfermedades (CDC). Millones de familias temen que en un futuro cercano tengan que pagar de su bolsillo las vacunas que actualmente están cubiertas por su seguro médico.
El secretario de Salud y Servicios Humanos, Robert F. Kennedy Jr., conocido activista antivacunas, destituyó a los 17 miembros del Comité Asesor sobre Prácticas de Inmunización (ACIP), el grupo responsable de recomendar las vacunas que deberían ser incluidas en los calendarios nacionales de inmunización para niños y adultos.
Kennedy sustituyó a los miembros del panel por otros nuevos, afines a sus puntos de vista, lo que generó alarma entre profesionales médicos y los expertos en salud pública.
“La gente debería preocuparse por lo que va a pasar con la disponibilidad de vacunas para los niños”, afirmó Jennifer Tolbert, directora adjunta del Programa sobre Medicaid y Personas sin Seguro Médico de KFF.
En virtud de la Ley de Cuidado de Salud a Bajo Precio (ACA), las aseguradoras médicas actualmente están obligadas a cubrir todas las vacunas recomendadas por el ACIP. Además, los estados y otras jurisdicciones utilizan el calendario de vacunación infantil para establecer los requisitos de inmunización de los escolares.
Las recomendaciones del ACIP también determinan qué vacunas están cubiertas por el programa Vaccines for Children (VFC), una iniciativa financiada por los CDC que proporciona dosis gratuitas a niños de familias de bajos ingresos y sin seguro médico.
La mitad de los niños del país son elegibles para este programa.
Si los nuevos miembros del ACIP retiraran su apoyo a una vacuna concreta y el director de los CDC estuviera de acuerdo, las consecuencias serían inmediatas, aseguró Tolbert. “Eso afectaría automáticamente qué vacunas están cubiertas y, por lo tanto, cuáles se encuentran disponibles para los niños beneficiarios de Medicaid”, explicó.
Las aseguradoras aún no han dicho cómo modificarían la cobertura, pero Tolbert afirmó que una medida de ese tipo abriría la puerta a que los planes de salud privados se negaran a cubrir la vacuna.
Los pediatras temen que en el futuro los padres se vean obligados a elegir entre pagar cientos de dólares de su bolsillo por las vacunas o dejar a sus hijos desprotegidos.
Por su parte el AHIP, la asociación nacional que agrupa a la industria de seguros médicos, dijo que los planes “siguen cumpliendo los requisitos federales relacionados con la cobertura de las vacunas recomendadas por el ACIP y seguirán apoyando el amplio acceso a servicios preventivos críticos, incluidas las vacunas”.
Los pediatras también dicen que las noticias sobre la nueva ley presupuestaria del presidente Donald Trump, que se espera que reduzca el gasto en Medicaid en aproximadamente $1.000 millones durante la próxima década, también han generado mucha inquietud entre los padres.
En realidad, aunque pueden estar preocupados por perder su Medicaid, Tolbert advirtió que la ley no menciona las vacunas ni cambia los requisitos de elegibilidad o las prestaciones de Medicaid para los niños. Sin embargo, menos financiación federal significa que los estados tendrán que tomar decisiones sobre a quiénes seguirán cubriendo y qué servicios se les ofrecerá.
Para tener los fondos necesarios para pagar Medicaid, los estados podrían aumentar los impuestos y destinar a este programa fondos destinados a otras áreas, como la educación o el sistema penitenciario. Pero lo más probable es que opten por reducir el gasto en Medicaid.
“También podrían hacerlo recortando la elegibilidad de poblaciones opcionales, recortando servicios que son opcionales o reduciendo los pagos a los proveedores”, argumentó Tolbert. “No está claro cómo se desarrollará esto, y es probable que sea diferente en cada uno de los estados”.
En junio, Kennedy anunció en una publicación en X que los CDC ya no recomiendan la vacuna contra covid-19 para niños sanos y embarazadas. La medida provocó una demanda judicial por parte de la Academia Americana de Pediatría y otras asociaciones de médicos que buscan frenar la directiva de Kennedy.
También ese mes, los nuevos miembros del ACIP nombrados por Kennedy votaron a favor de recomendar que los adultos y los niños ya no reciban vacunas contra la gripe con timerosal, un conservante que rara vez se utiliza en vacunas contra la gripe.
Los activistas antivacunas, entre ellos Kennedy, llevan décadas manifestándose contra el timerosal, alegando que está relacionado con el autismo, a pesar de que no existe evidencia científica que respalde esa relación.
“No hay motivo de preocupación”, afirmó en un comunicado Emily Hilliard, vocera del Departamento de Salud y Servicios Humanos. “Como ha declarado el secretario Kennedy, no se negará a nadie el acceso a una vacuna autorizada si decide recibirla”.
“Cuando el comité del ACIP se reunió en junio, reafirmó que las vacunas contra la gripe seguirán siendo accesibles y estarán dentro de la cobertura. Por otra parte, hizo hincapié en la seguridad garantizando que estas vacunas no contienen mercurio”, escribió Hilliard.
“El programa Vaccines for Children sigue proporcionando vacunas contra covid-19 sin costo alguno para los niños que cumplen los requisitos cuando los padres, el proveedor y el paciente consideren que la vacunación es adecuada. Medicaid seguirá reembolsando los gastos de administración”.
Sin embargo, la posibilidad de que una vacuna sea restringida o deje de estar cubierta ya está cambiando la forma en que los padres abordan la inmunización. En el consultorio de Falusi, están programando citas para que la vacunación coincida exactamente con los requisitos de elegibilidad de sus hijos, a veces incluso en la misma semana de su cumpleaños.
En Albuquerque, Nuevo México, la pediatra Melissa Mason, ha atendido algunos pacientes que contrajeron sarampión durante el brote en varios estados que comenzó en Texas.
Teme que nuevas limitaciones a la vacunación derive en más enfermedad y muertes.
Desde enero, se han registrado a nivel nacional más de 1.300 casos de sarampión, según los CDC. “Estamos viendo este brote porque las tasas de vacunación son demasiado bajas y eso permite que el sarampión se propague en la comunidad”, dijo Mason.
Los niños y adolescentes representan el 66% de los casos de sarampión, indican los CDC. En respuesta, Mason ha comenzado a ofrecer la vacuna contra el sarampión a bebés de tan solo 6 meses, medio año antes de lo habitual, aunque dentro de las directrices federales.
El año pasado, las tasas generales de vacunación en los jardines de infantes descendieron en el país, y el número de niños con exención de vacunación escolar siguió aumentando.
Mason teme que, si se restringe el acceso a las vacunas, las comunidades vean el regreso de otras enfermedades prevenibles que se han mantenido bajo control durante mucho tiempo, especialmente en estados como Nuevo México, donde el 61% de los niños están bajo Medicaid.
La tos ferina, otra enfermedad que puede ser mortal para los niños más pequeños, también se está propagando. Según informaron los CDC, hasta el 5 de julio se habían identificado más de 15.100 casos. Mason explicó que la tos ferina es especialmente peligrosa para los bebés demasiado pequeños para recibir la vacuna.
Por ahora, los pediatras están tratando de subrayar la urgencia sin provocar pánico en la población.
En Columbia, Carolina del Sur, Greenhouse solía ofrecer a las familias un rango de edad flexible para las vacunas de rutina.
“Ya no digo eso”, expresó la pediatra.
Ahora, la médica recomienda a los padres a vacunar a sus hijos tan pronto como puedan hacerlo.
Muchos de ellos le han preguntado si la vacuna contra el VPH, que ayuda a prevenir el cáncer de cuello uterino, se puede administrar a niños menores de la edad recomendada, que es de 9 años.
“De hecho, hoy mismo dos padres me han preguntado si sus hijos de 7 u 8 años podían recibir la vacuna contra el VPH”, contó Greenhouse. “Tuve que responderles que no está permitido”.
Dado que la vacuna requiere varias dosis aplicadas con meses de diferencia, Greenhouse teme que se acabe el tiempo para que las familias puedan cubrir la serie con el seguro de salud. Algunas familias pueden decidir no comprar la segunda dosis si tienen que pagarla de su bolsillo. Si ya no está cubierta por el seguro, esa segunda dosis podría costar alrededor de $300.
“No puedo estar 100% segura de cómo será el futuro de algunas de estas vacunas”, reflexionó Greenhouse. “Lo que sí puedo decir es que es una situación muy aterradora”.
Se espera que el comité asesor sobre vacunas que nombró recientemente el secretario Kennedy realice su próxima reunión pública en agosto.
Dungeons & Dragons has exploded in popularity over the past few years, and part of that is due to the success of Stranger Things. The TTRPG features heavily in Netflix’s nostalgia-tinged supernatural series–not only do we see the characters play the game, they even give many of the otherworldly creatures they encounter names pulled from Dungeons & Dragons lore. Soon, fans will be able to take part in the Stranger Things crew’s tabletop adventures with an all-new D&D crossover game, Stranger Things: Welcome to the Hellfire Club.
The game looks to be a streamlined version of D&D that comes with everything you need, is easy to set up, and includes adventures based on the campaigns made by Stranger Things character Eddie Munson. The final season of Stranger Things doesn’t premiere until November 26, but fans will be able to join the Hellfire Club on October 7. You can preorder the crossover game for $50 at Amazon.
Dungeons & Dragons Stranger Things: Welcome to The Hellfire Club takes its name from the in-universe D&D club run by Eddie Munson. Gameplay is based on Dungeons & Dragons and is designed for 3-5 players, accompanied by a Dungeon Master (DM). Rather than rolling up their own unique adventurers, players take on one of several pre-made party roles–which are based on the D&D characters played by Stranger Things’ characters like Nog the Dwarf, Lady Applejack, Erica’s Rogue, and Dustin’s Cleric–and embark on a series of four guided adventures based on the ones made by Munson.
These pieces are all rendered with a classic art style inspired by ’80s heavy metal and classic D&D illustrations. Dungeons & Dragons Stranger Things: Welcome to The Hellfire Club Adventure Game seems like it could be a perfect game for Stranger Things fans who enjoy TTRPGs, or anyone who wants to dip their toes into tabletop gaming with a more structured experience that’s easy to pick up and play.
The upcoming TTRPG isn’t the first Stranger Things board game. In 2023, prolific board game publisher CMON Limited released Upside Down, a cooperative strategy game for 2-4 players based on the first two seasons of the show. Stranger Things: Upside Down retails for $50 and is in stock at Amazon.
Dungeons & Dragons Stranger Things: Welcome to The Hellfire Club Adventure Game
Gallery
More Stranger Things Books, Merch, And More
While Stranger Things is nearing its conclusion, fans have plenty of other Stranger Things releases to check out, including numerous official books and graphic novels that flesh out the Stranger Things universe. There are even a couple of Stranger Things x D&D comic collections in trade paperback, including the newest miniseries. Stranger Things and Dungeons & Dragons: The Rise of Hellfire releases September 30 in paperback and is up for preorder for $20 at Amazon.
Stranger Things and Dungeons & Dragons: The Rise of Hellfire
Stranger Things Graphic Novels & Comic Collections
Experience Stranger Things Seasons 1-4 in a new medium
There’s also a new set of books that collects all the written scripts for each episode into paperback volumes. Each book costs $30 and covers a full season. Scriptbooks for the first two seasons release September 2, and Seasons 3-4 will follow on December 9.
Stranger Things Novels
For adult readers:
For YA readers:
New Stranger Things Lego Set
Along with the wide collection of reading material listed above, new Stranger Things merch is on the horizon, including a collection of four Stranger Things Lego BrickHeadz figures launching October 1 for $40.
Looking for more tabletop games? Check out these new D&D and HeroQuest releases
As for D&D fans, there’s also the newly released Horrified: Dungeons & Dragons board game, which–as the title implies–puts a D&D spin on the award-winning horror-themed board game, Horrified. 1-5 players explore the dungeons of Undermountain and take on quests that pit them against iconic D&D monsters like The Mimic, The Beholder, The Displacer, and Red Dragon. The game was originally expected to launch August 10, but it’s already out–at Target at least–for $30. Amazon also has a store page for the game, though it’s not available to buy just yet. We had a chance to play the game ahead of launch, so be sure to check our Horrified: Dungeons & Dragons review if you want to learn more.
If you want to try the real thing, the best place to start is the recent D&D 2024 Edition Core Rulebooks set. The new Player’s Handbook, Dungeon Master’s Guide, and Monster Manual are all required to play the latest edition of D&D. If you’re looking for some pre-made adventures to follow along with, there’s the recent Dragon Delves Adventure Anthology that contains 10 modules designed for characters from levels 1-12. And if you want to expand your game even further with new classes, monsters, and and more, all set in Eberron campaign setting, you can preorder the upcoming Eberron: Forge of the Artificer Rules Expansion for $30 ahead of its August 19 launch date. Check out all the D&D 2024 book below.
All Dungeons & Dragons 2024 Edition Releases
HeroQuest: The Crypt of Perpetual Darkness Quest Pack
Beyond these new D&D releases, tabletop fans looking for more themed adventures should also check out the new HeroQuest: The Crypt of Perpetual Darkness Quest Pack expansion that launches in August. This set of 10 adventures is designed by actor and TTRPG super fan Joe Manganiello. The box includes new cards, dungeon tiles, dice, and a metallic Black Dragon miniature. And just like Welcome to the Hellfire Club, The Crypt of Perpetual Darkness features a heavy metal aesthetic that’s perfect for the dark fantasy adventures Manganiello cooked up. Unfortunately, it’s currently sold out at Amazon, but hopefully we’ll see a restock soon.
Note that The Crypt of Perpetual Darkness requires the HeroQuest base game to play, which is available now for $88 (was $135), or the HeroQuest: First Light set that’s available for $50. As mentioned above, HeroQuest is a more streamlined, board-game-style TTRPG that is perfect for anyone who wants to try out TTRPGs or who prefers the more tactile, mechanics-driven experience of a tabletop game with the aesthetics and crunch of pen-and-paper games.
A groundbreaking international study, recently published in Health Data Science, analyzed objective sleep data from 88,461 adults in the UK Biobank and found significant associations between sleep traits and 172 diseases. The research, led by teams from Peking University and Army Medical University, highlights sleep regularity — such as bedtime consistency and circadian rhythm stability — as an underrecognized but critical factor in disease risk.
Using actigraphy data over an average of 6.8 years, researchers identified that 92 diseases had over 20% of their risk attributable to poor sleep behavior. Notably, irregular bedtime (after 00:30) was linked to a 2.57-fold higher risk of liver cirrhosis, while low interdaily stability increased the risk of gangrene by 2.61 times.
Importantly, the study challenges previous claims that “long sleep” (≥9 hours) is harmful. While subjective reports have linked long sleep to stroke and heart disease, objective data revealed this association in only one disease. Misclassification may be to blame: 21.67% of “long sleepers” actually slept less than 6 hours, suggesting that time spent in bed is often confused with actual sleep time.
“Our findings underscore the overlooked importance of sleep regularity,” said Prof. Shengfeng Wang, senior author of the study. “It’s time we broaden our definition of good sleep beyond just duration.”
The team confirmed several associations in U.S. populations and identified inflammatory pathways as a possible biological link. Future research will explore causality and assess the impact of sleep interventions on chronic disease outcomes.
Hi! Thank you for considering to publish on Lawctopus. Lawctopus reaches to 3-4 lakh law students, aspirants and young lawyers every month!
Publishing your event or opportunity will ensure that you get a good number of quality applicants and attendees.
Publishing your internship experience or job experience with us is a great way to ensure that people make informed choices about their job and internship decisions.
Below are some important details!
Submitting a post on Lawctopus: Guidelines
1. Please submit your post to [email protected] and follow the below guidelines.
Please use email only. Please do NOT call, SMS, or Whatsapp us regarding publishing/updating of posts.
Our editorial team takes 2-3 working days to publish a post and/or to make changes on an already published post. Kindly note that we work from Monday to Friday, 10 am to 7 pm.
2. The subject line of your email should be ‘Lawctopus Post’. The full content of the post should be in the body of the email.
Brochures, other documents, logos, and images can be sent as attached files.
4. The full content (body of the email) should be between 300-1200 words long.
5. Please mention the original URL to the event/opportunity or attach the original documents (like brochures, registration forms) at the end of the email.
For example: www.nls.ac.in is NOT the original URL.
6. Kindly email changes (for your already published post) on the same email thread/chain for all requests to update content. Please avoid fresh/new email subject lines for the same post.
Sponsored posts: If you are private organisation and are charging students, we’ll treat your post as a sponsored post and charge between Rs. 10,000 and 50,000 for such a post. The fee depends on the nature of the post being submitted.
The following details are to be included for a post on Lawctopus:
NOTE: Feel free to include any other detail relevant for your requirements.
Events & Opportunities
Events and opportunities include: Conferences, Call for Papers, Webinars, Courses, Workshops, Entrance Exams, Scholarships, Fellowships; Essay Competitions, Moots, Fests, etc.
About the organiser/college/university
Details about the event/opportunity
Who is it for/eligibility
Location (country/state/city)
Registration/submission procedure
Fee details (if any)
Prizes (if any)
Deadlines/important dates
Contact information
Official link/Official brochure
Internship and Job Openings
About the organisation
Full address
Eligibility/qualifications
Main responsibilities
Number of employees/interns required
Location
Work timings
Who can apply
Salary/Stipend
Duration of internship
Application procedure
Contact info
Official link (organisation’s website/social media link)
Internship and Job Experiences
Name of the organisation
Full address [including state and city]
Website address/social media links
Duration of the internship job [for example May 1, 2024-June 30, 2024]
Process of application
First impressions/initial formalities
Main tasks
Positive aspects about the internship/job
Negative aspects about the internship/job
Work culture
Timings
Stipend/salary [monthly]
Commute and stay
Other things
Charges for Sponsored Posts
Most College/University events are published for free!
We do have paid plans and advertisements for enhanced visibility: check here (for singular events) or contact us at [email protected] for Annual Plans.
Charges for job/internship posts depend on the type of the organisation, job location, and number of hirings.
For advertisement of events organised by private players, or products and services by private players, our advertisement details are here.
If you want to submit an opportunity, outside of the law stream field, please check NoticeBard.com.
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/lifestyle/fashion/get-up-to-80-off-on-sunglasses-perfumes-and-makeup-on-amazon-freedom-festival-101753773214368.html” on this server.
Merck & Co. is launching a new cost-cutting program, announcing Tuesday a plan to redirect by the end of 2027 $3 billion away from older, slow-growth businesses to newly launched drugs and experimental medicines it hopes can drive faster revenue growth.
The move comes as Merck prepares for generic competition to its cancer blockbuster Keytruda beginning in 2028 in the U.S. Research and development, sales and manufacturing functions will be affected as Merck seeks to support the newer drugs.
Merck is already facing faltering topline sales as its second biggest drug, the HPV vaccine Gardasil, has struggled in China and Japan. CEO Rob Davis told investors that executives “expect a return to growth” in the second half of 2025, following a second quarter in which Merck recorded a 2% fall in sales compared with the same period one year ago.
Dive Insight:
In the company’s second quarter earnings call, executives didn’t go into detail about how spending within the company would shift. However, Davis dropped a hint that spending behind Keytruda would fall in favor of newer products like the cancer medicine Welireg or an experimental dual-acting drug licensed from LaNova Medicines.
“We’re not looking to pull back on spending in oncology,” he said. “It’s about reallocating our resources and focusing our resources so it’s not just about Keytruda. You’re going to see greater growth spend as you see Keytruda pull back.”
Pipeline products and newly launched drugs represent a $50 billion “commercial opportunity” by the mid-2030s, Merck’s executives claim. Of that, new oncology medicines account for $25 billion in potential sales and new cardiometabolic drugs like Winrevair and an experimental cholesterol drug make up $15 billion, while HIV and immunology medicines are another $5 billion each, Davis said.
Merck also recently agreed to buy Verona Pharma in a $10 billion deal that will add a newly approved lung disease drug to its pipeline.
Still, Merck faces near-term challenges as it confronts falling sales from Gardasil. It has paused China shipments through at least the end of 2025, and also faces slowing revenue in Japan. Meanwhile, in the U.S., the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention may move to recommend a single dose of Gardasil rather than the two to three now used, further limiting sales.
Total sales in the second quarter were $15.8 billion, down from $16.1 billion in the same period in 2024. Merck is forecasting 2025 sales of between $64.3 and $65.3 billion, compared with the $64.2 billion it recorded in 2024.
NOW READ: Six famous people who failed before succeeding
About Michael Yardney Michael is the founder of Metropole Property Strategists who help their clients grow, protect and pass on their wealth through independent, unbiased property advice and advocacy. He’s once again been voted Australia’s leading property investment adviser and one of Australia’s 50 most influential Thought Leaders. His opinions are regularly featured in the media.
Apple has unveiled a new plan, called AppleCare One, which extends AppleCare+ coverage. If you’re invested in Apple’s ecosystem, AppleCare One is worth checking out—especially if you tend to break your devices.
What Is AppleCare One?
AppleCare One is Apple’s all-in-one subscription plan that combines multiple AppleCare+ coverages into a single, convenient package. Instead of managing separate protection plans for your iPhone, Mac, iPad, and other Apple devices, AppleCare One bundles them into one streamlined monthly payment. As such, it makes it easier for those deeply invested in the Apple ecosystem to stay protected.
Traditionally, AppleCare+ has been offered as individual coverage for each device. It provides extended warranty support, accidental damage protection, 24/7 priority access to Apple Support, and theft and loss protection (only for iPhone).
Related
Apple One Is the Best Entertainment Package You’re Not Using
It’s seriously good.
AppleCare One covers up to three devices under a single plan and saves money compared to buying separate AppleCare+ plans for each product. It costs $19.99 per month, which averages to about $6.67 per device—regardless of whether it’s an Apple Watch, iPhone, Mac, or iPad.
If you’re in the US, you can sign up for AppleCare One on your iPhone, iPad, or Mac right now by navigating to Settings > General > AppleCare & Warranty. Alternatively, you can visit the nearest Apple Store to sign up for AppleCare One.
How This Compares to Traditional AppleCare+
AppleCare One builds on the foundation of AppleCare+ but offers more flexibility, convenience, and value. AppleCare+ is purchased individually for each device, typically within 60 days of buying it, and each plan has its own cost based on the product type and model.
For example, as of this writing, you need to pay $13.99/month (or $139.99/year) to get AppleCare+ for an iPhone 16 Pro Max. For the iPhone 16e or 16, it costs $9.99/month ($99.99/year) or $11.99/month ($119.99/year), respectively. The pricing also varies for other product types, such as Mac and Apple Watch, based on the model.
Related
AppleCare+ Explained: How Much Does It Cost and Is It Worth the Price?
AppleCare+ protects your Apple device, but is it worth the cost?
AppleCare One simplifies that entire process. For a flat fee of $19.99/month, you can cover up to three devices, regardless of type or model. If you need more coverage, each additional device costs $5.99/month. And when needed, you can remove products from the plan at any time. This all saves you money if you have several devices you used to cover under individual AppleCare+ plans.
It also introduces the ability to add devices already owned—those up to four years old—as long as they’re in good condition. This is a significant improvement over the strict 60-day window required by AppleCare+. Thanks to this, you no longer need to purchase a warranty when you buy an iPhone or another Apple device; you can also add coverage to older devices after taking some time to think about it.
Both plans offer unlimited accidental damage repairs, battery coverage, and priority access to Apple support. However, AppleCare One expands theft and loss protection to the iPad and Apple Watch, whereas AppleCare+ only offered it for the iPhone.
Another major change is how the plan handles device upgrades. If you trade in a covered device at Apple, AppleCare One will automatically transfer the coverage to the new device—no need to manually cancel or repurchase coverage like with AppleCare+.
Get AppleCare One if You’re Deep in the Apple Ecosystem
If you own multiple Apple devices, AppleCare One is practically a no-brainer. Whether it’s an iPhone, iPad, Apple Watch, or Mac that you’ve held onto for the last four years, AppleCare One gives you a single, affordable plan to keep them all protected. Instead of paying for separate AppleCare+ plans—with different billing cycles and rules—you get unified coverage starting at $19.99 per month for up to three devices.
If you’ve already paid for AppleCare+ for multiple devices you own, it’s wise to cancel them and switch to AppleCare One right away. However, if you only own one device or only one of your devices is eligible for coverage, you shouldn’t pay for AppleCare One because you’ll likely be paying more than if you just subscribed to AppleCare+ for the device.
AppleCare One is a user-friendly and cost-effective protection plan for anyone with multiple Apple devices. By combining the benefits of AppleCare+ into a single, flexible subscription, it eliminates the hassle of managing separate plans. There are also added perks, including expanded theft and loss protection for iPad and Apple Watch, and the option to cover older devices. Depending on how often you break your devices or run into trouble, AppleCare One could be a great way to bring peace of mind without spending a fortune.
Nestled in the west of China’s Hunan Province, the small town of Zhijiang in Dong Autonomous County witnessed a remarkable chapter in history – one in which the bonds of friendship between China and the United States blossomed amid the global fight against fascism during World War II.
At the onset of the China’s total resistance against the Japanese aggression following the Lugou Bridge Incident, US General Claire Lee Chennault vowed, “I’ll help China as much as I can if you need.” He would soon go on to lead a group of American volunteer pilots to support China’s resistance against Japanese aggression. This group became famously known as the Flying Tigers, namely the American Volunteer Group (AVG).
At the height of the campaign, Zhijiang Dong Autonomous County hosted 6,062 American pilots. Over the course of their mission, more than 2,000 American members of the Flying Tigers gave their lives in combat. Meanwhile, over 200 downed airmen were rescued by local Chinese citizens – many of whom paid the ultimate price during these daring rescues.
In his memoir “Way of a Fighter,” General Chennault wrote: “At least 95 percent of all American airmen that landed alive behind the Japanese lines were rescued and guided back to their bases by Chinese. The Japanese made it quite plain during their punitive expedition in the wake of the Doolittle Raiders in early 1942 that the penalty for aiding American airmen was, not only death for individuals involved, but annihilation for their families and communities. Yet there is no authentic case of the Chinese refusing to aid American airmen behind the Jap lines during the rest of the war… These rescues were by far the most convincing demonstration of Chinese goodwill toward Americans… “
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-29/Flying-Tigers-Memorial-Museum-A-living-tribute-to-China-US-friendship-1FoTSIuCW0E/img/d4da02fcbe2f41b481a64f526ec621fe/d4da02fcbe2f41b481a64f526ec621fe.jpeg' alt='A statue of General Claire Lee Chennault stands outside the Flying Tigers Memorial Hall in Zhijiang Dong Autonomous County, Hunan Province, China, in this photo taken on July 25, 2025. /CGTN'
Today, the Flying Tigers Memorial Museum, located in Zhijiang Dong Autonomous County, continues to tell this extraordinary story of wartime solidarity and friendship between the two nations.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-29/Flying-Tigers-Memorial-Museum-A-living-tribute-to-China-US-friendship-1FoTSIuCW0E/img/2d5dd9cbdeb647efaf96d84d94a628c7/2d5dd9cbdeb647efaf96d84d94a628c7.jpeg' alt='The name of the main memorial hall was inscribed by Anna Chan Chennault, or Chen Xiangmei, wife of the late General Claire Lee Chennault and a well-known Chinese American advocate for China-US friendship in this photo taken on July 25, 2025. /CGTN'
The museum complex consists of three main buildings: the main memorial hall, and two wartime structures – the original control tower of the Sino-American Air Force and the Chinese American Composite Wing clubhouse – both preserved to reflect their historical roles.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-29/Flying-Tigers-Memorial-Museum-A-living-tribute-to-China-US-friendship-1FoTSIuCW0E/img/738a2005415b4440bcabbe7dff6c3359/738a2005415b4440bcabbe7dff6c3359.jpeg'The former clubhouse of the Chinese American Composite Wing is now open to the public as part of the museum in this photo taken on July 25, 2025. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-29/Flying-Tigers-Memorial-Museum-A-living-tribute-to-China-US-friendship-1FoTSIuCW0E/img/738a2005415b4440bcabbe7dff6c3359/738a2005415b4440bcabbe7dff6c3359.jpeg'The former clubhouse of the Chinese American Composite Wing is now open to the public as part of the museum in this photo taken on July 25, 2025. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-29/Flying-Tigers-Memorial-Museum-A-living-tribute-to-China-US-friendship-1FoTSIuCW0E/img/738a2005415b4440bcabbe7dff6c3359/738a2005415b4440bcabbe7dff6c3359.jpeg'The former clubhouse of the Chinese American Composite Wing is now open to the public as part of the museum in this photo taken on July 25, 2025. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-29/Flying-Tigers-Memorial-Museum-A-living-tribute-to-China-US-friendship-1FoTSIuCW0E/img/738a2005415b4440bcabbe7dff6c3359/738a2005415b4440bcabbe7dff6c3359.jpeg'The former clubhouse of the Chinese American Composite Wing is now open to the public as part of the museum in this photo taken on July 25, 2025. /CGTN
Inside the main hall, visitors can find a rich collection of historical artifacts, including personal items belonging to the American and Chinese pilots, and rare color photographs capturing moments of everyday life and military cooperation during the war.
Wu Jianhong, the museum’s director, revealed that many of these items were generously donated by descendants of Flying Tigers veterans, Chinese Americans, and American supporters. “You could say the Flying Tigers Memorial Museum is a joint creation of the Chinese and American people,” Wu noted.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-29/Flying-Tigers-Memorial-Museum-A-living-tribute-to-China-US-friendship-1FoTSIuCW0E/img/1557418ae1c04ce6945e7567b4415a77/1557418ae1c04ce6945e7567b4415a77.jpeg' alt='Flying Tigers uniforms are exhibited at the museum in this photo taken on July 25, 2025. The embroidered green apple logo on the left of the chest represents the badge of the American Volunteer Group's First Pursuit Squadron, nicknamed the "Adam & Eves." The other two squadrons were known as the "Panda Bears" and "Hell's Angels." /CGTN'
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-29/Flying-Tigers-Memorial-Museum-A-living-tribute-to-China-US-friendship-1FoTSIuCW0E/img/f210cda55aa04b1f8dcd7db36f3e45e8/f210cda55aa04b1f8dcd7db36f3e45e8.jpeg'Historical photographs showing the camaraderie and united struggle of the Chinese and American military and civilians during war are seen in a photo taken at the exhibition on July 25, 2025. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-29/Flying-Tigers-Memorial-Museum-A-living-tribute-to-China-US-friendship-1FoTSIuCW0E/img/f210cda55aa04b1f8dcd7db36f3e45e8/f210cda55aa04b1f8dcd7db36f3e45e8.jpeg'Historical photographs showing the camaraderie and united struggle of the Chinese and American military and civilians during war are seen in a photo taken at the exhibition on July 25, 2025. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-29/Flying-Tigers-Memorial-Museum-A-living-tribute-to-China-US-friendship-1FoTSIuCW0E/img/f210cda55aa04b1f8dcd7db36f3e45e8/f210cda55aa04b1f8dcd7db36f3e45e8.jpeg'Historical photographs showing the camaraderie and united struggle of the Chinese and American military and civilians during war are seen in a photo taken at the exhibition on July 25, 2025. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-29/Flying-Tigers-Memorial-Museum-A-living-tribute-to-China-US-friendship-1FoTSIuCW0E/img/f210cda55aa04b1f8dcd7db36f3e45e8/f210cda55aa04b1f8dcd7db36f3e45e8.jpeg'Historical photographs showing the camaraderie and united struggle of the Chinese and American military and civilians during war are seen in a photo taken at the exhibition on July 25, 2025. /CGTN
Although color photography existed during World War II, it was still in its infancy, with only the United States and Germany capable of producing large numbers of color images. A remarkable number of vivid, high-quality color photographs on display at the Flying Tigers Memorial Museum were taken by an American signalman Joe Day. In 2014, Joe Day donated these invaluable images to the museum, offering an authentic glimpse into the conditions and camaraderie of the era.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-29/Flying-Tigers-Memorial-Museum-A-living-tribute-to-China-US-friendship-1FoTSIuCW0E/img/d1d6ddd7d599438499f7443a50363e55/d1d6ddd7d599438499f7443a50363e55.jpeg'A historic color photograph displayed in the museum depicts signalman Joe Day at Zhijiang Airport. This photograph of the exhibit was taken on July 25, 2025. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-29/Flying-Tigers-Memorial-Museum-A-living-tribute-to-China-US-friendship-1FoTSIuCW0E/img/d1d6ddd7d599438499f7443a50363e55/d1d6ddd7d599438499f7443a50363e55.jpeg'A historic color photograph displayed in the museum depicts signalman Joe Day at Zhijiang Airport. This photograph of the exhibit was taken on July 25, 2025. /CGTN
During my visit, I observed a wide cross-section of visitors at the museum, from elderly patrons accompanied by their families, to youth tour groups exploring the exhibits, to a steady stream of international guests.
“The Flying Tigers Memorial Museum serves as an important window and platform for cultural exchange between China and the United States,” said Wu. “We’ve had so, so many foreign visitors – especially Americans – who come specifically to see where the Flying Tigers once fought and to learn how they lived and worked alongside the Chinese people.”
To commemorate the 80th anniversary of the victory in the Chinese People’s War of Resistance Against Japanese Aggression and the World Anti-Fascist War, a delegation of descendants of Flying Tigers veterans and long-time American friends of China will visit Zhijiang in September, according to Wu. A series of commemorative events will be held to honor this legacy.
While the flames of war have long subsided, the story of the Flying Tigers and the spirit of China-US cooperation in the face of global conflict continues to echo through time. Their story serves as a powerful reminder of what can be achieved when two peoples come together in the name of peace.
Awdah Hathaleen a Palestinian community leader who was a consultant on the Oscar-winning documentary “No Other Land,” died Monday after an Israeli settler allegedly shot him to death in the occupied West Bank.
“No Other Land” filmmaker and subject Yuval Abraham announced his colleague’s death Monday, writing on X (formerly Twitter), “[Hathaleen] just died. Murdered.” Two hours prior, Abraham shared video of the confrontation that led to Hathaleen’s death. In the video, the settler in a dark shirt can be seen shoving people in a group, pulling out and pointing his pistol in their direction. The video shows him firing at people off-screen.
In the caption of his video, Abraham writes that the settler “just shot” Hathaleen in the lungs and identified the shooter as Yinon Levi. Levi was among the 13 hard-line Israeli settlers targeted last year by international sanctions for their alleged attacks and harassment of Palestinians in the West Bank. President Trump lifted U.S. sanctions against the Israelis in January.
“This is him in the video firing like crazy,” Abraham tweeted.
The incident occurred in in the village of Umm al-Khair, in the Masafer Yatta region that was the focus of “No Other Land.” Hathaleen was rushed to a hospital in Israel, where he was pronounced dead, his family confirmed to the New York Times. He was 31.
According to multiple reports, Israeli police said they responded to the scene, detaining and arresting an Israeli citizen. Police did not identify the detainee they took in for questioning, and claimed “terrorists hurled rocks toward” the nearby Israeli settlement of Carmel, according to CNN. Additionally, the Israeli military detained five Palestinians and two foreign tourists for their alleged involvement in Monday’s incident, the BBC reported.
The IDF did not immediately respond to The Times’ request for confirmation on Tuesday.
“No Other Land” filmmaker and Palestinian journalist Basel Adra on Tuesday tweeted video showing the attack from another angle. In this video, Levi is seen with the pistol in his right hand, smacking a person in front of him. The clip also sees Levi raising his right arm and firing off-screen. Adra says Levi “fires the bullet that took” Hathaleen’s life, adding in his caption that “the apartheid court decided to release him to house arrest.”
On Monday, Adra tweeted he was in disbelief about his friend’s death: “My dear friend Adwah was slaughtered this evening. He was standing in front of the community center in his village where a settler fired a bullet that pierced his chest and took his life. This is how Israel erases us — one life at a time.”
On Instagram, the Center for Jewish Nonviolence described Hathaleen as a well-known community figure: “an activist, artist, and teacher in the West Bank community of Masafer Yatta.” The activist group reminded Instagram followers that last month Hathaleen and another Palestinian man were denied entry, detained overnight and deported back to the West Bank when they arrived at the San Francisco International Airport.
“So many in our community knew Awdah, and gained so much by learning from him, and being his friend,” the organization said, concluding its statement with a call to action. “May Awdah’s memory be a revolution. May we see justice for Awdah, and justice for all Palestinians, within our lifetime.”
Earlier this year, Israeli settlers brutalized another member of the Oscar-winning “No Other Land” team. In March, Palestinian filmmaker Hamdan Ballal was beat in his head and stomach by settlers in the village of Susiya in the Masafer Yatta area. Palestinian residents said the settlers, some wearing masks, some carrying guns and some wearing military uniforms, attacked as residents were breaking their fast during the Muslim holy month of Ramadan, according to the Associated Press. Israeli military and police forces detained the filmmaker on suspicion of hurling rocks at IDF and police.
He was released a day later, with bruises on his face and blood on his clothes. As he recalled hearing “the voice of soldiers laughing at me,” his wife said she felt the international attention surrounding “No Other Land’s” Oscar win prompted settlers to “attack us more.” The harrowing documentary , which became the subject of controversy in Miami Beach earlier this year, documents Israel’s demolition of Palestinian villages in Masafer Yatta and the displacement of their communities in favor of Israeli military training grounds.
Since Israel launched its war against Hamas nearly two years ago, more than 60,000 Palestinians have been killed, Gaza’s Health Ministry said Tuesday. At least 77 were killed over the past 24 hours, most while seeking food.
New Delhi, July 28: BYD Auto, the Chinese EV maker, is reportedly planning to launch its new affordable model in India soon. The upcoming BYD electric SUV was recently spotted testing in India, marking its imminent launch. The company has not yet to announce its launch; however, it is expected to be the BYD Atto 2. With this new model, the Chinese company aims to expand its EV range in India.
Currently, BYD Auto offers various electric cars in India, such as the BYD Sealion 7, BYD eMAX 7 (rebranded version of BYD e6 MPV), BYD Atto 3, and BYD Seal. All the models offer long-range and enhanced performance in the EV segment. The prices of these models start with the BYD Atto 3, offered at INR 24.99 lakh. However, BYD may be aiming for a lower budget segment of customers this time. MG Cyberster Price, Specifications and Features Revealed, Know Everything About Electric Roadster Launched by JSW MG Motor India.
BYD Atto 2 Battery and Range
BYD Atto 2 will be launched in India as a compact SUV, matching its international counterpart. It is expected to boast a 45.1kWh Blade Cell battery pack offering long range in a single charge. The electric SUV may offer 380 km range for the entry variant, and the long-range variant could offer 402 km range.
BYD Atto 2 Spotted Testing in India; Check Expected Specifications and Features
BYD Atto 2 was spotted on Indian roads, likely hinting at its imminent launch. The new BYD EV will be introduced as a compact electric SUV and added to the company’s existing electric vehicle lineup. BYD Atto 2 will be a compact SUV measuring 1,830mm in width, 1,675mm in height, and 4,310mm in length. The same model is available in other countries with different names. It is called “Yuan Up” in China and “Yuan Pro” in Brazil.
The car’s overall design would be similar to the Atto 3 e-SUV’s. However, it would be boxy. It will get similar signature LED headlights and connected LED taillamps. The rear spoiler sports raised ends and has a faux diffuser below. Inside, the BYD Atto 3 electric SUV is expected to have a minimalist design. It may come with a 12.8-inch infotainment display and an 8.8-inch digital instrument cluster behind the steering wheel. Tesla Model Y Gets Highest IIHS Safety Rating for 2025 After Tesla Cybertruck; Elon Musk Reacts.
Besides, the BYD Atto 3 e-SUV is expected to get various features in India, such as Type-C charging ports, leather upholstery, ambient lighting, and power-adjusted seats with a heating option.
(The above story first appeared on LatestLY on Jul 29, 2025 04:43 PM IST. For more news and updates on politics, world, sports, entertainment and lifestyle, log on to our website latestly.com).
Meta told employees that it is going to allow some coding job candidates to use an AI assistant during the interview process, according to internal Meta communications seen by 404 Media. The company has also asked existing employees to volunteer for a “mock AI-enabled interview,” the messages say.
It’s the latest indication that Silicon Valley giants are pushing software engineers to use AI in their jobs, and it signals a broader move toward hiring employees who can vibecode as part of their jobs.
“AI-Enabled Interviews—Call for Mock Candidates,” a post from earlier this month on an internal Meta message board reads. “Meta is developing a new type of coding interview in which candidates have access to an AI assistant. This is more representative of the developer environment that our future employees will work in, and also makes LLM-based cheating less effective.”
“We need mock candidates,” the post continues. “If you would like to experience a mock AI-enabled interview, please sign up in this sheet. The questions are still in development; data from you will help shape the future of interviewing at Meta.”
Meta CEO Mark Zuckerberg has made clear at numerous all-hands and in public podcast interviews that he is not just pushing the company’s software engineers towards using AI in their work, but that he foresees human beings managing “AI coding agents” that will write code for the company.
“I think this year, probably in 2025, we at Meta as well as the other companies that are basically working on this, are going to have an AI that can effectively be a midlevel engineer that you have at your company that can write code,” Zuckerberg told Joe Rogan in January. “Over time we’ll get to a point where a lot of the code in our apps and including the AI that we generate is actually going to be built by AI engineers instead of people engineers … In the future people are going to be so much more creative, and they’re going to be freed up to do kind of crazy things.”
In April, Zuckerberg expanded on this slightly on a podcast with Dwarkesh Patel, where he said that “sometime in the next 12 to 18 months, we’ll reach the point where most of the code that’s going towards [AI] efforts is written by AI.”
While it’s true that many tech companies have pushed software engineers to use AI in their work, they have been slower to allow new applicants to use AI during the interview process. In fact, Anthropic, which makes the AI tool Claude, has specifically told job applicants that they cannot use AI during the interview process. To circumvent that type of ban, some AI tools promise to allow applicants to secretly use AI during coding interviews. The topic, in general, has been a controversial one in Silicon Valley. Established software engineers worry that the next batch of coders will be more AI “prompters” and “vibecoders” than software engineers, and that they may not know how to troubleshoot AI-written code when something goes wrong.
“We’re obviously focused on using AI to help engineers with their day-to-day work, so it should be no surprise that we’re testing how to provide these tools to applicants during interviews,” a Meta spokesperson told 404 Media.
If you want to create a perfect storm at Covered California and other Affordable Care Act marketplaces, all you have to do is make enrollment more time-consuming, ratchet up the toll on consumers’ pocketbooks, and terminate financial aid for some of the youngest and healthiest enrollees.
And presto: You’ve got people dropping coverage; rising costs; and a smaller, sicker group of enrollees, which translates to higher premiums.
The Trump administration and congressional Republicans have just checked that achievement off their list.
They have done it with the sprawling tax and spending law President Donald Trump signed on July 4 and a related set of new regulations released by the Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services that will govern how the ACA marketplaces are run.
Among the many provisions, there’s this: Large numbers of lawfully present immigrants currently enrolled in Obamacare health plans will lose their subsidies and be forced to pay full fare or drop their coverage.
Wait. What?
I understand that proponents of the new policies think the government spends too much on taxpayer subsidies, especially those who believe the ACA marketplaces are rife with fraud. It makes sense that they would support toughening enrollment and eligibility procedures and even slashing subsidies. But taking coverage away from people who live here legally is not health care policy. It’s an echo of the federal immigration raids in Los Angeles and elsewhere.
“It’s creating a very hostile environment for them, especially after having to leave their countries because of some very traumatic experiences,” says Arturo Vargas Bustamante, a professor of health policy and management at UCLA’s Fielding School of Public Health. “For those who believe health care is a human right, this is like excluding that population from something that should be a given.”
Email Sign-Up
Subscribe to KFF Health News’ free Morning Briefing.
In Covered California, 112,600 immigrants, or nearly 6% of total enrollees, stand to lose their federal tax subsidies when the policy takes effect in 2027, according to data provided by the exchange. In the Massachusetts and Maryland marketplaces, the figure is closer to 14%, according to their directors, Audrey Morse Gasteier and Michele Eberle, respectively.
It’s not clear exactly how much financial aid those immigrants currently receive in ACA marketplaces. But in Covered California, for example, the average for all subsidized enrollees is $561 per month, which covers 80% of the $698 average monthly premium per person. And immigrants, who tend to have lower-than-average incomes, are likely to get more of a subsidy.
The immigrants who will lose their subsidies include victims of human trafficking and domestic violence, as well as refugees with asylum or with some temporary protected status. And “Dreamers” will no longer be eligible for ACA marketplace health plans because they will not be considered lawfully present. Immigrants who are not in the country legally cannot get coverage through Covered California or most other ACA marketplaces.
The nearly 540,000 Dreamers in the United States arrived in the U.S. as kids without immigration papers and were granted temporary legal status by President Barack Obama in 2012. Of those, an estimated 11,000 have ACA health plans and would lose them, including 2,300 in Covered California.
Supporters of the policy changes enshrined in the CMS rule and budget law think it’s high time to rein in what they say are abuses in the system that started under the Biden administration with expanded tax credits and overly flexible enrollment policies.
“It’s about making Obamacare lawful and implementing it as drafted rather than what Biden turned it into, which was a fraud and a waste-infused program,” says Brian Blase, president of Arlington, Virginia-based Paragon Health Institute, which produces policy papers with a free-market bent and influenced the Republican-driven policies.
But Blase doesn’t have much to say about the termination of Obamacare subsidies for lawfully present immigrants. He says Paragon has not focused much on that subject.
Jessica Altman, executive director of Covered California, expects most immigrants who lose subsidies will discontinue their enrollment. “If you look at where those populations fall on the income scale, the vast majority are not going to be able to afford the full cost of the premium to stay covered,” she says.
Apart from the human hardship cited by Bustamante, the exodus of immigrants could compromise the financial stability of coverage for the rest of Covered California’s 1.9 million enrollees. That’s because immigrants tend to be younger than the average enrollee and use fewer medical resources, thus helping offset the costs of older and sicker people who are more expensive to cover.
Covered California data shows that immigrant enrollees targeted by the new federal policies pose significantly lower medical risk than U.S. citizens. And a significantly higher percentage of immigrants in the exchange are ages 26 to 44, while 55- to 64-year-olds make up a smaller percentage.
Still, it would be manageable if immigrants were the only younger people to leave the exchange. But that is unlikely to be the case. More red tape and higher out-of-pocket costs — especially if enhanced tax credits disappear — could lead a lot of young people to think twice about health insurance.
The covid-era enhanced tax credits, which have more than doubled ACA marketplace enrollment since their advent in 2021, are set to expire at the end of December without congressional action. And, so far, Republicans in Congress do not seem inclined to renew them. Ending them would reverse much of that enrollment gain by jacking up the amount consumers would have to spend on premiums out of their own pockets by an average of 66% at Covered California and more than 75% nationally.
And an analysis by the Congressional Budget Office shows that a consequent exodus of younger, healthier people from the marketplaces would lead to even greater costs over time.
Enhanced tax credits aside, consumers face additional hurdles: The annual enrollment period for Covered California and other marketplaces will be shorter than it is now. Special enrollment periods for people with the lowest incomes will be effectively eliminated. So will automatic renewals, which have greatly simplified the process for a majority of enrollees at Covered California and some other marketplaces. Enrollees will no longer be able to start subsidized coverage, as they can now, before all their information is fully verified.
“Who are the people who are going to decide to go through hours and hours of onerous paperwork?” says Morse Gasteier. “They’re people who have chronic conditions. They have health care issues they need to manage. The folks we would expect not to wade through all that red tape would be the younger, healthier folks.”
California and 20 other states this month challenged some of that red tape in a federal lawsuit to stop provisions of the CMS rule that erect “unreasonable barriers to coverage.” California Attorney General Rob Bonta said he and his fellow attorneys general hoped for a court ruling before the rule takes effect on Aug. 25.
“The Trump administration claims that their final rule will prevent fraud,” Bonta said. “It’s obvious what this is really about. It’s yet another political move to punish vulnerable communities by removing access to vital care and gutting the Affordable Care Act.”
Now that the Switch 2 has launched, we’re expecting to see more accessories for it revealed in the months to come. While an ergonomic set of controllers to replace the Joy-Con 2s would be appreciated, one creator has come up with a different–and potentially greasier–alternative that you can build for free, if you have a 3D printer. Called the GamiFries, this container allows you to clip your Joy-Cons or Switch to it, and enjoy an artery-clogging meal of McDonald’s fries during a Donkey Kong Bananza session.
The add-on is pretty simple in its design: the container is big enough for you to pop in a carton of medium-sized fries, and there’s a hole in the middle for the McDonald’s logo to peer through. The rails on the side allow for a Joy-Con 2 to be securely fitted, or you can supersize the experience to sit on either side of your Switch 2 console and then add the controller. This gives you the opportunity to devour some fries when one of your hands is free, which is a frankly terrible idea given how much grease is involved in the production of this food.
Of course, the best option here is to simply smash your face into the container and forage for food like an animal, but that might not be the best idea when you have company. Either way, you’re going to be cleaning your Switch 2 and its controllers quite often if you decide to 3D-print this game-and-eat cradle, so maybe consider dropping $85 for a Switch 2 Pro Controller or one of 8BitDo’s reliable third-party devices.
In other Switch 2 news, it’s going to be interesting to see how the console does during the lucrative holiday season, as Circana analyst Mat Piscatella expects this to be the first big test of the new Nintendo hardware following its impressive launch. The Switch 2 has sold 1.6 million units in the US for its first month–smashing a US sales record that stood for 17 years–and globally, 3.5 million units were sold in just four days. Nintendo is predicting that it will sell 15 million Switch 2 consoles during its current business year that concludes in March 2026.
Regular walking is widely recognized for its significant benefits to overall health and well-being. Previous research has primarily focused on middle-to-high-income White populations. Now, a novel analysis using data from the Southern Community Cohort Study, involving 79,856 predominantly low-income and Black individuals across 12 southeastern US states, confirms the benefits of regular walking, especially at a faster pace, within a crucial, underrepresented group. The new study appearing in the American Journal of Preventive Medicine, published by Elsevier, underscores the importance of promoting walking, particularly at a brisk pace, as an effective form of physical activity for improving health.
Lead investigator Wei Zheng, MD, PhD, Division of Epidemiology, Department of Medicine, Vanderbilt Epidemiology Center, School of Medicine, Vanderbilt University, and Vanderbilt-Ingram Cancer Center, Vanderbilt University Medical Center, says, “While the health benefits of daily walking are well-established, limited research has investigated effects of factors such as walking pace on mortality, particularly in low-income and Black/African-American populations. Our research has shown that fast walking as little as 15 minutes a day was associated with a nearly 20% reduction in total mortality, while a smaller reduction in mortality was found in association with more than three hours of daily slow walking. This benefit remained strong even after accounting for other lifestyle factors and was consistent across various sensitivity analyses.”
Participants reported the average amount of time per day (minutes) they typically spend “walking slowly (such as moving around, walking at work, walking the dog, or engaging in light exercise)” and “walking fast (such as climbing stairs, brisk walking, or exercising).” Information regarding vital status and cause of death was obtained by linking the cohort to the National Death Index.
The protective effect of fast walking extended to all causes of death but was most pronounced for cardiovascular diseases. Importantly, the benefits of fast walking were independent of overall leisure-time physical activity levels (LTPA). Even for those who are already engaged in slow walking or some LTPA, adding more fast walking further reduced mortality.
According to the study the benefits of fast walking related to cardiovascular health are:
Boosts heart efficiency: As an aerobic exercise, fast walking improves cardiac output, increases oxygen delivery, and enhances the efficiency of the heart’s pumping action, leading to better overall cardiovascular health.
Manages cardiovascular risk factors: Regular fast walking helps control body weight and composition, reducing obesity and related risks like hypertension and dyslipidemia.
Highly accessible: Fast walking is a convenient, low-impact activity suitable for individuals of all ages and fitness levels.
Low-income populations often face economic constraints and are more likely to reside in impoverished, highly polluted communities with limited access to safe walking spaces. Additionally, these populations tend to have a higher prevalence of lifestyle behaviors that may increase disease risk and mortality, such as lower quality diet, cigarette smoking, and heavy alcohol consumption. At the same time, there are other challenges for individuals with low income such as lack of access to health insurance or healthcare that may also increase mortality. These factors collectively contribute to an increased mortality among low-income individuals and may potentially elucidate the racial disparities observed in longevity. By demonstrating the benefits of fast walking in this study, this research provides direct evidence to inform targeted interventions and policies to improve health equity.
Lead author of the article Lili Liu, MPH, Division of Epidemiology, Department of Medicine, Vanderbilt Epidemiology Center, School of Medicine, and Vanderbilt University, Vanderbilt-Ingram Cancer Center, Vanderbilt University Medical Center, concludes, “Public health campaigns and community-based programs can emphasize the importance and availability of fast walking to improve health outcomes, providing resources and support to facilitate increased fast walking within all communities. Furthermore, the findings of the reduced mortality associated with fast walking pace were supported by previous studies conducted in middle- and upper-middle-income populations. Individuals should strive to incorporate more intense physical activity into their routines, such as brisk walking or other forms of aerobic exercise.”
Khurana & Khurana (K&K) is a distinguished full-service law firm known for its comprehensive legal solutions across a diverse spectrum of practice areas. With over 18 years of experience, K&K has built a reputation for delivering precise, commercially viable, and client-centric legal services.
The firm’s expertise spans Intellectual Property Protection and Portfolio Management, Corporate and Commercial Laws, Litigation and Dispute Resolution, Taxation, Banking and Finance, Compliance, Media and Entertainment Laws, and emerging areas such as Technology and Data Protection.
About the Opportunity
Khurana & Khurana is thrilled to invite skilled professionals with outstanding abilities in Patent Searching Professional (Electronics/Telecommunication)to join their team!
Skill Set Required
Extremely Strong and Competent Professional for Comprehensive Patent Preparation/Drafting Profile with a minimum of 3-5 years of core experience in drafting US/EP/IN style patent applications.
Ability to deeply understand technical subject matters for elaborating inventions in corresponding patent specifications will be the key evaluation parameter.
Should have a strong understanding of Patent laws. Registered Patent Agents/Attorneys would be preferred.
Fast learning capabilities along with the ability to work independently are must.
Should be a strong team player and willing to take additional responsibilities pertaining to trainings, speaking opportunities, client communications, overseeing docketing team to ensure smooth client intimations, among others.
Should be a strong team player and willing to take additional responsibilities pertaining to trainings, speaking opportunities, client communications, overseeing docketing team to ensure smooth client intimations, among others
Disclaimer: Charging money from students for internships or from job applicants is unethical and can result in blacklisting. We strongly discourage requesting any kind of payment from interns, including processing fees or charges for certificates. If you have any concerns, please contact us at [email protected]
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/lifestyle/health/are-your-eyes-trying-to-reveal-diabetes-and-high-cholesterol-ophthalmologist-shares-signs-to-watch-out-for-101753781703373.html” on this server.
Vaccine maker Bavarian Nordic on Monday said it has agreed in principle to a roughly $3 billion take-private offer from private equity firms Nordic Capital and Permira.
The company’s board of directors plans to unanimously recommend the deal to Bavarian Nordic shareholders when they formally receive Nordic Capital and Permira’s bid in the coming weeks.
Under the deal, the two firms will pay 233 Danish kroner per Bavarian Nordic share, representing a 21% premium to the company’s closing price on Wednesday, one day before the vaccine maker confirmed it was in takeover talks.
“The offer received from Nordic Capital and Permira is the result of intense negotiations aimed at securing the best possible terms for our shareholders,” said Bavarian Nordic CEO Luc Debruyne, in a statement. “Together with Nordic Capital and Permira, the growth strategy of Bavarian Nordic can be accelerated.”
The companies expect to complete their deal in the fourth quarter.
Bavarian Nordic has developed vaccines for mpox and smallpox, the former of which thrust the company into the global spotlight a few years ago during the most recent outbreak of the disease. It also has a shot against the chikungunya virus, dubbed Vimkunya, that’s approved in the EU, U.K. and the U.S.
The company launched Vimkunya in the U.S. in March and secured a recommendation from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention in May. It expects to launch the shot in the EU and U.K. this year.
Bavarian Nordic has hit setbacks in the past, having scrapped a vaccine for respiratory syncytial virus in 2023 after negative late-stage trial results.
But its revenue is now growing on rising demand for its traveler vaccines and continued support for its government contract business. The U.S. government recently exercised options for additional supply of Bavarian Nordic’s smallpox vaccine, which will increase revenue this year and secure business for next.
Nordic Capital and Permira said they plan to continue operating Bavarian Nordic “in the same manner” as currently, including at the company’s main facilities.
The firms will need to secure over 90% of the voting rights and share capital of Bavarian Nordic to complete the deal.
The RBA has pulled off a rare feat: inflation in the 2-3% band while keeping unemployment at 4.1%.
Governor Michele Bullock called it a “remarkable” achievement, and she’s right—it’s far better than many expected post-pandemic.
The primary force behind low unemployment isn’t private sector strength, but massive growth in public sector employment, especially in healthcare, education, and administration.
95% of jobs growth (in hours worked) came from the non-market sector over the past two years.
Without that public demand, unemployment might be closer to 5.25% today.
Public demand has risen from 22% to 27% of GDP, a structural shift that makes interest rate changes less effective.
Unlike the private sector, health and government services don’t react much to rate hikes or cuts.
The RBA’s main lever—interest rates—is now a blunter tool, while fiscal policy becomes more influential.
The Reserve Bank of Australia (RBA) may have pulled off something few thought possible—bringing inflation back within the target band while unemployment remains historically low.
But don’t be fooled into thinking the hard part is over.
In fact, the real challenges are just beginning, according to analysis by Westpac.
RBA Governor Michele Bullock was right when she recently said:
“Australia has done remarkably well. Who would have said two years ago we would be sitting here now with inflation at 2-something and unemployment at 4.1%? Not many people.”
And she’s right.
But while we’ve come a long way from pandemic-era chaos, that remarkable economic equilibrium we’ve struck – stable prices and strong employment – may prove temporary according to Westpac’s economist Jameson Coombs.
He cites the unsung hero of this success story as a massive, and now peaking, expansion in public demand.
The quiet force behind low unemployment
What most commentators overlook is how Australia’s strong labour market has been heavily propped up by the non-market sector—healthcare, education, and public administration.
Over the past two years, a staggering 95% of growth in hours worked came from these areas.
Without this surge in government-driven job creation – particularly in the care economy – unemployment might be a full percentage point higher today, sitting around 5.25%.
In short, public sector expansion masked the weaknesses in private sector employment. But that won’t last, according to the Westpac report
Public demand is forecast to slow, and with that, the RBA will face a much tougher balancing act between managing inflation and supporting employment.
A narrowing path: the RBA’s mandate is about to clash
For the past year, the RBA has had the luxury of focusing on inflation without worrying much about jobs.
That’s about to change.
As public sector job growth slows and the private sector recovery remains tentative, the trade-off between inflation and full employment will become increasingly sharp.
Rather than balancing one objective while the other behaves, the RBA will soon find the two mandates – price stability and full employment – pulling in opposite directions.
This will make monetary policy much harder to calibrate, and it’s coming at a time when that very policy tool is losing its potency.
Monetary policy is losing its bite
Here’s a structural issue most people aren’t talking about: the Australian economy has become less responsive to interest rate movements.
Why? Because over the past decade, public demand has surged from 22% to 27% of GDP – a compositional shift similar in scale to the mining boom.
That’s a $33 billion quarterly swing in real activity.
But public demand – especially in healthcare and government services – is far less sensitive to interest rates than private consumption or business investment.
And the result is that rate hikes and cuts now pack a smaller punch.
This means:
When the RBA wants to cool inflation with rate hikes, the public sector shrugs.
When it wants to stimulate growth through cuts, the public sector may not respond quickly enough.
Put simply, the RBA is now working with a blunter tool, and the economy’s responsiveness has shifted in favour of fiscal policy, not monetary policy.
Why inflation hasn’t spiked—yet
You might be wondering: if the government’s been spending like mad, why hasn’t inflation surged?
There are three key reasons:
Most of the spending has gone into services like aged care and childcare, which are not counted in the Consumer Price Index (CPI).
Government subsidies (on energy bills, for example) temporarily lowered CPI outcomes, even if inflationary pressure was building behind the scenes.
Spillovers into inflation have been second-order. Yes, they’ve increased demand and income, but not in a way that’s shown up in headline inflation metrics.
But that’s starting to unwind, according to the Westpac report.
As subsidies roll off and public demand slows, headline inflation may actually tick up, even as the real economy cools.
What happens next?
Westpac suggests we’re entering an economic phase where:
Public demand starts to drag on GDP growth.
The private sector, while recovering, remains weak and less job-intensive.
Inflation remains sticky, partly due to structural factors and subsidy roll-offs.
The labour market weakens, but not enough to justify aggressive rate cuts without reigniting inflation.
This means the RBA may have to sit on its hands longer than many expect, even as the economy slows and unemployment rises.
In other words, while the economy needs monetary support, inflation won’t give the RBA enough room to act boldly.
That’s the worst-case trade-off.
Implications for property investors
This complex environment has major implications for property investors and market participants:
Expect less predictability from the RBA. There will be less consensus on rate moves. Don’t be surprised by sudden shifts in tone or policy between meetings.
Private sector-led growth will be patchy, so location and asset selection matter more than ever.
This interest rate easing cycle may be drawn out and have a more muted effect than past cycles.
So, while inflation is (technically) back in the target range and rate cuts are on the horizon, this isn’t the green light many hope for.
The RBA will have to manage rising unemployment and stubborn inflation with tools that don’t work as well as they used to, meaning the RBA’s job is only going to get harder, and property investors should be prepared for a longer, drawn-out interest rate cycle.
About Michael Yardney Michael is the founder of Metropole Property Strategists who help their clients grow, protect and pass on their wealth through independent, unbiased property advice and advocacy. He’s once again been voted Australia’s leading property investment adviser and one of Australia’s 50 most influential Thought Leaders. His opinions are regularly featured in the media.
Menopause can bring many changes, and a dip in sex drive is a common one. If you’re wondering how to increase libido in women during this phase, you’re not alone. The good news is there are supplements for women’s libido after menopause that may help rekindle desire naturally. These products act as a libido enhancer for women, using herbs, amino acids, and nutrients to support your body’s sexual health.
They’re not magic pills, but many women find them helpful as part of natural ways to increase libido post-menopause. We’ve rounded up 11 of the best options available, including some vegan, gluten-free, and all-natural picks.
11 Best Supplements For Women’s Libido After Menopause
Before we dive into the list, a quick note: Libido is complicated, even more so after menopause. Stress, hormones, and even mindset play a role in desire. These supplements for women’s libido after menopause won’t turn back time, but they can support your body in key ways, from balancing hormones and improving blood flow to simply giving you a confidence boost. Think of them as one of the natural ways to increase libido after menopause, alongside healthy lifestyle habits. Now, let’s explore our top 11 picks of libido-boosting supplements and what makes each one stand out.
1. OLLY Lovin’ Libido Capsules
This popular gummy vitamin brand offers a targeted capsule for libido. OLLY Lovin’ Libido combines clinically studied ashwagandha with maca root and damiana leaf, a trio of traditional aphrodisiacs. It’s formulated to help women who feel “uninterested in and unsatisfied with sex” reclaim their spark. The capsules are easy to swallow and vegetarian, with no artificial flavors.
USPs
Contains KSM-66 ashwagandha, which has been shown to enhance arousal and support natural lubrication
Includes maca and damiana, herbs used for centuries to boost desire
Hormone-free herbal formula
Vegetarian, sugar-free, and gluten-free capsules
Why it’s great
Simple, natural libido enhancer for women that also helps ease stress. Many women report improved mood and reduced vaginal dryness with consistent use.
Amazon Rating: 3.9 out of 5 stars
2. Waòm Wellness “Crave” Women’s Libido Booster
If you prefer a comprehensive blend, Crave by Waòm Wellness is a multitasking supplement. It’s packed with herbs, amino acids, and vitamins designed to address energy, mood, and hormones together. Two capsules a day deliver maca, fenugreek, ashwagandha, L-arginine, and even L-theanine for relaxation. It’s a vegan-friendly formula made in the USA, great for those seeking supplements for women’s libido after menopause with an all-in-one approach.
Related Reading: 10 Best Vibrators for Women Over 50, Rated By Real Women
USPs
Herbal blend for desire and intimacy, crafted to naturally boost libido and confidence
Energy & stamina support, includes guarana and maca to fight fatigue and ignite passion
Fenugreek and ashwagandha may help regulate hormones and reduce stress, creating a better foundation for a healthy sex drive
Also comprises L-arginine that improves circulation and L-theanine that supports calm focus
Why it’s great
It tackles multiple factors like low energy, stress, and poor circulation in one go. Basically, Crave is a holistic libido enhancer for women. It helps boost mood, reduce anxiety, and support hormonal harmony to get you in the mood more often. Plus, it’s vegan and made under GMP standards, which is a nice quality touch.
Amazon Rating: 3.9 out of 5 stars
3. Harmony Libido GLOW
Harmony Libido GLOW is a 9-in-1 formula touted for “fast results.” It’s designed to heighten sensitivity, reduce dryness, and boost energy and mood, and with daily use, can help address some of the most daunting menopause symptoms. This supplement emphasizes high-quality ingredients and overall vitality. If you’re looking for a gentle daily push, Harmony aims to improve your baseline libido over time while also giving a bit of an immediate lift.
USPs
Comprehensive daily formula containing 9 ultra ingredients to support libido and wellbeing
Promotes natural energy and mood balance, helps you feel good day-to-day, not just in the bedroom
Offers fast-acting support. It’s formulated to start making a difference relatively quickly
Made with high-quality, hormone-free ingredients for optimal results
Why it’s great
Harmony is all about restoring your confidence and spark gradually and safely. Think of it as an everyday supplement that not only addresses sex drive but also helps with energy and overall wellness. It’s a newer entry, but feedback highlights improved mood and decreased discomfort with intimacy.
Amazon Rating: 4.3 out of 5 stars
4. Solaray Libido Her Capsules
From a trusted supplement brand, Solaray Libido Her is formulated especially for peri- and post-menopausal women. It features time-honored herbs like shatavari, an Ayurvedic herb for female vitality, fenugreek, and organic ashwagandha, plus others to support natural lubrication and libido. Importantly, it’s made without hormones.
Related Reading: What After Menopause: Understanding How Your Body Changes
USPs
Herbal hormone-free support helps boost sex drive and comfort without any estrogen or testosterone, using plant extracts only
Targets menopause symptoms
Ingredients like shatavari and fenugreek may aid vaginal dryness and hormonal balance, which in turn can improve desire
Comes in easy-to-take vegetarian capsules
Why it’s great
This supplement acknowledges that menopause is a life stage with unique needs. It’s one of the supplements for women’s libido after menopause that also respects your desire to avoid synthetic hormones. Users like that it’s gentle. For example, some note subtle improvements in arousal and mood without side effects. If you prefer a more traditional herbal route, Solaray’s blend is a solid choice to naturally nurture that flame again.
Amazon Rating: 4.3 out of 5 stars
5. Pretty Privates Female Libido Booster
Pretty Privates offers a natural, fast-acting formula that effectively tackles libido loss after menopause. It’s marketed as part of a women’s health bundle, often paired with their vaginal probiotics or tightening pills. The key draw here is that it’s both vegan and gluten-free, covering dietary needs. This pill focuses on improving mood, energy, and hormonal harmony to help increase sex drive and enjoyment.
USPs
Natural and fast-acting formula that uses a blend of herbal extracts to give a noticeable boost in mood and desire, sometimes within a few weeks of consistent use
Vegan and gluten-free, making it a great pick for those with dietary restrictions or sensitivities
Balanced formula that includes popular aphrodisiac herbs such as maca, horny goat weed, etc, along with vitamins to support overall women’s health
Why it’s great
Many women report this supplement helped “reignite their passion”, make them feel more energized and even a bit more balanced emotionally. It seems to tackle fatigue and low mood effectively. If you’re seeking a libido enhancer for women that aligns with a clean, plant-based lifestyle, Pretty Privates’ product is a compelling pick.
Amazon Rating: 4.4 out of 5 stars
6. Nature’s Craft “G-Curve” Horny Goat Weed Blend
For a budget-friendly yet super popular option, check out Nature’s Craft G-Curve. This is a customer favorite with thousands of ratings. It’s a potent, horny goat weed-based blend, enhanced with red ginseng, tongkat ali, muira puama, tribulus terrestris, and more. Basically, a power-packed option for those seeking natural ways to increase libido. Interestingly, it’s pitched to women not just for libido but also for “filling out curves”, highlighting its hormonal support that might subtly affect body composition.
Related Reading: Midlife Crisis For A Woman: What Is It? How To Deal With It?
USPs
All-in-one herbal powerhouse that combines several aphrodisiacs and adaptogens in one pill
Aims to boost energy, mood, and endurance overall, which can indirectly lift libido
Hormone balance support by including herbs like tribulus and saw palmetto, it may assist with hormone equilibrium and thus drive
Why it’s great
This is an old-school supplement that helps women struggling with no sex drive after menopause. Many women love that it not only increased their libido gradually, but also improved their workout energy and confidence. Some even mention a slight enhancement in feminine shape, as the product suggests. It’s also one of the most affordable on the list. Nature’s Craft quality is well-regarded, and they stick to nature-based solutions for everyday problems.
Amazon Rating: 3.9 out of 5 stars
7. Warped Wellness “Love Goddess” Libido Booster
The name says it all. Oh Yes! Love Goddess by Warped Wellness is formulated to enhance intimacy, passion, and desire. It’s a more premium supplement, notable for including Muira Puama, sometimes called the “Viagra of the Amazon,” as a key ingredient for female arousal. Love Goddess also contains vitamins and other herbal extracts geared towards overall sexual wellness. This one positions itself as a higher-end solution for women who want to boost libido after menopause and are willing to invest in a quality formula.
USPs
Exotic ingredients like Muira Puama, an Amazonian herb traditionally used as an aphrodisiac, to support arousal and responsive desire
Likely includes other proven helpers like maca, ginseng, or damiana in a potent mix
Holistic benefits that extend far beyond libido. It may improve energy and reduce stress, since passion is not just physical
Why it’s great
Users describe feeling a noticeable uptick in sexual desire and sensitivity. Some even call it a “game changer” that restored excitement in the bedroom. It comes at a higher price point, but a lot of women find that the results are worth it. If you’re looking for supplements for women’s libido after menopause that’s a bit more luxurious and powerful, this could be the one.
Amazon Rating: 4.3 out of 5 stars
8. Promescent VitaFLUX for Women
VitaFLUX for Women is a different breed of supplement on this list. Rather than herbs, it uses amino acids like L-arginine, L-citrulline, and L-carnitine at therapeutic doses to boost nitric oxide and blood flow. This increased circulation can help with natural lubrication, arousal, and orgasm intensity, all of which can decline after menopause due to lower estrogen. It’s formulated by Promescent, a company known for sexual wellness products, and is vegan-friendly. Taken daily, VitaFLUX focuses on the physical side of libido: better blood flow and energy.
Related Reading: 13 Reasons Why Women Can’t Orgasm (and Steps to Achieve One)
USPs
Improves circulation by raising nitric oxide and increases blood flow to intimate areas, which is crucial for arousal and sensation
Enhances lubrication and comfort. Many women find it helps alleviate vaginal dryness and even reduces painful intercourse
Boosts energy and recovery, thanks to those amino acids that support overall vitality, muscle recovery, and stamina
Why it’s great
If vaginal atrophy, dryness, or weak sensation are big issues for you, this supplement directly addresses that physiological aspect. It’s one of the supplements for sex drive that also doubles as a heart-health booster. Women using VitaFLUX often report feeling more responsive during intimacy and having stronger orgasms.
Amazon Rating: 4.7 out of 5 stars (limited reviews)
9. FOCL “Desire” Female Libido Gummies
Why not make libido-boosting a little sweeter? FOCL Female Libido Booster comes in the form of tasty strawberry cream gummies. Don’t let the candy-like formulations fool you. These gummies are packed with herbal goodness like horny goat weed, fenugreek, and green tea for a gentle energy lift. FOCL is a wellness brand known for plant-based, often CBD-infused supplements, though this particular product centers on adaptogens and botanicals for hormone balance and drive. It’s an easy, even fun, addition to your routine.
USPs
Tasty and convenient chewable gummies that make it simple to remember your dose, and they’re kind on the stomach
Includes fenugreek & horny goat weed, a dynamic duo for women’s libido
Added green tea and other botanicals provide a mild energy boost and antioxidant support, so you feel overall revitalized
Why it’s great
For those who hate pills, this is a game-changer. You’re more likely to be consistent when your supplement feels like a treat. Many users note improvements in their sex drive after a few weeks, along with enjoying the calm energy from the green tea. FOCL’s gummy is a modern take on a libido enhancer for women, aligning with a holistic wellness vibe. It’s also discreet because it looks like any other vitamin gummy.
Amazon Rating: 3.8 out of 5 stars (200+ reviews)
10. Bravado Labs Libido Enhancer with Maca & Dong Quai
Bravado Labs Libido Enhancer is formulated especially with menopausal women in mind, thanks to the inclusion of Dong Quai, a traditional Chinese herb often used to support female hormone balance and ease menopause symptoms. Along with maca and ashwagandha, Bravado’s supplement aims to boost drive, energy, and intimate performance. It’s about helping you feel “in the mood” more often by taming those disruptive menopause side effects like hot flashes or mood swings that can kill libido.
USPs
Dong Quai is nicknamed “female ginseng” for its benefits on women’s vitality
It may help regulate hormones and even alleviate mild hot flashes or low mood
By fostering that equilibrium, it indirectly supports a healthier libido
A combination of Maca and Ashwagandha helps fight fatigue and stress while supporting sexual desire
Intimacy and performance boost designed to not only increase desire but also enjoyment, potentially aiding natural lubrication and climax due to improved hormonal harmony
Why it’s great
This is a thoughtful choice if your low libido is tied to other menopause complaints. It’s like a two-in-one: a general menopause supplement and a libido booster. Many women taking Bravado Labs’ pills noticed not just a lift in sex drive, but also improvements in mood stability and energy.
Amazon Rating: 3.6 out of 5 stars (250+ reviews)
11. Irwin Naturals Steel-Libido for Women
Rounding out our list is a classic: Steel-Libido for Women by Irwin Naturals. This has been around for years, found in many health stores, and remains relevant. It delivers a specialized blend of botanicals and nutrients to support sexual vitality. Key ingredients include adaptogens like maca, ashwagandha, and ginseng, which have long histories in sexual health formulas. Unlike capsule supplements, Steel-Libido comes in liquid soft-gels, which are easy to swallow and designed for fast release. You can take it daily or just on days you anticipate intimacy.
USPs
Time-tested ingredients like maca, ashwagandha, and ginseng are proven friends to female libido, especially for improving arousal and energy
Irwin Naturals also includes nutrients like vitamin E and maybe L-theanine, cayenne, etc., that support circulation and pleasure
Liquid Soft-Gel technology is purported to enhance the absorption of the nutrients
Contains BioPerine, a black pepper extract, to increase bioavailability
Why it’s great
Steel-Libido is like the reliable friend who’s always there. Not flashy, but effective. Women report feeling an overall vitality boost: better mood, more vaginal lubrication, and definitely a stronger desire with regular use. Some take it daily for ongoing support, while others use it as a quick “get me in the mood” aid an hour or two before sex.
Amazon Rating: 3.7 out of 5 stars (moderate reviews)
Final Thoughts
Rediscovering your sex drive after menopause is absolutely possible – it just might take some intentional effort and the right support. These supplements for women’s libido after menopause each offer a different angle, from hormonal balance to blood flow to stress reduction. Remember, everyone’s body is unique. You may need to try one or two to find your groove, and give it a few weeks to truly gauge effects. Also, consider combining supplements with other natural ways to increase libido: staying active, managing stress, getting good sleep, and open communication with your partner. Boosting libido is not just about a pill – it’s about nurturing your overall well-being. The products in this guide are there to assist that journey, giving you a gentle nudge in the right direction. Here’s to feeling like yourself again – vibrant, confident, and open to intimacy on your own terms. You deserve it!
How Often Do 50-Year-Old Married Couples Make Love?
What To Do When Intimacy Causes Painful Sexual Intercourse And Not Pleasure
17 Signs A Woman Has Not Made Love For A Long Time
Your contribution does not constitute a charitable donation. It will allow Bonobology to continue bringing you new and up-to-date information in our pursuit of helping anyone in the world to learn how to do anything.
Share Feedback
What is your feedback?
Subscribe to Our Newsletter
Get your weekly dose of insightful articles straight to your inbox.
After feeling disconnected from most modern games, I decided to bring back a piece of my childhood. So I built a retro gaming setup on my PC that finally feels like home again
I Built a Retro Console With RetroArch
I grew up playing the PlayStation 2, PSP, and Game Boy Advance, and I still find myself going back to games from those consoles even today. I even emulate older Pokémon games on my Android phone from time to time.
The only issue is convenience. Setting up separate consoles every time I want to play something gets tiring pretty quickly. Between switching inputs, dealing with old cables and adapters, or just the general clutter, it’s not exactly the best experience. I wanted a cleaner, easier way to play everything I loved without giving up that retro feel.
Raghav Sethi / MUO
That’s where RetroArch came in. It’s a free emulator frontend that supports a ton of different systems, and it runs on Windows, macOS, Linux, Android, iOS, and more. Everything launches from one place, and it instantly made my PC feel like a proper retro gaming setup. Once I got it working, it felt like I had built the perfect console for myself.
Related
This App Lets You Play PSP Classics on Your iPhone: Here’s How
Your iPhone can emulate all the PSP games you played in your childhood.
Installing and Setting Up RetroArch
To set up RetroArch on your PC, just download the setup from the official RetroArch website and install it like any other app. When you open it for the first time, you’ll see a fairly minimal desktop UI. It doesn’t look like much at first, but once you start loading it up with cores and games, it starts to feel more like a proper console frontend.
RetroArch doesn’t actually emulate anything on its own—it uses “cores” to do that. A core is basically an emulator for a specific system, and you can download them directly from inside the app. Go to Load Core > Download a Core and pick the consoles you want to emulate. Once you’ve downloaded a few, you can load them through Main Menu > Load Core.
You’ll also notice that some systems have multiple cores available. For example, the GBA has both mGBA and VBA-M. If you’re not sure which one to pick, try loading the same game in both and see which one performs better. You can switch between cores anytime, so there’s no pressure to choose the “right” one up front.
I plugged in an Xbox controller and it worked automatically. If you want to customize controls, head to Settings > Input. You can remap buttons, set custom layouts, and even save profiles for specific games or systems.
Adding Games and BIOS Files
Once you’ve got RetroArch up and running, the next step is to organize your games. I made a dedicated “Retro Games” folder on my PC and created subfolders inside it for each system, like GBA, NES, and so on. It just makes things easier to manage, especially when you start building out your library with different file types like ROMs or ISO files.
Once your games are sorted, you can scan your library by going to Main Menu > Import Content > Scan Directory and selecting the folder that contains your ROMs. RetroArch will automatically add them to your playlist, complete with box art and metadata if it recognizes the files.
For most older systems, all you need is the game file. But for some cores, especially for consoles like the PlayStation, you will need the BIOS files too. A BIOS is essentially the firmware that ran on the original console, and some games won’t boot without it. The process of getting a BIOS file legally involves extracting it from your own hardware.
It’s a bit technical and varies depending on the system, but generally involves running a tool on your console to dump the BIOS file, then transferring it to your PC. RetroArch looks for these in the system folder, which you’ll find inside its install directory.
To play a game, just select the console you want to emulate in the main menu, pick the title, and choose a core when prompted, and the game will start running.
Related
How to Play Emulated Games on Your Steam Deck With EmuDeck
EmuDeck is a user-friendly option for those who want to emulate games on their Steam Deck.
Making RetroArch Feel More Like a Console
For starters, if you want your games to look the way they did on the original consoles, you can use RetroArch’s shaders to make them feel like you’re playing on an old CRT TV. If you’re using your setup as a couch console connected to a TV, the default RetroArch interface isn’t great for that kind of experience.
It’s more suited to a keyboard and mouse, and it doesn’t feel all that intuitive with a controller. You’ll probably want cover art for your games too, especially if you plan to scroll through your library using a controller.
To add box art automatically, go to Main Menu > Online Updater > Thumbnails Updater and select the system you want artwork for. It pulls in cover art and game metadata for most recognized titles. Just make sure your games have already been scanned and added to your library beforehand, otherwise the art might not work properly.
To switch to a more console-like interface, go to Settings > Drivers > Menu and change the menu driver to xmb. This gives you the same crossbar layout that the PS3 had. I grew up on PlayStations, so this layout feels natural to me, but I get that it might not be everyone’s thing.
If you are still looking for something with a more retro-focused theme, I also recommend EmulationStation. It’s a separate frontend that sits on top of RetroArch and gives you a fully themed dashboard that works well for big-screen setups.
If you’re on an iPhone and want something simpler, there are plenty of great emulators for iOS as well. For most people though, I’d still recommend sticking with RetroArch as it does pretty much everything you’d need.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-26/Tianjin-Anglican-Church-A-must-visit-century-old-gothic-gem-1Fdn0AUe0ko/img/dcca83009fcd47c68c16fd054f48571c/dcca83009fcd47c68c16fd054f48571c.jpeg'Tianjin Anglican Church, a cultural hub since 1903, offers a picturesque scene for visitors. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-26/Tianjin-Anglican-Church-A-must-visit-century-old-gothic-gem-1Fdn0AUe0ko/img/dcca83009fcd47c68c16fd054f48571c/dcca83009fcd47c68c16fd054f48571c.jpeg'Tianjin Anglican Church, a cultural hub since 1903, offers a picturesque scene for visitors. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-26/Tianjin-Anglican-Church-A-must-visit-century-old-gothic-gem-1Fdn0AUe0ko/img/dcca83009fcd47c68c16fd054f48571c/dcca83009fcd47c68c16fd054f48571c.jpeg'Tianjin Anglican Church, a cultural hub since 1903, offers a picturesque scene for visitors. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-26/Tianjin-Anglican-Church-A-must-visit-century-old-gothic-gem-1Fdn0AUe0ko/img/dcca83009fcd47c68c16fd054f48571c/dcca83009fcd47c68c16fd054f48571c.jpeg'Tianjin Anglican Church, a cultural hub since 1903, offers a picturesque scene for visitors. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-26/Tianjin-Anglican-Church-A-must-visit-century-old-gothic-gem-1Fdn0AUe0ko/img/dcca83009fcd47c68c16fd054f48571c/dcca83009fcd47c68c16fd054f48571c.jpeg'Tianjin Anglican Church, a cultural hub since 1903, offers a picturesque scene for visitors. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-26/Tianjin-Anglican-Church-A-must-visit-century-old-gothic-gem-1Fdn0AUe0ko/img/dcca83009fcd47c68c16fd054f48571c/dcca83009fcd47c68c16fd054f48571c.jpeg'Tianjin Anglican Church, a cultural hub since 1903, offers a picturesque scene for visitors. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-26/Tianjin-Anglican-Church-A-must-visit-century-old-gothic-gem-1Fdn0AUe0ko/img/dcca83009fcd47c68c16fd054f48571c/dcca83009fcd47c68c16fd054f48571c.jpeg'Tianjin Anglican Church, a cultural hub since 1903, offers a picturesque scene for visitors. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-26/Tianjin-Anglican-Church-A-must-visit-century-old-gothic-gem-1Fdn0AUe0ko/img/dcca83009fcd47c68c16fd054f48571c/dcca83009fcd47c68c16fd054f48571c.jpeg'Tianjin Anglican Church, a cultural hub since 1903, offers a picturesque scene for visitors. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-26/Tianjin-Anglican-Church-A-must-visit-century-old-gothic-gem-1Fdn0AUe0ko/img/dcca83009fcd47c68c16fd054f48571c/dcca83009fcd47c68c16fd054f48571c.jpeg'Tianjin Anglican Church, a cultural hub since 1903, offers a picturesque scene for visitors. /CGTN
Tianjin’s Anglican Church is a beloved destination for visitors. Constructed in 1903, this Gothic masterpiece has retained its original charm through careful renovations. The church building frequently hosts concerts and art exhibitions, adding a vibrant cultural element to its historical appeal. Just a stone’s throw away is a delightful cafe. It is an ideal spot for history buffs, culture enthusiasts, and photography aficionados.
Adam Lambert sits on a rickety wooden chair just outside the main chapel at the Hollywood United Methodist Church on a break from rehearsing the musical “Jesus Christ Superstar.”
Dressed in beige shorts and a vest with matching mid-calf boots, Lambert wears his trademark glitter eye makeup with thick black liner. He’s calm and collected, content to spend his lunch break chatting, even though the rehearsal schedule is a breakneck nine days total. He chalks up his easygoing demeanor to the high-wattage professionalism of the cast, and his familiarity with the music.
Lambert first heard the soundtrack on one of his dad’s vinyl records when he was about 10 years old.
“I’ve always wanted to do that musical. I’ve always wanted to play Judas,” he says with a smile. “And when they told me Cynthia [Erivo] was interested, I was like, ‘Wow, this is gonna be crazy.’”
Lambert, a fan-favorite “American Idol” runner-up who began performing with Queen in 2011, plays Judas to Erivo’s Jesus in the Hollywood Bowl production directed by Tony-winning choreographer Sergio Trujillo.
Josh Gad, who portrays King Herod, calls the cast “the musical theater version of the Avengers.” He’s referring to Erivo and Lambert, in addition to Phillipa Soo as Mary Magdalene, Milo Manheim as Peter, Raúl Esparza as Pontius Pilate, Tyrone Huntley as Simon and Brian Justin Crum as Annas. The sold-out show runs from Friday to Sunday.
Tyrone Huntley performs as Simon during a rehearsal of “Jesus Christ Superstar” at the Hollywood United Methodist Church in Los Angeles.
(Etienne Laurent / For The Times)
Judging from the ongoing commentaryand controversy over the casting on social media, a queer, Black, female actor playing Jesus and a gay actor portraying Judas feel like a revelation to fans grappling with mounting concerns about civil rights in America. Over the last six months, the Trump administration has curtailed diversity, equity and inclusion programs and attempted to roll back key legal protections for certain members of the LGBTQ+ community.
“The challenge for the audience of seeing a female Black Jesus is so exciting. And we all feel the excitement,” says Lambert, adding that the show doesn’t change lyrics or pronouns. “Maybe it doesn’t have to do with male or female. I don’t really know if it matters what gender Jesus was, because it was about the teachings and the love and the connection to faith. So shouldn’t it transcend gender?”
Power — who has it and who doesn’t — has emerged as a defining narrative in 2025. That was also the case 2,000 years ago when Pontius Pilate ordered the crucifixion of Jesus, who posed a serious threat to the religious and political primacy of the Pharisees, the Herodians and the Romans. The 1971 musical by Andrew Lloyd Webber and Tim Rice imagines the final days of Jesus’ life, including his agony, before he ultimately accepts his fate.
Gad is keenly aware of the notion of power as historic through-line as he approaches his titular number, “Herod’s Song,” in which the King of Judea coyly mocks Jesus before taking a frightening turn into true menace.
“This is a man who’s so insecure he can’t afford to let Jesus out of his chains in order to actually face him without the help of soldiers around him,” Gad says. “My hope is that I’m getting to bring one of the greatest hypocrites to life in a way that will both make people laugh and also make them recognize that archetype.”
Brian Grohl, left, Josh Gad, Adam Lambert and Sergio Trujillo are bringing “Jesus Christ Superstar” to the Hollywood Bowl.
(Etienne Laurent / For The Times)
The musical was first released as a concept album in 1970 and played at the Hollywood Bowl in 1971, before debuting on Broadway later that year. During its run, protests outside the stage door were commonplace, and although the musical has reached the pinnacle of success over the years, it has remained controversial.
Big summer musicals have been a staple of the Hollywood Bowl since 2000, but the shows went dark due to the COVID-19 pandemic in 2020. With the exception of “Kinky Boots” in 2022, “Jesus Christ Superstar” is the first of what Bowl leaders hope will be an annual resumption of the beloved programming.
“We wanted to make sure that when we came back, it was the most spectacular thing we could do,” says Meghan Umber, president of the Hollywood Bowl and chief programming officer at the Los Angeles Philharmonic.
“Jesus Christ Superstar,” was always at the top of the Bowl’s musical wishlist but wasn’t available until now, adds Brian Grohl, associate director of programming for the L.A. Phil.
“The number of titles that can sustain three nights at the Hollywood Bowl is a narrowed-down list already,” Grohl said, so securing the title resulted in a lot of jumping and shouting around the office. And when it came to who would play Jesus, Umber and Grohl both say Erivo topped the list. Her “yes” made all the others follow.
Adam Lambert performs Saturday during a rehearsal of “Jesus Christ Superstar.”
(Etienne Laurent / For The Times)
Gad calls Erivo — who was not present at a recent rehearsal because of a previous engagement — a “generational talent.” And he’s far from alone. Talk to anyone on the cast or crew and they will immediately hold forth on her extraordinary gifts.
“I see the hand of God in her,” Trujillo says reverently. “Even now, me being in the room with her, I hear it and I see it, and it is transcendent.”
Trujillo decided to go back to the musical’s roots as a concept album and is staging the show as a bare-bones rock concert. Instead of elaborate scenic design, there are black road boxes, microphones and cords. Even the costumes are contemporary with nods to their lineage. A rhythm band will play onstage and a 37-piece orchestra will perform behind a giant LED screen that will create the illusion that the musicians are hovering in the sky above the action.
Keeping the show in the present and infusing it with the raw energy of youth culture was crucial to Trujillo’s vision, he says, adding that in the spirit of rock ‘n’ roll, the musical “reflects the turbulent political times that we’re living in.”
“As I set up each one of the characters, they’re at a microphone singing and then they take the microphone and they step into the scene. I always want to remind the audience that we are in a concert, but we’re also telling the story,” says Trujillo. “Every single person understands the opportunity that we all have to take this monumental story, this monumental score, and to do it justice. So everyone is coming at it with such goodwill and so much joy.”
At a Saturday rehearsal in the church gym, Trujillo’s words ring true. The ensemble cast of more than 20 talented dancers and singers, in sweats and hoodies, run through “What’s the Buzz.” Gad watches and cheers from a table on the sidelines next to conductor and musical director Stephen Oremus, who smiles and nods his head with the beat.
“If you need me to stand in for Jesus, I’ll do it,” Gad jokes.
Phillipa Soo, who plays Mary Magdalene, sings a heartfelt rendition of “I Don’t Know How to Love Him.”
(Etienne Laurent / For The Times)
Lambert mesmerizes the assembled crew and onlookers with a potent rendition of “Heaven on Their Minds” and Soo brings tears with a heartfelt performance of “I Don’t Know How to Love Him.”
“The more time I spend with this musical, the more brilliant I understand it to be,” says Manheim during a brief break. The 24-year-old, who‘s gained a tween following after playing Zed in Disney Channel’s “Zombies” franchise, is part of the youth cohort Trujillo wanted to cast. He wasn’t as familiar with the score as the older cast members — which is part of the point.
“It’s cross-generational,” says Trujillo of the show. “This is the gift that you give to your children and then it just gets passed on.”
Would you like to work nearly double the standard 40-hour week? It’s a question that many startups in the US are asking prospective employees—and to get the job, the answer needs to be an unequivocal yes. These companies are embracing an intense schedule, first popularized in mainland China, known as “996,” or 9 am to 9 pm, six days a week. In other words, it’s a 72-hour work week.
The 996 phenomenon in China gave rise to major protests and accusations of “modern slavery,” with critics blaming the schedule for a spate of worker deaths. Despite the negative connotations overseas, US firms, many of them working on artificial intelligence, are adopting both the schedule and its nickname as they race to compete against each other—and with China. Adrian Kinnersley, a serial entrepreneur who runs both a staffing and recruitment company and an employment compliance startup, has been surprised by how many startups are going all-in on 996. “It’s becoming increasingly common,” he says. “We have multiple clients where a prerequisite for screening candidates before they go for an interview is whether they are prepared to work 996.”
At the beginning of the Covid pandemic, conversations about conditions for workers in the United States often centered around burnout and the need for increased flexibility. Even in the notoriously hard-charging tech sector, companies began emphasizing efforts to facilitate a balanced schedule. Now, the surge in interest in 996 demonstrates the pendulum has swung the other way. It echoes Elon Musk’s “extremely hardcore” ultimatum to X employees, which encouraged them to work punishing hours.
Companies aren’t having trouble finding willing employees, and some frame it as core to their work culture. Rilla, an AI startup that sells software designed for contractors (like plumbers) to record conversations with prospective clients and coach them on how to negotiate higher rates, says nearly all of its 80-person workforce adheres to the 996 schedule.
“There’s a really strong and growing subculture of people, especially in my generation—Gen Z—who grew up listening to stories of Steve Jobs and Bill Gates, entrepreneurs who dedicated their lives to building life-changing companies,” says Will Gao, the company’s head of growth. “Kobe Bryant dedicated all his waking hours to basketball, and I don’t think there’s a lot of people saying that Kobe Bryant shouldn’t have worked as hard as he did.”
Rilla is up front about its expectations. In current job listings, it explicitly states that workers are expected to log more than 70 hours a week, warning them not to join if they aren’t “excited” about the schedule. Breakfast, lunch, and dinner are provided at the office every day—even on Saturdays.
Amrita Bhasin, the CEO of AI logistics startup Sotira, says that it’s common for Bay Area founders to adopt the schedule as they grow: “The first two years of your startup, you kind of have to do 996,” she says. While Bhasin sees the demanding workload as essentially mandatory for company leaders, she doesn’t think that rank-and-file employees should be expected to keep pace: “I don’t think it’s fair to push it onto them.”
Just in time for the annual EVO fighting game tournament this weekend, PlayStation has detailed more information about its upcoming wireless PS5 and PC fightstick–which we now know is called the FlexStrike–slated to launch sometime in 2026, thanks to a new PlayStation Blog post.
Originally dubbed “Project Defiant,” the PlayStation FlexStrike fight stick controller was an unexpected surprise announcement at PlayStation’s June 2025 State of Play presentation. It’s Sony’s first official fight stick, and as such, it utilizes the PlayStation Link wireless connection, which enables several cool features on the PS5, including the ability to pair a wireless PlayStation Pulse headset or earbuds for simultaneous, lag-free audio. You can also connect two FlexStrike fight sticks to one PS5 at the same time for local multiplayer.
The FlexStrike will feature an eight-button layout and a joystick with a black and white color scheme that matches the look of the PS5 and other official peripherals. According to Sony, it will feature a “sturdy, ergonomic design for a comfortable feel during intense fight sessions. It’s unclear how moddable the FlexStrike will be, but so far, Sony has confirmed it will have three different movement gates for the joystick–square, circle, or octagon–that can be swapped out without needing tools. There will be a built-in compartment for storing the extra restrictor gates and the included PS Link USB adapter when not in use.
PlayStation FlexStrike Fight Stick controller with sling case
As for the rest of the inputs, the eight main face buttons (which map to Cross, Circle, Square, Triangle, R1, R2, L1, and L2) use mechanical switches. The rest of the standard inputs from the PS5’s DualSense controller are also present on the fight stick, including:
PS Button
Share Button
PlayStation Link Button
L3 Button
R3 Button
Touch Pad
Options Button
There is also a Lever Mode Switch for changing how the stick operates and a Lock Button. You’ll be able to wake up the PS5 from sleep mode using the FlexStrike’s PS Button. The FlexStrike will also include a sling carry case, which we got a glimpse of in the new PlayStation blog post.
Unfortunately, the new blog post didn’t divulge pricing, preorder information, or a specific launch date for the FlexStrike, but if you’re attending EVO 2025, you’ll be able to see the fight stick in-person during the event–though you won’t be able to actually go hands-on with the controller yet. Sony says even more details will be revealed over the coming months, so we expect to know the price and finalized release date soon. Expect preorders to open shortly thereafter.
The FlexStrike reveal is notable for several reasons, the most obvious being that this is PlayStation’s first official fight stick peripheral. The PS5 has plenty of excellent fight sticks to pick from–including PDP’s Victrix Pro FS and its leverless sibling, the Pro FS-12–but we’re curious to see how a PS5-dedicated model made specifically by Sony will stack up to the third-party options.
The June 4, 2025 PlayStation State of Play had several other exciting fighting game announcements, including the reveal of Marvel Tokon: Fighting Souls, a 4v4 team fighting game developed by Arc System Works and featuring a roster of Marvel characters, releasing on PS5 and PC in 2026. Digital Eclipse also announced the Mortal Kombat: Legacy Kollection, which compiles numerous classic Mortal Kombat titles–including arcade, home console, and handheld editions–plus exclusive behind-the-scenes content. The Mortal Kombat Legacy Kollection launches on PS5 and PS4 later in 2025.
Editor’s Note: This article was updated on July 28 with new information on the FlexStrike name reveal EVO 2025 information.
Interview conducted by P.V. Ananhya as a part of her Campus Leaders Program.
Please introduce yourself to our readers
I am Ms. Rini Adiyattil, a dedicated legal academic with a strong foundation in law and human rights. I hold a BBA LL.B and an LL.M in Human Rights, and I am currently pursuing my Ph.D. in Law at Saveetha School of Law, Chennai.
My academic journey began in 2021 as an Assistant Professor at KMCT Law College, where I also served as the Nodal Officer, contributing significantly to both academic and administrative development. My transition to Saveetha School of Law reflects my commitment to advanced research and ongoing professional growth.
As a scholar, I have published two articles in Scopus-indexed journals and am in the process of completing seven more. My interdisciplinary approach to legal education and research is further strengthened by my completion of a course in Psychology.
My current doctoral research focuses on bringing social reforms and upliftment for women sex workers, addressing the challenges faced by this marginalized section of society. I am passionate about advancing human rights and exploring the intersection of law and human behavior.
With experience presenting at international conferences, including the World Criminology Conference at Jindal Global Law School, I strive to bring a global perspective to my work. I am deeply committed to mentoring law students and guiding them toward meaningful and impactful careers in the legal profession.
Ma’am, could you walk us through your journey into law — what inspired you to choose this field, and how did your academic and professional path unfold?
My journey into law has been shaped by a profound curiosity about justice and a strong desire to contribute meaningfully to society. What initially inspired me was witnessing the transformative role that law can play in protecting rights and uplifting marginalized communities.
This realization motivated me to pursue a BBA LL.B, where I was introduced to the foundational principles of law and their real-world impact.
As I advanced academically with an LL.M in Human Rights, my passion deepened, especially as I engaged with issues at the intersection of law and social justice. Entering academia as an Assistant Professor allowed me to channel this enthusiasm into teaching and mentoring, fostering critical thinking and a sense of purpose among my students.
Each step—whether in research, classroom discussions, or administrative roles—has reinforced my belief in law as a dynamic force for positive change.
Currently, as a Ph.D. scholar, my focus on social reforms for women sex workers reflects my commitment to using legal research as a tool for empowerment. Throughout my journey, the drive to inspire future legal professionals and contribute to human rights has been my guiding force, making this path both intellectually fulfilling and deeply rewarding.
What was your own law school experience like? Were there any challenges you faced, or moments that shaped your perspective on legal education?
My law school journey was marked by both rigorous academic engagement and significant personal growth. Navigating the demanding curriculum required adaptability and a disciplined approach, particularly as I balanced coursework with research interests and co-curricular involvement. These challenges cultivated resilience and sharpened my analytical skills.
A defining aspect of my experience was my exposure to human rights law, which profoundly influenced my academic trajectory and commitment to advocacy. Interactions with dedicated faculty and intellectually curious peers fostered a collaborative learning environment, encouraging me to view legal education as a platform for critical inquiry and societal impact.
These formative experiences continue to inform my approach as an assistant professor, where I strive to mentor students and advance research in human rights.
Have you always wanted to be an academic, or did the teaching profession find you unexpectedly along the way?
My passion for teaching and research emerged as I immersed myself in legal education and mentoring students. Working closely with aspiring lawyers, I found great satisfaction in guiding them toward meaningful careers and advancing human rights research.
The dynamic exchange of ideas in the classroom and the impact of collaborative research deepened my commitment, making teaching and research not just a profession, but a calling.
In your view, what does ‘mentorship’ truly mean in the context of law school? How is it different from just being a teacher?
Mentorship in law school goes far beyond simply teaching legal concepts—it means serving as a role model who offers genuine care, guidance, and support to students as they navigate both their academic journey and personal growth. While a teacher imparts knowledge and ensures students meet curriculum goals, a mentor invests in the holistic development of each individual, helping them build character, resilience, and ethical judgment.
As a mentor, I strive to create a nurturing environment where students feel valued and empowered, guiding them not just to be skilled lawyers, but also compassionate and principled human beings. This relationship is ongoing and personal, focusing on molding students into better professionals and better people, well beyond the classroom.
What are some of the most common struggles you see law students facing today — academically or personally — and how do you try to support them?
Law students today commonly struggle with high academic pressure, mental health challenges like anxiety and depression, and the stress of balancing coursework, internships, and career planning. Many also face personal obstacles such as isolation, reluctance to seek help, and adapting to the competitive legal environment.
To support them, I focus on creating an open, caring environment where students feel comfortable discussing their struggles, both academic and personal. I encourage them to seek help when needed, connect them with counseling and wellness resources, and offer mentorship that emphasizes empathy, resilience, and holistic growth. By recognizing students as whole individuals and fostering a supportive community, I aim to help them build confidence and well-being alongside their legal skills.
Do you think today’s law students are too focused on placements and CVs, and not enough on becoming ‘lawyers’ in the truest sense? What’s your take?
Many law students today are indeed highly focused on placements and building impressive CVs, often driven by the competitive job market and the desire for career security. This focus is understandable, as practical experience through internships and extracurricular activities is crucial for developing essential legal skills and employability.
However, there is a risk that students may sometimes prioritize credentials over the deeper process of becoming thoughtful, ethical, and well-rounded lawyers.
The true essence of legal education should balance both: gaining practical exposure and building a strong CV, while also nurturing critical thinking, ethical judgment, and a genuine commitment to justice and service. As educators, our role is to encourage students not just to collect achievements, but to reflect on their experiences, develop core values, and grow into lawyers who serve society with integrity.
You’ve seen multiple batches come and go. Is there one particular student or mentoring moment that has stayed with you over the years?
While I’ve had the privilege of mentoring many remarkable students over the years, I don’t like to compare or single out any one individual. I believe each student brings their own unique strengths and potential, and every mentoring experience is meaningful in its own way.
What stays with me most is witnessing students discover their inner resilience and grow into confident, compassionate professionals, each on their own distinct journey.
Legal education today is often called ‘textbook-heavy’. What reforms or shifts would you like to see in how law is taught in Indian universities?
Legal education in India has traditionally been textbook-heavy, but the New Education Policy (NEP) 2020 proposes important reforms to address this. I believe law should be taught in a way that is multidisciplinary, practical, and rooted in real-world challenges.
NEP 2020 encourages law schools to move beyond rote learning by integrating legal education with other disciplines, promoting critical thinking, research, and innovation.
The policy advocates for:
Multidisciplinary institutions, allowing law students to learn alongside peers from diverse fields, which broadens their perspective and understanding of law in social, political, and economic contexts.
Greater emphasis on clinical legal education and practical skills, ensuring students are prepared for the complexities of modern legal practice.
Adoption of technology and bilingual teaching to make legal education more accessible and relevant to local needs.
Curricula that reflect constitutional values, ethics, and social justice, fostering lawyers who are not just technically skilled but also socially responsible.
These reforms, if implemented well, can make legal education more dynamic, inclusive, and better aligned with the needs of the 21st century.
How can a law student discover what path suits them — litigation, academia, judiciary, corporate, policy, etc.? Are there signs or moments to look for?
Discovering the right path in law is a highly personal journey, and there is no single formula. I encourage students to explore a variety of opportunities during their law school years—internships, moot courts, research projects, legal aid clinics, and seminars. These experiences often reveal what excites and motivates them most.
Certain signs can help guide students:
If you thrive in dynamic, argumentative settings and enjoy public speaking, litigation or courtroom practice may suit you.
If you find joy in research, writing, and teaching others, academia could be your calling.
Those who are analytical, detail-oriented, and interested in shaping legal interpretation may be drawn to the judiciary.
Students who appreciate working in teams, understanding business, and solving practical problems might excel in corporate law.
If you are passionate about systemic change and societal impact, policy work or public interest law could be fulfilling.
Often, a moment of clarity comes during an internship, a classroom discussion, or a project that truly resonates. My advice is to remain open-minded, reflect on your experiences, and seek feedback from mentors. Over time, your interests and strengths will guide you toward the right path.
You’ve mentored students preparing for judiciary, academia, and even competitive exams. How do you adapt your guidance for each individual’s journey?
Mentoring is most effective when it is tailored to each student’s aspirations, strengths, and challenges. I begin by understanding their goals, motivations, and any concerns they may have. For judiciary aspirants, I focus on building a strong foundation in substantive law, analytical reasoning, and answer-writing skills.
For those interested in academia, I encourage deep research, critical analysis, and opportunities for publishing and presenting papers.
Students preparing for competitive exams receive guidance on time management, exam strategies, and stress management. I also connect them with alumni and professionals in their chosen fields for practical insights.
Above all, I emphasize the importance of self-awareness and resilience. My role is to provide resources, encouragement, and honest feedback, while empowering each student to take ownership of their journey.
What do you believe are the three non-negotiable skills every law graduate should leave law school with — no matter what career path they choose?
Critical Thinking and Analytical Skills: The ability to dissect complex legal problems, evaluate arguments, and arrive at reasoned conclusions is fundamental in any legal career.
Effective Communication: Both written and oral communication are essential for advocacy, negotiation, drafting, and collaboration.
Ethical Judgment and Integrity: Upholding ethical standards, demonstrating professionalism, and making principled decisions are non-negotiable for building trust and credibility in the legal profession.
These skills serve as the foundation for lifelong learning and success, regardless of the specific path a graduate chooses.
Law school can sometimes feel overwhelming. What would you advise students who are feeling lost, confused, or behind their peers?
Feeling overwhelmed is a common experience in law school, and it’s important to remember that everyone’s journey is unique. My advice is:
Pause and Reflect: Take a step back to identify what is causing the stress—academic pressure, uncertainty about the future, or comparison with peers.
Seek Support: Reach out to mentors, faculty, or counselors. Sharing your concerns often provides clarity and reassurance.
Set Small, Achievable Goals: Break down tasks into manageable steps and celebrate small victories.
Avoid Comparisons: Focus on your own growth and progress, rather than measuring yourself against others.
Practice Self-care: Prioritize your mental and physical well-being—rest, exercise, and activities you enjoy.
Remember, setbacks are temporary, and resilience is built through overcoming challenges. Trust the process, and don’t hesitate to ask for help when needed.
Can you recommend any books, judgments, or readings that deeply influenced your thinking — ones you’d urge every law student to read?
Certainly. Some works that have profoundly shaped my perspective include:
Books: “To Kill a Mockingbird” by Harper Lee — for its exploration of justice, empathy, and moral courage.
“The Rule of Law” by Tom Bingham — for a clear understanding of the foundational principles of law.
“Justice: What’s the Right Thing to Do?” by Michael Sandel — for stimulating critical thinking about ethics and justice.
Judgments:
Kesavananda Bharati v. State of Kerala — for its significance in constitutional law and the doctrine of basic structure.
Vishaka v. State of Rajasthan — for its impact on gender justice and workplace rights.
Navtej Singh Johar v. Union of India — for its affirmation of equality and human dignity.
Other Readings:
Articles and essays by Dr. B.R. Ambedkar, especially his writings on constitutional morality and social justice.
These readings not only provide legal knowledge but also inspire a deeper commitment to justice and humanity.
How do you personally stay motivated, curious, and passionate — whether about teaching or the law itself?
My motivation stems from a genuine curiosity about the law’s potential to shape society and improve lives. Engaging with students, learning from their perspectives, and witnessing their growth continually renews my passion for teaching.
I stay curious by reading widely, attending conferences, and collaborating with colleagues across disciplines. Researching emerging issues, especially those related to human rights and social justice, keeps me intellectually stimulated.
Ultimately, the knowledge that my work can contribute to positive change—whether through teaching, research, or advocacy—fuels my passion and sense of purpose.
Finally, looking back at your journey so far, what is one thing you wish you had known as a student that you now pass on to your mentees?
I wish I had understood earlier that success in law is not defined solely by academic achievements or placements, but by the values, resilience, and empathy you cultivate along the way. It’s important to embrace failures as learning opportunities and to remain open to new experiences.
To my mentees, I always say: Trust your journey, be kind to yourself, and never lose sight of the larger purpose behind your pursuit of law—to serve justice and make a meaningful difference in society.
Disclaimer: Interviews published on Lawctopus are not edited thoroughly so as to retain the voice of the interviewee.
This interview is a part of our Star Interview series, conducted by the Campus Leaders at Lawctopus. Stay tuned for more!
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/astrology/horoscope/daily-horoscope-today-july-29-2025-risky-financial-habits-may-cause-savings-to-dip-if-left-unchecked-101753688334384.html” on this server.
The Food and Drug Administration has given Sarepta Therapeutics a green light to resume shipping its gene therapy Elevidys to some patients with Duchenne muscular dystrophy, a little over one week after demanding the company halt sales over safety concerns.
In a statement Monday evening, Sarepta said it would begin shipments to treatment sites “imminently.” The resumption applies only to Duchenne patients who can still walk, which typically describes individuals who are younger and whose disease hasn’t advanced as far.
For Duchenne patients who can no longer walk, shipments remain on a volunatary pause Sarepta instituted in June following the death from liver failure of a second teenager who had received Elevidys. Both teenagers were no longer able to walk when they died.
“We look forward to working collaboratively with the FDA to complete the safety label update for Elevidys and to discussing the approach to risk mitigation for nonambulatory patients, who remain on pause pending the outcome of those discussions,” Sarepta CEO Doug Ingram said.
Sarepta had initially refused to comply with the FDA’s July 18 request to stop Elevidys shipments in ambulatory patients, precipitating a three-day standoff with the agency before the company chose to back down last Monday.
The FDA’s request came on the heels of a furor over Sarepta’s failure to disclose the death of a patient with a different kind of muscular dystrophy who received one of the company’s experimental gene therapies in a clinical trial. That experimental treatment and Elevidys share a common delivery component, but differ in dose, manufacturing process and genetic payload.
More recently, an 8-year-old boy in Brazil who had received Elevidys died, but his death was ruled unrelated to the gene therapy. In a statement Monday, the FDA said it had investigated that case and agreed.
“The FDA will continue to work with the sponsor regarding non ambulatory patients, which remains subject to a voluntary hold, following two deaths,” said the agency.
“The patient community is an important voice, and the FDA will continue to listen to and respond to thoughts from the community impacted by DMD,” it added.
Editor’s note: This is breaking news. Check back later for updates.
When you’re overly focused on the future and always want to accomplish more, it’s very difficult to be happy today.
After all, it is never enough.
I see many people who want more, who want to have a better life.
And it’s not just more money or more properties.
Some want more degrees or academic qualifications.
Others want to:
Achieve more in their career.
Read more books
Visit more countries
Put on more muscles
Run more miles
And so on
To deal with that dichotomy, I’ve adopted a philosophy for the life I call “Short-term contentment. Long-term hunger.”
Today, we can be grateful for what we have and be at peace with the way our life is.
And at the same time, we can have a hunger for improving ourselves in the future.
Let’s take getting rich, for example.
For most people, it takes 2 or 3 decades to build substantial wealth.
And many people are unhappy until they become rich.
But not if you live by the philosophy of “Short-term contentment. Long-term hunger”.
You’ll invest, work hard, and learn new skills; but you also enjoy your life now.
This is one of the secrets of living a happy and wealthy life.
One way to do this is to see how far you’ve come, rather than how far you still have to go.
Rather than looking at how much longer it will take to achieve your financial goals, look at how far you’ve come from when you first started building your wealth.
Have you noticed how insecure people have to buy things that are better than the one their neighbour just bought, or that the person on Instagram just bought?
The easiest thing in the world is to be discontent.
The fact is you’ll never be wealthy if you’re not grateful for what you already have.
I’ve often said you have to enjoy the journey otherwise you won’t enjoy the destination.
I’m not saying don’t strive.
I’m not saying don’t be ambitious.
Truth is, you can be happy today even if you are ambitious.
But long-term goals are for the long run.
As you go through your days, try to remind yourself that you’re content right now.
When you combine that with a long-term ambition, you have the best of both worlds.
About Michael Yardney Michael is the founder of Metropole Property Strategists who help their clients grow, protect and pass on their wealth through independent, unbiased property advice and advocacy. He’s once again been voted Australia’s leading property investment adviser and one of Australia’s 50 most influential Thought Leaders. His opinions are regularly featured in the media.
Lingerie isn’t just for twenty-somethings or honeymoon nights, after all there is no age limit on feeling confident and sexy. With the right lingerie for older women, you can embrace beauty and sensuality, irrespective of the years behind you. Yes, in the past, mature ladies were often overlooked by big lingerie brands but that hasn’t stopped women in their 50s, 60s, and beyond from seeking out mature lingerie that is elegant, comfortable, and tastefully sexy. Over time, brands fell in line. Today, there are more options than ever, from supportive lace bras to sultry babydolls, all designed to make lingerie for mature women feel as fabulous as they deserve.
If you’re an older woman, you too can indulge in sexy lingerie that highlights your curves, reflects your style, and most importantly, feels amazing to wear. Remember, the right lingerie is ultimately about confidence and personal empowerment, not just about impressing others. You know what you like and what feels good, so don’t hesitate to treat yourself to pieces that make you say, “Wow, I look good!”
15 Spectacular Options For Lingerie For Older Women—Tastefully Sexy
If you have been looking for ways to feel sexy in your skin again, especially during or after menopause, and need a little push to rekindle the flame of intimacy, sexy lingerie for older women could lend impetus to your efforts. From premium lace chemises to comfy sexy underwear for mature women, there is no dearth of options to choose from. Let’s dive into some options for the best lingerie for older women that prove you can be classy and sexy at any age. Whether you prefer mature sheer lingerie with a daring touch or a luxurious satin set, these hand-picked pieces are tasteful, elegant, and oh-so-sexy. Bonus: Most of these come in inclusive sizing, because every body deserves to feel gorgeous.
Related Reading: How To Increase Libido After Menopause
1. Wacoal Embrace Lace Chemise
This delicate chemise features Wacoal’s signature floral lace along the bodice and hem, with a soft mesh body for a comfortable drape. It’s an elegant piece that proves feeling sexy can also mean feeling at ease. Great for both lounging and as a romantic nightie. The lingerie for older women design provides a flattering shape without being overly revealing, perfect if you want something classy yet a little playful.
Rating: 4.3 out of 5 stars
2. Avidlove Plus Size Lace Babydoll
An ultra-soft lace babydoll designed with curvy, mature figures in mind. It has a feminine deep V-neck and a flowy sheer mesh skirt that drapes beautifully over the hips. The halter tie straps and stretchy lace provide comfort while the silhouette is tastefully sexy, offering both coverage and allure for lingerie for mature women of any size. It comes in sizes up to 5X, so it’s wonderfully inclusive.
Rating: 4.4 out of 5 stars
3. RSLOVE Lace Garter 3-Piece Set
A popular three-piece set comprising a lacy bralette, panty, and garter belt, it exudes classic sex appeal with a refined twist. The delicate lace detailing and adjustable garter straps make it a tasteful choice of lingerie for older women who want something daring yet elegant. It’s revealing enough to feel sexy—hello, garters!—but still classy, allowing you to showcase confidence and playfulness in equal measure.
Rating: 4.3 out of 5 stars
4. Kaei&Shi Embroidered Lace Lingerie Set (4-Piece)
An intricately embroidered lingerie ensemble including a lace underwire bra, matching panty, garter belt, and even a little lace choker for a dramatic touch. The bra’s underwire offers lift and support, while the sheer floral lace and strappy accents give a mature sheer lingerie look that’s boldly feminine. Despite its multiple pieces, it’s designed to be comfortable on a woman’s body. This set is perfect if you want an all-out ensemble that’s still tasteful and far from not trashy.
Rating: 4.4 out of 5 stars
Related Reading: 13 Reasons Why Women Can’t Orgasm (and Steps to Achieve One)
5. OYOANGLE Polka Dot Mesh Babydoll
A flirty two-piece babydoll set with a playful polka dot lace pattern. It includes a V-neck sheer mesh babydoll top and a matching thong. The design is cute and coquette-ish without feeling juvenile. This piece strikes a delicate balance between a balance that’s ideal for mature lingerie style. The flowy babydoll cut skims your figure, so it’s forgiving and flattering, making it great lingerie for mature women who want something fun yet sultry.
Rating: 4.6 out of 5 stars
6. Ekouaer Satin Lace Robe & Nightgown Set
A two-piece set featuring a satin slip nightgown with lace trim and a matching short robe. The satin fabric feels luxurious on your skin, and the lace detailing on the robe adds just the right touch of romance. This set is perfect for lounging in style or stepping up your bedtime look. It’s also a smart choice if you prefer a bit more coverage. It doubles as sexy underwear for mature women who like an elegant reveal or a glamorous cover-up.
Styling tip: wear the robe loosely tied for a hint of mystique.
Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars
7. Popiv Complete Lace Garter Set (4-Piece)
A comprehensive lingerie set that comes with everything: a lace bra, matching panty, a garter belt, and stockings to complete the look. This set is all about feeling put-together and vixenish. Despite being a “naughty” outfit on the surface, the design stays on the classy side with floral lace and a flattering cut. It’s a fantastic option if you’re in the mood to really dress up, you know, on special occasions like your anniversary or any night you want to feel empowered and sexy. The bra provides decent support and the coordinating pieces make it easy to achieve that classic pin-up silhouette.
Rating: 4.4 out of 5 stars
8. Avidlove Lace Nightgown with Side Slit
A long, flowing lace nightgown featuring a dramatic thigh-high side slit and delicate bow accents. This piece offers the best of both worlds: it gives you the elegant coverage of a gown while the sheer lace and side split add a definite wow factor. The style is reminiscent of old Hollywood glamour.Imagine a satin slip but done in stretchy floral lace. It’s the kind of mature lingerie that’s incredibly comfortable. You don’t have to put up with tight underwires or corsetry here. Yet, it makes you feel like a star. If you prefer lingerie for older women that leans more toward grace and less toward “bare it all,” this nightgown is a beautiful choice.
Rating: 4.7 out of 5 stars
Related Reading: How Often Do 50-Year-Old Married Couples Make Love?
9. Avidlove Deep-V Lace Teddy Bodysuit
One of Amazon’s best-selling one-piece teddies, and for good reason. This lace bodysuit has a plunging Deep-V neckline that elongates your figure and a convenient snap crotch closure, so you’re not fumbling when it’s time to take it off. The floral lace is soft and has a gentle stretch, hugging your curves in a very appealing way. Despite the seductive cut, it manages to be comfortable. As a piece of sexy lingerie for older women, this teddy shows that you can absolutely have support and allure in one package. It’s a confidence booster and a versatile wardrobe secret all at once.
Styling tip: Layer it under a blazer or blouse for a cheeky outfit.
Rating: 4.4 out of 5 stars
10. Lace Halter Bralette & High-Waist Panty Set (Plus Size)
A two-piece set featuring a halter-style lace bralette and a matching high-waisted lace panty. This set is all about marrying comfort with sexiness for mature women. The halter bralette is wireless and soft, meanwhile, the high-waist panty offers a bit of tummy coverage and a retro vibe, proving that sexy underwear for mature women can be both flattering and forgiving. The whole look is vintage-inspired with a classic pin-up high-waist look and the lace is nice and stretchy. It’s available in plus sizes, and it’s the kind of set you can wear under a dress and feel quietly confident knowing what’s underneath.
Rating: 4.2 out of 5 stars
11. Avidlove 3-Piece Bra & Kimono Set
This unique set includes a lace bralette, a matching lace bikini panty, and a sheer lace kimono-style robe to tie it all together. The idea here is layered sexiness: you can tease with the robe on, then reveal the pretty bra and panty set beneath. The bralette is unlined and stretchy, providing a natural look, and the robe adds a touch of drama while still being lightweight. We love this for an at-home date night.
It’s the kind of ensemble that makes you feel put together and elegant without trying too hard. It’s also one of the best lingerie for older women seeking versatility. You can mix and match the pieces with other items. The robe, for instance, could top a simple nightgown to instantly glam it up.
Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars
12. Avidlove Satin Cami & Shorts Pajama Set
Don’t let the word pajama fool you, this two-piece satin set is as sexy as it is comfy. It includes a V-neck camisole with lace trim and a pair of matching satin shorts. The fabric is silky and cooling, and made to make those hot flashes or warm nights easier on your body, while the lace adds that lingerie touch. This set is perfect for those times you want to feel a bit sensual but also prioritize comfort like a relaxed weekend morning or a low-key evening in.
The cami’s straps are adjustable and the shorts have a little side slit, so the fit is easy and flattering. In terms of mature sheer lingerie, this isn’t sheer, but it gives a subtle sheen and shows just enough skin to remind you that you’re wearing something special. It’s proof that the best lingerie for older women can sometimes be as simple as a lovely satin PJ set that doubles as flirtatious loungewear.
Rating: 4.3 out of 5 stars
Related Reading: The Pressure to Perform, When Intimacy Becomes a Chore
13. WDIRARA Lace Bustier Set with Stockings
If you’re craving a bit of vintage glamour, this lace bustier set delivers. It features a lace bustier, akin to a corset-like top, with boning for structure, a matching lace thong, adjustable garter straps, and a pair of classic fishnet thigh-high stockings to complete the ensemble. The bustier has a hook-and-eye front closure and lightly padded cups, so it gives your bust a nice lift and defines the waist, giving you that hourglass effect that many women find empowering.
Despite the dramatic look, the materials are fairly stretchy, making it easier to wear than old-school corsets. This set is for the nights you want to pull out all the stops and channel your inner Dita Von Teese. It’s a bit of dress-up that’s still chic and elegant, and it definitely qualifies as sexy lingerie for older women who aren’t afraid to steal the spotlight.
Rating: 4.4 out of 5 stars
14. Lilosy Floral Lace Underwire Bra & Panty
Sometimes all you need is a beautifully made bra-and-panty set to feel sexy. This Lilosy set comprising a floral lace underwire bra that provides shape and support and a matching lace bikini-cut panty, offers just that. The bra’s cups are sheer enough to be enticing but still provide coverage in all the right places.
This set is a lovely option for everyday use as well as special occasions. It’s the kind of lingerie for mature women that you can wear under your work clothes to give you a secret confidence boost, or unveil later in the evening for a delighted partner. The style is elegant and not overly fussy: no extra straps or complicated bits, just classic lace done right. If you’re looking for something that’s both practical and pretty, you can’t go wrong with a high-quality lace underwire like this.
Rating: 4.3 out of 5 stars
15. Donnalla Lace Bodysuit Lingerie Set
Rounding off our list is this alluring lace bodysuit that comes with a removable garter belt and a matching panty. Essentially, it gives you the look of a one-piece teddy but with the option to dress it up further with garters. The bodysuit itself has a plunging neckline and gorgeous scalloped lace edging. It’s designed to accentuate your waist and hips, with a cheeky-cut bottom that isn’t too skimpy.
Many women love this set because it stays in place, no riding up or slipping down, so you can actually move around comfortably in it. Practical and sexy. If you’ve been shy about trying a garter belt, this is a friendly way to start since you can clip it on or leave it off. Overall, this set is about ease and allure: you get an all-in-one best lingerie for older women look that’s seductive, but you also get convenience and comfort in the fit.
Rating: 4.3 out of 5 stars
Final Thoughts
Growing older should never mean giving up on feeling sexy. In fact, many women say they feel more confident and empowered in their skin as they age, and the right lingerie can amplify that confidence. Whether you gravitate toward mature sheer lingerie pieces or cozy satin pajamas, the key is choosing items that make you feel amazing. Don’t be afraid to experiment with sexy lingerie for older women that matches your personality, be it bold reds and blacks or soft pastels and creams. Remember, lingerie is ultimately for you. As one 68-year-old enthusiast beautifully put it, wearing lovely lingerie is like having “your little secret” and a reminder that “we still have sexual feelings, even if the world doesn’t see us that way”. So go ahead, indulge in some gorgeous lingerie for older women, because feeling fabulous is truly timeless. Enjoy the classy, sexy, and confident you!
The Dynamics And Importance Of Sex In A Relationship
17 Signs A Woman Has Not Made Love For A Long Time
5 Ways Exercise And Fitness Improve Your Sex Drive
Your contribution does not constitute a charitable donation. It will allow Bonobology to continue bringing you new and up-to-date information in our pursuit of helping anyone in the world to learn how to do anything.
Share Feedback
What is your feedback?
Subscribe to Our Newsletter
Get your weekly dose of insightful articles straight to your inbox.
You already use the Play Store on your Android phone or tablet—but it’s not just for browsing and installing apps. It’s packed with powerful features that let you share digital purchases with family, free up storage easily, and keep your device secure.
8
Keep Your Device Safe With Play Protect
Downloading apps from the Play Store is generally safe, as Google regularly checks every listed app and game to ensure they meet its security standards. But even when you venture outside the Play Store (like by sideloading an Android app to install an older version or something not available in your region), the Play Store still has your back.
It offers a Play Protect feature that’s enabled by default and runs regular scans of your apps to detect anything that might put your device at risk. If it finds something suspicious, you’ll receive a notification. Otherwise, it quietly works in the background.
If you ever suspect that your phone might be infected, you can run a manual scan. Tap your profile icon in the Play Store, select Play Protect, and tap Scan.
The Play Protect settings menu includes a useful option called Permissions for unused apps. It shows you which apps you haven’t opened in the past six months. Aside from helping you remove permissions from apps you don’t need anymore, it provides a great place to start if your phone’s storage is running low.
7
Sync Apps Across All Your Devices
If you own multiple Android devices, such as a watch, tablet, TV, or Chromebook, there’s a good chance you use many of the same apps across them. The good news is that you don’t have to install those apps manually on each device every time. As long as you’re signed in with the same Google account on all your Android devices, you can set the Play Store to automatically sync apps between them.
On the Play Store, tap your profile icon in the top-right corner and go to Manage apps & device > Sync apps to devices. You’ll see a list of all Android devices connected to your account. Simply check the boxes next to the devices you want to sync with, and you’re all set.
6
Uninstall Apps in Bulk to Clean Up Fast
Clearing out apps and games you no longer use is a great way to free up space on your Android phone. While uninstalling individual apps is easy, the Play Store offers an even quicker way to clean up multiple apps at once when you’re ready for a full-on cleanup.
Tap your profile icon in the top-right corner and go to Manage apps & device. Then, switch to the Manage tab to view a list of all your installed apps. From here, you can sort by size or last used to easily spot the low-hanging fruit.
Finally, tick the check boxes next to the ones you no longer need, hit the trash icon in the top-right corner, and select Uninstall to confirm.
5
Save Space With Auto-App Archiving
You don’t have to uninstall apps and games manually to free up storage space. The Play Store offers a handy auto-app archiving feature that can save space without fully removing your apps.
To take advantage of this, tap your profile picture on the Play Store and go to Settings > General and enable Automatically archive apps. Once activated, the Play Store takes care of the rest.
Google Play will now automatically remove parts of unused apps from your device when storage is running low. This doesn’t affect any of the app data, and the app icon remains on your home screen, grayed out. If you ever want to use the app again, tap it, and it will re-download right where you left off.
4
Install Apps Remotely
You don’t need to have your Android phone or tablet in hand to install an app on it. The Google Play Store lets you remotely install apps to any of your connected Android devices, be it your phone, tablet, or smartwatch.
As long as you’re signed into the same Google account used on your phone, you can open the Play Store in a web browser on any device and sign in. Search for the app you want, then click the Install button on its page. Then, select the device and click Install again.
This feature also works in the Play Store app on your phone or tablet. On the app or game page, tap the arrow next to the Install button, select the device you want to install it on, and then tap Install again.
3
Get a Refund When You’re Unsatisfied
While the Google Play Store is packed with free apps and games across every category, you might make a purchase every once in a while. And thankfully, Google understands that not every paid app or game may live up to expectations.
If you spend money on something that doesn’t live up to the hype, you can request a refund directly from the Play Store. You’ll need to act quickly, though—refunds for apps and in-app purchases must be requested within 48 hours of purchase. For movies, TV shows, eBooks, and audiobooks, you have up to seven days to request a refund, provided you haven’t downloaded or streamed the content.
To get a refund, all you have to do is search for the app or game on the Play Store to open its page. If you’re within the eligible window, you’ll see a Refund button. Tap it, and you should receive an email confirmation shortly after.
For in-app purchases, the process is slightly different. Tap your profile picture in the top-right corner, go to Payments & subscriptions > Budget & history. Find the item you want a refund for and tap View to open the transaction details. Then, select Report a problem, select a reason from the dropdown menu, and hit Submit.
2
Share Apps, Games, and Movies via Family Library
For purchases you decide to keep, you can share them with up to five family members. To do so, you’ll need to set up Google Play Family Library, which lets you share your paid Android apps, games, movies, TV shows, eBooks, and even audiobooks.
Head to Play Store Settings > Family > Sign up for Family Library and follow the on-screen instructions to create your family group and invite members. You can choose to share items individually or set all eligible purchases to be shared automatically. Your family members will then be able to download and enjoy that content on their own devices, without needing to buy it themselves.
Not every item is eligible for sharing, though. To check whether an app, game, or piece of media can be added to your Family Library, look for the Family Library icon on the content’s details page.
1
Earn and Use Google Play Points
Every time you make a purchase on the Play Store, you could be missing out if you’re not earning Google Play Points. This rewards program lets you collect points for nearly every dollar you spend.
To get started, tap your profile icon in the Play Store, go to Play Points, and join the program for free. Once done, you’ll earn points automatically with every eligible purchase. The more you spend, the higher your level can climb—from Bronze up to Silver, Gold, and Platinum—each offering increasing benefits like bonus point events and special discounts.
These points aren’t just for show. You can redeem them for Google Play credit, use them to score discounts on in-app items, or even donate them to select charities.
You might not need the above Play Store features every day, but knowing they’re available can save you time, money, and storage space when it counts. So take a moment to get familiar with what the Play Store can really do—you’ll thank yourself later.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-28/Chill-in-summer-Hear-nature-s-roar-at-Tiger-Leaping-Gorge-1Fnma3qBCIE/img/636df41649ff4545a5dd395df88cda78/636df41649ff4545a5dd395df88cda78.jpeg'A view of Tiger Leaping Gorge in Yunnan Province. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-28/Chill-in-summer-Hear-nature-s-roar-at-Tiger-Leaping-Gorge-1Fnma3qBCIE/img/636df41649ff4545a5dd395df88cda78/636df41649ff4545a5dd395df88cda78.jpeg'A view of Tiger Leaping Gorge in Yunnan Province. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-28/Chill-in-summer-Hear-nature-s-roar-at-Tiger-Leaping-Gorge-1Fnma3qBCIE/img/636df41649ff4545a5dd395df88cda78/636df41649ff4545a5dd395df88cda78.jpeg'A view of Tiger Leaping Gorge in Yunnan Province. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-28/Chill-in-summer-Hear-nature-s-roar-at-Tiger-Leaping-Gorge-1Fnma3qBCIE/img/636df41649ff4545a5dd395df88cda78/636df41649ff4545a5dd395df88cda78.jpeg'A view of Tiger Leaping Gorge in Yunnan Province. /CGTN
Brace yourself for one of China’s most breathtaking sights: Tiger Leaping Gorge in Yunnan Province. Carved by the powerful Jinsha River, this dramatic gorge offers not only jaw-dropping views but also a refreshing break from the summer heat.
Keshia Knight Pulliam, who shared the screen with Malcolm-Jamal Warner on “The Cosby Show,” highlighted the Emmy-nominated actor’s musical talents as she broke her silence on his death.
Pulliam on Sunday shared an Instagram video of Warner playing the bass at Atlanta’s City Winery. She shared the video of Warner, best known for his portrayal of clean-cut Theodore Huxtable, a week after he drowned while swimming in the Caribbean off Costa Rica. He was 54.
“A week ago I lost my big brother but I gained an angel,” Pulliam captioned her video. She played Rudy Huxtable, the youngest of the TV family’s children.
“I love you… I miss you,” she added, before referencing the other Huxtable children. “We got our girls.”
“House of Payne” star Pulliam, 46, is the latest “Cosby Show” star to mourn Warner. As news of the actor-musician’s death spread last week, co-stars including Bill Cosby, Geoffrey Owens and Raven-Symoné paid tribute. Cosby told CBS News last week he and co-star Phylicia Rashad were “embracing each other over the phone” when they learned of Warner’s death.
“He was never afraid to go to his room and study. He knew his lines and that he was quite comfortable even with the growing pains of a being a teenager,” Cosby said of Warner.
Owens, who appeared as Warner’s on-screen brother-in-law, Elvin Tibideaux, said in a statement shared with Deadline that his co-star’s death had left him speechless. “Malcolm was a lovely man; a sweet and sensitive soul. I respected him for many reasons, including the fact that he genuinely loved the act of creation,” he said.
Warner, also a TV director and a Grammy-winning musician, was on vacation with his family at the time of his death. He was swimming when a current pulled him deeper into the ocean.
The Red Cross in Costa Rica confirmed to The Times last week that its first responders also tended to another man in the same drowning incident that claimed Warner’s life. The patient, whose identity was not disclosed, survived. First responders found Warner without vital signs, and he was taken to the morgue.
As news of his death spread last week, his Hollywood peers, including Morris Chestnut, Tracee Ellis Ross, Viola Davis and Niecy Nash also paid tribute on social media. Beyoncé honored the actor, briefly updating her website to include a tribute to the TV star.
Pulliam also thanked fans on Sunday for their support as she mourned. “Thank you for every text, call and all the love that you have sent my way,” she said in an Instagram story. “I’ve just needed a moment.”
City Winery in Atlanta, the venue from Pulliam’s video, will host an event in Warner’s honor on Wednesday. “This tribute is our communal offering to say: Thank you. For the way he gave, for the work he created, for the bridges he built between TV, poetry, music, and love,” says the event website. According to the site, all profits will go to Warner’s family. He is survived by his wife and daughter.
Perl was once everywhere. Or at least it felt that way. Around the turn of the millennium, it seemed that almost every website was built on the back of this scripting language. It processed massive amounts of text—mechanisms for doing this powerfully and easily were part of the language—and it was even used in bioinformatics, munging and churning through genetic data. Based on one list, the companies that used Perl ranged widely: Amazon, Google, Yahoo, Deutsche Bank, Akamai, Citibank, Comcast, Morgan Stanley, Mozilla. A lot of Craigslist was programmed in Perl.
Even at its peak use, the popularity of Perl was always a bit surprising. Perl is an undeniably messy language. It’s often referred to as the “duct tape of the internet,” with programmers joking that it’s a “write-only” language: You write in it but seldom read it (at least successfully).
There is an amalgamated mashup nature to Perl, all in service of its motto: “There’s More Than One Way to Do It.” Just as there are synonyms in English, Perl has a variety of approaches to writing the same thing. While this is a common feature of programming languages to a certain degree, Perl seems to want to knock you over the head with it. There are multiple ways, for example, of writing conditional statements, from using the traditional “if” to “unless”; to writing an if statement backward in a single line; to even a three-part operator that involves a question mark and a colon. I have a distinct memory, in the early 2000s, of writing code in Perl one day, and the next day not understanding what I had written.
But this clutter and baroque structure are in fact intentional and part of the broader philosophy that underlies Perl. The language’s creator, Larry Wall, was trained in linguistics, and his intention was to become, along with his wife, a missionary involved in rare languages. Wall ended up taking a different path and fully embraced coding. But his deep thoughts around how languages work never left him.
Wall’s perspective seemed to be that an obsession with linguistic purity was overrated. English has words from French, Greek, German, and even Akkadian, betraying its winding history and multifarious origins. We split our infinitives and dangle our modifiers. We have puns, both intended and not. So what’s a little bit of strangeness when it comes to how to write an if statement? Wall viewed evolution as part of the process of language development. There is an organic process going on here, and the final products needn’t be orderly. And so, a broad—and nonjudgmental—approach to language construction is vital, whether it’s a language designed to write scripts or sonnets.
Perl has its “more than one way” to do things and English has its numerous styles and flexible nature, a nature that can contain everything from cooking recipes to haikus, shopping lists to Faulkner. That is the sign of something that is truly open-ended. As Wall once said: “I’m a firm believer that a language … ought to be an amoral artistic medium.” If Perl has any overarching vision or dogma, it’s merely the fact that, perhaps, there shouldn’t be programming dogma at all.
To be clear, I was never a deep user of Perl. Its syntax and messiness overwhelmed its power for me, and when I was introduced to the well-ordered structure of Python, I ran to that language and never really looked back. This might in fact be a hint as to why the language lost its luster. Even in 1998, during its heyday, there were suggestions that Perl’s bloat might lead to a desire to jump to something “cleaner.” Whatever the reason, Perl is no longer as popular as it once was.
After a few hours with Bloober Team’s Silent Hill 2 remake, it became clear to me that the oft-derided developer had made something special, and the conversation about the studio was about to change. After a few hours with Bloober Team’s next game, the sci-fi horror Cronos: The New Dawn, questions about the studio’s capabilities are virtually an afterthought for me. I’m no longer wondering if the team can set and achieve lofty goals. Cronos has impressed in the two hours I’ve played it so far, and though I still have questions and will reserve my final judgment for the full game later this year, it’s clear the team has found its secret weapon in how it has designed Cronos’ combat gameplay.
When I previously saw Cronos during a hands-off showing in June, I likened its “merge system” of combat encounters to Dead Space, only played almost in reverse. Rather than strategically “cut off their limbs,” like the famous bloody wall scrawl once instructed Isaac Clarke to do, Cronos delivers its own desperate plea: “Don’t let them merge!” Enemies can absorb their defeated comrades, creating towering monstrosities that may well combine multiple classes into something more threatening.
For example, if one of the stalking husks of biomass that has blade-like appendages merges with one of the others that spews toxic bile at you, well, now you’ve got yourself a third, worse thing, offering the most horrific of both worlds. Sometimes the stakes are heightened from the get-go, with no shortage of motionless husks lying around any momentary battlefield you might find yourself in, and it may cross your mind to first burn away those buffs with a flamethrower–and maybe with a nearby fuel recharger, you can even accomplish this at times.
By merging, enemies combine their strengths and become much more fearsome.
But the real tension of any encounter comes when you’re trying to manage not just how you’ll kill enemies, but where. With an area-of-effect blast of your flamethrower that shoots out toward the ground in a small circle, you can permanently burn the bodies and prevent them from merging into a still-active enemy. This left me constantly worrying about where defeated enemies would fall, forcing me to sometimes purposely evade, but not yet kill, the game’s monsters, or “orphans.”
Flamethrower fuel was extremely limited in my demo, so the best practice was to get a few of them to die almost on top of each other, then light them ablaze like a big sci-fi viking funeral. But that’s easier said than done, so inevitably I’d be faced with the choice to kill an enemy outright, whether its place of death was advantageous to me or not…which would then feed this felled monster back into my path as I’d watch it merge with other monsters still pursuing me.
It’s a really clever wrinkle that once more gives Bloober Team an exceptionally tense combat system to lean into. In my Silent Hill 2 remake review, I wrote abou how I’d often make it out of a fight for my life and “observed my breathing return to normal, and felt my shoulders release their tension.” Similar feelings defined my Cronos hands-on preview. Initially, I was quite proud of my smart combat decisions that did just what I was instructed to do: I wasn’t letting them merge. However, as encounters became more complicated, some merging felt like an unfortunate inevitability. I couldn’t be everywhere at once, and I didn’t have enough fuel to burn away all the bodies, so I saw more than a few merged, ambulating nightmares, which always provided the healthy kind of stress and anxiety that horror games should offer.
With a gun that slowly charges to fire off its most powerful shots, ammo scarcity went beyond just the fuel, too. I could quickly fire off multiple, weaker rounds, using up more ammo, or I could try to nail more powerful single shots, but they were sometimes very difficult to land on target, and the enemies would charge toward me in the meantime, of course. Combined with the merging enemies, this created combat encounters that demanded I constantly consider my moment-to-moment choices. Lining up shots on one particular boss’ weak points was difficult enough, and supplies were low enough, that it took me about four or five tries to finally kill the thing. Since my demo started from the game’s opening, I understood this to be the first boss of the game. Future bosses are not likely going to be more forgiving, I assume.
The slimy world of Cronos sets the stage for a time-travel horror story I’m eager to see for myself.
With gunplay and exploration taking plenty of cues from the genre’s long history, I now find myself a few months out from Cronos’ launch without much to worry about when it comes to gameplay. Upgrading my suit and weapons provided hard-fought and welcome buffs, I was constantly rewarded for going off the main path–like when I rescued a cat tied to a side quest that tasks you with saving many of them over the course of the story–and I especially loved the downbeat vibes of safe rooms, made whole with their own theme song like one of Capcom’s finest.
There’s still so much more to see before I know how the whole experience comes together. Bloober Team says the game will take about 16 hours to beat on a typical playthrough–more if you plan to see everything it offers. Cronos comes from a team of people within Bloober Team that is different from those responsible for Silent Hill 2. Naturally, the Silent Hill 2 remake enjoyed the blueprint of Team Silent’s effort, so Cronos is the studio’s chance to show it can do it all on its own. For now, at least, it seems the studio has found a way to make combat compelling and put its own original spin on the horror genre.
What if we could prevent people from developing obesity? The World Obesity Federation expects more than half the global population to develop overweight or obesity by 2035. However, treatment strategies such as lifestyle change, surgery and medications are not universally available or effective.
By drawing on genetic data from over five million people, an international team of researchers has created a genetic test called a polygenic risk score (PGS) that predicts adulthood obesity already in early childhood. This finding could help to identify children and adolescents at higher genetic risk of developing obesity, who could benefit from targeted preventative strategies, such as lifestyle interventions, at a younger age.
“What makes the score so powerful is its ability to predict, before the age of five, whether a child is likely to develop obesity in adulthood, well before other risk factors start to shape their weight later in childhood. Intervening at this point can have a huge impact,” says Assistant Professor Roelof Smit from the NNF Center for Basic Metabolic Research (CBMR) at the University of Copenhagen and lead author of the research published in Nature Medicine.
The study arises from the Genetic Investigation of Anthropometric Traits (GIANT) Consortium, an international collaboration of human genetics researchers dedicated to studying the genetic architecture of anthropometric traits such as human height and body mass index. The research involved a collaboration with the consumer genetics and research company 23andMe, inc., and the contributions of more than 600 scientists from 500 institutions, globally.
Twice as effective at predicting obesity as the next best test
The subtle variations in our genomes can greatly impact our health. Thousands of genetic variants have been identified that increase our risk of obesity, for example, variants that act in the brain and influence our appetite. A PGS is like a calculator that combines the effects of the different risk variants that a person carries and provides an overall score.
To create their PGS, the scientists drew on the genetic data of more than five million people – the largest and most diverse genetic dataset ever. They then tested their new PGS for obesity on datasets of the physical and genetic characteristics of more than 500,000 people. They found that their new PGS was twice as effective as the previous best test at predicting a person’s risk of developing obesity.
“This new polygenic score is a dramatic improvement in predictive power and a leap forward in the genetic prediction of obesity risk, which brings us much closer to clinically useful genetic testing,” says Professor Ruth Loos from CBMR at the University of Copenhagen.
Genetics is not destiny
The scientists also investigated the relationship between a person’s genetic risk of obesity and the impact of lifestyle weight loss interventions, such as diet and exercise. They discovered that people with a higher genetic risk of obesity were more responsive to interventions but also regained weight more quickly when the interventions ended.
However, the new PGS has its limitations. Despite drawing on the genomes of a broader, more globally representative population, it was far better at predicting obesity in people with European-like ancestry than in people with African ancestry.
Khurana & Khurana (K&K) is a distinguished full-service law firm known for its comprehensive legal solutions across a diverse spectrum of practice areas. With over 18 years of experience, K&K has built a reputation for delivering precise, commercially viable, and client-centric legal services.
The firm’s expertise spans Intellectual Property Protection and Portfolio Management, Corporate and Commercial Laws, Litigation and Dispute Resolution, Taxation, Banking and Finance, Compliance, Media and Entertainment Laws, and emerging areas such as Technology and Data Protection.
About the Opportunity
Khurana & Khurana is thrilled to invite skilled professionals with outstanding abilities in Patent Drafting and Prosecution to join their team!
Skill Set Required
Extremely Strong and Competent Professional for Comprehensive Patent Preparation/Drafting Profile with a minimum of 3-5 years of core experience in drafting US/EP/IN style patent applications.
Ability to deeply understand technical subject matters for elaborating inventions in corresponding patent specifications will be the key evaluation parameter.
Should have a strong understanding of Patent laws. Registered Patent Agents/Attorneys would be preferred.
Fast learning capabilities along with the ability to work independently are must.
Should be a strong team player and willing to take additional responsibilities pertaining to trainings, speaking opportunities, client communications, overseeing docketing team to ensure smooth client intimations, among others.
Should be a strong team player and willing to take additional responsibilities pertaining to trainings, speaking opportunities, client communications, overseeing docketing team to ensure smooth client intimations, among others
Disclaimer: Charging money from students for internships or from job applicants is unethical and can result in blacklisting. We strongly discourage requesting any kind of payment from interns, including processing fees or charges for certificates. If you have any concerns, please contact us at [email protected]
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/lifestyle/health/cardiologist-says-this-1-simple-test-can-assess-your-risk-of-early-death-can-you-stand-on-one-leg-for-10-seconds-101753705338769.html” on this server.
GSK is turning to a China-based biotechnology company in search of its next blockbuster medicine, announcing Monday a broad drugmaking alliance with Hengrui Pharma that could be worth billions of dollars.
GSK will pay Hengrui $500 million upfront to start the alliance. In return, it will receive rights outside of the greater China region and Taiwan to an experimental drug for chronic obstructive pulmonary disease as well as the potential to develop up to 11 other therapies for respiratory illnesses, immune disorders or cancer. If a variety of milestones are met, the deal could be worth up to $12 billion, plus royalties, GSK said.
The deal’s initial focus is a drug, HRS-9821, that’s currently in Phase 1 testing. An inhalable medication, it blocks a pair of enzymes called PD3 and PD4, both of which play a role in the chronic lung disease COPD.
PD3 and PD4 are also the targets of Verona Pharma’s Ohtuvayre, which the Food and Drug Administration approved in June 2024 and Merck & Co. acquired in a $10 billion deal this month.
GSK said in a statement that HRS-9821 has shown “best-in-class” potential and could be administered through a dry-powder inhaler formulation. Ohtuvayre, which some analysts expect to top $4 billion in peak sales, is given as a liquid suspension using a nebulizer.
The companies didn’t specify which other drugs might be selected under the deal. Hengrui will lead development through the completion of Phase 1 trials. GSK will have the option to acquire most rights to those programs either at the end of early-stage testing or before.
“This deal reflects our strategic investment in programmes that address validated targets, increasing the likelihood of success, and with the option to advance those assets with the greatest potential for patient impact,” Tony Wood, GSK’s chief scientific officer, said in a statement.
By partnering with Hengrui, GSK extends a trend among pharmaceutical companies to license drugs from China. A report published by the investment bank Jefferies this month found one-third of the drug industry’s licensing deal spending in the first half of 2025 involved China-originated drugs, compared to 21% in 2023 and 2024 and single digits previously.
These deals were once focused on cancer therapies, but now include a wide set of indications, from immune disorders to obesity. Their growth reflects the biotech sector’s fast growth there, and the speed at which companies in China can bring drug prospects into testing. Many are designed as what some analysts have described as “me too better” versions of existing therapies.
Hengrui, one of China’s largest drugmakers by market capitalization, has been a beneficiary. In the last year or so, the firm formed a lucrative partnership with Merck in cardiovascular disease and licensed a portfolio of weight loss drugs to biotech startup Kailera Therapeutics.
Aiolos Bio, which GSK acquired for $1 billion last year, was also built around a respiratory disease drug discovered by Hengrui. A recent Jefferies report noted several other unpartnered medicines in Hengrui’s pipeline that are comparable to drugs either on the market or that have been the focus of other business development deals — among them treatments for pain, cancer and heart disease.
“This strategic collaboration with GSK marks yet another significant milestone in Hengrui’s globalisation journey and our mission to innovate and deliver higher-quality, cutting-edge therapies for patients worldwide,” said Hengrui executive vice president and chief strategy officer Frank Jiang, in the statement.
Nearly 200 Australian suburbs saw median property prices rise by more than $500/day between May 2020 and May 2025.
19 suburbs surpassed $1,000/day, with top performers like Wollstonecraft and Surfers Paradise doubling in value.
Australia needs ~250,000 new homes/year to keep up with population growth, yet we only approved 181,643 in the past year.
One year into the National Housing Accord, we’re already 60,000 homes behind target.
The suburbs with strong fundamentals—scarcity, location, amenities—continue to outperform.
The best time to invest was yesterday. The next best time is before the market prices in the next wave of growth.
Imagine waking up every day for the past five years and discovering your home just earned you over $1,000 in the last 24 hours.
For homeowners in nearly 20 Australian suburbs, that wasn’t fantasy; it was reality.
Recent data from PropTrack has highlighted an astonishing trend: nearly 200 suburbs across the country saw median home prices increase by more than $500 a day between May 2020 and May 2025.
And in 19 of these suburbs, price growth averaged over $1,000 per day.
Obviously, there are both good and bad sides to this story.
On the one hand, this is good news for home owners and property investors who already own the properties in the right locations.
But on the other hand, this phenomenal growth rate reveals something much more problematic: a housing system stretched to its limits, strained by chronic undersupply, record population growth, and political paralysis.
A crisis fueled by demand, delays, and demographics
Let’s be honest: this price surge wasn’t just due to market enthusiasm or investor speculation.
It’s the consequence of a perfect storm:
Population pressures: Since the pandemic’s end, migration numbers have rebounded, and then some. We’re welcoming more than double the pre-COVID-19 average of new arrivals. That’s great for our economy in the long term, but it’s put extraordinary pressure on our already strained housing system.
Construction bottlenecks: The National Housing Accord aimed to build 1.2 million new homes by 2029. Yet we’re already 60,000 homes behind just one year in. The ABS reported 181,643 new homes were approved last year. That’s better than the year prior, but still far short of the 250,000 homes needed annually to meet demand.
Planning inertia: Many of the high-growth suburbs are areas flagged for increased density. But approvals lag, land-use rules remain rigid, and developers are hamstrung by rising construction costs and planning delays. Projects aren’t financially viable, even when zoning allows them.
Note: In short, we’re not building enough. Not fast enough. Not in the right places.
The $1,000-a-Day Club: a snapshot
Here are just a few examples that stand out:
Wollstonecraft, NSW: House prices doubled from $2.8M to $5.7M—an average rise of $1,547 a day.
Warrawee, NSW: Up from $2.45M to $4.9M—$1,338 a day.
Surfers Paradise, QLD: Leapt from $1.78M to $4M—$1,212 per day.
Unley Park, SA: Adelaide’s top performer, with $1,237 per day in growth.
These aren’t just prestige suburbs, they’re tightly held, undersupplied, and in many cases, centrally located or lifestyle-rich, with good access to infrastructure.
That combination is gold for long-term capital growth… and poison for affordability.
Why this matters for property investors
As always, I encourage strategic, long-term thinking, meaning for savvy investors, this surge presents both a warning and an opportunity.
The warning: If you’re sitting on the sidelines waiting for “the crash” or “the right time” before getting in, you may be waiting forever. Despite relatively high interest rates, despite economic headwinds, values in tightly held suburbs have soared. Why? Because demand is structural, and supply is broken.
The opportunity: These data points highlight where the real scarcity is. Not every suburb will grow at $1,000 a day, but those with similar fundamentals (proximity, amenities, lifestyle, and limited future supply) are likely to outperform. Smart investors will be using this information to position themselves now, before the next wave of growth.
Policy failures are driving this.
Let’s be blunt, governments of all levels have failed to address Australia’s housing crisis.
Stamp duty hikes on foreign buyers, along with endless planning delays and overregulation, have choked off supply, particularly for higher-density projects.
Ironically, the very investors and developers we need to build more homes have been driven away.
Meanwhile, migration continues at a brisk pace, and it’s unlikely to slow any time soon.
Where to from here?
Here’s what I believe needs to happen:
Planning reform: Fast-track medium and high-density approvals in appropriate areas. Cut the red tape.
Incentivise development: Remove punitive taxes on foreign investment in new housing supply. Encourage private capital to return to the market.
Think long term: Recognise housing as critical infrastructure. Please treat it with the same urgency as transport or energy.
Smart investing: For investors, now is the time to focus on scarcity, quality, and long-term demographic trends. There’s opportunity in the chaos, if you know where to look.
Final thoughts
Yes, $1,000-a-day growth sounds sensational, but it also screams system failure.
Australia doesn’t just have a housing affordability issue; we have a housing supply crisis driven by a political system that talks a big game but moves too slowly.
For investors who already own in these top-performing suburbs, congratulations.
For those seeking to grow their wealth safely and strategically, the lesson is clear: buy well, hold for the long term, and focus on areas where demand is expected to continue outstripping supply.
Because in today’s market, standing still means falling behind.
If you’re like many property investors, you’re probably wondering what’s the right thing to do at present.
Should you buy, should you sell, or should you just wait?
You can trust the team at Metropole to provide you with direction, guidance, and results.
Whether you’re a beginner or an experienced investor, at times like we are currently experiencing you need an advisor who takes a holistic approach to your wealth creation and that’s exactly what you get from the multi-award-winning team at Metropole.
We help our clients grow, protect and pass on their wealth through a range of services including:
Strategic property advice – Allow us to build a Strategic Property Plan for you and your family. Planning is bringing the future into the present so you can do something about it now! Click here to learn more
Buyer’s agency – As Australia’s most trusted buyers’ agents we’ve been involved in over $4Billion worth of transactions creating wealth for our clients and we can do the same for you. Our on the ground teams in Melbourne, Sydney, and Brisbane bring you years of experience and perspective – that’s something money just can’t buy. We’ll help you find your next home or an investment-grade property. Click here to learn how we can help you.
Property Development – We enable you to become an “armchair developer” and get all the benefits of property development without getting your hands dirty. We take the hassles out of your investment by assisting you with all the expertise you need, from concept to completion, including construction. Click here to see if it’s the right way for you to grow your portfolio.
Property Management – Our stress-free property management services help you maximise your property returns. Click here to find out why our clients enjoy a vacancy rate considerably below the market average, our tenants stay an average of 3 years, and our properties lease 10 days faster than the market average.
About Brett Warren Brett Warren is National Director of Metropole Properties and uses his two decades of property investment experience to advise clients how to grow, protect and pass on their wealth through strategic property advice.
If you’ve ever felt like you’re dating a man-child, you know how frustrating and exhausting the experience can be. Maybe you find yourself picking up his dirty socks again while he’s glued to a video game, or you’re always the one apologizing on his behalf when he throws a mini tantrum. You’re certainly not alone in experiencing this. Sadly, signs of an immature man manifest in far too many relationships. Take, for example, this woman on Reddit, who laments, “My boyfriend doesn’t do anything around the house, has no ambition, and I feel like his mother.”
When you’re stuck in that dynamic, it’s easy to feel more like a parent than a partner. Over time, emotional immaturity grows from being an annoyance to a relationship killer. Research shows that an emotionally immature partner can wreak havoc on your happiness. The Gottman Institute warns that immature husbands or boyfriends often create significant relationship stress, leading to feelings of unhappiness and even depression.
That’s why it becomes crucial to identify the signs of emotional immaturity in a man and figure out what you can do, short of ending things and walking away, if you find yourself in such a relationship. In this article, we shed light on the 17 deadly signs of an immature man and how to deal with one, backed by insights from psychologists, experts, and women who have been in your shoes.
Role Of Maturity In A Relationship
Why does maturity matter so much in love? Simply put, a mature partner creates the foundation for a stable, loving relationship while an immature one can turn your life into an emotional rollercoaster. Emotional maturity is about more than age; it’s the ability to handle feelings, communicate openly, and take responsibility for one’s actions. In a romantic context, this translates to trust, respect, and stability.
Couples counselor Samantha Burns explains, “Emotional immaturity can reflect a lack of depth and understanding about one’s own emotions, an inability to communicate and process things related to the relationship, as well as lack of empathy and ability to understand your partner’s emotional experiences.”
On the flip side, emotional maturity builds trust, safety, and a deeper connection. Therapist Tya Camellia Stone, LMFT, says, “The number one predictor for success in any relationship is emotional maturity.” When both people are mature, you feel secure enough to be vulnerable. You know you can count on each other. Conflicts still happen, but you talk them through calmly and learn from them, instead of screaming or slamming doors.
Related Reading: 13 Signs Of A Hot And Cold Relationship & How To Break The Patter
By contrast, immaturity undercuts the very things that make a relationship work. An immature man may love you in his own way, but he struggles to show up as an equal partner. He might throw childish tantrums during disagreements or withdraw when life gets tough. In place of honest talks and teamwork, you get blame games, emotional outbursts, or stony silence. Over time, this chaos erodes your bond. It’s hard to feel safe with someone who might explode or disappear on you whenever emotions run high.
Immaturity also forces you into roles you never signed up for. You might catch yourself being the “parent” in the relationship, reminding him of basic responsibilities, mediating his conflicts, or tolerating behavior you know is unacceptable. Therapists refer to this dynamic as the Peter Pan syndrome, where one partner is stuck in perpetual adolescence.
“If your partner is Peter Pan, you might be Wendy,” writes therapist Marni Feuerman. You may unconsciously encourage the behavior by taking on the role of a parent. The problem is, playing mommy to your partner is a recipe for burnout and resentment.
At the end of the day, maturity is a cornerstone of a healthy relationship. It means you can rely on your partner to be considerate of your feelings, to work as a team, and to handle life’s ups and downs with grace. When that’s missing, love just isn’t enough to bridge the gap. Little problems turn into big dramas. You end up walking on eggshells, constantly trying to prevent the next meltdown or wondering if you’re asking for too much. It’s a painful situation – but recognizing the red flags is the first step toward change.
17 Deadly Signs Of An Immature Man In A Relationship
A person’s maturity, or lack thereof, reflects in their every action. And so, signs of an immature man cannot remain under wraps for far too long when you’re in a relationship with one. If you find yourself rolling your eyes at the way your partner acts or ask them to “grow up” far too often, pay attention. You may notice some or most of the signs of emotional immaturity in your man:
1. He lives only in the present
One of the classic signs of immaturity in a man is a total lack of future planning, whether it’s about his career, financial stability, or relationship milestones. He might drift from job to job or have little to no ambition beyond the weekend’s plans. You’ll notice he hesitates to discuss or set goals like moving in together, marriage, or even vacations months down the line. This “live in the moment” attitude can feel fun at first, but it becomes frustrating when you’re trying to build a life together, and he’s not on board.
In many cases, a lack of future plans goes hand-in-hand with poor responsibility in day-to-day life. Perhaps he still relies on parents or others to get through life. You know he is an immature man coasting aimlessly through life if,
He shows a lack of ambition and struggles to hold down a stable job or career path
He hasn’t thought about saving money, buying a home, or making other adult financial decisions
He has a paycheck-to-paycheck lifestyle or is happy seeking support from family, friends, or even his partner, quite regularly
He jokes about never growing up or calls himself a “free spirit” to avoid adult responsibilities
Related Reading: 15 Signs A Commitment-Phobe Loves You
2. Fear of commitment
A fear of commitment is one of the biggest red flags of emotional immaturity in relationships. You’ll notice this fear of commitment through avoidant behaviors. For example, he may change the subject or make a joke when you bring up future plans as a couple. He might label serious discussions as “drama” or say, “Why can’t we just enjoy what we have now?” While it’s healthy not to rush, an emotionally mature man will at least be open to discussing the relationship’s direction. The immature one, however, treats commitment like a trap. This leaves you in a perpetual state of uncertainty, wondering if you’re wasting your time because,
He keeps things ambiguous
He might promise “someday” but never actually takes any step toward it
He has a string of short relationships in his past
3. Financial irresponsibility and frivolous spending
Budgeting isn’t on his list of priorities
One of the most telling of the 17 deadly signs of an immature man is the way he handles his finances. One hallmark is frivolous spending: buying expensive gadgets, luxury items, or partying beyond his means, instead of paying bills or saving for important things. Does your partner also blow his paycheck on toys and nights out, only to borrow money for rent? Does he avoid budgeting or rack up debt on impulse purchases?
Then, yes, you’re most definitely dealing with a lack of maturity in your partner. These financially reckless behaviors stem from an inherent lack of discipline and foresight. Being financially reckless doesn’t just hurt his wallet, it affects you and the relationship’s stability. If you’re constantly having to cover for him or you can’t rely on him to contribute equally, resentment will build.
Responsible adults understand that managing money is part of building a future. In contrast, an immature guy might say “YOLO” as an excuse to splurge and ignore the consequences. He may expect others to pick up the slack when he overspends.
Related Reading: 5 Harsh But True Signs He’ll Never Marry You
4. Volatile emotions and outbursts during conflicts
Mature adults keep their cool in disagreements, but an immature man often fights dirty or explodes at minor issues. If your partner becomes unpredictable, stubborn, or downright mean during arguments, take note. Immaturity in conflict can look like,
Shouting
Name-calling
Storming out
Personal attacks
Defensiveness
“Having a meaningful conversation with an immature man during an argument can be tricky. They usually depend on petty insults,” says Feuerman. You might find that any time you try to address a concern, he gets defensive or flips the script. Perhaps you bring up something minor, like “It upset me that you cancelled our plans last minute”, and suddenly he’s calling you “crazy” or “too sensitive.”
One Redditor described this as “the unwillingness to let go of being ‘right’ in a situation where you unintentionally hurt someone’s feelings… immature and annoying.” Instead of listening, an immature guy will double down on being right, even if it means hurting you. It’s a telltale sign of emotional immaturity when he cannot calmly discuss issues and instead turns every argument into a battlefield.
5. He never apologizes or admits mistakes
A well-rounded adult can say, “I’m sorry, I was wrong.” An immature man, on the other hand, never takes accountability. If your guy refuses to apologize sincerely, or worse, resorts to blame-shifting, it’s a major red flag. Burns says, “Someone who’s emotionally immature likely won’t want to admit when they’ve screwed up and may even attempt to place the blame on others.” They have an arsenal of excuses ready whenever something is their fault.
For example, let’s say, he forgot your birthday. A mature partner would apologize profusely. The immature one might say, “Well, you should’ve reminded me. It’s not my fault!” Or if he hurts your feelings, he retorts, “You’re just too sensitive.” In his mind, it’s always someone else’s fault, never his.
This blame-shifting leaves you feeling unheard and frustrated because your feelings are invalidated. You might even start doubting yourself, wondering if you are the problem, when in reality, he’s just dodging accountability.
Related Reading: 7 Reasons You Lose Feelings For Someone Fast
6. No history of meaningful long-term relationships
Emotional immaturity signs aren’t just evident in the way a man is leading his life in the present, but also in his past. One telling aspect is his relationship history. Has he ever had a serious, committed relationship that lasted beyond the honeymoon phase? If all his past relationships were short-lived or superficial, it could signal emotional immaturity. Of course, everyone’s history is different and not having a long-term ex isn’t a crime. But if he’s well into adulthood and proudly proclaims he’s never been “tied down” or he speaks about exes with total disrespect, that’s concerning. Here’s why:
All exes are “crazy”: When every former partner is described as crazy, clingy, or at fault, that’s a red flag. Emotionally mature people don’t disparage all their exes; an immature man does this to avoid acknowledging his own role in breakups
No long-term commitments: He has never been in a relationship that lasted more than a few months, or he’s always casually “dating” with no intention to commit. It could indicate he bails when things require work or depth
Lack of emotional growth: If you ask what he learned from past relationships, he draws a blank or offers a joke. It doesn’t occur to him to examine his patterns or feelings. This lack of introspection means he’s likely to repeat the same mistakes
7. Self-centered and egocentric behavior
It’s all about him
Does it feel like the world revolves around him? Immature men are often extremely self-focused. He may show little genuine interest in your thoughts or feelings, instead steer every conversation back to himself. Your needs tend to take a backseat because he prioritizes his own comfort and ego at all times.
In psychological terms, this can border on narcissistic tendencies, but even without a diagnosis, it’s emotionally draining to date someone so self-absorbed. A self-centered partner might,
Interrupt you frequently
Make decisions unilaterally
Get upset when he isn’t the center of attention
Lack empathy
Have a compelling need to win and be acknowledged
For example, if you have a success or spotlight, instead of being happy for you, he may feel threatened or annoyed. He might even try to one-up your stories or shift focus back by any means, including intimidation or sulking. Being with someone like this leaves you feeling invisible and unimportant.
8. Lack of impulse control
Impulsivity is a common trait in children, and unsurprisingly, also one of the 17 deadly signs of an immature man. If your partner acts on whims without thinking of consequences, it’s a worrying sign. This can cover a range of behaviors:
He says or does things “without thinking”: He often claims, “I didn’t think, I just did it.” This might range from blurting out insults when upset to making big life changes on a whim
He has trouble with routines or commitments: He might impulsively cancel plans because something more fun came up, not considering your feelings. Or he can’t stick to long-term projects because he gets bored easily and chases whatever shiny thing grabs his attention that day
He exhibits potentially reckless behaviors: In some cases, impulsivity extends to dangerous areas such as driving recklessly, substance abuse, or other risk-taking. Immature people often seek instant gratification, ignoring long-term risks
“An emotionally immature person won’t have a handle on his emotions and may not be able to control his behavior. In that aspect, they can be compared to children. The difference is, they’re not a child, and those unchecked impulses can have serious consequences,” says relationship expert Esther Perel.
Related Reading: 11 Situationship Red Flags You Should Know About
9. Bullying or intimidating tendencies
It may sound extreme, but some immature men resort to bullying behaviors, especially men who are insecure or don’t feel in control. This doesn’t always mean physical aggression, although it can escalate to that; it often appears as verbal belittling, teasing that crosses the line, or domineering behavior to impose his will. If your partner frequently makes you feel small, afraid, or bullied, that’s a serious sign of not just immaturity but potential toxicity. For example,
He might mock your accomplishments or interests as silly, just to assert superiority
When he’s upset, he could lash out by calling you demeaning names, knowing it will hurt
In group settings, he might try to dominate or embarrass you in front of others
These behaviors often stem from deep insecurity. He feels big only by making others feel small. A mature man with confidence would never need to bully his loved ones. The immature bully, however, hasn’t learned healthy ways to cope with his feelings. “He might lash out and bully you to feel better about himself. If your man always attacks and bullies you, you might be dating an immature man,” warns Feuerman.
10. He’s a poor listener
Communication is the bedrock of a good relationship, and it has to be a two-way street. If your guy never truly listens, constantly interrupts, or dismisses what you have to say, it’s a sign of emotional immaturity. A mature partner values your thoughts and seeks to understand you. An immature one, on the other hand, either tunes you out or waits for his turn to speak.
Ask yourself: Do you feel heard in your relationship? If you constantly have to repeat yourself, or you get cut off mid-sentence, that’s not just bad manners, it shows a lack of respect for you. An immature partner might also selectively listen: he hears what he wants to, especially if it’s praise or about him, but anything that requires empathy or effort goes in one ear and out the other. Over time, poor listening leads to major misunderstandings and a feeling of distance. You may stop confiding in him because experience tells you there’s “no point – he won’t listen anyway.”
11. It’s his way or the highway
His lack of flexibility can be frustrating
Emotional immaturity often makes people inflexible and unable to put their partner’s needs first, even occasionally. This means that he is unwilling to make healthy compromises, adjust to make room for your likes, dislikes, and preferences, or prioritize you and the relationship.
Relationship expert April Davis says, “You can spot this trait when someone refuses to meet in the middle and starts lying, blaming, or guilt-tripping you in order to get their way.” If disagreements routinely end with him stubbornly insisting on his solution or sulking if he doesn’t get it, that’s a problem. Over time, you feel like your preferences never matter; it’s always about accommodating him. Such inflexibility and lack of support can make you feel very alone in the relationship.
12. Habitual lying and dishonesty
Lies, even “small” ones, can seriously undermine a relationship. If your man lies chronically, whether to avoid trouble or to make himself look good, it’s a sign of immaturity. Instead of dealing with reality and its consequences, he takes the childish route of fibbing. This could be,
Frequent little lies: He lies about things that don’t even seem necessary, like what he was doing, who he was with, why he was late. These unnecessary lies indicate a reflex to avoid any responsibility or image damage. For example, saying “I was stuck in traffic” when he was really oversleeping or goofing off
Inconsistent stories: His explanations often change upon retelling or under slight pressure. If you ask a follow-up question, he stammers or revises his story. You might have a gut feeling that he’s hiding something or not being fully honest
Image crafting: Some immature men lie to inflate their image. He might boast about achievements that never happened, or exaggerate facts to seem “cool.” This shows insecurity and a lack of acceptance of reality
Dishonesty in a relationship can also be a way to avoid conflict. He figures if he tells you what you want to hear, he won’t have to deal with your reaction. But of course, repeated lies destroy trust. You cannot feel secure with someone when you’re always wondering if he’s telling the truth. A mature man understands that trust and transparency go hand in hand, even when the truth is hard.
Related Reading: 21 Signs That You Are Alone In A Relationship
13. You often feel alone in the relationship
One of the worst feelings is being lonely while in a relationship. That’s what you get when there is emotional immaturity in relationships. You might notice that,
Your immature partner is emotionally checked out even when he’s physically present
You don’t have the deep emotional bond that a healthy relationship should have
He doesn’t engage when you try to share your feelings or seek support
You’re met with indifference, dismissal, or blank stares
This creates an emotional intimacy gap that makes it harder for you to connect. It’s as if you’re each in your own bubble, rather than walking through life hand-in-hand.
14. He avoids deep or serious conversations
Immature men often avoid deep conversations about the relationship, feelings, or anything requiring vulnerability. They prefer to keep things light and fun. When you try to deepen your connection with them by stimulating vulnerability, they either shut down or divert with humor. You might also notice that whenever you say, “We need to talk,” he visibly squirms, quickly says he’s too tired or busy, or suddenly becomes unreachable, either literally or through a closed-off demeanor, to shut you down.
He might accuse you of “overthinking” or “bringing drama” if you try to discuss your feelings or the state of the relationship. Davis explains, “Immature men are not comfortable with emotional depth. They get overwhelmed by feelings and prefer to ignore them.”
An immature man may not know how to articulate deeper emotions
This reluctance to engage deeply can leave important issues unresolved. If you can’t have an honest talk about where things are headed or address a recurring problem, those issues fester. It also means you never truly know what he’s thinking or feeling at a deeper level. Some immature men lack the emotional vocabulary altogether. They might literally not know how to articulate deeper emotions because they’ve never practiced.
So they stick to surface-level conversations about the happenings of the day, hobbies, daily trivia, or physical intimacy, and clam up when it comes to emotional intimacy. Over time, the relationship stays shallow. You may yearn for a partner who opens up, connects, and “goes there” with you emotionally, and realize sadly that he’s not willing or able.
15. He can’t make or stick to decisions
Do you end up making all the decisions, from where to eat dinner to bigger life choices, because he simply won’t? You could be dealing with chronic indecisiveness, which is one of the telling emotional immaturity signs. A mature man takes equal initiative in a relationship and collaborates on decisions.
An immature one either doesn’t want the responsibility or is afraid of making the “wrong” choice, so he constantly defers to you or flips back and forth endlessly. This can put unfair pressure on you, and it’s also a turn-off when someone can’t make up their mind even on small matters.
Indecisiveness might stem from laziness or fear. Perhaps he just doesn’t care enough to put thought into plans, so you always have to plan dates, vacations, etc. Or he’s so afraid of commitment that even choosing a mutual activity freaks him out because it implies responsibility. He might even say things like “I don’t know, whatever you want” to everything. This might sound accommodating, but really, it’s him not putting any effort into the relationship.
Related Reading: In Love With An Emotionally Unavailable Man? 10 Tips To Connect With Him
16. Lack of emotional responsiveness
Struggling to empathize or respond to your emotions is among the serious signs of emotional immaturity in a man. This goes beyond just listening, it’s about truly caring and reacting appropriately when you’re happy, sad, scared, or hurt. An immature man often lacks emotional responsiveness to connect with or validate your feelings. For instance, if you come to him in distress, he might look uncomfortable or give a nonchalant response like “That sucks” and then change the subject. He may also exhibit emotional numbness or detachment when deep emotions are in play because he can’t handle them. As a result, he may,
Fail to comfort you: In times when a loving partner should be supportive, he is either absent or useless. He might physically distance himself or offer a half-hearted pat and then quickly move on. You do not feel emotionally supported by him
Not celebrate your joy either: Empathy isn’t just for bad times, it’s also sharing joy. If he reacts to your good news with apathy or finds a way to make it about him, that’s low empathy
Overreacts to your emotions: Paradoxically, he might get very defensive if your feelings are about something he did. Instead of hearing you out, he takes it as a personal attack. Sharon Peykar, LCSW, explains, “Immature partners take things very personally, seeing everything as an attack on them.” He can’t step into your shoes because he’s too busy guarding his own ego
A partner who can’t or won’t show empathy will leave you feeling lonely and frustrated that your emotional needs are never met.
17. He avoids important relationship discussions
The final among the 17 deadly signs of an immature man is a tendency to shy away from crucial conversations about the relationship. “Immature men may shy away from discussing the relationship’s future or addressing critical issues. They may dodge conversations about commitment, conflict resolution, or personal growth,” says Peykar.
Whether it’s the “Where are we headed?” conversation or resolving ongoing conflicts, or talking about mutual growth, he wants no part of it. This avoidance is detrimental because it stalls the relationship’s progress. Issues never get fixed if you can’t talk about them. You might find you’re going in circles—the same fight keeps happening because he refuses to properly discuss it and find a solution. Or you feel anxious about the future because he won’t confirm if he even sees a future with you. Some women describe this as feeling like the relationship is stuck in limbo due to his communication avoidance. If every serious talk leads to him stonewalling or disappearing, his immaturity is controlling the fate of the relationship. And unfortunately, silence solves nothing.
7 Practical Strategies on Dealing with an Immature Man
So you’ve identified several of these signs in your partner. You might be thinking, “Yikes, that’s a lot of red flags. What do I do about it?” Don’t panic. Emotional immaturity in relationships, while harmful, doesn’t have to mean that there is no hope for a future together. In fact, many couples deal with a maturity gap at some point and manage to navigate it well. For that to happen, the immature partner has to see the error of his ways and invest in his personal growth.
Remember, you can’t force someone to grow up overnight, but you can set boundaries, communicate effectively, and make informed decisions for your own well-being. The goal isn’t to scold or “parent” him into change. It doesn’t work anyway. Instead, focus on how you respond and what you need. Here are seven practical strategies to help you cope with and hopefully encourage a more mature dynamic in your relationship:
1. Hold him accountable
Resist the urge to “roll over” and cover for his mistakes. It might feel easier to clean up his messes or excuse his behavior, but that only enables immaturity. Instead, let him face the natural consequences of his actions. For example, if he forgets something important due to irresponsibility, don’t automatically fix it for him.
This might mean calmly pointing out when he’s at fault and not accepting his blame-shifting. It also means stopping any “parenting” behaviors you’ve been doing, like reminding him of every little task or apologizing to others for him. Step back and allow him to experience the fallout. Sometimes, feeling the discomfort of consequences is the jolt needed for him to realize he must grow up.
Related Reading: What Are The Weak Points Of A Man During Romance?
2. Communicate your needs clearly and calmly
Rather than yelling at him for being immature, which can trigger defensiveness, use clear, open communication about how his behavior affects you. Pick a moment when things are calm, and explain your feelings using “I” statements. For instance, “I feel hurt and alone when you dismiss my feelings as ‘drama.’ I need a partner who will listen and try to understand, even if we disagree.”
Keep it focused on the behavior, not personal attacks. Relationship experts suggest not beating around the bush. He might genuinely not realize how his actions impact you. By spelling it out, you give him a chance to reflect and respond. Be prepared that he might not take it well initially because of a tendency to get defensive. But planting the seed is important.
3. Set healthy boundaries
Decide what you will and won’t tolerate, then stick to it. Boundaries might include things like,
“I will not accept being shouted at or insulted. If it happens, I will remove myself from the situation.”
“If you blow our shared budget on impulsive buys, you will need to return the items or figure out the finances. I won’t cover it.”
Setting healthy boundaries is a great way of dealing with an emotionally immature man. However, enforcing boundaries consistently is even more crucial. So, if you said you’d leave the room if he yells, actually do it when he raises his voice. If you said no more lending large sums of money, stick to that. This shows him that you’re serious and that his actions have limits. Feuerman says, “These limits are for your health, and you’re not responsible for magically curing his immaturity; you’re responsible for maintaining your self-respect.”
Related Reading: Indifference In Relationships — Causes, Signs And Coping Tips
4. Suggest professional help
Sometimes, the immature behaviors are deeply ingrained or tied to underlying issues such as insecurity, past trauma, etc. A professional can help him recognize and address these patterns in a way you likely can’t nor should you have to. It can be helpful to suggest couples therapy, framing it as a team effort to improve communication, or encourage him to talk to a therapist individually.
Approach it supportively, not as an ultimatum like “You need therapy!” but rather “I think a counselor could really help us sort out some of these recurring issues and teach us better ways to handle them.” If he’s resistant, you could even start therapy on your own for guidance. Often, when one partner starts going, the other becomes more open to joining. Remember, you can’t force someone to change, but you can offer the tools and express that it’s important to you.
BetterHelp Banner
5. Encourage personal growth and responsibility
He won’t transition into an emotionally mature man overnight but you can encourage him to take steps in the right direction. Support any positive interests or habits that promote responsibility, self-awareness, or empathy. For example, if he’s open to reading, you could share a relatable article or book on relationships or emotional intelligence. If he struggles with life skills, encourage him to try doing things independently and acknowledge when he does.
Let’s say he sticks to a budget for one month. Show appreciation for his efforts, which reinforces the behavior. The key is he has to want to improve. You can’t nag him into changing, but you can create an environment where growth is noticed and valued.
6. Be patient, but stay firm
If you choose to stay and work on the relationship, know that change takes time. You’ll need patience for him to unlearn years of immature habits. Celebrate small wins and understand there may be relapses. However, patient doesn’t mean passive. You also must remain firm in your expectations and boundaries.
Make it clear that while you understand growth is a process, certain behaviors are unacceptable and must trend in the right direction. For example, you might say, “I know you’re trying to communicate better, and I appreciate it. I’m here to work on this together. But I need you to know that if the screaming and insults continue like they used to, I won’t be able to stay in this relationship long-term.” This kind of statement affirms both support and seriousness.
Related Reading: 15 Examples Of Manipulation In Relationships
7. Acknowledge growth
People, even adults, respond well to positive reinforcement. When your partner does show signs of maturity or improvement, notice and appreciate it. Did he calmly discuss a tough issue instead of yelling? Let him know how much that meant to you. Did he take initiative on a decision or chore he usually dodges? Thank him sincerely. This isn’t to baby him or give gold stars for basic adult behavior. It’s about reinforcing that his efforts are seen and valued, which encourages him to continue.
“Positive feedback can encourage him to continue making positive changes and show him his efforts are noticed and valued. It creates a more encouraging environment for growth, rather than a constant criticism loop, which can make someone defensive,” says Burns.
Key Pointers
Maturity is the foundation of healthy relationships. It brings emotional stability, accountability, and long-term commitment
An immature man often avoids responsibility, lacks empathy, craves validation, and resists emotional intimacy
Dealing with immaturity requires setting boundaries, not enabling bad behavior, and maintaining clear, calm communication
Growth is possible, but if patterns persist, choosing your peace over potential is a powerful act of self-respect
Final Thoughts
Dealing with an immature man in a relationship is downright exhausting. You need to prioritize your well-being above all else. If he is resistant to change, you cannot single-handedly fix his immaturity. There may come a point where you must decide if the relationship, as it stands, is fulfilling enough for you. If he is unwilling to do the work to become a more mature and emotionally available partner, you might find the relationship is no longer healthy or satisfying for you. It’s perfectly okay to prioritize yourself and step away from a situation that isn’t improving. Sometimes, the toughest maturity lesson for both partners is realizing love isn’t enough if one person refuses to grow.
On the other hand, many relationships do improve with time and effort. Emotional maturity can develop, especially if he truly cares about you and wants to be better. By recognizing the signs and applying these strategies, you’re giving your relationship a fighting chance. Whether he rises to the challenge is ultimately up to him. Remember that you deserve a partner who meets you at your level.
Contempt In Relationships: The Toxic Behavior You Must Avoid
When A Woman Feels Neglected In A Relationship | What To Do
Am I Overthinking Or Is He Losing Interest? 18 Signs To Help You Identify
Your contribution does not constitute a charitable donation. It will allow Bonobology to continue bringing you new and up-to-date information in our pursuit of helping anyone in the world to learn how to do anything.
Share Feedback
What is your feedback?
Subscribe to Our Newsletter
Get your weekly dose of insightful articles straight to your inbox.
Writing means facing creative blocks constantly. I write a lot, so I know the feeling. Obsidian is my go-to for all of it, and with a few tweaks, it actually makes me want to write more.
Where You Write Matters
I use two Obsidian vaults: one dedicated to university work and another for everything else, including personal and professional writing. My university vault involves mostly scientific or technical notes, so eloquence isn’t necessary.
My second vault demands a completely different mindset because the writing is creative and expressive. Consequently, and paradoxically, this makes writing in the second vault twice as hard.
I’ve learned over time that my work environment has a great influence on my productivity and creativity. A welcoming environment encourages me to start writing and makes it easier to stay engaged. Since Obsidian essentially serves as my writing workplace, it needed to feel inviting and comfortable.
Related
Templates Are the Best Obsidian Workflow Hack You’re Not Using
Unleash the power of templates to transform your note-taking routine.
I tried using templates in Obsidian to make writing easier. I’ve tried AI workflows and a pile of plugins, but nothing stuck. It wasn’t until I stumbled onto a setup that was almost ridiculously simple that things finally clicked.
The Typewriter Experience in Obsidian
To me, writing with a pencil on paper provides unmatched tactile feedback. Feeling each letter form beneath my fingertips is satisfying. However, I’m considerably faster at typing than writing by hand, so reverting to paper wasn’t practical. What’s the next best thing to a pencil that offers a similarly tactile experience?
A typewriter, of course! I can’t realistically use a vintage typewriter today—it’s impractical and expensive—but I can certainly emulate one. Thankfully, Obsidian offered the next best thing.
The core of this setup is Obsidian’s Typewriter Scroll plugin. This plugin automatically scrolls your note down with every new line, always keeping your current line centered, similar to how traditional typewriters advance the paper with each keystroke.
The plugin also offers a Zen Mode, which I’ve activated. Zen Mode highlights only the current paragraph and fades the paragraphs above. This simple effect helps me focus solely on the words I’m typing, not what I’ve typed before.
To really sell the typewriter vibe, I installed the Typewriter theme. It makes Obsidian actually look and feel like a vintage typewriter. The theme does offer a dark mode, and normally, I’m all for dark mode in everything, but the theme’s default white-paper look works better here. Paper, after all, isn’t typically black.
Of course, aside from what’s on your computer, the physical environment also affects your work. For some reason, I churn out words much faster at a café than I do at home. Even stranger, my writing at the café somehow ends up sounding more academic.
Real typewriters don’t have sidebars, tab switchers, word counters, or menus. At first, I used Obsidian’s built-in full-screen mode (F11) to manually hide the sidebars. But buttons and other visual elements were still visible. My writing experience still wasn’t pure enough.
Predictably, there was an Obsidian plugin to handle this as well: the Fullscreen Focus Mode plugin. It takes the minimalist aesthetic even further by hiding almost every element save for the note you’re writing. It’s not completely distraction-free; elements like the note directory and scrollbar remain, but it’s still a significant improvement.
The Fullscreen mode plugin doesn’t add a button to the interface. You can use it by either setting up a hotkey for it or by calling it from the command palette.
Less Really Is More
Whenever I open my vault, I now genuinely feel the urge to write. If you’ve ever struggled to begin writing, you’ll understand how significant this change can be.
Obsidian offers a simple canvas by default, but allows you to create a sophisticated, fully customized workspace. This brings the constant feeling of having to improve your Obsidian workflow to use every plugin and feature you can. But, sophistication isn’t inherently better. Sometimes, less is more, and for me, this setup is what’s been working.
Related
6 Reasons Why Obsidian Is My Go-To App for Deep Research Projects
Deep research feels lighter with Obsidian on hand.
While I’m very happy with my minimalist Obsidian setup, I know that sometimes tranquility alone won’t be enough. In those moments, I turn to The Most Dangerous Writing App. This app stimulates creativity through a very different method–a perfect complement when minimalism alone doesn’t suffice.
I’m genuinely happy with my minimal Obsidian setup, but there are days when tranquility isn’t sufficient to spark creativity. For moments when I need adrenaline rather than calm, I switch to The Most Dangerous Writing App—it does the same but through very different means.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-27/Chill-in-summer-No-filter-needed-for-Pingshan-Canyon-1FlAMSqWx2M/img/e1f6e09eaf9e4b5388e319588f5ec8d6/e1f6e09eaf9e4b5388e319588f5ec8d6.jpeg'A view of Pingshan Canyon in Enshi Tujia and Miao Autonomous Prefecture, Hubei Province. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-27/Chill-in-summer-No-filter-needed-for-Pingshan-Canyon-1FlAMSqWx2M/img/e1f6e09eaf9e4b5388e319588f5ec8d6/e1f6e09eaf9e4b5388e319588f5ec8d6.jpeg'A view of Pingshan Canyon in Enshi Tujia and Miao Autonomous Prefecture, Hubei Province. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-27/Chill-in-summer-No-filter-needed-for-Pingshan-Canyon-1FlAMSqWx2M/img/e1f6e09eaf9e4b5388e319588f5ec8d6/e1f6e09eaf9e4b5388e319588f5ec8d6.jpeg'A view of Pingshan Canyon in Enshi Tujia and Miao Autonomous Prefecture, Hubei Province. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-27/Chill-in-summer-No-filter-needed-for-Pingshan-Canyon-1FlAMSqWx2M/img/e1f6e09eaf9e4b5388e319588f5ec8d6/e1f6e09eaf9e4b5388e319588f5ec8d6.jpeg'A view of Pingshan Canyon in Enshi Tujia and Miao Autonomous Prefecture, Hubei Province. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-27/Chill-in-summer-No-filter-needed-for-Pingshan-Canyon-1FlAMSqWx2M/img/e1f6e09eaf9e4b5388e319588f5ec8d6/e1f6e09eaf9e4b5388e319588f5ec8d6.jpeg'A view of Pingshan Canyon in Enshi Tujia and Miao Autonomous Prefecture, Hubei Province. /CGTN
Tucked away in the mountains of Hubei Province, Pingshan Canyon is a hidden gem of a destination for a summer holiday. Its cool, glassy emerald waters and dramatic cliffs create a surreal escape — and as you drift through the canyon, the mirror-like river makes you look as if you’re floating in the air.
By Ken Jennings Scribner: 480 pages, $21 If you buy books linked on our site, The Times may earn a commission from Bookshop.org, whose fees support independent bookstores.
Ken Jennings wants you to know he didn’t name his trivia game “Kennections.”
“It’s really an unpleasant name,” the “Jeopardy!” champion turned host says of the quizzes now published weekly by Mental Floss. “We have to lead with that. It was suggested by an editor at Parade Magazine, but it doesn’t look good or sound good.”
But Jennings loves the quizzes themselves, which are now collected (kellected?) in “The Complete Kennections.” The Simon & Schuster release, on shelves July 29, follows earlier Jennings books that included more writing. Those include: “Brainiac: Adventures in the Curious, Competitive, Compulsive World of Trivia Buffs,” “Maphead: Charting the Wide, Weird World of Geography Wonks,” “Because I Said So!: The Truth Behind the Myths, Tales, and Warnings Every Generation Passes Down to Its Kids” and “100 Places to See After You Die: A Travel Guide to the Afterlife.”
Jennings recently spoke about his books, AI and why trivia matters. This interview has been edited for length and clarity.
Was writing books always a goal?
I was an English major in college. I wanted to write and to teach, but writing didn’t seem like a practical choice. I was also doing a double major in computer science, and in 2000 it was absurdly easy to get a job at a friend’s startup, even if you were a terrible programmer, which I was.
Writing about geography and myths and fabled places of the afterlife all seem to make sense coming from the brain of a “Jeopardy!” champion.
It’s easy to imagine the same kid in an elementary school library, reading about these things in the World Book encyclopedia during a rainy recess. That’s my origin story. I was just a sponge for weird information. That’s my origin story right there.
I thought of “Jeopardy!” as a fun, crazy summer and did not think it would be my life, so I tried making each book less about “Jeopardy!” and trivia than the one before it.
Is the information in your books trivial, or do you think it’s important to get readers to understand geography and the way our culture passes down myths and tales?
I’m a believer that trivia is not just a bar pastime, or even a way for little Lisa Simpsons to get told they’re smart into adulthood. I always felt trivia was kind of a universal social good, a way to enjoy cultural literacy.
I feel I’m part of the last generation that had to justify having nerdy interests. It was kind of shameful and made you the punchline of jokes in movie comedies and stand-up. Today, it seems self-evident to everyone younger than us that, well, of course you would just be obsessive about lunchboxes or about “Battlestar Galactica” or fossils. That’s totally normalized, and it’s actually good.
But I’ve also been mourning the loss of generalists, people who knew a little bit about everything, which is what “Jeopardy!” celebrates, but it’s not fashionable. We live in a siloed society of specialists. And I really think we’d be better off if everybody knew a little bit about everything.
I do think it’s good to know trivia is not something that makes you better than other people. It doesn’t exist to show off or even to make you feel smarter about yourself. Ideally, it should bring people together and make the world more interesting and make you a more sparkling conversationalist.
“Jeopardy!” and your books strive to make learning facts fun. Is there a lesson there for educators?
I think that’s the beauty of trivia. I wrote a series of books for kids with amazing facts because I liked that kind of book when I was a kid. And you can see it in a classroom, when you see kids’ eyes light up about information and about serious subjects and about knowledge when it’s presented in a fun way, especially with narrative.
Narrative is the secret sauce. It just makes kids think the world is an amazing adventure and you just have to be curious and dig into it. But that gets beaten out of us, and then a lot of us at some point just specialize in one thing. You need to remind people that learning is not a chore. If it’s not fun, you’re doing it wrong. And trivia is very good at that.
Every good “Jeopardy!” clue tells a story in some way, saying, here’s why you should want to know this or here’s what this might have to do with life and the reason why this is not random minutia, which I think is a lot of people’s stereotype of trivia nerds. A trivia question can help you connect it to other things. Trivia is just an art of connections.
That’s certainly true in your “Kennections” book.
I grew up doing crosswords, riddles and rebuses. I’ve always liked trivia that rewards not just the recall of the right fact but has a little more mental clockwork involved so you have to solve some puzzles. You have to analyze the clue and figure out why it exists and what it’s asking or what it’s not asking, what was included, what was omitted. There’s a lot of analysis that can kind of lead you to the right answer by deduction, even if you don’t know the right fact off the top of your head. One half of your brain is just trying to recall these five facts, but you’ve got this other half that’s trying to figure it out and step back and take the big picture. And it might be something outside the box.
The art of it is finding five things that fit in the category but that can have double meanings: Commodore is both a computer and a member of a Lionel Richie combo.
You write that “Kennections” consumes your life — you go into a bagel store and wonder if you can build five questions out of the flavors. Is the problem that in your day-to-day life, you’re constantly seeing things and thinking things this way? Or is the problem that you can’t say this out loud because you’ll make your family crazy?
That’s something I learned early — that being this trivia-loving kid has the potential to be annoying. But my kids know what they’re getting from me at this point. And they both have the gene themselves. One is obsessed with Major League Baseball, and one is obsessed with the history of Disney theme parks, and they have encyclopedic knowledge every bit as awe-inspiring and freakish as I had as a kid. And I’m proud of that.
Do you worry about living in a culture that’s so polarized that facts aren’t even universally received and where AI takes over people’s need to be curious, allowing students to take shortcuts in learning?
I think an oligarch class is going to deliver us a combination of both, where the AI will not only create reliance on it but give us bad, counterfactual information about important issues. And it’s really something I take seriously. It’s really something we need to be pushing back on now.
You don’t want to trust an AI summary of a subject or AI’s take on an issue without understanding who controls that algorithm and why they want you to hear that information.
Tesla did not respond to WIRED’s request for comment on this article.
For Nagley, it’s too early to talk about Tesla failing to survive, “but the question is, can they thrive? One of the iron rules about the car industry is that there are model life cycles. People get bored of cars of one generation and want a new generation, or they go somewhere else,” he says. Customers “have decided that a lot of Tesla cars, including the ‘new’ Model Y, are looking very familiar.”
In an automotive world where China designs are advancing far faster than Western competitors, how cars look is becoming ever more crucial. For Jamie Tomkins, senior project designer at the Royal College of Art’s Intelligent Mobility Design Centre in London, an only slightly updated Model Y design is a missed opportunity for Tesla. “Just to update the front and rear and make it kind of Cybertruck-esque … it’s not enough,” he says.
Referring of the historical global success of the Y, Tomkins adds that it would have been prudent for Tesla to invest in a full redesign, “but they’ve done it on the cheap. Any brilliance that Musk may have shown before is now history.”
Frank Stephenson, the renowned auto designer who has worked for Ford, BMW, Ferrari, Maserati, Fiat, Lancia, Alfa Romeo, and McLaren, and is perhaps best known for redesigning the Mini, has a clear opinion. “They’ve got a great design team [at Tesla]. But the worst designer at Tesla is Musk. I know a few guys on the team. They’re very capable. It’s just that when Elon says ‘I want something’ he gets it, and it’s not to everybody’s taste—which is I’m sure what happened with Cybertruck.”
Model Y is “the most successful volume seller for the brand, and it’s doing well,” says Stephenson. “But it’s that philosophy of if it’s not broken, don’t fix it. But a lot of times, in the world of design, that is the wrong path. If you’re not moving forward, you’re moving back. So everybody’s full on, especially the Chinese right now.”
Stephenson feels that the addition of the light bars to the ‘new’ Model Y was a response to some of the more positive reactions to the Cybertruck—“so they borrowed that,” he says. “The one on the back has the wow factor. The light bar on the front is as boring as you can make a light bar.”
However, Musk appears to not merely be pinning hopes of extending the Model Y’s lifespan on just the recent refresh. “Grok is coming to Tesla vehicles very soon,” Elon Musk stated in a post on X earlier this month, though this only brings the EV brand in line with what the likes of Mercedes-Benz and Volkswagen have already done in adding AI assistants to their vehicles.
And just last week it was revealed that Tesla has a longer-wheelbase version of the Y, the Model Y L (a six-seater, 456 HP, dual-motor iteration of its electric SUV) coming to China customers to fill the demand for such vehicles there right now. Whether it eventually also lands in the US remains unconfirmed.
The biggest first-party Nintendo Switch 2 launch games are on sale for the first time at Woot as part of the retailer’s Video Game Super Sale. The Amazon-owned discount shop that has become one of the best places to get Nintendo game deals over the past year. Mario Kart World, The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild, and Tears of the Kingdom are discounted by eight bucks each. Though not massive discounts, these games are pretty unlikely to be featured in official Nintendo sales anytime soon.
Make sure to browse the much, much larger list of original Switch game deals below the trio of Switch 2 deals. Woot has dozens of first-party game deals, including multiple Zelda titles, a handful of Pokemon adventures, and a wide selection of Super Mario platformers and spin-offs.
Amazon briefly discounted Donkey Kong Bananza to $63 on July 25. We’ve included a link to it below, because it’s worth checking to see if it’s back on sale.
Since it’s bundled with the more popular of the two Switch 2 console options, many Switch 2 owners have a digital copy of Mario Kart World already. But if you are planning to buy the Pokemon Legends: Z-A Switch 2 Console Bundle, for instance, this deal is worth considering.
If you already own the original versions of Breath of the Wild and Tears of the Kingdom, it’s worth noting you can upgrade to the Switch 2 Editions for $10 each–and it’s definitely worth the upgrade fee. Both games have markedly improved performance on the new console.
Woot also has the original Nintendo Switch edition of Tears of the Kingdom for $48 (was $70), so you’d wind up paying $58 for the Switch 2 version after buying the upgrade pack. If you opt for this route, we’d recommend waiting until your Woot order arrives before buying the upgrade. There’s a chance you’ll get a copy from a different region. Though fully playable regardless, DLC for games must be purchased from the same region’s eShop.
Nintendo Switch Game Deals
Nintendo Switch deals at Woot
All of the Switch games in the list below are fully compatible with Switch 2, and some have free Switch 2 updates that improve performance and/or add new features. Many games without dedicated Switch 2 updates run noticeably better on Nintendo’s new console.
Super Mario Party Jamboree + Jamboree TV launched on Switch 2 last week for $80. The Switch version is on sale for $45 (was $60) at Woot. The upgrade pack for Switch 2 is $20, so you could potentially save $15 by purchasing the original and the upgrade separately. Just like with Tears of the Kingdom, you’ll want to ensure you get a US edition before buying the DLC from the US eShop.
There are some third-party games in the alphabetized list as well. Here’s just about every Switch game deal at Woot available now:
With Amazon carrying Nintendo games again, it seemed possible that the treasure trove of deals on Switch games at Woot would disappear. After all, the Amazon-owned discount shop’s catalog of Nintendo games expanded significantly throughout 2024. Amazon itself, meanwhile, didn’t have any Nintendo games for most of 2024. That remained true in 2025 until late June, a few weeks after the Switch 2 launch. But Amazon selling these Switch 2 games for full price (or $1 below) seemingly doesn’t impact Woot’s ability to offer deals like this–at least not at the moment.
In fact, the trio of Switch 2 game deals at Woot might indicate the offers will be even more noteworthy. All three Switch 2 games at Woot are North American editions with ESRB ratings. None of the store pages feature a disclaimer about region-free imports. This is interesting because Woot added that disclaimer to Switch game pages last year. Sometimes Woot sells imported editions from other regions. The games are always playable in English, and Nintendo Switch consoles can play games from any region. The Switch 2 is the same way–it isn’t region-locked, so you can import a game from Japan and it’ll work just fine.
At this time, Woot’s game deals for the original Switch still contain the disclaimer, but many of the store pages were created before Amazon started selling US editions of Nintendo games, accessories, and hardware. It’s possible original Switch games from Woot will always be US versions before long. For reference, when you buy a Switch game from Woot, it is shipped from an Amazon warehouse and often arrives in Amazon-branded packaging. Purchases can be made using your Amazon account.
A major new study led by the University of Sydney suggests that walking 7000 steps a day offers similar health benefits across several outcomes as walking 10,000.
il 7000 steps, at which point the benefits began to taper off
A major new study led by the University of Sydney suggests that walking 7000 steps a day offers similar health benefits across several outcomes as walking 10,000.
Led by Professor Melody Ding from the School of Public Health, the study was published in The Lancet Public Healthand analysed data from 57 studies from 2014 to 2025 that were conducted in more than ten countries including Australia, USA, UK and Japan.
The largest and most comprehensive review to date, the researchers examined the impact that different daily step counts have on the chance of dying from cardiovascular disease and cancer, and developing diseases such as cancer, type 2 diabetes, dementia and depression. Professor Melody Ding says the findings offer a more achievable benchmark for people who struggle to meet traditional exercise guidelines.
“Aiming for 7000 steps is a realistic goal based on our findings, which assessed health outcomes in a range of areas that hadn’t been looked at before,” said Professor Ding.
“However, for those who cannot yet achieve 7000 steps a day, even small increases in step counts, such as increasing from 2000 to 4000 steps a day, are associated with significant health gain.
“We know daily step count is linked to living longer, but we now also have evidence that walking at least 7000 steps a day can significantly improve eight major health outcomes — including reducing risk of cardiovascular disease, dementia and depressive symptoms.”
Health benefits at different step counts
The researchers looked at studies in which participants wore step counting devices, such as pedometers, accelerometers and fitness trackers, to track their daily step counts. Starting at 2000 steps, experts compared the health outcomes of people walking more steps a day at 1000 step increments to see whether there was any difference in the risk of early death or other major diseases.
When compared with 2000 steps a day, researchers found that:
Walking 7000 steps a day reduced the risk of death by 47 percent, which was almost identical to the benefit seen at walking 10,000 steps per day.
Dementia risk dropped by 38 percent from walking 7000 steps a day, with only a 7 percent extra reduction at 10,000 steps.
Risk of type 2 diabetes fell by 22 percent from walking 10,000 steps a day and reduced to 27 percent at 12,000 steps.
Significant health improvements were seen when people increased their average daily steps from 2000 to between 5000 and 7000 steps.
“For people who are already active, 10,000 steps a day is great,” said Dr Katherine Owen, co-author and chief analyst of the study from the School of Public Health. “But beyond 7000 steps, the extra benefits for most of the health outcomes we looked at were modest.”
The researchers are working with the Australian government to use the evidence from this study to inform future updates to physical activity guidelines.
“Our research helps to shift the focus from perfection to progress. Even small increases in daily movement can lead to meaningful health improvements,” said Professor Ding.
Experts are calling for future studies to explore how step goals should vary based on age, health status and region, and to include diverse populations and longer-term data to strengthen the evidence. Professor Ding says this kind of detail is rare and will be useful for health practitioners when tailoring advice for patients.
HyperVerge is a bootstrapped, fast-growing AI company building identity infrastructure for the world. We power 1B+ verifications across 40+ countries, trusted by 300+ clients like Jio, CRED, Swiggy, SBI, HDFC AMC, Airbus, and Grab.
Job Details
Location: Bengaluru (In-Person)
Duration: 6 Months | Full-Time | Paid
Start Date: Immediate
Stipend: INR 25K/month
Educational Qualification – Fourth or Final Year of BA.LLB/BBA.LLB/LLM
Eligibility
Basic Qualifications:
Fourth or Final Year of BA.LLB/BBA.LLB/LLM from a reputed law school.
Excellent legal research and writing skills.
A deep interest in technology law, corporate governance, and emerging compliance frameworks.
Strong command of Microsoft Office tools and comfort with collaborative platforms (Google Suite, Notion, etc).
High attention to detail and ownership mindset.
Preferred Experience:
Prior internships with corporate law firms or in-house legal departments.
Exposure to technology contracts, data privacy frameworks, or intellectual property issues.
Experience navigating startup, SaaS, or AI company environments is a plus.
Key Responsibilities
Legal Research & Policy Awareness
Conduct in-depth legal research on evolving areas like AI governance, data protection (GDPR, CCPA), intellectual property, and tech compliance.
Track global regulatory developments affecting SaaS, fintech, and AI industries.
Translate dense legal concepts into actionable insights for internal stakeholders.
Contract Lifecycle Management
Assist in reviewing, redlining, and managing NDAs, MSAs, SaaS agreements, partnership contracts, and more.
Maintain an organized repository of all contractual documents, ensuring version control and timely renewals.
Collaborate with business teams to enable frictionless, compliant deal-making.
Compliance & Regulatory Readiness
Work on internal compliance audits, risk assessments, and data privacy initiatives.
Prepare filings and documentation related to licensing, corporate governance, and international business regulations.
Help align internal processes with evolving laws like the Digital Personal Data Protection Act (DPDPA), GDPR, etc.
Special Projects & Legal Ops
Support strategic legal initiatives that directly impact product, people, and partnerships.
Handle internal documentation, reporting, and maintain knowledge bases.
Take ownership of ad hoc legal and business ops assignments.
How to Apply?
Interested candidates can apply online via the link given at the end of the post.
Disclaimer: Charging money from students for internships or from job applicants is unethical and can result in blacklisting. We strongly discourage requesting any kind of payment from interns, including processing fees or charges for certificates. If you have any concerns, please contact us at [email protected]
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/astrology/horoscope-today-daily-astrological-predictions-for-july-28-2025-family-interference-may-push-your-boundaries-101753599783356.html” on this server.
Today, a brief rundown of news involving Rocket Pharmaceuticals and Atara Biotherapeutics, as well as updates from Abivax, Gate Bioscience and Matchpoint Therapeutics that you may have missed.
Rocket Pharmaceuticals is laying off approximately 30% of its workforce and focusing resources on gene therapies for three inherited heart conditions, the company said Thursday. Rocket expects the cuts will reduce its operating expenses by one-quarter, which, together with existing cash reserves and the potential sale of a regulatory fast pass it might receive in the future, should help keep the company afloat into the second quarter of 2027. The Food and Drug Administration last year rejected an approval application for Rocket’s gene therapy Kresladi, which the company hopes to resubmit. Rocket said it anticipates delays in advancing two other programs for Fanconi anemia and and pyruvate kinase deficiency. — Ned Pagliarulo
Atara Biotherapeutics and partner Pierre Fabre Pharmaceuticals are taking a second shot at FDA approval of their T cell immunotherapy tab-cel, announcing Thursday that the agency has accepted their resubmission after rejecting an initial attempt over manufacturing in January. The FDA will decide on approval by Jan. 10, Atara said. Tab-cel was developed for previously treated adults and children who have post-transplant lymphoproliferative disease that’s positive for the Epstein-Barr virus. — Ned Pagliarulo
Abivax expects to raise at least $650 million via a sale of its American Depositary shares that it priced Thursday. The secondary stock offering follows the company’s announcement this week of Phase 3 study results for an ulcerative colitis drug that impressed analysts and investors. Should the investment banks underwriting the offering exercise their options to purchase additional stock, Abivax could bring in nearly $750 million, which would be some ten times its current cash holdings. It expects the new funds will give it operating runway through 2027 and support further testing of the drug, obefazimod, in inflammatory bowel disease. — Ned Pagliarulo
Gate Bioscience, a California-based biotechnology company, announced Thursday that it has entered into collaboration and licensing agreement with Eli Lilly. The deal includes an upfront payment, equity investment, and could also hold potential milestone and royalty payouts. A Gate spokesperson said the fresh funding provides more than a year of runway for the company and, all told, the deal value could reach up to $856 million. The company is backed by well-known life sciences investors like Versant Ventures, a16z, Arch Venture Partners and Alphabet’s venture capital arm. It aims to create “molecular gates,” a new class of medicines designed to stop cells from secreting disease-causing proteins. Through their collaboration, Lilly and Gate hope to identify therapies that can eliminate “specific difficult-to-drug proteins” and thereby provide novel ways to treat diseases with “high unmet medical need.” — Jacob Bell
Privately held Matchpoint Therapeutics is getting validation of its drug research from Novartis, which has agreed to pay the Watertown, Massachusetts-based biotech as much as $60 million in upfront and research funding fees. Under the deal, Matchpoint is responsible for advancing an undisclosed program through preclinical testing, at which point Novartis holds an option to exclusively license it. Matchpoint specializes in drugs that work by binding covalently to their target, and is taking aim at an unnamed transcription factor involved in inflammatory disease. — Ned Pagliarulo
GSK will have to wait a little longer to learn whether its multiple myeloma drug Blenrep can make a return to the U.S. market. The FDA was set to decide on approval by July 23, but extended its review by three months to “review additional information” the company provided to support its application. Blenrep’s new decision date is Oct. 23. An advisory committee voted last week that GSK’s trial data did not prove a favorable benefit-risk balance for the patients the company hopes to treat. — Ned Pagliarulo
Ever wondered how Warren Buffett went from selling Coca-Cola bottles for a nickel as a seven-year-old in Omaha to sitting atop the Berkshire Hathaway empire with over $1,070 billion in assets?
There are three key habits that helped him get there, and they’re habits everyone can adopt.
1. Never Stop Learning
In Berkshire Hathaway’s 50th annual letter to shareholders, the late Charlie Munger highlighted one of Buffett’s most important traits:
“Buffett’s decision to limit his activities to a few kinds and to maximize his attention to them, and to keep doing so for 50 years, was a lollapalooza.
Buffett succeeded for the same reason Roger Federer became good at tennis.
Buffett was, in effect, using the winning method of the famous basketball coach, John Wooden.”
Buffett learned what he was good at, stuck with it, and kept honing his skills.
Malcolm Gladwell, in his book Outliers, suggests that to become an expert, you need some inherent skill but also at least 10,000 hours of practice.
It’s not just about being good; it’s about the practice that makes you good.
Take Bill Gates, who spent countless nights learning to code, or The Beatles, who played in Hamburg bars for hours each day.
Similarly, Buffett once said:
“I insist on a lot of time being spent, almost every day, to just sit and think.
This is very uncommon in American business. I read and think.
So I do more reading and thinking, and make fewer impulse decisions, than most people in business. I do it because I like this kind of life.”
No matter where life takes you, remember this: consistent practice and continual learning are key to getting closer to your goals.
2. Patience Is the Key to Success
In today’s fast-paced world, it’s easy to get caught up in the rush.
Buffett’s patience is one of his most admirable qualities.
In 2003, he mentioned that among his largest holdings, the last time he changed his position in any was:
Coca-Cola in 1994
American Express in 1998
Gillette in 1989
Washington Post in 1973
Moody’s in 2000
Brokers might not love him for it, but his patience pays off. In his 2010 letter to shareholders, Buffett said:
“We will need both good performance from our current businesses and more major acquisitions.
We’re prepared.
Our elephant gun has been reloaded, and my trigger finger is itchy.”
Despite having a cash pile, Buffett waits patiently for the right opportunity.
While quick decisions are sometimes necessary, more often than not, patience leads to better outcomes.
Whether it’s buying batteries on sale or buying the company that makes them, patience can make all the difference.
3. Give Credit Where Credit Is Due
Buffett is quick to praise those around him.
In 2009, he said of Ajit Jain, head of the Berkshire Hathaway Reinsurance Division:
“If Charlie, I, and Ajit are ever in a sinking boat – and you can only save one of us – swim to Ajit.”
In his 2013 letter to shareholders, Buffett praised Ted Weschler and Todd Combs, portfolio managers at Berkshire Hathaway:
“In a year in which most equity managers found it impossible to outperform the S&P 500, both Todd Combs and Ted Weschler handily did so. Each now runs a portfolio exceeding $7 billion. They’ve earned it.
I must again confess that their investments outperform the mine. (Charlie says I should add “by a lot.”) If such humiliating comparisons continue, I’ll have no choice but to cease talking about them.
Todd and Ted have also created significant value for you in several matters unrelated to their portfolio activities.
Their contributions are just beginning: Both men have Berkshire blood in their veins.”
And in 2005, he credited Tony Nicely, CEO of Geico:
“Credit Geico – and its brilliant CEO, Tony Nicely – for our stellar insurance results in a disaster-ridden year.… Last year, Geico gained market share, earned commendable profits, and strengthened its brand. If you have a new son or grandson in 2006, name him Tony.”
Buffett, worth $128 billion, understands the value of others’ work.
Recognizing and appreciating those who help us along the way is crucial for success.
Adopting these three habits – continuous learning, patience, and giving credit – can make a significant difference in your path to success.
Whether you’re an investor or pursuing other goals, these principles will guide you toward a more fruitful journey.
Setting up my soundbar was relatively straightforward: I simply connected it to the TV via Bluetooth, and it worked right away. However, to achieve the best sound, I found that it needed to be optimized to suit my TV—and one setting is especially crucial.
The One Setting That’s Affecting Your Soundbar Audio Quality
Jack Mitchell/MakeUseOf
Soundbars typically support various audio formats, so if your TV sends a signal that the soundbar doesn’t handle well, it can cause issues such as latency (a lag in sound and dialogue), missing sound effects, or poor audio quality. It can also cause improper decoding of audio formats, such as DTS or Dolby Digital, resulting in muffled dialogue or poor bass response, all because the correct switch needs to be toggled!
To get the best audio performance from your soundbar, the main setting to adjust is the audio output format in your TV’s audio settings menu. The most common audio formats are PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) and Bitstream. Both these formats transmit a digital audio signal to your soundbar, but they work in different ways.
PCM vs. Bitstream: What’s the Difference?
To put it simply, PCM and Bitstream each refer to the method by which digital audio is transmitted from your TV or media player. The difference lies in where the decoding takes place.
PCM means that your TV decodes the audio before sending it to your soundbar.
Bitstream sends compressed audio to your soundbar, which decodes it internally.
So with a PCM setup, your TV does all the hard work. This is usually fine, provided it has a strong audio processor (which my midrange Samsung model doesn’t). Soundbars, on the other hand, are built purely for audio, so by selecting Bitstream—or in my case, “Auto”—you are likely to get better decoding, especially if you are using advanced audio formats.
For most home theater setups, including my own, Bitstream (or Auto) is usually the best option, particularly if your soundbar supports the latest surround sound formats.
Bitstream typically plays true 5.1 and 7.1 surround sound more effectively from streaming apps and media players.
Bitstream offers better audio decoding, as even some Dolby and DTS-ready TVs downmix surround sound (convert it to fewer channels) before passing it to the soundbar. In contrast, Bitstream sends the raw signal for the soundbar to process.
Bitstream is required for spatial audio formats, such as Dolby Atmos and DTS:X, to provide a full complement of object-based audio effects.
Additionally, if your soundbar supports HDMI-ARC or eARC connectivity, Bitstream enables better processing of high-bitrate audio formats. Conversely, PCM might struggle to handle uncompressed data due to bandwidth constraints.
Bitstream might usually be the preferred choice, but PCM has its place. Here are a few scenarios where PCM might be the better option:
For simpler setups that don’t support advanced audio formats like Dolby Atmos, PCM ensures compatibility.
Some TVs may have limitations when processing Bitstream, resulting in latency. In these cases, having PCM decode the audio on the TV might be the better option.
Gamers may find that PCM is more effective when using their Xbox or PlayStation. In some instances, using pre-decoded audio can reduce lag and preserve quality.
As a general rule, if you’re not using your soundbar for surround sound formats or if your soundbar has issues while the TV is in Bitstream mode, try switching to PCM to see if this is more effective.
Other Settings to Consider for Optimal Sound Quality
Switching your TV’s audio output format from PCM to Bitstream (or vice versa) can resolve many performance issues. Still, several other factors also affect sound quality, including the shape of your living space. Consider tweaking the following options for optimal soundbar performance.
Many soundbars have EQ presets for movies, music, sports, and custom profiles. It’s worth experimenting to achieve the best results.
If speech sounds muffled or is getting drowned in the mix, try switching on dialog enhancement in your audio settings.
Some soundbars have manual EQ controls for lower and higher frequencies. Try adjusting these if your overall sound tends to be boomy or tinny.
Some soundbars simulate surround sound with virtual surround or 3D sound modes. Even if your soundbar doesn’t support true surround sound, it’s worth activating these for a more immersive experience.
I now know it’s essential to check a TV’s audio format settings when setting up a soundbar or channeling audio from a different device, such as a games console. If your current soundbar sounds underwhelming or experiences performance issues, try switching between PCM and Bitstream (or Auto) to see if it improves the sound quality. Simply toggling this one switch might unlock clearer dialog, fix any latency issues, or deliver more dynamic sound effects, all within your existing audiovisual setup.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-27/Tianjin-jianbing-guozi-Savor-the-authentic-taste-from-its-origin-1FdnnhObpF6/img/846e276a8e3449bcaf8f7db1b8d0948a/846e276a8e3449bcaf8f7db1b8d0948a.jpeg'A woman makes jianbing guozi at a street stall in Tianjin. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-27/Tianjin-jianbing-guozi-Savor-the-authentic-taste-from-its-origin-1FdnnhObpF6/img/846e276a8e3449bcaf8f7db1b8d0948a/846e276a8e3449bcaf8f7db1b8d0948a.jpeg'A woman makes jianbing guozi at a street stall in Tianjin. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-27/Tianjin-jianbing-guozi-Savor-the-authentic-taste-from-its-origin-1FdnnhObpF6/img/846e276a8e3449bcaf8f7db1b8d0948a/846e276a8e3449bcaf8f7db1b8d0948a.jpeg'A woman makes jianbing guozi at a street stall in Tianjin. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-27/Tianjin-jianbing-guozi-Savor-the-authentic-taste-from-its-origin-1FdnnhObpF6/img/846e276a8e3449bcaf8f7db1b8d0948a/846e276a8e3449bcaf8f7db1b8d0948a.jpeg'A woman makes jianbing guozi at a street stall in Tianjin. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-27/Tianjin-jianbing-guozi-Savor-the-authentic-taste-from-its-origin-1FdnnhObpF6/img/846e276a8e3449bcaf8f7db1b8d0948a/846e276a8e3449bcaf8f7db1b8d0948a.jpeg'A woman makes jianbing guozi at a street stall in Tianjin. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-27/Tianjin-jianbing-guozi-Savor-the-authentic-taste-from-its-origin-1FdnnhObpF6/img/846e276a8e3449bcaf8f7db1b8d0948a/846e276a8e3449bcaf8f7db1b8d0948a.jpeg'A woman makes jianbing guozi at a street stall in Tianjin. /CGTN
When in Tianjin, be sure to try jianbing guozi, a savory pancake roll filled with crispy fried dough sticks. A fresh mung bean batter is spread thin on a griddle. Then, an egg is cracked over it and crispy fried dough sticks are added. The pancake is topped with a special blend of soybean paste and fermented tofu. Everything is made to order at bustling street stalls, and each bite embraces the local flavor and charm of the city.
Twelve years after a breakup that didn’t stick — and one year shy of the 20th anniversary of its biggest album — My Chemical Romance is on the road this summer playing 2006’s “The Black Parade” from beginning to end.
The tour, which stopped Saturday night at Dodger Stadium for the first of two concerts, doesn’t finally manifest the long-anticipated reunion of one of emo’s most influential bands; My Chem reconvened in 2019 and has been performing, pandemic-related delays aside, fairly consistently since then (including five nights at Inglewood’s Kia Forum in 2022 and two headlining appearances at Las Vegas’ When We Were Young festival).
Yet only now is the group visiting sold-out baseball parks — and without even the loss leader of new music to help drum up interest in its show.
“Thank you for being here tonight,” Gerard Way, My Chem’s 48-year-old frontman, told the crowd of tens of thousands at Saturday’s gig. “This is our first stadium tour, which is a wild thing to say.” To mark the occasion, he pointed out, his younger brother Mikey was playing a bass guitar inscribed with the Dodgers’ logo.
So how did this darkly witty, highly theatrical punk band reach a new peak so deep into its comeback? Certainly it’s benefiting from an overall resurgence of rock after years dominated by pop and hip-hop; My Chem’s Dodger Stadium run coincides this weekend with the return of the once-annual Warped Tour in Long Beach after a six-year dormancy.
Then again, Linkin Park — to name another rock group huge in the early 2000s — recently moved a planned Dodger Stadium date to Inglewood’s much smaller Intuit Dome, presumably as a result of lower-than-expected ticket sales.
The endurance of My Chemical Romance, which formed in New Jersey before eventually relocating to Los Angeles, feels rooted more specifically in its obsession with comic books and in Gerard Way’s frank lyrics about depression and his flexible portrayal of gender and sexuality. (“GERARD WAY TRANSED MY GENDER,” read a homemade-looking T-shirt worn Saturday by one fan.) Looking back now, it’s clear the band’s blend of drama and emotion — of world-building and bloodletting — set a crucial template for a generation or two of subsequent acts, from bands like Twenty One Pilots to rappers like the late Juice Wrld to a gloomy pop singer like Sombr, whose viral hit “Back to Friends” luxuriates in a kind of glamorous misery.
Gerard Way, from left, Mikey Way and Ray Toro perform as My Chemical Romance.
(Etienne Laurent / For The Times)
For much of its audience, My Chem’s proudly sentimental music contains the stuff of identity — one reason thousands showed up to Dodger Stadium wearing elaborate outfits inspired by the band’s detailed iconography.
In 2006, the quadruple-platinum “Black Parade” LP arrived as a concept album about a dying cancer patient; Way and his bandmates dressed in military garb that made them look like members of Satan’s marching band. Nearly two decades later, the wardrobe remained the same as the band muscled through the album’s 14 tracks, though the narrative had transformed into a semi-coherent Trump-era satire of political authoritarianism: My Chemical Romance, in this telling a band from the fictional nation of Draag, was performing for the delectation of the country’s vain and ruthless dictator, who sat stony-faced on a throne near the pitcher’s mound flanked by a pair of soldiers.
The theater of it all was fun — important (if a bit crude), you could even say, given how young much of the band’s audience is and how carefully so many modern pop stars avoid taking political stands that could threaten to alienate some number of their fans. After “Welcome to the Black Parade,” a bearded guy playing a government apparatchik handed out Dodger Dogs to the band and to the dictator; Way waited to find out whether the dictator approved of the hot dog before he decided he liked it too.
Fans react as My Chemical Romance performs.
(Etienne Laurent / For The Times)
Yet what really mattered was how the great songs still are: the deranged rockabilly stomp of “Teenagers,” the Eastern European oom-pah of “Mama,” the eruption of “Welcome to the Black Parade” from fist-pumping glam-rock processional to breakneck thrash-punk tantrum.
Indeed, the better part of Saturday’s show came after the complete “Black Parade” performance when My Chem — the Way brothers along with guitarists Frank Iero and Ray Toro, drummer Jarrod Alexander and keyboardist Jamie Muhoberac — reappeared sans costumes on a smaller secondary stage to “play some jams,” as Gerard Way put it, from elsewhere in the band’s catalog. (Its most recent studio album came out in 2010, though it’s since issued a smattering of archived material.)
Gerard Way of My Chemical Romance performs.
(Etienne Laurent / For The Times)
“I’m Not Okay (I Promise)” was blistering atomic pop, while “Summertime” thrummed with nervy energy; “Na Na Na (Na Na Na Na Na Na Na Na Na)” was as delightfully snotty as its title suggests. The band reached back for what Way called his favorite My Chem song — “Vampires Will Never Hurt You,” from the group’s 2002 debut — and performed, evidently for the first time, a chugging power ballad called “War Beneath the Rain,” which Way recalled cutting in a North Hollywood studio “before the band broke up” as My Chem tried to make a record that never came out.
The group closed, as it often does, with its old hit “Helena,” a bleak yet turbo-charged meditation on what the living owe the dead, and as he belted the chorus, Way dropped to his knees in an apparent mix of exhaustion, despair, gratitude — maybe a bit of befuddlement too. He was leaving no feeling unfelt.
For crypto firms, the vibe shift is a blessing. Although they have comparatively few problems accessing overseas bank accounts—often in the Cayman Islands or Switzerland—in lieu of a US bank account, they are often unable to earn yield on deposits or transact seamlessly with US-based counterparties, and sometimes they incur high account fees. Neither do they benefit from deposit insurance under the US Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, which guarantees up to $250,000 per account holder.
Though some of the big-name banks, like JP Morgan, are trialing crypto technologies for internal use, many remain reluctant to supply accounts to crypto businesses, sources say. “The banks that John Doe has heard of have nothing to do with crypto,” claims David McIntyre, COO at DoubleZero, a startup developing networking infrastructure specific to crypto networks.
But that has created an opening for smaller fintechs to expand their deposit bases by scooping up clients in the crypto industry. “Basically, founders these days are going with a Mercury or Meow,” claims Khan. “Meow has been super aggressive in terms of reaching out to founders anytime they see a fundraising announcement.”
These fintechs tend to market themselves as crypto-forward—providing integrated services like stablecoin transfers—and far less stuffy than their traditional counterparts; Meow’s roughly 30-year-old CEO, Brandon Arvanaghi, runs his LinkedIn profile a bit like a TikTok account, complete with video skits.
“These American fintechs have much better technology than random bank X in the Cayman Islands or Switzerland. They have better platforms, better support—better everything,” says McIntyre.
Mercury declined an interview for this article. Meow and Brex did not respond to interview requests.
In practice, these fintechs act as a software layer on top of a traditional bank that holds a US license; they handle the user interface and customer acquisition, while the partner bank manages the deposits. Meow partners with Grasshopper Bank; Brex and Mercury partner with several banks. This model was adopted widely in the US during the Covid-19 pandemic, which forced banks to find ways to reach customers digitally.
“In its best form, it’s a way for banks to get access to better technology,” says Craig Timm, senior director of anti-money-laundering at ACAMS, which runs finance-related certification programs. Timm worked previously as a financial crime specialist at Bank of America and the US Department of Justice. “For the fintechs, it lets them focus on the things they’re good at—building, marketing, reaching new customers—without having to get a banking license, which can be difficult and expensive.”
But the arrangement also typically requires the fintech to follow ground rules set by the partner bank, including parameters around the types of client they are allowed to serve. Mercury, for instance, is unable to provide accounts to crypto companies that take custody of customer funds, including exchanges, a spokesperson told WIRED.
“They’re putting a skin on top of someone else’s bank,” says McIntyre, who previously worked at Brex. “They have to abide by the bank’s underwriting requirements, regulations, and determination about what customers to accept.”
8BitDo’s reimagined Nintendo 64 wireless controller launches next Wednesday, July 30. The controller manufacturer confirmed the release date in an email to GameSpot. The 8BitDo 64 Bluetooth Controller was revealed alongside the Analogue 3D last October. Analogue’s 4K Nintendo 64 has been delayed twice, and since the new gamepad was designed in collaboration with the retro hardware manufacturer, the 8BitDo 64 Bluetooth has been pushed back twice, too.
Though designed with the Analogue 3D in mind, the controller supports PC, Nintendo Switch, and Android. If you’re a Nintendo Switch Online + Expansion Pack subscriber, the new controller will offer a cool new way to play classic N64 games. You can preorder the 8BitDo 64 Bluetooth Controller for $40 in white or black at Amazon.
We’ve reached out to 8BitDo about Switch 2 compatibility. A handful of the manufacturer’s controllers received firmware updates when the Switch 2 launched in June. Considering that 8BitDo’s newest Switch controllers–Ultimate 2 Bluetooth, All-Button Arcade, the upcoming Pro 3 Bluetooth–support Switch 2, we would be surprised if the 64 Controller doesn’t work on Nintendo’s new console.
The 8BitDo 64 Controller is a wireless Bluetooth gamepad that sports all the buttons you’d expect from a device designed to play N64 games but reorganized into a contemporary form factor that resembles the 8BitDo Ultimate Controller series.
The reworked shape moves the joystick to the left side of controller. This is a Hall Effect joystick with a metal ring, so it should feel as smooth and precise as 8BitDo’s other controllers with the same tech. Hall Effect sensors eliminate the risk of stick drift, and metal rings hold up better over time.
8BitDo recreated the N64 control stick’s surface by adding three circular ridges. Thankfully, it has a rubberized stick cap instead of the original’s hard plastic surface. 8BitDo also included the octagonal stick gate, which Nintendo implemented on the N64 controller to mimic an eight-way D-pad. The actual D-pad on the new controller is in a new location, too, but it still sits in a recessed pocket.
The large A/B buttons and four C buttons match the N64 layout and are the same size/shape. The should buttons and triggers have been redesigned to match modern expectations. The shoulder buttons are labeled R and L, just like the N64 controller, while both of the top triggers are Z buttons. The N64’s Z button was on the back of the middle prong. The dual triggers will be helpful if you want to use the controller for games outside of the N64 library.
The large start button returns and is joined by three buttons found on many 8BitDo Switch controllers: minus (select), 8BitDo (home), and Turbo. Once you assign the turbo function to a button, pressing and holding it is registered as repeated taps.
You can fully remap the controls and make other adjustments using the 8BitDo Ultimate Software desktop or mobile app. It has two different input modes: S-Input (Switch) and D-Input. Though it has built-in rumble motors, vibration is limited to Analogue 3D and Switch.
The black edition of the 8BitDo 64 launches the same day, but Amazon currently estimates a longer wait for the black controller. The date will vary based on your location, but it says August 11 for us (as of July 25). It’s possible your order will arrive sooner, as Amazon’s estimates are often fairly conservative.
The Nintendo 64 controller isn’t 8BitDo’s only exciting upcoming release. On August 12, 8BitDo will launch the Pro 3 Bluetooth Gamepad for $70. The highly customizable retro-inspired wireless controller is compatible with Nintendo Switch 2, Switch, PC, Apple devices, and Android. Check out our 8BitDo Pro 3 preorder guide for more details.
What is the Analogue 3D?
The Analogue 3D is the premium retro hardware manufacturer’s next FPGA console. Unfortunately, preorders for the $250 console sold out last October, so interested retro gamers will want to keep an eye on potential restocks after the console launches in late August.
The console lets you play your original N64 game cartridges with hardware-accurate emulation and 100% compatibility in up to 4K resolution. The console has four controller ports for real Nintendo 64 three-prong controllers or third-party wired controllers. It does not come with a controller, though, so you’ll want to grab an 8BitDo 64 Bluetooth Controller or another controller or two.
An analysis of studies incorporating data from almost 30 million people has highlighted the role that air pollution – including that coming from car exhaust emissions – plays in increased risk of dementia.
Dementias such as Alzheimer’s disease are estimated to affect more than 57.4 million people worldwide, a number that is expected to almost triple to 152.8 million cases by 2050. The impacts on the individuals, families and caregivers and society at large are immense.
While there are some indications that the prevalence of dementia is decreasing in Europe and North America, suggesting that it may be possible to reduce the risk of the disease at a population level, elsewhere the picture is less promising.
Air pollution has recently been identified as a risk factor for dementia, with several studies pointing the finger at a number of pollutants. However, the strength of evidence and ability to determine a causal effect has been varied.
In a paper published on July 24 in The Lancet Planetary Health, a team led by researchers at the Medical Research Council (MRC) Epidemiology Unit, University of Cambridge, carried out a systematic review and meta-analysis of existing scientific literature to examine this link further. This approach allowed them to bring together studies that on their own may not provide sufficient evidence, and which sometimes disagree with each other, to provide more robust overarching conclusions.
In total, the researchers included 51 studies, including data from more than 29 million participants, mostly from high-income countries. Of these, 34 papers were included in the meta-analysis: 15 originated in North America, 10 in Europe, seven in Asia, and two in Australia.
The researchers found a positive and statistically-significant association between three types of air pollutant and dementia. These were:
Particulate matter with a diameter of 2.5 microns or less(PM2.5), a pollutant made up of tiny particles small enough that they can be inhaled deep into the lungs. These particles come from several sources, including vehicle emissions, power plants, industrial processes, wood burning stoves and fireplaces, and construction dust. They also form in the atmosphere because of complex chemical reactions involving other pollutants such as sulphur dioxide and nitrogen oxides. The particles can stay in the air for a long time and travel a long way from where they were produced.
Nitrogen dioxide (NO2), one of the key pollutants that arise from burning fossil fuels. It is found in vehicle exhaust, especially diesel exhaust, and industrial emissions, as well as those from gas stoves and heaters. Exposure to high concentrations of nitrogen dioxide can irritate the respiratory system, worsening and inducing conditions like asthma and reducing lung function.
Soot, from sources such as vehicle exhaust emissions and burning wood. It can trap heat and affect the climate. When inhaled, it can penetrate deep into the lungs, aggravating respiratory diseases and increasing the risk of heart problems.
According to the researchers, for every 10 micrograms per cubic meter (μg/m³) of PM2.5, an individual’s relative risk of dementia would increase by 17%. The average roadside measurement for PM2.5 in Central London in 2023 was 10 μg/m³.
For every 10 μg/m3 of NO2, the relative risk increased by 3%. The average roadside measurement for NO2 in Central London in 2023 was 33 µg/m³.
For each 1 μg/m³ of soot as found in PM2.5, the relative risk increased by 13%. Across the UK, annual mean soot concentrations measured at select roadside locations in 2023 were 0.93 μg/m³ in London, 1.51 μg/m³ in Birmingham and 0.65 μg/m³ Glasgow.
Senior author Dr Haneen Khreis from the MRC Epidemiology Unit said: “Epidemiological evidence plays a crucial role in allowing us to determine whether or not air pollution increases the risk of dementia and by how much. Our work provides further evidence to support the observation that long-term exposure to outdoor air pollution is a risk factor for the onset of dementia in previously healthy adults.
“Tackling air pollution can deliver long-term health, social, climate, and economic benefits. It can reduce the immense burden on patients, families, and caregivers, while easing pressure on overstretched healthcare systems.”
Several mechanisms have been proposed to explain how air pollution may cause dementia, primarily involving inflammation in the brain and oxidative stress (a chemical process in the body that can cause damage to cells, proteins, and DNA). Both oxidative stress and inflammation play a well-established role in the onset and progression of dementia. Air pollution is thought to trigger these processes through direct entry to the brain or via the same mechanisms underlying lung and cardiovascular diseases. Air pollution can also enter circulation from the lungs and travel to solid organs, initiating local and wide-spread inflammation.
The researchers point out that the majority of people included in the published studies were white and living in high-income countries, even though marginalised groups tend to have a higher exposure to air pollution. Given that studies have suggested that reducing air pollution exposure appears to be more beneficial at reducing the risk of early death for marginalised groups, they call for future work to urgently ensure better and more adequate representation across ethnicities and low- and middle-income countries and communities.
Joint first author Clare Rogowski, also from the MRC Epidemiology Unit, said: “Efforts to reduce exposure to these key pollutants are likely to help reduce the burden of dementia on society. Stricter limits for several pollutants are likely to be necessary targeting major contributors such as the transport and industry sectors. Given the extent of air pollution, there is an urgent need for regional, national, and international policy interventions to combat air pollution equitably.”
Further analysis revealed that while exposure to these pollutants increased the risk of Alzheimer’s disease, the effect seemed stronger for vascular dementia, a type of dementia caused by reduced blood flow to the brain. Around 180,000 people in the UK are thought to be affected by this type of dementia. However, as there were only a small number of studies that examined this difference, the researchers did not class it as statistically significant.
Joint first author Dr Christiaan Bredell from the University of Cambridge and North West Anglia NHS Foundation Trust said: “These findings underscore the need for an interdisciplinary approach to dementia prevention. Preventing dementia is not just the responsibility of healthcare: this study strengthens the case that urban planning, transport policy, and environmental regulation all have a significant role to play.”
The research was funded by the European Research Council under the Horizon 2020 research and innovation program and from the European Union’s Horizon Europe Framework Programme.
The company is looking for a persuasive, empathetic, and knowledgeable Legal Consultant to join our team. This role is ideal for someone with a legal background and experience in client-facing roles. The primary responsibility is to take inbound calls from prospective clients, assess their immigration needs, and convert inquiries into active cases.
Interested candidates can apply online via the link given at the end of the post.
Disclaimer: Charging money from students for internships or from job applicants is unethical and can result in blacklisting. We strongly discourage requesting any kind of payment from interns, including processing fees or charges for certificates. If you have any concerns, please contact us at [email protected]
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/lifestyle/fashion/capes-instead-of-dupattas-and-corsets-over-cholis-experts-decode-what-festive-dressing-looks-like-in-2025-101753618526587.html” on this server.
In January, the Belgian drugmaker said it would split into two pieces, one that would keep the name Galapagos and focus on cell therapy and another that would build a pipeline by buying assets. Then in May, the company said it was re-evaluating that plan while exploring “all strategic alternatives for its existing businesses” and looking for more outside deals.
In its latest update, Galapagos said it’s evaluating strategic alternatives for the cell therapy business, including a divestiture. It also announced the appointments of two new executives and two new board members who will join an already revamped leadership team.
Dive Insight:
Investors have punished Galapagos over the last five years after a series of research and development setbacks. The company’s American depositary receipts, which topped $274 in February 2020, plummeted below $23 five years later. And while the stock has ticked up in recent months, the announcement of the latest “new chapter” from Galapagos sent ADRs down 10% to under $30 apiece on Thursday.
CEO Henry Gosebruch, originally tapped to lead the planned spinout company, is now charged with an overall revamp of Galapagos. He’s joined by a new CFO, Aaron Cox, and the latest hires, Sooin Kwon as chief business officer and Dan Grossman as chief strategy officer. Kn and Grossman start on Aug. 4.
Together, the group needs to find a way to stem losses that have expanded with restructuring costs while employing a huge pile of cash to buy experimental medicines that could turn into blockbusters. Galapagos had 3.1 billion euros, or $3.6 billion, in cash and financial investments at the end of June after its second-quarter loss widened to 215.7 million euros from 71.3 million euros a year earlier.
“The new management appears credible and has the right skillsets for the tasks at hand,” Leerink Partners analyst Faisal Khurshid wrote in a note to clients Wednesday. Still, Khurshid said he’s keeping his “market perform” rating on the stock as he waits to see how the team executes its mission.
Galapagos reported a few interim steps on its “transformation journey.” The company said it’s transferred certain small molecule programs in oncology and immunology to Onco3R Therapeutics in return for equity and future unspecified “milestone-based considerations.” Gilead Sciences also agreed to give up its opt-in rights to the cell therapy business, giving full control to Galapagos.
Income growth has stagnated, while asset values—particularly property—have surged.
This has created a tilted playing field, favouring those who already own property or other appreciating assets.
The median home price in Australia has surpassed $1 million, highlighting how far out of reach property is for many Australians, especially younger generations.
If you’re feeling like it’s getting harder to get ahead financially, you’re not imagining things.
While incomes have inched up slowly, property values, and by extension, household wealth, have skyrocketed.
The playing field isn’t just uneven anymore—it’s tilting sharply toward those who already own assets.
You see…in the grand theatre of Australian prosperity, we’ve just witnessed a defining act: According to the ABS, the median Australian home has now cracked the $1 million mark.
Now that’s great news for property owners, but for everyone else, especially first-home buyers and the younger generations, it’s a stark reminder that the ladder to wealth is being pulled further out of reach.
And the truth is, this isn’t just about housing affordability.
It’s about wealth inequality and how owning property is rapidly becoming the great divide in Australian society.
The wealth gap is growing, and fast
Wealth inequality in Australia is accelerating at a pace that should make us all pause.
Source: ABS Data
Let’s put things in perspective: the combined wealth of Australia’s 200 richest individuals has ballooned to $667.8 billion, which now makes up a staggering 24.5% of our national GDP.
Two decades ago, that figure sat at just 8%.
[note] That’s not just economic growth—that’s wealth concentration on steroids. [/notes]
At the same time, wealth across Australian households is rising, but not evenly.
According to ABS data, the net worth of the average household has surged from around $530,000 in 2004 to well over $1.4 million in 2024.
Disposable incomes, by contrast, have grown at a snail’s pace.
What we’re seeing is a divergence: incomes slowly ticking up, while asset prices, particularly residential property, shoot into the stratosphere.
Take a look at the chart below (based on ABS figures), and the pattern becomes painfully obvious:
Household wealth has nearly tripled over two decades.
Household disposable income has not even doubled.
That gap? That’s where property lives.
Source: ABS Data
Property: the great wealth accelerator
In Australia, real estate is not just a roof over your head, it’s the foundation of long-term financial security.
Around 55% of Australian household assets are tied up in land and dwellings.
That means most of our wealth growth is tied to the housing market, not wages, not shares, and not savings accounts.
And that’s where the problem lies for those left out.
Those who got into the property market early, baby boomers, Gen X, or even Millennials who scraped into their first homes a decade ago, have benefited immensely from decades of capital growth and leveraged equity.
Meanwhile, those still renting or waiting to “save a bit more” are watching the ladder get taller, faster than they can climb.
This dynamic is what’s driving inequality: those who own property are compounding their wealth, while those who don’t are falling behind.
No, don’t blame this on “ugly, greedy, property investors” because 70% of properties are owned by homeowners, ordinary mums and dads, so it’s really the roof over their head that’s becoming more valuable over time.
A tax system tilted toward the rich
What amplifies this wealth gap is a tax system that, whether intentionally or not, rewards those who already have wealth or own property.
Let’s break it down:
Capital gains tax discounts reward long-term asset holders (especially those in property). But while a lot is spoken about the benefits investors receive, the biggest capital gain discount is for homeowners who can upgrade their home and do not pay any capital gains tax at all when they sell!
Negative gearing continues to favour investors and business owners who take a risk with their capital and at times have more expenses than income. By the way.. I think this is a fair advantage that those who take financial risk receive.
Superannuation tax concessions benefit those Australians who put money aside to secure their financial future in retirement.
[note] What this means is: once you own assets, the system helps you grow and protect that wealth more efficiently than income alone ever could. [/note]
The lesson? Don’t just work for your money, make it work for you
The message here isn’t to vilify the wealthy. Far from it!
What I’m trying to get across is that it’s important to understand our capitalist system, to learn from what’s worked for the wealthy and to understand how to play the game with the rules we have been given.
If you’re not yet a property investor, now is the time to seriously consider becoming one.
This is not about speculation, it’s about strategically using real estate as a tool to build wealth over time.
Because despite all the noise: interest rates, media panic, politics, the fundamentals haven’t changed:
Australia’s population is growing.
We have a chronic housing shortage.
Demand continues to outstrip supply.
Rising construction costs mean all new dwellings will be considerably more expensive
And land in our capital cities (which is where most people want to live) is finite.
These are the ingredients that make residential real estate such a powerful long-term asset.
It’s not too late, but it is getting harder
Yes, affordability is an issue. Yes, borrowing capacities are tighter.
But the cost of waiting can be even greater than the cost of entry.
That’s why smart investors aren’t sitting on the sidelines, they’re thinking strategically:
Buying investment-grade properties in tightly held suburbs
Leveraging equity to grow a portfolio over time
Working with property strategists (like our team at Metropole) to build intergenerational wealth.
Because in 10 or 20 years, today’s prices will look like a bargain. And those who acted will be on the right side of the wealth divide.
Wealth in Australia isn’t just growing, it’s compounding.
But only for those who understand that owning property is no longer optional if you want to create a financially secure future.
The data is clear. The opportunity is still there.
Now the question is: will you take action, or keep waiting while others build their wealth?
That’s where our Complimentary Wealth Discovery Session comes in. We’re offering you a 1-on-1 chat with a Metropole Wealth Strategist to help you:
Clarify your financial goals
Understand how macro trends affect your position
Build a personalised, data-driven property strategy
Get ahead of the curve — before everyone else piles in
There’s no cost, no obligation — just practical, tailored guidance based on decades of experience.
Click here now to book your free Wealth Discovery Session.
About Michael Yardney Michael is the founder of Metropole Property Strategists who help their clients grow, protect and pass on their wealth through independent, unbiased property advice and advocacy. He’s once again been voted Australia’s leading property investment adviser and one of Australia’s 50 most influential Thought Leaders. His opinions are regularly featured in the media.
Most people never venture beyond Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V in Google Docs. But the real time-savers are the shortcuts nobody talks about—especially for navigating long docs or fixing formatting fast.
Once you use them, you’ll wonder how you ever managed without.
1
Paste Without Formatting Makes Everything Cleaner
This is my favorite shortcut—and for good reason. You copy text from a website, paste it into your document, and suddenly you’re dealing with weird fonts, random colors, and formatting that doesn’t match. Instead of spending some more time cleaning it up, just use Ctrl + Shift + V (Windows) or Cmd + Shift + V (Mac) to paste the content without formatting.
With this shortcut you can strip away all the original formatting and paste plain text that matches your document’s style. It’s perfect when you’re pulling quotes from research papers, copying code snippets, or grabbing text from emails.
Adding comments to documents usually means highlighting text, right-clicking, and navigating through menus. The Ctrl + Alt + M (Windows) or Cmd + Option + M (Mac) shortcut lets you add comments instantly without breaking your typing flow.
This shortcut is most useful during editing sessions. You can mark sections that need fact-checking, suggest rewrites, or leave reminders without interrupting your reading flow. It’s also brilliant for collaborative projects where you need to give feedback quickly.
To use this shortcut more effectively, combine it with other Google Docs shortcuts. For instance, you can pair it with Ctrl + Shift + Right/Left Arrow key to select text with your keyboard, add a comment, type your note, and hit Enter.
3
Voice Typing Beats Typing Every Time
Google Docs voice typing turns your speech into text with impressive accuracy. When your fingers are tired, but your brain is still churning out ideas, Ctrl + Shift + S (works on both Windows and Mac) instantly activates voice typing. Google’s voice recognition is highly impressive, and it understands punctuation commands, too.
You can say, period to add a period, new line to start a new paragraph, or comma to add a comma. It handles technical terms surprisingly well, though you might need to clean up a word or two. Voice typing is perfect for first drafts, brainstorming sessions, or when you’re dealing with repetitive strain injury.
To get the best results with voice typing, try to speak naturally and clearly, but don’t slow down too much. The AI often performs better with normal speech patterns than with overly careful pronunciation.
4
Quickly Select Whole Paragraphs
When working with longer documents, you often need to adjust entire sections at once. A common problem with click-and-drag selection is that you can frequently miss the first word or grab unwanted text from adjacent paragraphs. For precise selection, use Ctrl + Shift + Up/Down Arrow (Windows) or Cmd + Shift + Up/Down Arrow (Mac) to select complete paragraphs instantly.
This shortcut makes restructuring documents and applying consistent formatting effortless, even when you’re moving sections around or formatting multiple paragraphs with the same style.
5
Move Paragraphs Up and Down Instantly
Often, when you need to reorganize paragraphs for better flow, you’ll simply cut and paste the text blocks, which risks breaking formatting. Alt + Shift + Up/Down Arrow (Windows) or Option + Shift + Up/Down Arrow (Mac) moves your current paragraph up or down without touching your clipboard.
Put your cursor anywhere in a paragraph and use this shortcut to slide it into the perfect position. It’s incredible for outlining, reordering lists, or fixing the flow of your arguments.
This works beautifully with bullet points and numbered lists, too. You can rearrange entire sections without worrying about breaking your formatting or losing your numbering.
Scrolling through a long document isn’t fun when you have to jump back and forth from start to finish. On Windows, press Ctrl + Home to go to the beginning and Ctrl + End to reach the end. On a Mac, Cmd + Up Arrow takes you to the top, and Cmd + Down Arrow moves you to the bottom instantly.
This shortcut is handy when you’re working with lengthy reports, manuscripts, or research papers. I often need to check the introduction after writing the conclusion and vice versa, so this makes it easy to jump to the start and back.
7
Bonus: Show All Shortcuts When You Forget
I use these shortcuts daily to speed up my Google Docs workflow and rely less on the mouse. But there are dozens more worth learning, though it’s hard to remember them all. Fortunately, you can bring up the list of supported Google Docs shortcuts using Ctrl + / (Windows) or Cmd + / (Mac).
The list is searchable too. In the Keyboard shortcuts search bar, type format to find formatting shortcuts, insert for insertion options, orbrowse categories to discover shortcuts you didn’t know existed.
These seven shortcuts help you work faster without reaching for the mouse all the time. Start with the ones you need most. Once you get used to them, try these 90+ Google Docs keyboard shortcuts to save even more time and effort every day.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-26/Nyingchi-Xizang-s-mild-climate-haven–1FdoICHCWQ0/img/12fc92bb5d7c423d921e0b83a41b986a/12fc92bb5d7c423d921e0b83a41b986a.jpeg'A view of Nyingchi near Yarlung Zangbo River in southwest China’s Xizang Autonomous Region. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-26/Nyingchi-Xizang-s-mild-climate-haven–1FdoICHCWQ0/img/12fc92bb5d7c423d921e0b83a41b986a/12fc92bb5d7c423d921e0b83a41b986a.jpeg'A view of Nyingchi near Yarlung Zangbo River in southwest China’s Xizang Autonomous Region. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-26/Nyingchi-Xizang-s-mild-climate-haven–1FdoICHCWQ0/img/12fc92bb5d7c423d921e0b83a41b986a/12fc92bb5d7c423d921e0b83a41b986a.jpeg'A view of Nyingchi near Yarlung Zangbo River in southwest China’s Xizang Autonomous Region. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-26/Nyingchi-Xizang-s-mild-climate-haven–1FdoICHCWQ0/img/12fc92bb5d7c423d921e0b83a41b986a/12fc92bb5d7c423d921e0b83a41b986a.jpeg'A view of Nyingchi near Yarlung Zangbo River in southwest China’s Xizang Autonomous Region. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-26/Nyingchi-Xizang-s-mild-climate-haven–1FdoICHCWQ0/img/12fc92bb5d7c423d921e0b83a41b986a/12fc92bb5d7c423d921e0b83a41b986a.jpeg'A view of Nyingchi near Yarlung Zangbo River in southwest China’s Xizang Autonomous Region. /CGTN
Located in southeastern Xizang along the middle and lower reaches of the Yarlung Zangbo River, Nyingchi has a unique geography. Moisture from the Indian Ocean creates dramatic, altitude-based ecosystems, ranging from tropical rainforests to alpine tundra. The lush pastures of the river valley support sustainable yak herding and maintain ecological balance. Snow-capped peaks rise above ancient forests and glaciers in this region, blending humid mildness with rugged, high-altitude landscapes and earning it the nickname “Xizang’s Climate Oasis.”
It’s been 20 years since Hurricane Katrina reshaped the City of New Orleans.
Spike Lee examined the disaster with two big HBO documentaries, the 2006 “When the Levees Broke: A Requiem in Four Acts,” just a year after the event, and a 2010 sequel, “If God Is Willing and Da Creek Don’t Rise,” and is involved with a new work for Netflix, “Katrina: Come Hell and High Water,” arriving in late August. Other nonfiction films have been made on the subject over the years, including “Trouble the Water,” winner of the grand jury prize at the 2008 Sundance Film Festival, Nova’s “Hurricane Katrina: The Storm That Drowned a City,” “Hurricane Katrina: Through the Eyes of the Children,” and “Dark Water Rising: Survival Stories of Hurricane Katrina Animal Rescues,” while the storm also framed the excellent 2022 hospital-set docudrama “Five Days at Memorial.” As a personified disaster with a human name and a week-long arc, it remains famous, or infamous, and indelible.
In the gripping five-part “Hurricane Katrina: Race Against Time,” premiering over two subsequent nights beginning Sunday at 8 p.m. on National Geographic (all episodes stream on Hulu and Disney+ Monday), director Traci A. Curry (“Attica”) necessarily repeats many of Lee’s incidents and themes. But she finds her own way through mountains of material in the series that is at once highly compelling and difficult to watch — though I suggest you do.
Though there are many paths to take through the story, they lead to the same conclusions. Curry speaks with survivors, activists, scientists, officials and journalists, some of whom also appear in archival footage, but her eye is mainly on the victims, the people who lost their homes, people who lost their people, those unable to evacuate, for lack of money or transportation or the need to care for family members. If the storm itself was an assault on the city, most everything else — the broken levees, the flooded streets, the slow government response, the misinformation, the exaggerations and the mischaracterizations taken as fact — constituted an attack on the poor, which in New Orleans meant mostly Black people. (“The way they depicted Black folks,” says one survivor regarding sensational media coverage of the aftermath, when troops with automatic weapons patrolled the streets as if in a war zone, “it’s like they didn’t see us as regular people, law abiding, churchgoing, hard working people.”)
Effective both as an informational piece and a real-life drama, “Race Against Time” puts you deep into the story, unfolding as the week did. First, the calm before the storm (“One of the most peaceful scariest things,that a person can experience,” says one 8th Ward resident), as Katrina gained power over the Gulf of Mexico. Then the storm, which ripped off part of the Superdome roof, where citizens had been instructed to shelter, and plunged the city into darkness; but when that passed, it looked briefly like the apocalypse missed them.
Then the levees, never well designed, were breached in multiple locations and 80% of the city, which sits in a bowl between the Mississippi River and Lake Pontchartrain, found itself under water. Homes drown: “You’re looking at your life, the life that your parents provided for you, your belongings being ruined, your mother’s furniture that she prided is being thrown against a wall.” Residents are driven onto roofs, hoping for rescue, while dead bodies float in the water. This is also in many ways the most heartening part of the series, as neighbors help neighbors and firefighters and police set about rescuing as many as possible, going house to house in boats running on gasoline siphoned from cars and trucks. A coast guardsman tears up at the memory of carrying a baby in her bare arms as they were winched into a helicopter.
When Hurricane Katrina hit in 2005, Malik Rahim, a community organizer, was a resident of Algiers Point in New Orleans. (National Geographic)
Lt. General Russel Honore served as commander of Joint Task Force Katrina and is widely credited for reestablishing order and evacuating the Superdome. (National Geographic)
And then we descend into a catalog of institutional failures — of governance, of communication, of commitment, of nerve, of common sense, of service, of the media, which, camped in the unflooded French Quarter or watching from afar, repeated rumors as fact, helping create a climate of fear. (Bill O’Reilly, then still sitting pretty at Fox News, suggests looters should be shot dead.) More people escaping the flood arrive at the Superdome, where the bathrooms and the air conditioning don’t work, there’s no food or water and people suffer in the August heat, waiting for days to be evacuated. Instead, the National Guard comes to town along with federal troops, which residents of this city know is not necessarily a good thing.
Many speakers here make a deep impression — community organizer Malik Rahim, sitting on his porch, speaking straight to the camera, with his long white hair and beard, is almost a guiding spirit — but the star of this show is the eminently sensible Lt. Gen. Russel L. Honoré(now retired), a Louisiana Creole, who was finally brought in to coordinate operations between FEMA and the military. (We see him walking through the streets, ordering soldiers to “put your guns on your back, don’t be pointing guns at nobody.”) Honoré, who is free with his opinions here, had respect for the victims — “When you’re poor in America, you’re not free, and when you’re poor you learn to have patience” — but none for foolish officialdom, the main fool being FEMA director Michael Brown, mismanaging from Baton Rouge, who would resign soon after the hurricane.
When buses finally did arrive, passengers were driven away, and some later flown off, with no announcement of where they were headed; family members might be scattered around the country. Many would never return to New Orleans, and some who did, no longer recognized the place they left, not only because of the damage, but because of the new development.
The arrival of this and the upcoming Lee documentary is dictated by the calendar, but the timing is also fortuitous, given where we are now. Floods and fires, storms and cyclones are growing more frequent and intense, even as Washington strips money from the very agencies designed to predict and mitigate them or aid in recovery. Last week, Ken Pagurek, the head of FEMA’s urban search and rescue unit resigned, reportedly over the agency’s Trump-hobbled response to the Texas flood, following the departure of Jeremy Greenberg, who led FEMA’s disaster command center. Trump, for his part, wants to do away with the agency completely.
And yet Curry manages to end her series on an optimistic note. Residents of the Lower 9th Ward have returned dying wetlands to life, creating a community park that will help control the next storm surge. Black Masking Indians — a.k.a. Mardi Gras Indians — are still sewing their fanciful, feathered costumes and parading in the street.
On November 2, 2022, I attended a Google AI event in New York City. One of the themes was responsible AI. As I listened to executives talk about how they aligned their technology with human values, I realized that the malleability of AI models was a double-edged sword. Models could be tweaked to, say, minimize biases, but also to enforce a specific point of view. Governments could demand manipulation to censor unwelcome facts and promote propaganda. I envisioned this as something that an authoritarian regime like China might employ. In the United States, of course, the Constitution would prevent the government from messing with the outputs of AI models created by private companies.
This Wednesday, the Trump administration released its AI manifesto, a far-ranging action plan for one of the most vital issues facing the country—and even humanity. The plan generally focuses on besting China in the race for AI supremacy. But one part of it seems more in sync with China’s playbook. In the name of truth, the US government now wants AI models to adhere to Donald Trump’s definition of that word.
You won’t find that intent plainly stated in the 28-page plan. Instead it says, “It is essential that these systems be built from the ground up with freedom of speech and expression in mind, and that U.S. government policy does not interfere with that objective. We must ensure that free speech flourishes in the era of AI and that AI procured by the Federal government objectively reflects truth rather than social engineering agendas.”
That’s all fine until the last sentence, which raises the question—truth according to whom? And what exactly is a “social engineering agenda”? We get a clue about this in the very next paragraph, which instructs the Department of Commerce to look at the Biden-era AI rules and “eliminate references to misinformation, Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion, and climate change.” (Weird uppercase as written in the published plan.) Acknowledging climate change is social engineering? As for truth, in a fact sheet about the plan, the White House says, “LLMs shall be truthful and prioritize historical accuracy, scientific inquiry, and objectivity.” Sounds good, but this comes from an administration that limits American history to “uplifting” interpretations, denies climate change, and regards Donald Trump’s claims about being America’s greatest president as objective truth. Meanwhile, just this week, Trump’s Truth Social account reposted an AI video of Obama in jail.
In a speech touting the plan in Washington on Wednesday, Trump explained the logic behind the directive: “The American people do not want woke Marxist lunacy in the AI models,” he said. Then he signed an executive order entitled “Preventing Woke AI in the Federal Government.” While specifying that the “Federal Government should be hesitant to regulate the functionality of AI models in the private marketplace,” it declares that “in the context of Federal procurement, it has the obligation not to procure models that sacrifice truthfulness and accuracy to ideological agendas.” Since all the big AI companies are courting government contracts, the order appears to be a backdoor effort to ensure that LLMs in general show fealty to the White House’s interpretation of history, sexual identity, and other hot-button issues. In case there’s any doubt about what the government regards as a violation, the order spends several paragraphs demonizing AI that supports diversity, calls out racial bias, or values gender equality. Pogo alert—Trump’s executive order banning top-down ideological bias is a blatant exercise in top-down ideological bias.
Marx Madness
It’s up to the companies to determine how to handle these demands. I spoke this week to an OpenAI engineer working on model behavior who told me that the company already strives for neutrality. In a technical sense, they said, meeting government standards like being anti-woke shouldn’t be a huge hurdle. But this isn’t a technical dispute: It’s a constitutional one. If companies like Anthropic, OpenAI, or Google decide to try minimizing racial bias in their LLMs, or make a conscious choice to ensure the models’ responses reflect the dangers of climate change, the First Amendment presumably protects those decisions as exercising the “freedom of speech and expression” touted in the AI Action Plan. A government mandate denying government contracts to companies exercising that right is the essence of interference.
You might think that the companies building AI would fight back, citing their constitutional rights on this issue. But so far no Big Tech company has publicly objected to the Trump administration’s plan. Google celebrated the White House’s support of its pet issues, like boosting infrastructure. Anthropic published a positive blog post about the plan, though it complained about the White House’s sudden seeming abandonment of strong export controls earlier this month. OpenAI says it is already close to achieving objectivity. Nothing about asserting their own freedom of expression.
In on the Action
The reticence is understandable because, overall, the AI Action Plan is a bonanza for AI companies. While the Biden administration mandated scrutiny of Big Tech, Trump’s plan is a big fat green light for the industry, which it regards as a partner in the national struggle to beat China. It allows the AI powers to essentially blow past environmental objections when constructing massive data centers. It pledges support for AI research that will flow to the private sector. There’s even a provision that limits some federal funds for states that try to regulate AI on their own. That’s a consolation prize for a failed portion of the recent budget bill that would have banned state regulation for a decade.
For the rest of us, though, the “anti-woke” order is not so easily brushed off. AI is increasingly the medium by which we get our news and information. A founding principle of the United States has been the independence of such channels from government interference. We have seen how the current administration has cowed parent companies of media giants like CBS into apparently compromising their journalistic principles to favor corporate goals. Extending this “anti-woke” agenda to AI models, it’s not unreasonable to expect similar accommodations. Senator Edward Markey has written directly to the CEOs of Alphabet, Anthropic, OpenAI, Microsoft, and Meta urging them to fight the order. “The details and implementation plan for this executive order remain unclear,” he writes, “but it will create significant financial incentives for the Big Tech companies … to ensure their AI chatbots do not produce speech that would upset the Trump administration.” In a statement to me, he said, “Republicans want to use the power of the government to make ChatGPT sound like Fox & Friends.”
As you might suspect, this view isn’t shared by the White House team working on the AI plan. They believe their goal is true neutrality, and that taxpayers shouldn’t have to pay for AI models that don’t reflect unbiased truth. Indeed, the plan itself points a finger at China as an example of what happens when truth is manipulated. It instructs the government to examine frontier models from the People’s Republic of China to determine “alignment with Chinese Communist Party talking points and censorship.” Unless the corporate overlords of AI get some backbone, a future evaluation of American frontier models might well reveal lockstep alignment with White House talking points and censorship. But you might not find that out by querying an AI model. Too woke.
This is an edition ofSteven Levy’sBackchannel newsletter. Read previous coverage from Steven Levy here.
Luto is an unsettling psychological horror game filled with challenging puzzles that can sometimes leave you scratching your head for extended periods. So, whether you’d like to be guided step-by-step through this creepy horror title or simply need help solving one of its clever puzzles, we’ve got everything you need in our full game walkthrough below. Let’s dive in.
Chapter 1 – It’s Happening Again
You begin the game in a desert on Monday. Move forward until a sandstorm begins. When prompted, press the button displayed on your screen rapidly.
When you regain control in the next segment, turn around and leave the bathroom.
In the hallway, turn left and walk forward. Grab the note resting on the banister to your left, then continue forward and down the stairs on the right.
In the next room, walk forward until you reach an entryway table against the left wall. Take a document from the trash beside the table. Afterward, pick up the keys from the table and open the front door of the house.
Now, it’s Tuesday. Leave the bathroom again, then run when you’re told to.
Wednesday comes next. Leave the bathroom once more, head down the stairs again, and then interact with the sketchbook on the floor.
Now, use the other door in this room to go to the basement. Down here, head to the desk against the back wall, then pick up the card and document sitting on it.
Return to the bathroom upstairs and get the keys from the sink. Afterward, go back downstairs and open the front door once again.
It’s now Thursday. Head back downstairs again and answer the phone on the entryway table.
Go back to the basement, this time interacting with the trap door in front of the desk from before, and choose to enter it.
Enter the trap door.
Chapter 2 – Beyond the Noise
Make your way down the ladder, then pass through the next two doors.
In the living room, pick up a sheet of paper from the side table, then head down the hallway to the right of it.
On your way down the stairs here, stop and pick up a card sitting in a hole in the wall. Additionally, pick up the little note from the ladder at the bottom of the stairs.
Look up at the light above you in the room with the stairs. Notice a hammer there? We need that.
You need to get that hammer.
How to get the hammer in Luto
Head forward and take a right to find another table with a phone on it. Pick up the sketchbook page here, then pick up the phone and press “SOS” three times.
This will cause the hammer to fall. Return to the area with the staircase and pick up the hammer from the floor. You’ll use this shortly.
Backtrack and take a left into the next hallway this time.
Down this hallway on the right is a door with clocks around it. To open this door, you need to find seven clocks.
You have to find seven clocks to open this door.
How to solve the clock door puzzle in Luto
For a clock to count as “found”, you just need to interact with it.
Continue forward into a bathroom. Clock 1 is in the bathtub.
Leave the bathroom and walk back down the hallway. Clock 2 is leaning against the wall next to a vase in front of the glass door.
Clock 3 is located halfway up the stairs you originally came down.
Now, walk over to where you picked up the phone and look up between two wooden beams to find Clock 4.
Continue past the phone and go down the stairs. Down here, you’ll find Clock 5 in a chair.
Open the next door and follow the hallway to find yourself back in the living room. Clock 6 is beneath the side table.
From where you entered this room, head forward into the next hallway and into a lit room on the left to find a card.
Leave this room and head the way you came from, stopping at the boarded-off door. Use the hammer to remove the nails here, then enter the room. Clock 7 is on the floor here.
Gallery
All clock locations.
Pick up the drawing beside the final clock and the card on a box in this room, then leave.
Return to the clock door, which can now be opened, and enter the next room.
Pick up a ripped note on the left and take the stuffed monkey hanging from the ceiling.
Return to the phone in the hallway. Dial the number 555-1725.
After the dialogue completes, turn and look down the hallway to see a figure that has emerged.
Dip into the room on the right and run down the hallway. Eventually, you’ll see a little toy ambulance in front of you, so follow it until it crashes into a door, then enter it and walk down the stairs.
Take the sketchbook page from the table on the left, then go through the door.
Follow the path until you reach the bathroom again. Pick up the note here, then turn around.
A coin will be floating in front of you now. Move toward it to trigger a scene.
Select any dialogue options here until you wake up inside a cave.
Make your way through the cave until you come across a familiar desert. As you did at the beginning of the game, press the button displayed on your screen rapidly when the sandstorm begins. Eventually, the screen will fade to black.
Chapter 3 – One More Time
You’re once again in the bathroom. Leave and head down the hallway, stopping to pick up the document on the right before going downstairs.
Grab the keys from the entryway table and leave through the front door.
You’ll now cycle through each day of the week. On Tuesday, Wednesday, and Thursday, simply leave the bathroom and interact with the document again before heading downstairs, getting the keys, and leaving through the front door.
When Friday arrives, a door on the left in the hallway can be opened to reveal a bedroom.
Grab the sketchbook page from the desk, then interact with the corkboard. Place the monkey drawing in the slot on the lower right.
Next, place the stuffed monkey you found earlier on the bed next to the other one.
Look away, and suddenly the stuffed monkeys have disappeared. You’ll need to find them around the room now.
Where to find the stuffed monkeys in the bedroom
Find them on the bookshelf above the computer, then turn around. Find them on the fan above you, then turn around. Find them in the laundry basket to the left of the TV, then turn around. Lastly, find them on the shelf to the right of the TV. Interact with them to get an eyeball.
Gallery
All stuffed monkey locations in the bedroom.
Leave the room, go left down the hallway, and pick up the document on the right once more. Go downstairs, grab the keys, and leave through the front door.
You’re back in the bathroom. Head downstairs yet again. When you reach the bottom of the stairs, grab the flashlight in front of you and turn it on.
Grab the sketchbook page on the front door, then turn around. Pick up and read the stamp on the table near the stairs, then head back up to the hallway.
Upstairs, there are four descending photos on the left wall. Interact with the fourth (lowest) one to get a key. You can also grab a document from the back of the fallen picture.
Interact with the fourth (lowest) photo to get a key.
Go back downstairs and open the little lockbox on the table using the key you just found. Take the tiny Entrance Door from the lockbox. Weird.
Head through the opening where the front door once was and walk down a creepy corridor until you reach a dilapidated home interior.
Make your way through this linear interior, stopping to grab a card from a metal cart along the way, then go down some stairs to another cave.
Walk through the cave until a large storage box is blocking the path forward. Move the crate out of your way, then enter the door.
Back in the house, go downstairs to answer the ringing phone.
After the dialogue finishes, repeatedly press the button to resist the darkness and head back to the living room to find a door ajar (every other door you approach will slam in your face during this segment).
Every door will slam in your face except this one.
Open the door and follow the corridor. Open two more doors to find a figure floating on the other side. Continue to resist during this period while walking toward the figure.
Interact with the figure and watch the scene here, then walk toward the ladder ahead.
Suddenly, the narrator will bring up the pause screen and kick you out of the game. Don’t worry: This is meant to happen.
Load back in and press “Continue.”
Walk toward the glowing figure ahead while resisting. Once you reach the figure and it disappears, stop resisting.
Chapter 1 – It’s Happening Again (revisited)
Guess what? You’re back in the bathroom.
Head to the stairs as usual and go down them. However, they will loop for a very long time. Just keep going until you come to a hole you can descend.
Chapter 4 – Thanks for Pushing Me
Head forward until you reach a door on the left leading to a room with a blue hue.
Enter the room, then pick up the sketchbook page on the left. Take note of the board on the wall here that is missing drawings. We’ll be returning later.
Leave the room for now.
Continue forward, stopping to pick up a note on your right before heading left past a boarded-off door.
Up ahead is the bathroom, which now has a tub filled with blood. Go past it and take a left at the fork. Walk up the stairs.
Pick up the drawing on the bannister.
Return to the fork and take the right path this time. Walk down the stairs.
Pick up the drawing on the floor.
Next, continue winding through this room until you reach a door with a gate. Interact with the gate and take the Golden Piece.
Go back upstairs and turn right into a hallway where only one door is cracked open. Enter the room.
Pick up the card on the desk, then go through the next door.
Take a left and head in the direction of the boarded-off door ahead. Before reaching it, stop and turn right to see a corridor full of doors.
At the end of this corridor of doors is a gate that can be opened with the Golden Piece.
At the end of this hallway is a door with a gate. Use the Golden Piece to open it.
Go down the stairs and interact with the door here to get the Moon and Sun Knocker and reveal another set of stairs. We’ll return here shortly.
For now, head back to where the path forked left and right. Take the right path again and enter a corridor full of doors.
Take a left while listening for a door with a ringing sound coming from within. It will be the second door on your right.
Place the Moon and Sun Knocker on this door, then use it to knock. The door will open, so head inside.
Place the Sun and Moon Knocker on the second door on the right, then use it to knock.
Answer the phone and go through the conversation.
Make your way through this area until you see a glowing blue door at the end of a hallway. Walk toward it, but stop to grab the drawing on a table on your right.
Go through the glowing blue door, turn right, and head toward the large gate ahead.
Open the gate and pass through it, follow the stairs down, and grab the Silver Piece from the shrine.
Go back upstairs and backtrack. Eventually, you’ll see a ghost pass in front of a door. Head through that door, take a right, and make your way toward another open door.
The ghost will attack you, sending you into a dialogue scene. Select your choices, then you’ll wake up the cave yet again.
Continue forward until you once again reach a glowing figure. Resist until you reach the figure, then stop resisting.
And you’re back in the bathroom again. Surprise!
Leave the bathroom and return to the room with the blue hue where you saw the board with missing drawings.
How to solve the drawings puzzle in Luto
You have to place the drawings in the correct spots:
“Look for the signs amidst all the noise” – Drawing of Strange Symbols
“Find the childhood that hides from pain” – Drawing of Two Monkeys
“Escape for the false prison of memories” – Drawing of a Canarian House
Place the drawings like this.
Now, leave the room and take a left. Follow the path back around to where it forks. Take the left path and go upstairs.
There’s now a glowing red room at the top with a videotape in a window. Interact with it to make it fall downstairs.
Turn around to see a figure has spawned behind you. It won’t bother you, so just walk past it and make your way back down the stairs.
In a basket by the bathroom ahead is the videotape. Pick it up.
Follow the path back around to a room with a bunch of TVs.
A TV located in the center of the room says “No Signal,” so interact with it and place the videotape inside the built-in VCR.
You’ll now be controlling a character on the TV.
Go down the stairs nearby, then take some more stairs on the left.
You’ll eventually see some TVs with symbols before the screen goes black and resets you somewhere else.
Walk through a sequence of pathways that will constantly reset. Eventually, you’ll leave the TV and be yourself (?) again.
A new door will now be open directly in front of you, but you don’t need to enter it currently.
Leave the TV room, then take an immediate right. Go back through the door you opened earlier with the Golden Piece and follow it all the way to the end to reach three TVs.
How to solve the TV symbols puzzle in Luto
Interact with the glowing red TVs and enter the following symbols from top to bottom:
Top TV – Spiral
Middle TV – Single middle line with two half-circles on top and bottom
Bottom TV – Three triangles (tri-force)
Set these symbols on the TVs.
A door will now open. Go through it.
Follow the left path around until you find a figure wearing glasses in front of a red static screen. Take Sam’s Broken Glasses.
Turn around to go back. You’ll soon fall through a hole.
Walk forward, then look to the right and grab the sketchbook page from the banister. Now head back left.
Follow the path back to the room with all of the TVs. Leave the room and go forward, heading to the left of the boarded-off door. to reach the fork again.
Take the right path and go down the stairs to the room with all the sketches.
Pick up the sketchbook page from the crate ahead, then take note of the monkeys once again. Here we go.
Where to find the stuffed monkeys in the sketch room
Look at the monkeys hanging from the crate, then turn around. Find the monkeys to the right of the crate on a shelf next to a basketball, then turn around. Find the monkeys hanging from the ceiling behind a sketch, then turn around. Find the monkeys on the ground behind a sketch near a gated door, then turn around. Find the monkeys on a crate near the last spot you found them.
Gallery
All stuffed monkey locations in the sketch room.
Pick up Isaac’s Deflated Ball.
Now, go over to the gated door and use the Silver Piece to open it. Downstairs, make your way through the linear path until you reach a red valve on a metal cart. Pick it up.
Leave the way you came. The screen will start shaking, closing off the door you originally used to come through here. Instead, there’s now a small hole you can enter.
Walk forward, pick up the coin, and pay no mind to the red spider that pops up. At the end of the corridor, move the crate out of your way.
Go down the stairs in the maintenance hallway here to reach a red pipe where you can attach the valve. This will allow you to stop the blood from flowing down the ladder in front of you.
Use the valve here to turn off the blood flowing down the ladder ahead.
Go down the ladder and walk forward. Pick up Joel’s Dull Heart.
Go back up and head into the section with the flickering blue light.
Directly to your right is an open door leading into a room with a rocking chair and a chest on a table.
First, grab the sketchbook page on the table to your right, then the note on the table near the rocking chair.
Place the Entrance Door into the door slot located on the photo on the wall.
Now, you need to find a way to open the chest.
How to open the chest for the mum’s items puzzle in Luto
The note you picked up a moment ago gives you hints on how to get the combination for the lock by counting items around the room. But if you want to bypass that process, enter the number: 3715.
You’ll hear a knock at the tiny door in the frame. Open it. Take Eva’s Shattered Photograph from inside.
Take Eva’s Shattered Photograph from inside the door.
Return once again to the maintenance hall and back down the stairs where the large gate was. You’ll know it’s the right spot if says “House of Lost Dreams” above it.
You now have the four items needed to solve the puzzle that awaits you at the bottom.
How to solve the House of Lost Dreams puzzle in Luto
You need to place four items on the trays beneath the paintings in this room. There are clues to be found in your sketchbook, but you can skip that altogether using the solutions below:
El Amanecer – Eva’s Shattered Photograph
El Mediodia – Isaac’s Deflated Ball
La tarde – Sam’s Broken Glasses
La noche – Joel’s Dull Heart
After placing the items, attempt to leave. A levitating figure will appear, so resist by pressing the button on your screen as usual. Keep doing so as you approach the figure, then interact with it to trigger a scene.
When you try to leave again, a painting will fall off the wall to reveal a hole you can pass through.
Make your way down the claustrophobic hallway of pictures for a while until the screen goes black, sending you back to… the bathroom again.
Leave the bathroom and start down the hallway. A figure will appear and drop into a picture on the floor. Follow it through.
You’re back in the bathroom, of course. Leave again and walk forward a bit, but do not enter the frame this time. Instead, turn around to find a new staircase has appeared where the bathroom once was.
Go down the stairs and through a door into a flooded hallway.
At the split, go left. Take a left down a short hallway and enter the door here.
When asked to choose left or right, choose left. Afterward, enter the door down the short hallway on the left.
When presented with two small hallways, each leading to doors, choose the one with the House For Sale sign near it.
Walk down a hallway, turn right to find two more small hallways with doors, and again choose the left one with the House For Sale sign near it.
Enter the doors that have House For Sale signs beside them.
You’ll enter an eerie scene with a figure in front of a moon. Walk toward the moon until the scene ends.
Continue through the claustrophobic hallway of pictures until you emerge from the bathroom mirror, then take the note from the door here.
Leave the bathroom. You’ll be attacked by the figure again.
Choose your dialogue options, then you’ll be back in the desert, where you’ll need to work your way back into the house.
Run toward the figure in the distance while resisting. It will disappear when you reach it, but you’ll be able to look around and spot another one. Keep running (while resisting) toward it until you reach it, then the screen will close in and… well, you can probably guess where you’re headed.
Yeah, you’re back in the bathroom.
Turn around and pick up the coin. Then take a few steps back and enter the door leading into a dark hallway.
Chapter 5 – Playing with the Truth
Continue forward and down a set of stairs, then take a right and follow the path around to a set of stairs going up.
Take the card on the ground at the top of the stairs, then take a left here, and take the stairs leading down on your right at the end of the hallway.
In the next room, take the sketchbook page from the table on the right.
Up ahead is another fork. Go to the right first and take a card sitting atop a painting, then head back around and go left to grab the Staff Key at the dead end.
Backtrack to the level above you and walk forward through the hallway to a door that says “Staff Only”. Use the Staff Key to open the door.
Use the Staff Key to enter the door.
In the Staff Room, wrap around to the left and take the videotape from the stack of boxes, then leave the Staff Room.
Walk forward until you find a white door on the left just past the staircase.
Interact with the white door multiple times until it finally opens.
Inside the next room, touch the TV to insert the videotape, and then you’ll find yourself within it as you were before.
Walk forward and interact with the figure with an “O” above its head to make it disappear, then continue ahead until you reach a room with multiple figures with letters above their heads.
In this segment, you’ll need to solve a hangman puzzle.
How to solve the hangman puzzle
On the left of the TV are six sheets of paper. You need to spell a specific word by touching the figures with the correct letters above their heads. Below these six sheets is another sheet of paper with a game of hangman that will advance each time you pick an incorrect letter. Once the hangman is finished, you’ll be kicked out of the TV and have to start over.
As usual, referring to your sketchbook can help you solve this puzzle, but for the sake of moving things along, the correct letters are R-O-M-P-E-R.
The solution to the hangman puzzle is R-O-M-P-E-R.
The figures are scattered throughout various rooms within the TV world, so take your time and be thorough. It can take a while to find every letter needed.
When you complete the puzzle, you’ll leave the TV.
Leave the room and start backtracking down the stairs toward where the chapter started. At the bottom of the stairs, turn left and enter the door here.
Turn right and walk down the hallway of doors. Sprint down this hallway until you hit a box that says “Load Level”, causing the screen to go black.
Chapter 22 – A Mouth Full of Sand Can’t Scream
You’ll wake up in a very dark room. Look around for a coin in the distance and walk toward it.
Look for a coin in the distance, then go pick it up.
Collect the coin, then head back toward the light behind you until the screen goes black and you start over.
This time, listen for a weird sound in the distance and make your way in its direction.
Eventually, you’ll come across a radio. Interact with it to make it disappear.
Follow the weird sound to a radio, then interact with it.
Afterward, there will be two more radios to find in the darkness. Follow the sounds to them. Interacting with one of these will spawn a dog bed in the light with a second sketchbook page. The other will be near a table with a sketchbook page you can pick up before you get close to it. It will disappear on its own.
When the final radio disappears, you’ll spawn in front of a glowing, levitating figure. Resist as usual, pressing forward until you can reach the figure and interact with it to end the sequence.
Follow the sound once more to a final radio. Interact with this one to bring up a frequency slider. Move the slider below 53 AM and wait a few moments.
Set the slider below 53 AM.
A figure will appear and spawn a “Load Level” box in front of you. Enter it.
You’re back in the hallway of doors. Walk forward and enter the open door on the left.
In this room are two boxes: Forward and Backward. It’s puzzle time.
How to solve the forward and backward puzzle
This one is easier than it looks at a glance.
At the end of this area is a major Out of Bounds gap that will teleport you back to the start of the room when touched. The Forward and Backward boxes here will make all the toy ambulances in the room go, well, forward or backward.
Spot a toy ambulance on the floor by the door you first entered. Pass through the Backward box, then follow that toy ambulance through the room while bypassing the Forward box altogether.
As the toy ambulance reaches the Out of Bounds gap, walk atop it and ride it across to the other side.
You’ll have to ride this toy ambulance across the Out of Bounds gap.
If you mess up and find the toy ambulance is lost on the other side of the Out of Bounds gap, just use the Forward box to bring it back to you and start over.
Enter the door ahead and turn left. Answer the phone down the hall, listen to the dialogue, then hang up.
Turn around and go up the staircase (where you initially got the hammer earlier in the game).
At the top of the stairs, turn left and go through the door here, then walk toward the Play Music box ahead.
Head toward the Play Music box.
Walk through this corridor, climb the ladder at the end, and interact with the trap door at the top a few times.
The narrator will once again kick you out. As last time, this is normal.
Load back in and press “Continue” multiple times to cycle through the narrator’s dialogue. This can take a while. Eventually, a scene will begin.
After the scene, you’ll be inside a game called 30/03. This functions as a mini-game where you have to avoid red spiders while collecting hearts to deposit in the center of a building. While there’s a trophy/achievement for beating it, failing is the primary method of moving forward in the story, so pause the game and choose to exit.
Once this sequence ends, you’ll be back in the bathroom, which shouldn’t surprise you at all by now.
Leave the bathroom and head toward the Trigger Title box ahead. Before you reach it, dip into the area on the left to grab a sketchbook page.
Enter the Trigger Title box.
Chapter 3 – One More Time (revisited)
Open the first door you come to, then head to the end of the room and pick up the keys.
Leave the room, continue down the hallway, and walk down the stairs. Interact with the front door.
Head forward into the bathroom, then turn around and re-enter the Trigger Title box.
Go downstairs again and pass through the Change Day box at the front door.
Wrap around and walk through the Increase Speed box, then follow the path until you enter a room with a lot of doors with words above them.
Enter the Teleport door.
Enter the Teleport door.
Walk through the Play Music and Light Candles boxes.
When presented with a choice to go left or right, choose either. They both lead to the same place.
Walk all the way forward to a metal cart and pick up a card.
Now head down the path and through the gate under the words “House of Lost Dreams”. At the end of this area, you’ll drop back down into the room with all the doors.
Walk around the side of this area to spot a radio on a table. Pick it up. This is Joel’s Radio. You can take it out and tune it a second time for a trophy/achievement if you wish.
Ivermectin administered to the whole population significantly reduces malaria transmission, offering new hope in the fight against the disease. The BOHEMIA trial, the largest study on ivermectin for malaria to date, showed a 26% reduction in new malaria infection on top of existing bed nets, providing strong evidence of ivermectin’s potential as a complementary tool in malaria control. The results of this project, coordinated by the Barcelona Institute for Global Health (ISGlobal) -an institution supported by the “la Caixa” Foundation- in collaboration with the Manhiça Health Research Centre (CISM) and the KEMRI-Wellcome Trust Research Programme, have been published in The New England Journal of Medicine.
Malaria remains a global health challenge, with 263 million cases and 597,000 deaths reported in 2023. Current vector control methods, such as long-lasting insecticidal nets (LLINs) and indoor residual spraying (IRS), have become less effective due to insecticide resistance and behavioral adaptations in mosquitoes to bite outdoors and during dusk or dawn, when people are not protected by these measures. This underscores the urgent need for innovative solutions to combat malaria.
Ivermectin for malaria: A novel strategy
Ivermectin, a drug traditionally used to treat neglected tropical diseases like onchocerciasis, which causes river blindness, and lymphatic filariasis, which causes elephantiasis, has been shown to reduce malaria transmission by killing the mosquitoes that feed on treated individuals. Given the rising resistance to conventional insecticides, ivermectin could offer an effective new approach totackle malaria transmission, especially in regions where traditional methods have become less effective.
The Unitaid-funded BOHEMIA project(Broad One Health Endectocide-based Malaria Intervention in Africa) conducted two Mass Drug Administration (MDA) trials in the high-burden malaria regions: Kwale County (Kenya) and Mopeia district (Mozambique). The trials assessed the safety and efficacy of a single monthly dose of ivermectin (400 mcg/kg) given for three consecutive months at the start of the rainy season in reducing malaria transmission. In Kenya, the intervention targeted children aged 5-15, while in Mozambique it focused on children under five.
Malaria reduction in Kenya
In Kwale County, Kenya, children who received ivermectin experienced a 26% reduction in malaria infection incidence compared to those who received albendazole, the control drug used in the study. The trial involved over 20,000 participants and more than 56,000 treatments, demonstrating that ivermectin significantly reduced malaria infection rates — particularly among children living further from cluster borders or in areas where drug distribution was more efficient. Moreover, the safety profile of ivermectin was favorable, with no severe drug-related adverse events and only mild, transient side effects already seen with ivermectin in campaigns against neglected tropical diseases.
“We are thrilled with these results,” says Carlos Chaccour, co-principal investigator of the BOHEMIA project and ISGlobal researcher at the time of the study. “Ivermectin has shown great promise in reducing malaria transmission and could complement existing control measures. With continued research, ivermectin MDA could become an effective tool for malaria control and even contribute to elimination efforts,” Chaccour, who is now a researcher at the Navarra Centre for International Development at the University of Navarra, adds.
“These results align with the World Health Organization’s (WHO) criteria for new vector control tools,” states Joseph Mwangangi, from the KEMRI-Wellcome Trust Research Programme. “The findings suggest that ivermectin MDA could be a valuable complementary strategy for malaria control, particularly in areas where mosquito resistance to insecticides is a growing concern,” adds Marta Maia, BOHEMIA’s lead entomologist from the University of Oxford.
Lessons from the Mozambique trial
In contrast, the implementation of the Mozambique trial in the rural district of Mopeia faced severe disruptions due to Cyclone Gombe (2022) and a subsequent cholera outbreak, which significantly disrupted operations. “One of the most important lessons we learned from the trial in Mopeia is that strong community engagement is essential,” states Francisco Saúte, director of the Manhiça Health Research Centre (CISM). “Building trust with local communities and fostering close collaboration with the Health Ministry, National Malaria Control Program, and local authorities was key to ensuring acceptance of the ivermectin MDA.”
Expanding the Impact Beyond Malaria
In addition to reducing malaria transmission, ivermectin MDA offers significant collateral benefits. The BOHEMIA team found an important reduction in the prevalence of skin infestations such as scabies and head lice in the ivermectin group in Mozambique, and the community reported a major reduction in bed bugs in Kenya. These effects are particularly valuable when ivermectin is integrated into existing delivery systems, maximizing its impact on public health.
Shaping the future of malaria prevention
The study is part of a larger global effort to assess ivermectin’s potential in malaria control. The findings have been reviewed by the WHO vector control advisory group, which concluded that the study had demonstrated impact and recommended further studies. Findings were also shared with national health authorities as they evaluate the potential inclusion of ivermectin in malaria control programs.
“This research has the potential to shape the future of malaria prevention, particularly in endemic areas where existing tools are failing,” concludes Regina Rabinovich, BOHEMIA PI and Director of ISGlobal’s Malaria Elimination Initiative. “With its novel mechanism of action and proven safety profile, ivermectin could offer a new approach using a well-known, safe drug that can add to the effect of other mosquito control tools available today.”
The International Journal of Law Management & Humanities invites Research papers, Articles, Short Notes, Book Reviews, Case Commentaries, and others such for its Volume VIII Issue IV.
The Manuscript titled “The Specific Relief (Amendment) Act, 2018” of IJLMH is recently Cited by 2-Judge Bench of Hon’ble Delhi High Court in Page 36 of the Judgement. The Judgement can be accessed by CLICKING HERE.
About the Journal
The International Journal of Law Management & Humanities is a bi-monthly, Double-Blind, Peer-Reviewed International Journal (ISSN: 2581-5369) working in the Law, Management & Humanities arena. Presently the Editorial team of IJLMH consists of Well-known and widely recognised professors and professionals from India, France, Ethiopia, Indonesia, Cameroon, and Nigeria.
IJLMH has published Research Papers of Authors from 54 Countries, 400+ Universities, 20 High Courts, and the Supreme Court of India and Rwanda and has created a revolution in the Indian Legal Publication Industry with innovations. Published Authors of the Journal include Sitting Magistrates, AOR – Supreme Court of India, Advocates of SC, HC and District Courts, Vice-Chancellors, Deans, Academicians, Librarians, Students of Various Universities, and others. The Journal is rated 4.9/5 based on 450+ reviews on Google.
IJLMH has published research of Authors from 54 countries, i.e., Australia, Austria, Afghanistan, Albania, Bangladesh, Brunei, Cameroon, Canada, Central African Republic, China, Dubai, Ethiopia, Germany, Ghana, Guinea, Hungary, India, Indonesia, Iran, Iraq, Ireland, Italy, Jordan, Kenya, Malaysia, Mauritius, Morocco, Myanmar, Namibia, Nepal, Netherlands, Nigeria, North Macedonia, Pakistan, Peru, Poland, Qatar, Rwanda, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Slovak Republic, South Africa, Spain, Srilanka, Syria, Tanzania, Thailand, Tunisia, Turkey, U.K., USA, Vietnam, and Zimbabwe.
IJLMH is the first Privately run Indian Journal to be indexed by HeinOnline and to provide FREE Digital Object Identifier Links to all the manuscripts.
Indexing and Impact Factor Information [30+ Indexing Databases & 8 Libraries]
The Journal is indexed in 30 Databases, including HeinOnline, MANUPATRA, ROAD: the Directory of Open Access scholarly Resources by ISSN, ZDB, ABCD Index, Scope Database, Citefactor, Journal Factor, I2OR, SIS, ISI, DRJI, SJIF, SIF and WCOSJ, EDJI Index, Infotiger etc. Please note that indexing of databases does not mean that all the paper will be available on all the databases.
The Journal is available in Libraries of Renowned universities like:
Harvard Library, Harvard University, Cambridge, USA
UC Library Search, University of California, San Francisco
Stanford Libraries, Stanford University, California
Northwestern Libraries, Northwestern University Pritzker School of Law, Chicago
USC Library, University of the Sunshine Coast, Queensland, Australia
UC Law Library, University of California College of the Law, San Francisco
University of Saskatchewan, Canada
Universiteit Leiden, Leiden, Netherlands
Journal Impact Factor: 6.885 (2025) – Calculated by International Institute of Organised Research.
IJLMH is being operated without any theme for best dissemination of knowledge. Any research related to Law, Management or Humanities is acceptable.
Submission Procedure
IJLMH has a unique Online Submission system that works on AI and allows you to transparently track every step of your Manuscript with Email and SMS notification. Please prefer to submit the manuscript via Online Submission System itself.
Manuscript Processing Charges (To be paid after acceptance)
For Indian Authors: INR 1150.
For Other Countries: $25
*This charge does not include a Hard Copy of the Certificate or Paper Booklet. The Hard Copies will be optional to order and charged separately. Hard Copies can be ordered at this link.
*There is no separate Charge for Co-Authorship till a maximum of 2 Authors.
Submission Guidelines
The submissions may be made under the following categories; the word limit is exclusive of footnotes:
Research paper: 3000 – 7000 words.
Article: 1500-3000 words
Book reviews: 1500-2000 words
Short Note & Case Comment: 1000 – 2000 words
The submission must not be previously published or currently under review at any other journal/conference/book etc. and should not be submitted to any other journal/conference while in process of review with us. Read this point carefully, Kindly do not submit the same paper at many journals/conferences/seminars etc.
The submission must be the original work of the authors i.e. shouldn’t be plagiarized and also should be free from grammatical, spelling and other errors. It must also not contain any defamatory words.
Submission must be accompanied by an abstract of not more than 300 words and author(s) affiliation. No Paper will be accepted without an abstract.
All footnotes/references in the submission must conform to the bluebook 19th Edition.
The charge consists of Co-Authorship for 2 Authors.
Copyright over the published material shall vest with “International Journal of Law Management & Humanities”
A separate cover letter mentioning the name(s) of the author(s), E-mail id, Mobile number, the title of the manuscript and the name of the Institution, shall be sent along with the submission if the submission is being made through email.
All submissions must be made in .doc format. No pdf format shall be entertained.
There should be no mention of the author’s name or any other identity in the original manuscript.
Important Dates
Submission Deadline for First Round: 1st Aug 2025.
Communication of Review Result: Within 2 days of submission.
Live Publication of Manuscript: It generally takes 3-5 days for publication, which may, in exceptional cases, extend up to 10 working days after Pre-publication formalities till the Publication and issuance of e-Certificate. Urgent Requests can be made with proper reasons subject to additional charges acceptance by the Editorial Board.
Contact Information
For more information or queries, kindly email us at [email protected].
Disclaimer: WEF April, 2021, Lawctopus will not publish any ‘Call for Papers/Blogs’ by journals that charge money at the time of submission. If you find any journal doing so, please intimate us at tanuj.kalia[at]lawctopus.com
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/lifestyle/festivals/national-parents-day-2025-30-wishes-images-messages-greetings-whatsapp-and-facebook-status-to-share-101753530282149.html” on this server.
A key committee that helps decide what new medicines enter the European market has changed its mind about a closely watched drug for Alzheimer’s disease, and is now putting its support behind the therapy.
The reversal is a win for Eli Lilly, which developed the drug and has already secured marketing approvals in Japan, China, the U.K. and the U.S., where it’s sold under the brand name Kisunla. Lilly classified Kisunla as one of the new products that could even further grow the company, which has ballooned in value thanks to an emerging class of weight loss and diabetes treatments.
Analysts, too, have big expectations, predicting peak annual sales will reach into the billions. But for Kisunla to have a shot at such success, Lilly has had to convince healthcare regulators that the drug’s potential to slow down the progression of Alzheimer’s outweighs its known safety risks. Like two other Alzheimer’s medicines sold by Biogen and Eisai, Kisunla can cause swelling and small-scale bleeding in the brain — a slate of side effects collectively known as “ARIA.”
ARIA was a main reason why that key committee from the European Medicines Agency sided against Kisunla during its initial review of Lilly’s marketing application. The group highlighted, for instance, how clinical testing had found nearly 37% of participants given the drug experienced these effects, versus just under 15% of those on a placebo.
Reviewers did consider whether to recommend Kisunla for people who lack a certain gene believed to increase the risk of ARIA, but ultimately concluded there wasn’t enough supportive evidence to warrant authorization.
Following that rejection, which came in late March, Lilly said it would appeal the committee’s decision. While such tactics don’t often work out — an analysis from RBC Capital Markets found a reversal rate of just 20% over the past decade or so — there was reason to think the odds might be better in this case. That’s because Eisai had just won an appeal for its drug Leqembi, which had raised similar safety concerns with the EMA.
Lilly’s bet has now paid off, as the committee’s new opinion is Kisunla should be authorized as a treatment for early symptomatic Alzheimer’s disease in certain adults who have one or no copies of that risk gene.
That opinion “marks a significant milestone” in the company’s efforts to get Kisunla to eligible patients in Europe, said Patrik Jonsson, president of Lilly International, in a statement.
Some estimates hold that roughly 7 million people in Europe are living with Alzheimer’s. And Lilly, in its statement, noted this figure is expected to almost double by 2050 as aging populations increase.
With the EMA in support, Lilly’s marketing application heads to the European Commission, which has final say on approval.
Setting the right budget for a property purchase, be it a home or investment, is a very important financial decision.
If your budget is too conservative, you risk missing out on potential capital growth or settling for a property that does not meet all your lifestyle needs.
On the other hand, if you overspend and overborrow, you might limit your ability to invest in other assets and/or face financial strain.
Finding that perfect balance is key to making the wisest investment decision.
Break this decision down into two questions
To set a property budget, you need the answer to two questions: (1) How much can you borrow? and (2) How much should you borrow?
The first question, “How much can you borrow?” is determined by your borrowing capacity, which is set by lenders.
A good mortgage broker can help you answer this, as borrowing capacity can vary significantly between lenders based on your individual circumstances.
The second question, “How much should you borrow?” depends on your financial position, cash flow, plans, and risk tolerance.
In the past, the answer to the first question was almost always higher than the second, as banks would typically lend more than what most people were comfortable borrowing.
However, since credit policies have tightened a lot since 2017, it’s become more common for clients to be able to prudently afford to borrow more than what the banks are willing to lend them.
How much should you borrow?
Of course, it’s essential not to borrow more than you can afford.
Just because a bank is willing to lend you a certain amount, does not mean it’s necessarily safe to borrow that amount.
To determine what you can afford, you need to calculate your surplus investable cash flow – essentially, your income minus your expenses.
Then, using the assumptions below, you can reverse-engineer the numbers to figure out how much you can reasonably spend on a property.
Conservative assumptions:
Gross rental yield: 2% to 3.5% (depending on property type and value)
Minus: 30% of gross rental income allocated for expenses
Minus: loan interest: 6% p.a. on a loan amount equal to 108% of the property’s value to account for acquisition costs
Add back: tax savings at 32%, 39%, or 47%, depending on your tax bracket
This table sets out some examples:
Limited by your borrowing capacity?
If your ability to purchase property is constrained by borrowing capacity, there are several steps you can take to address this.
Get a second opinion
It’s important to explore all possible avenues to increase your borrowing capacity.
Getting a second or third opinion from a mortgage broker can be valuable, as they might suggest a different lender or a new way to structure the deal for a better outcome.
Just ensure you are working with reputable professionals.
Never follow advice that encourages withholding information or misleading a lender because ultimately, you are the one signing the application and could be held liable.
Is your borrowing capacity likely to improve in the next few years?
If getting a second opinion does not help, determine whether your borrowing capacity is likely to improve in the next few years.
Borrowing capacity is made up of two key measures: serviceability and security.
Serviceability refers to your income and expenses, while security relates to the assets you can offer as collateral.
Which factor is limiting you; serviceability or security?
If serviceability is the issue, consider whether it will improve, perhaps due to an increase in income or a reduction in expenses/commitments.
If security is the limitation, waiting 6 to 12 months for more comparable sales might result in a higher property valuation, improving your capacity. Or maybe get another bank to value your property/s.
If your borrowing capacity is tight, should you even invest in property?
If your current borrowing capacity is not enough to buy an investment-grade property, and there’s little chance it will improve in the next few years, it might be time to explore other investment options.
For example, if you can’t borrow enough for property, a regular gearing strategy into shares could be a viable alternative.
However, please be cautious about taking on significant gearing in the current market, especially with share indexes near all-time highs.
Should you borrow to your full capacity?
For example, if you can borrow to invest up to $2 million into an investment property, should you invest to this full capacity?
The answer will depend on your personal situation, but I hope the following thoughts and observations can help guide your decision.
Quality over quantity
I firmly believe that investing in the highest quality property your budget allows reduces investment risk and is likely to deliver the best long-term returns.
A high-quality asset is one that benefits from scarcity and consistently benefits from strong demand from multiple sources.
It’s not just about a property being valuable – it’s about it being highly sought after (fixed and limited supply and a lot of buyer demand), like a pink or red diamond.
Personally, if I had a budget of $2 to $3 million, I would focus on investing in one exceptional property rather than spreading the investment across multiple properties.
A home can be a good investment
Many people aim to minimise the budget for their homes to free up funds for investment.
However, this can be a false economy.
Sometimes, the smartest decision is to allocate a larger budget to your home to benefit from its capital growth potential, as explained in this blog.
Time horizon
If you are many years or even decades away from retirement, it’s more appropriate to gear more aggressively.
Looking back on my 30+ years of investing in property, I think I could be in a stronger position today if I had borrowed more aggressively earlier on.
I’m not suggesting you borrow more than you can afford, but I do believe that people in their 20s, 30s, and 40s should avoid being too conservative with their borrowing, especially when they are a long way from retirement.
Other investments
The amount you invest in property should be influenced by your age and other investments.
For instance, if you are young and just starting to build wealth, it’s not a problem if your only material investment is in property.
However, if you are in your 40s or 50s and have a relatively low super balance, I would usually recommend setting a property investment budget that allows you to maximise super contributions, whilst still investing in property.
Or if you have substantial surplus cash flow, I typically aim to diversify investments across various assets and ownership structures, by investing in high-quality property, plus regular share investing in a family trust or company, whilst also maximising super contributions, for example.
The goal is that by the time you reach retirement, it is wise to have your wealth invested across shares and property, whilst maximising the tax benefits of super, as explained in this blog.
Budget first, property second
A common mistake I have observed over the years is when investors choose a location first and then set their budget based on that.
However, I believe a better approach is to set your budget first, and then determine the best type of property and location for that budget.
This ensures you are selecting the right asset that aligns with your strategy, not building a strategy around assets.
Your strategy should always come before the asset.
Don’t ask your barber if you need a haircut
If you ask a buyer’s agent who specialises in purchasing property in regional locations with an average price of around $700,000 what you should do with your $3 million investment budget, what do you think their answer would be?
Be careful who you seek advice from.
It’s essential to do your own research and seek independent advice, though I know that can be challenging, as many financial advisors have limited knowledge about direct property investments.
About Stuart Wemyss Stuart was a Chartered Accountant before establishing mortgage broking firm ProSolution Private Clients. He has authored two books and shares his experience with readers of Property Update. Visit www.prosolution.com.au
Want to enjoy streaming TV and movies while keeping your personal data to yourself? You do not have to trade privacy for great entertainment. These apps and devices help you keep your habits private every time you stream.
Stremio stands out as a privacy-focused streaming app that puts privacy back in your hands. This open-source media center operates differently from traditional streaming services by using add-ons to discover content from various sources across the web.
What I particularly find unique about Stremio is its transparent approach. The entire codebase is available on GitHub, meaning security researchers can audit the software for any potential privacy issues. Stremio itself doesn’t require you to store your viewing history or build a personal profile, and guest mode is available to limit further the information tied to your streaming. Still, some data, such as analytics and your IP address, is needed when loading content or using add-ons. As a best practice, stick to well-reviewed and official add-ons, and consider using privacy tools like a VPN to limit exposure to third-party hosts.
The add-on system works by running extensions remotely, which provides an extra layer of security compared to downloading potentially malicious software directly to your device. I use add-ons such as YouTube integration and various official community-created extensions that help expand my viewing options without compromising on privacy.
You can sign up with only basic information, or even use its guest mode, which skips data collection entirely. In guest mode, you won’t have to worry about your personal info leaking out. Add-ons like Torrentio and WatchHub help you discover content easily, all without platforms creating data profiles about your preferences.
Looking for something more optimized for use on your streaming stick or TV box? Kodi is another open-source media player that collects no personal information. Unlike commercial alternatives, Kodi can operate entirely offline by default, meaning your viewing habits stay exclusively on your device.
The platform excels at organizing your personal media collection. Point Kodi toward your movie and TV show folders, and it automatically organizes everything with beautiful artwork, episode descriptions, and cast information. This local approach ensures that nobody else knows what you’re watching or when you’re watching it.
Official add-ons from the Kodi repository connect to legitimate streaming services like YouTube, Twitch, and various news networks. These official extensions maintain the same privacy standards as the core application. Kodi also allows you to watch IPTV on your PC or streaming stick, listen to podcasts, and even play some games, making it a complete media center for entertainment.
Like Stremio, Kodi’s add-on ecosystem extends its capabilities beyond local media. However, note that add-ons can still ask for private data. Official Kodi repository add-ons generally uphold strong privacy standards, but third-party or unofficial add-ons can potentially log data such as your IP address and viewing activity with their own servers or developers. Again, be careful of installing third-party add-ons outside the official repository.
The software works particularly well if you want complete control over your entertainment setup. Whether you’re running Kodi on a dedicated media PC, Raspberry Pi, or smartphone, the experience remains consistent and private.
If you want to host your own private Netflix-like media library, Plex strikes a good balance between convenience and privacy. The platform excels at creating a polished streaming service that closely rivals many popular paid streaming services.
The basic Plex functionality remains free and includes local streaming of personal content. You can install the Plex Media Server on your old computer or NAS device, then access your library through apps on various devices. No need to plug your computer into your TV; just host the app and visit your Plex landing page. The interface is particularly user-friendly, making it accessible even for less technical folks.
However, Plex has introduced limitations on remote streaming for free users, now requiring a subscription to access your media outside your home network. Despite this change, local streaming within your home remains free and doesn’t require sharing additional personal data. You can boost your privacy by tweaking Plex settings, like activating incognito mode or disabling playback collection data.
The platform’s strength lies in its automatic organization capabilities and broad device support. Plex can identify your media files and enhance them with artwork, descriptions, and other metadata, creating a professional-looking library experience.
If you tried Plex and found that it lacks certain features, you may want to try JellyFin. Many people have moved to JellyFin and found that it provides great privacy through its open-source development and features that you’d have to pay a premium for on other platforms. This self-hosted media server software is completely free and open-source, ensuring no corporate entity has access to your viewing data.
Unlike commercial media servers, JellyFin never phones home to external servers. Your media stays on your hardware, accessible only to users you specifically authorize. This approach means your streaming habits remain completely private, whether you’re watching from home or accessing your library remotely.
Another reason to choose Jellyfin is that it gives you premium features like remote streaming and mobile access for free. I keep Jellyfin running on my server alongside Plex because it lets me stream my media collection from anywhere, including on my phone, and never puts features behind a paywall or restriction.
These streaming solutions prove streaming doesn’t have to mean sacrificing privacy. Whether you prefer self-hosted media servers, open-source applications, or privacy-respecting streaming services, options exist for every preference and technical skill level. The key is choosing platforms that align with your privacy priorities while delivering the content experience you want.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-26/Chill-in-Summer-This-waterfall-in-China-will-leave-you-speechless-1FjWd4FHT5S/img/3a194a87b7d4402c86459be9eb0e54a2/3a194a87b7d4402c86459be9eb0e54a2.jpeg'Huangguoshu Waterfall is seen in southwest China’s Guizhou Province. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-26/Chill-in-Summer-This-waterfall-in-China-will-leave-you-speechless-1FjWd4FHT5S/img/3a194a87b7d4402c86459be9eb0e54a2/3a194a87b7d4402c86459be9eb0e54a2.jpeg'Huangguoshu Waterfall is seen in southwest China’s Guizhou Province. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-26/Chill-in-Summer-This-waterfall-in-China-will-leave-you-speechless-1FjWd4FHT5S/img/3a194a87b7d4402c86459be9eb0e54a2/3a194a87b7d4402c86459be9eb0e54a2.jpeg'Huangguoshu Waterfall is seen in southwest China’s Guizhou Province. /CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-26/Chill-in-Summer-This-waterfall-in-China-will-leave-you-speechless-1FjWd4FHT5S/img/3a194a87b7d4402c86459be9eb0e54a2/3a194a87b7d4402c86459be9eb0e54a2.jpeg'Huangguoshu Waterfall is seen in southwest China’s Guizhou Province. /CGTN
Tucked deep in the lush mountains of Guizhou, the Huangguoshu Waterfall is the perfect escape for your summer travels; and you don’t just have to look at the falls. You can actually walk right behind it!
Diana Ross returned to the Hollywood Bowl on Friday night for the first of two weekend concerts — her fifth engagement at the hillside amphitheater since 2013 and her second gig in her adopted hometown of Los Angeles in less than a year (following her performance at last August’s old-school Fool in Love festival). In other words, it’s not exactly hard to catch the 81-year-old pop legend onstage these days — which isn’t to say that it’s not worth doing. Here are nine moments that made me glad I showed up Friday:
1. After coming out to — what else? — “I’m Coming Out,” Ross zipped through a frisky Motown medley linking some of the 12 No. 1 hits she and the Supremes scored in the 1960s. Would I have liked to have heard full versions of “You Can’t Hurry Love,” “Baby Love” and “Stop! In the Name of Love”? Sure. But hearing these all-timers stacked up in rapid succession was a thrill of its own — a reminder of the blend of efficiency and ingenuity attained on a daily basis at Hitsville, U.S.A.
2. Ross was backed by more than a dozen musicians at the Bowl, including four horn players and four backing vocalists, and they were cooking from the get-go: crisply propulsive in the Motown stuff; tight and gliding in “Upside Down”; lush yet down-home in Ross’ take on Billie Holiday’s “Don’t Explain,” from her 1972 Holiday biopic “Lady Sings the Blues.”
3. Two wardrobe changes meant that we beheld three glittering gowns in all, beginning with the fluffy canary-yellow number she emerged in. About halfway through the show, Ross slipped into a pipe-and-drape dressing room at the rear of the stage then slipped back out wearing bedazzled ruby red; later, she changed into a shimmering gold look. Each dress came accompanied by a matching shawl that Ross would eventually toss to the stage to be retrieved by a waiting assistant who seemed to know precisely when it would happen.
4. Each dress also came with a bulky mic pack that — in an endearingly peculiar costuming choice — Ross opted to wear on her waist instead of hiding it around back.
5. “I have an album out, a current album — the title of the album is called ‘Thank You,’” Ross told the crowd as she began to introduce a tune from her not-bad 2021 LP. Then she turned her head stage-left toward a sound engineer in the wings: “Who’s talking in the mic? I can hear a mic.” She returned to the audience. “Anyway, the title of the album is called ‘Thank You.’ Each song was specially written so that I could say ‘thank you’ to you for all the wonderful years, all the…” Another glance left. “Somebody’s talking in the microphone.” Another turn back. “We’re gonna start with this one — ‘Tomorrow,’ OK? We’ll start that if I can out-talk whoever’s talking over here.”
6. Ross’ daughter Rhonda joined her mom to sing another new-ish tune, “Count on Me” — “She’s been practicing,” Diana said proudly (if somewhat shadily) — then stuck around to do a mini-set of her own self-help-ish soul-folk songs, one of which beseeched us all to “stop gaslighting ourselves.”
7. Half a century after “The Wiz” debuted on Broadway in 1975, Ross sang her two big numbers from the Black retelling of the “The Wizard of Oz,” which she helped cement as a cultural landmark with her role as Dorothy in a fondly remembered movie adaptation. Here, “Home” was wistful yet determined, while “Ease on Down the Road” got even the high-rollers in the Bowl’s box seats moving.
8. During “Reach Out and Touch (Somebody’s Hand),” Ross led the crowd in a call-and-response recitation of what she called “my mantra”: ”I’m so grateful / For all the blessings in my life / For there are many / All is well / I’m resilient / Thank you, thank you, thank you.”
9. More of Ross’ children appeared onstage at the end of the show to join her for a rowdy “I Will Survive” — and to plug their latest commercial endeavors. “Can I say one thing?” Tracee Ellis Ross asked. “‘Solo Traveling with Tracee Ellis Ross’ on Roku streams today, so check out the show.” Diana Ross reclaimed the microphone and gestured toward her son Ross Naess. “This is my son — he’s doing a line of caviar called Arne Reserve.” She looked around. “Chudney, what’s happening with you?”
New Delhi, July 26: The TVS Motor Company has launched a new special edition scooter of the TVS Ntorq 125, referred to as the Super Soldier Edition. The TVS NTORQ 125 Super Soldier Edition draws inspiration from Marvel’s iconic character, Captain America. The launch is part of the company’s Super Squad series, which already features scooters themed around other superheroes. TVS NTORQ 125 Super Soldier Edition price in India starts at INR 98,117 (ex-showroom, Delhi).
TVS Motor described the new edition and said the scooter is “a bold reimagination of the fan-favourite Captain America.” The company added that the TVS NTORQ 125 Super Soldier Edition as a “Camo-inspired design”, and “this edition blends heroic legacy with street-ready swagger.” ‘Made in China’ BYD EV in Self-Driving Mode Spirals out of Control at Tianfu Airport in Chengdu After Brake Failure, Circles Over 100 Times (Watch Video).
TVS NTORQ 125 Super Soldier Edition Specifications and Features
The TVS NTORQ 125 Super Soldier Edition comes with advanced features and stylish details. It includes a gaming console-inspired digital speedometer, a USB charger for convenience, and a 20-litre under-seat storage area. It also features an LED lamp and comes with a wheelbase of 1285mm and ground clearance of 155mm. The TVS NTORQ 125 Super Soldier Edition has a kerb weight of 111 kg. The scooter offers two options for the front brakes, which come either with a 220mm disc with SBT or a 130mm drum with SBT. At the rear, it features a 130mm drum brake. MG Cyberster Price, Specifications and Features Revealed, Know Everything About Electric Roadster Launched by JSW MG Motor India.
The front suspension of the NTORQ 125 Super Soldier Edition comes with a telescopic suspension with hydraulic dampers, while the rear uses a coil spring paired with hydraulic dampers. It is powered by a single-cylinder, 4-stroke, SI, air-cooled, fuel-injected 124.8cc engine. It delivers a peak power of 7kW at 7,000 rpm and a maximum torque of 10.6Nm at 5,500 rpm. The scooter also comes with a 5.8-litre fuel tank.
(The above story first appeared on LatestLY on Jul 26, 2025 01:07 PM IST. For more news and updates on politics, world, sports, entertainment and lifestyle, log on to our website latestly.com).
The future of self-driving cars in Italy it seems needs not only technology but also (possibly above all) political backing. The good news, then, is that more than 60 mayors in Italy have decided to take the field for the cars of the future.
On July 14, in the hall of the MEET Digital Culture Center in Milan, Pierfrancesco Maran, a member of the European Parliament for the Italian Democratic Party, launched the Autonomous Driving: Italy in the Front Row initiative, which has backing from administrators from all over the country.
Among the signatories to the scheme are Milan mayor Beppe Sala and Turin mayor Stefano Lo Russo, as well as dozens of other mayors of medium-size and small cities. The goal, apparently, is to make Italy the European leader in autonomous vehicles, turning municipal territories into open-air laboratories for testing the automotive technologies of the near future.
Catching Up With the USA and China
The initiative stems from the realization that Europe lags dramatically behind the United States and China. While Waymo fulfills more than 250,000 paid rides a week in the four US cities where it operates, and China has established 20 pilot cities with more than 74 million miles of accumulated testing, Europe is limited to 400 highly fragmented micro-projects—of which less than half are nationwide.
The gap is not only geographical. In the United States and China, private individuals and companies invest billions, while in Europe, public funds are dispersed over initiatives that are too small. Europe’s regulatory fragmentation, with 27 different national frameworks (including differing traffic laws, for example), also makes it impossible to exploit any advantage of the region being a single continental market.
A Waymo self-driving vehicle in San Francisco.
Justin Sullivan/Getty Images
Italian administrators see autonomous driving as a practical solution to everyday urban problems, such as last-mile urban logistics and reducing traffic and pollution in city centers. Extending the right to mobility for the elderly, disabled, and children is also a priority shared by many administrators in the country, as is the use of autonomous vehicles to better connect suburban areas poorly served by public transportation.
Are you curious about New Game Plus in Wuchang: Fallen Feathers? This mode is a staple in soulslike and role-playing games, letting you restart your adventure with the goodies that you’ve found during your first playthrough. That said, there are some caveats that might surprise you with how Wuchang handles this concept. Oh, and before we continue, please be reminded that this article contains minor spoilers.
What to expect in New Game Plus in Wuchang: Fallen Feathers
New Game Plus mode is unlocked after completing the campaign and obtaining an ending. After the end credits roll, you’ll be sent back to the main menu. Unfortunately, we’re not allowed to show an image just yet, but you should see an option called “Causality Reversal,” which is the term that the game uses for New Game Plus mode.
Should you start New Game Plus mode?
Here’s the surprising part: You’re actually forced to start Wuchang: Fallen Feathers’ New Game Plus mode after beating the game.
It doesn’t matter if you pick “Causality Reversal,” “Continue,” or “Load Game.” All these options bring you back to the game’s intro for a New Game Plus run. Worse, your original save file will be overwritten, too.
This can be a bit problematic, especially if you missed a few items or spells during your initial playthrough. It’s also different from how other games handled this feature–i.e. there’s an option to try New Game Plus via the main menu, but you can still load your original save.
Wuchang wakes up in the same cave upon starting New Game Plus.
Is there a way to avoid New Game Plus mode?
If you’re not ready yet for New Game Plus in Wuchang: Fallen Feathers, you need to have a backup save before you conclude the campaign. This is how we did our workaround for the PC (Steam) version of the game:
Prior to obtaining an ending, we exited the game so we could have a backup of the save state.
The files/folders that you need are in the “C:Users[username]AppDataLocalProject_Plague” directory.
Copy the whole “Saved” folder and place it somewhere else.
If you need to revert to a previous state, simply place the “Saved” folder in the “Project_Plague” directory and overwrite everything there. Then, launch Wuchang and pick “Load Game” from the main menu.
The save file might say “Causality Reversal 1”–i.e. New Game +1–but that’s fine. This is mostly due to cloud functionality. Upon loading it, you should find yourself at the same spot as your original save.
Items that can’t be duplicated grant you Red Mercury blood resources instead.
What carries over and what changes in New Game Plus?
Here’s what you can expect in Wuchang: Fallen Feathers’ New Game Plus mode:
You carry over all your equipment/gear pieces, Red Mercury, unlocked skills, spells, temperance needles, and the like.
Enemies will be tougher this time around.
Jade Pendants and Benedictions that you pick up have a +1 coefficient, which means their effects are more potent.
Vendors still sell the same items. You can’t purchase stuff that can’t have duplicates–i.e. spells.
If you loot items that can’t have duplicates–i.e. Manna Vase upgrades and spells–you’ll receive Red Mercury-related materials instead.
Panda Bamboozlings/Bamboo Shoots and Inner Demons that you killed before will respawn in the same locations. You should be able to amass more of their rewards.
You have to reacquire quest items. You can tackle quests that you weren’t able to complete previously.
That does it for our guide on New Game Plus in Wuchang: Fallen Feathers. We hope you’re well prepared if you want to continue your adventure. If you’re still looking for other gear pieces, you can take a look at our best weapons and armors/outfits guide.
Many dangers await you as you venture forth in Sichuan Province during the fall of the Ming Dynasty. If you need more help, we’ve got you covered with our Wuchang: Fallen Feathers guides hub.
Stevia may provide more benefits than as a zero-calorie sugar substitute. When fermented with bacteria isolated from banana leaves, stevia extract kills off pancreatic cancer cells but doesn’t harm healthy kidney cells, according to a research team at Hiroshima University.
The researchers published their findings in the International Journal of Molecular Sciences.
“Globally, the incidence and mortality rates of pancreatic cancer continue to rise, with a five-year survival rate of less than 10%,” said co-author Narandalai Danshiitsoodol, associate professor in Department of Probiotic Science for Preventive Medicine, Graduate School of Biomedical and Health Sciences. “Pancreatic cancer is highly invasive and prone to metastasis, showing significant resistance to existing treatments, such as surgery, radiotherapy and chemotherapy. As such, there is an urgent need to identify new and effective anticancer compounds, particularly those derived from medicinal plants.”
Prior studies by other researchers indicated that stevia leaf extract demonstrated potential as an anticancer drug, but isolating and applying the specific bioactive components that protect against cancer cells has remained challenging, Danshiitsoodol said. However, fermenting with bacteria can structurally change the extract and produce bioactive metabolites, which are compounds that can impact living organisms.
“To enhance the pharmacological efficacy of natural plant extracts, microbial biotransformation has emerged as an effective strategy,” said corresponding author Masanori Sugiyama, professor in the Department of Probiotic Science for Preventive Medicine, Graduate School of Biomedical and Health Sciences. Sugiyama’s lab has isolated and evaluated the health benefits of more than 1,300 lactic acid bacteria (LAB) strains from fruits, vegetables, flowers and medicinal plants. “In this study, we aimed to compare LAB-fermented and non-fermented extracts to identify key compounds that enhance bioactivity, ultimately contributing to the efficacy of herbal medicine in cancer prevention and therapy.”
Specifically, the team fermented stevia leaf extract with plant-derived Lactobacillus plantarum SN13T strain (FSLE) and compared its effects on pancreatic cancer (PANC-1) cells in the lab, alongside non-cancerous human embryonic kidney cells HEK-293, to the effects of non-fermented stevia extract. The cells utilized in these experiments were acquired from established commercial cell lines.
“Our findings indicate that FSLE demonstrates significantly greater cytotoxicity than the non-fermented extract at equivalent concentrations, suggesting that the fermentation process enhances the bioactivity of the extract,” Sugiyama said. “Notably, FSLE exhibited lower toxicity toward the HEK-293 cells, with minimal inhibition observed even at the highest concentration tested.”
Additional analyses identified chlorogenic acid methyl ester (CAME) as the active anti-cancer compound. When fermented, the concentration of chlorogenic acid in the extract dropped six-fold, indicating a microbial transformation, according to Danshiitsoodol.
“This microbial transformation was likely due to specific enzymes in the bacteria strain used,” Danshiitsoodol said. “Our data demonstrate that CAME exhibits stronger toxicity to cells and pro-apoptotic effects — which encourage cell death — on PANC-1 cells compared to chlorogenic acid alone.”
Next, the researchers said they plan to study the effects in a mouse model to better understand the effectiveness of various dosages across a whole-body system.
“The present study has substantially enhanced our understanding of the mechanism of action of the Lactobacillus plantarum SN13T strain in the fermentation of herbal extracts, while also offering a valuable research perspective on the potential application of probiotics as natural anti-tumor agents,” Danshiitsoodol said.
Other contributors include Rentao Zhang and Masafumi Noda, Department of Probiotic Science for Preventive Medicine, Graduate School of Biomedical and Health Sciences, Hiroshima University; and Sayaka Yonezawa and Keishi Kanno, Department of General Internal Medicine, Hiroshima University Hospital.
The Indian Journal of Integrated Research in Law, ISSN: 2583-0538, PIF: 6.962 is an online bi-monthly journal that promotes research in the field of law as an integrated subject.
IJIRL strives to provide a platform where everyone related to the field of law can contribute their research work on any topic related to law and allied subjects and further our goal of creating a quality-driven platform open to students and professionals alike which can be utilized to foster the growth of law as a discipline in the contemporary era while instilling a sense of curiosity for legal research.
Perks of Getting Published at IJIRL
Indexed: The journal is indexed in reputable databases like Manupatra, HeinOnline, Google Scholar & ROAD, which makes the articles available to a wider community, thus, making the research available to all.
Links To Verify Indexing:
Free DOI (Digital Object Identification): A DOI is a string of numbers, letters and symbols used to permanently identify an article or document and link to it on the web. A DOI will help a reader easily locate a document from the citation.
Certificate of Excellence: The top 10 authors in each issue are given a softcopy of the Certificate of Excellence for their publication.
Timely Processing of Manuscript: The whole review process takes up to 24-72 hours. The final publication is done within 1-4 working days of the payment of the processing fee.
Internship Opportunities: The top authors in each issue will be provided with internship opportunities based on availability.
Opportunity To Work As A Student Editor: The top authors are provided with an opportunity to work as student editors at IJIRL based on the availability of slots.
Theme
Any topic or issue relating to law or any related field can be sent for publication in IJIRL as the journal aims to promote interdisciplinary research in the field of law and related disciplines.
Who is Eligible to Submit?
All Academicians, Research Scholars, Lawyers, Law Students or Anyone with an interest in the field of law and related disciplines can submit their original and unpublished manuscripts.
How to Submit?
The authors can submit their manuscripts through the form provided at the end of this post.
Note: In case of any difficulty in filling the submission form, the authors can submit their manuscript via email at [[email protected]]
Types of Submissions Accepted
IJIRL accepts submissions of manuscripts in the following categories:
Long Articles (4000-6000 words, Excluding footnotes)
Case Notes and Legislative Comments (1500-2500 words)
Note: The journal may be flexible on the word limit depending on the quality of the article.
Guidelines for Submission
The guidelines for publication must be strictly followed. The guidelines for publication in IJIRL can be accessed here.
Processing Charges (To Be Paid After Acceptance)
Single Authored Manuscript: INR 800/-
Co-Authored Manuscript (Up to Three Authors): INR 1000/-
Foreign Authors (Outside India): $ 25/-
General Instructions & Guidelines for Submission
Long articles and short articles must be accompanied by an Abstract.
An article can be authored by up to 3 co-authors.
All works must be original, unpublished, and must not be pending for review before any other journal.
Any form of plagiarism will result in immediate disqualification for publication on IJIRL
The first page of the manuscript should contain the title of the paper, the name of the authors, and their institutional affiliation, followed by an abstract.
The main body of the manuscript should be in Times New Roman style, font size 12, with 1.5 line spacing and footnotes in Times New Roman Style, Size 10, with 1.0 line spacing. All headings must have uniform formatting.
All footnotes/ references should conform to the Bluebook 20th Edition or ILI Rules of Footnoting.
Once published, Copyright over the manuscript shall vest with “Indian Journal of Integrated Research in Law”.
Contact Information
All correspondence and queries related to the submission may be addressed to [email protected]
Disclaimer: WEF April, 2021, Lawctopus will not publish any ‘Call for Papers/Blogs’ by journals that charge money at the time of submission. If you find any journal doing so, please intimate us at tanuj.kalia[at]lawctopus.com
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/lifestyle/health/paediatrician-explains-blue-baby-syndrome-know-causes-symptoms-and-treatment-101753530359355.html” on this server.
AstraZeneca executive Cristian Massacesi will join Bristol Myers Squibb as its chief medical officer, replacing outgoing executive Samit Hirawat, the company said Friday.
Massacesi, who served as chief medical officer at AstraZeneca the past four years, will start Aug. 1. His predecessor, Hirawat, is leaving to “pursue new professional opportunities,” according to an announcement.
Since Hirawat joined Bristol Myers in 2019, the company has brought to market drugs like Sotyktu, Reblozyl, Camzyos, Opdualag and Cobenfy. Of those, Reblozyl has already become a blockbuster, bringing in nearly $1.8 billion in revenue in 2024.
The company also stocked its pipeline with notable cancer drug acquisitions under Hirawat, entering the radiopharmaceutical space with its buyout of RayzeBio, allying with BioNTech on a popular type of bispecific antibody, and adding a portfolio of KRAS therapies with its purchase of Mirati Therapeutics.
Cobenfy, a schizophrenia medicine, came in via its purchase of Karuna Therapeutics in 2023.
Hirawat’s “commitment and visionary approach have driven our progress and positioned us at the forefront of impactful medical innovation,” Bristol Myers CEO Christopher Boerner said in a statement.
As the new CMO, Massacesi will face challenges. Bristol Myers announced plans to deepen cost cuts earlier this year as it faces generic competition for its cancer medicine Revlimid, and the looming patent expirations of its cancer immunotherapy Opdivo and blood thinner Eliquis.
His experience shaping AstraZeneca’s pipeline could help. In recent years, the U.K. pharma’s multi-pronged approach to building vast oncology drug portfolio has included prioritizing some of the same areas that interest Bristol Myers, such as radiopharma. During Massacesi’s tenure, AstraZeneca has also invested in antibody-drug conjugates and cell therapy.
Massacesi joined AstraZeneca in 2019 as head of late development oncology and was made oncology chief development officer when appointed CMO of AstraZeneca and its rare disease unit Alexion. Before AstraZeneca, he steered cancer drug development at Pfizer and Novartis.
Boerner said Massacesi’s “deep scientific expertise, strong focus on clinical execution and proven track record of regulatory approvals will be instrumental as we continue to advance our pipeline and deliver breakthrough medicines to even more patients around the world.”
The Australian housing market remains far more complicated than many portray it to be.
The Australian housing cycle is turning up again; falling interest rates are the key driver, along with a chronic undersupply of homes of 200,000-300,000 dwellings.
This partly reflects a surge in building times; poor affordability is a key constraint though, but it varies significantly between cities; and finally, mortgage arrears remain low.
Average prices are expected to rise 5-6% this year boosted by falling rates but constrained by poor affordability.
By now, you’ve probably noticed the resurgence in our property markets.
Headlines are shifting from fear to FOMO again, and once more we’re hearing bold predictions from both extremes, the eternal optimists touting the tired “property doubles every seven years” mantra and the perennial bears warning of a crash.
The reality, as always, lies somewhere in between.
Australia’s housing market isn’t broken. But it is complex.
And if you want to build lasting wealth through property, you need to cut through the noise and understand what’s really driving the trends – not just today, but into the future.
What’s notable is that this isn’t just the previously strong performing cities of Brisbane, Adelaide in Perth anymore.
Cities that were previously lagging: Melbourne, Hobart, Canberra, Darwin, are joining the party.
This kind of broad-based upswing is a clear sign of a market cycle in motion – not a one-off blip according to Shane Oliver.
And savvy investors know that this phase of the property cycle create opportunity.
2. Interest rates are (still) a key driver
To put it simply: when interest rates fall, borrowing capacity rises, and property becomes more attractive.
So it’s no coincidence that property prices started to rebound as rates started easing earlier this year.
Dr Oliver makes a strong point: in five of the past seven RBA rate-cutting cycles since 1982, home prices rose significantly over the following 12 to 18 months, provided we didn’t fall into recession.
The AMP base case now includes a series of 0.25% rate cuts starting in August, then again in November, February and May.
Dr. Oliver suggests that if the labour market continues to soften, we could even see back-to-back cuts sooner than expected.
However, the previous two rate cuts and the expectation of easier monetary policy are already fueling renewed buyer confidence.
But remember, these tailwinds won’t benefit everyone equally. Location, property type, and strategy still matter.
3. Chronic undersupply is the real elephant in the room
Forget the populist blame game about negative gearing or investors, Australia’s biggest housing issue currently is lack of supply and not property speculation.
Since the mid-2000s, our population has grown rapidly thanks to strong immigration, but housing completions just sorry okay thank you very much. I enjoyed my lunch.haven’t kept pace.
Dr Oliver estimates the national housing shortfall is at least 200,000 dwellings, and possibly closer to 300,000 depending on household formation assumptions.
Why? A toxic mix of planning red tape, higher construction costs, and labour shortages.
Yes, immigration has been moderating lately. But that alone won’t fix the problem.
We need meaningful reforms to boost construction capacity, things like streamlining approvals, encouraging smaller dwellings, and smarter material use like pattern plans or timber over brick and concrete.
And critically, governments need to stick to their promise under the National Housing Accord: building 1.2 million new homes over five years.
5. Yes, Australian property is expensive, but that’s only part of the story
Affordability is clearly deteriorating, and it has been for decades.
Dr Shane Oliver’s valuation table shows this clearly. He believes:
Houses are around 30% overvalued on a price-to-rent basis.
Units, on the other hand, are only 1% overvalued—which suggests better value and less downside risk.
Perth and Melbourne now appear to be the least overvalued capital city markets for houses.
Both cities show undervaluation in the unit sector.
This sort of dispersion is gold for investors.
It means you don’t need to wait for a national upswing – you just need to find the right city and the right asset type.
7. Mortgage arrears remain low
Despite all the talk of mortgage stress, actual arrears remain extremely low, sitting below 1% on average, and still low even for high LVR or high debt-to-income borrowers.
This reflects several things:
Prudent lending standards
Strong employment levels (so far)
Large household savings buffers from the COVID period
Unless we see a sharp spike in unemployment, we’re unlikely to get a wave of forced sales that would push prices down meaningfully.
So where are we headed?
Dr Oliver’s base case? A 5–6% gain in national property prices this year, underpinned by lower interest rates and structural undersupply, but limited by poor affordability.
There are risks both ways:
For investors, this environment rewards strategy, not speculation.
Buy well-located properties with strong fundamentals and decent rental yields.
Avoid the froth, ignore the spruikers, and don’t fall for the doom-and-gloomers either.
This market isn’t cheap, but for the strategic, it’s still full of opportunity.
About Joseph Ballota Joseph is a Property Coach who put hundreds of people on the road towards wiping away their mortgage in under 5 years through expert Property Investment Plans.
What is a real relationship? Is it just romantic dates and cute Instagram posts, or is there something deeper? A real relationship isn’t just about labels—it’s about connection, trust, and commitment. It is about knowing each other’s habits, quirks, and imperfections and still choosing to love and accept them. To learn more about this, we talked to California-based psychiatrist and cognitive behavior therapist, Dr. Shefali Batra (MD in psychiatry), who specializes in counseling for separation and divorce, breakup and dating, and premarital compatibility issues.
What Does It Mean To Be In A Relationship?
Being in a relationship means having someone who knows your food order by heart, calls you out on your nonsense, and still chooses to stick around. It’s about partnership, compromise, and sending memes that say, “This is so us.” But is that all? Responding to the question of what is a real relationship, Dr. Batra defines a healthy relationship as, “You’ll celebrate each other’s wins, endure each other’s bad moods, and sometimes argue about whether Friends or The Office is the superior show. But if you’re willing to communicate, respect each other’s space, and genuinely enjoy each other’s company—even when you’re just sitting in silence—then congrats, you’re in a balanced relationship.”
13 Characteristics Of A Real Relationship
Real relationships are built over time, requiring effort, patience, and mutual understanding. They involve shared experiences, deep conversations, and moments of laughter, but also the ability to navigate tough times hand in hand. If you’ve ever wondered what makes a relationship work, here are 13 defining characteristics that shape the foundation of a strong and meaningful partnership.
1. You communicate, even when it’s awkward
Good communication isn’t just about talking; it’s about being honest, even when it’s uncomfortable. A real relationship thrives when both partners feel safe to express their feelings and thoughts without fear of judgment or retaliation. Notice if you see these behaviors in your relationship:
Listen actively and not interrupting when the other is speaking
During disagreements, the focus is on understanding rather than proving a point
When a partner expresses feeling overwhelmed/tired/upset, the other acknowledges their feelings instead of dismissing them, ensuring a supportive space
You don’t bottle things up or avoid tough conversations—honest discussions strengthen the bond
This Reddit user shared how they knew they were in a real relationship: “ I know I can come to him about anything I’m feeling and he’ll talk it out with me, without shaming me for my feelings.”
2. You argue, but fairly
Arguments are inevitable, but how you handle them defines the strength of your relationship. Do disagreements escalate into shouting, personal attacks, and insults? Or do you work as a team to find a resolution? Here are some characteristics of fair fighting:
No shouting, name-calling, or bringing up past mistakes to hurt the other person
You use “I” statements instead of blaming: “I feel hurt when…” rather than “You always….”
Compromises are made with mutual respect, not resentment
Disagreements are seen as opportunities for growth, not threats to the relationship
Related Reading: The Most Important 7 Qualities Of A Healthy Relationship
3. You make plans beyond next week
A serious relationship involves long-term thinking and shared goals and dreams. If your partner envisions a future with you, it’s a sign of commitment. Here are some signs, as per Dr. Batra, that say you’re in it for a long ride:
Conversations about the future naturally include both of you
You can plan vacations, big events, or even future living arrangements without hesitation
You both set goals as a couple
4. You introduce each other proudly
If your partner is serious about you, they wouldn’t want to keep you a secret. On the contrary, they would be proud and show you off to their family and friends. They gladly take you to events as a plus one instead of making excuses.
Nancy, a 24-year-old graphic designer, shares, “My boyfriend is a social butterfly and is often invited to parties. He loves taking me with him to these parties and introducing me to his friends. The way he showers me with compliments in front of them makes me feel so loved. When I used to say I want a real relationship, this is what I meant.”
Related Reading: Secure Relationships – What Are They And What Do They Look Like?
5. You feel safe being yourself
What is a relationship if not feeling comfortable enough to be your unfiltered self and not having to pretend or act differently to be loved, be it your:
Ugly laughs
Weird habits
Or random shower thoughts
If you know they love you for who you truly are, not just an idealized version of you, and there’s mutual acceptance of flaws and imperfections, that is one of the signs of a healthy relationship.
6. You support each other’s goals
A strong relationship encourages growth, not limits it. So, if you’re wondering whether you’re in a serious relationship, notice if your partner:
Supports your career, passions, and personal ambitions
Celebrate your wins, no matter how big or small
Not feel threatened by your achievements
Gives you space to grow individually while still growing together in the relationship
Characterisitics of a real relationship
7. You’re comfortable in silence
Real intimacy means you don’t always need words to feel connected. You can sit in comfortable silence without awkwardness, whether it’s:
Watching a sunset
Driving together
Or simply sitting on the couch reading
There’s no pressure to entertain each other or fill every moment with conversation—your presence alone is enough. This level of ease shows an unspoken understanding and emotional safety in the relationship.
8. You don’t play mind games
Healthy relationships don’t involve manipulation, jealousy, or unnecessary tests. You don’t have to worry about any mind games like:
Waiting hours to reply just to seem busy
Playing hard to get
Or making each other jealous to elicit a reaction
Dr. Batra shares, “When there’s transparency and honesty in the relationship, it eliminates unnecessary drama, creating a stress-free and secure environment. The communication flows naturally, instead of being seen as a power struggle.” A real relationship values emotional safety over mind games, ensuring that both people feel appreciated rather than insecure.
9. You respect each other’s space
Love doesn’t mean being inseparable—it means balancing relationship needs with individuality. A strong relationship allows both partners to maintain their independence while still being deeply connected. So, do you see these behavior patterns in your relationship?
Encouraging alone time and personal hobbies
Recognizing that time apart can strengthen the relationship
No guilt-tripping or resentment when one person needs space
Dr. Batra says, “Independence within a relationship makes it stronger. When both individuals can thrive on their own, they bring their best selves into the partnership. Respecting each other’s space fosters a relationship based on trust and confidence rather than insecurity and dependency.”
Related Reading: 9 Examples Of Mutual Respect In A Relationship
10. You laugh a lot
Shared laughter creates strong emotional bonds and lightens even the toughest situations. It’s one of the simplest yet most powerful ways to strengthen a relationship. This connection can take the form of:
Inside jokes
Playful teasing
Banter
A unique language only you and your partner understand
And, most importantly, light-hearted jokes during stressful times to lighten up the mood
Dr. Batra shares, “A relationship filled with joy and humor is resilient. Couples who laugh together often experience deeper emotional intimacy. Laughter creates cherished moments of happiness, making even the most mundane activities feel special when shared with the right person.” It’s not just about having fun—it’s about finding joy in each other, making life’s journey enjoyable and meaningful together.
11. You trust each other fully
Without trust, a relationship is built on shaky ground. And this trust can manifest in several ways. For example, if there’s no urge to snoop through each other’s phones or if you can make time and go out with your friends (of any gender) without any raised eyebrows from your partner, these are all signs of a healthy relationship.
This Reddit user shared a list of all the green flags she found in her partner, “I didn’t even realise it was happening – probably because I wasn’t used to seeing green flags…It wasn’t until I looked back and paid real close attention that I saw all the green flags. I felt emotionally safe with him. We could talk about anything and feel no judgment. He was trustworthy. If he said he would, he would.
12. You handle tough times together
A real relationship isn’t just about enjoying the good times—it’s about standing by each other when things get hard. Life is full of challenges, and the strength of a relationship is often revealed during difficult moments. You don’t run away when things get hard; instead, you work through problems as a team, knowing that struggles are temporary but your bond is enduring. You support each other through stress, grief, and uncertainty, offering emotional reassurance and practical help.
13. You feel at home with them
At the end of the day, love is about peace, not just passion. So pay attention if your partner’s presence makes you feel safe and comfortable. Are you constantly feeling a sense of anxiety over your partner getting upset over something or simply losing feelings and walking away? Or do you feel calm and content after snuggling up to them after a long day? This calmness is a major sign of true love.
This Reddit user put it very beautifully, “I thought I had no feelings for him till I realized real healthy for me is calm, not anxious”
Are You Ready For A Real Relationship?
We’ve answered all your questions like, “What is a real relationship?” “What does it mean to be in a relationship?”, and how you can identify one. But let us also tell you that not all people can be part of a committed relationship. Many people desire love, but not everyone is truly prepared to give the commitment and required effort in a relationship. So, how do you know if you’re ready? Here are some signs, as per Dr. Batra:
You are emotionally available: If you’re still healing from a past relationship or unsure about what you want, you may not be ready to fully invest in someone else
You value consistency over excitement: A serious relationship isn’t just about chemistry; it’s about showing up every day, even when the initial spark fades
You can handle disagreements maturely: If you avoid conflict or struggle to communicate during tough moments, you may need to work on personal growth before diving into a committed relationship
You don’t expect a partner to “fix” you: Relationships provide support, but they are not a substitute for self-love and self-improvement
You’re clear about your relationship needs and expectations: If you find yourself constantly “seeing where it goes” but panicking when deeper conversations arise, it may be time to reflect on what you truly want
How to build a strong relationship
Building a meaningful relationship takes time, effort, and intentionality. Here are some tips on what makes a relationship work and how to build a strong bond:
Communicate openly and honestly: Express feelings, thoughts, and concerns without fear of judgment
Foster trust and reliability: Show up consistently and honor commitments to strengthen mutual trust
Prioritize quality time together: Spend meaningful moments together to deepen the connection
Respect differences and personal growth: Allow room for individuality while growing as a couple
Support each other’s goals and dreams: Encourage your partner’s ambitions and celebrate their successes
Handle conflicts with maturity: Disagreements are inevitable, but resolving them with respect is key
Keep the romance alive: Small gestures, surprises, and appreciation keep the love fresh and exciting
Key Pointers
A strong relationship is built on open, honest communication. Expressing feelings, listening actively, and addressing concerns without fear fosters trust and understanding
Real relationships thrive on mutual trust and respect. Whether it’s giving each other space, avoiding mind games, or standing by each other in tough times, trust forms the foundation of a lasting bond
A healthy relationship allows both partners to maintain their individuality
Humor and shared moments of joy create an emotional closeness that keeps the relationship fresh and enjoyable
Love isn’t just about the good times—it’s about showing up when things get hard
Final Thoughts
What is a real relationship? It’s not just about being together, it’s about growing together. Healthy relationships are built on trust, respect, and mutual effort. If you recognize these healthy relationship characteristics in your own love life, congratulations! If not, it might be time for a serious conversation. At the end of the day, what is the meaning of love in a relationship? It’s not just about emotions—it’s about commitment, understanding, and putting in effort in a relationship. True love should feel like home—safe, comfortable, and filled with care.
15 Qualities Of A Good Relationship That Make Life Bliss
15 Characteristics Of True Love
18 Most Important Things In A Relationship
Your contribution does not constitute a charitable donation. It will allow Bonobology to continue bringing you new and up-to-date information in our pursuit of helping anyone in the world to learn how to do anything.
Share Feedback
What is your feedback?
Subscribe to Our Newsletter
Get your weekly dose of insightful articles straight to your inbox.
Spreadsheets are supposed to save time, but sometimes they just make things messier. I hated digging through endless menus until I found a handful of formulas that do the heavy lifting for me.
8
VLOOKUP
VLOOKUP searches for a specific value in the first column of a range and returns a corresponding value from another column in the same row. You can call it a lookup tool that saves you from manually scrolling through vast datasets. The syntax for VLOOKUP is:
VLOOKUP(search_key, range, index, [is_sorted])
Here, search_key is the value you want to find, and range is the table where you’re searching. The index parameter tells VLOOKUP which column to return data from, while is_sorted indicates whether your data is sorted.
If you set is_sorted to FALSE, it will show you exact matches, which is usually what you want for most lookup tasks.
Here’s how VLOOKUP works in practice:
=VLOOKUP("Saniya", B2:J3000, 9, FALSE)
This formula searches for “Saniya” in column B and returns the corresponding value from the ninth column. It’s perfect if you want to find employee details, product information, or any data organized in tables.
However, there’s a limitation of VLOOKUP that it only searches to the right. It can’t look left of your search column. But for most everyday tasks, it handles data lookup perfectly. For more detailed examples, you can check out our guide on using the VLOOKUP function in Google Sheets.
7
SUMIF
SUMIF adds up values in a range based on specific criteria you set. Instead of manually calculating totals for different categories, this formula does the heavy lifting, and it’s accurate.
While the basic IF function returns TRUE or FALSE based on conditions, SUMIF takes it further by performing calculations on the data that meets your criteria. It has the following syntax:
SUMIF(range, criteria, [sum_range])
Here, the range contains the cells you’re checking against your criteria, the criteria is your condition, and sum_range is the actual values to add up. If you omit sum_range, SUMIF adds the values in the range itself. It only works with text, numbers, and even wildcards, such as asterisks (*) for partial matches.
=SUMIF(V2:V3000, "<1000", Z2:Z3000)
In the above example, the formula checks column V for values less than 1000 and then sums the corresponding amounts in column Z. This formula is handy for calculating sales totals, expense categories, or any conditional summation.
Related
How to Use the SUMIFS Function in Excel
Want to make data analysis in Excel a breeze? Learn how to use the SUMIFS function to quickly sum up specific criteria in your spreadsheets.
You can even combine multiple criteria, though you’ll need SUMIFS for that level of complexity. For such complex examples and advanced criteria combinations, you can check out our detailed guide on using the SUMIF function in Google Sheets.
6
CONCATENATE
This function combines text from multiple cells into a single cell. When you need to merge first and last names, create email addresses, or build custom labels, you can use this function in your formula to handle the text manipulation.
You can also use the ampersand (&) symbol as a shortcut for basic concatenation, though using the CONCATENATE function in Google Sheets offers more flexibility for complex combinations. The syntax for CONCATENATE is:
CONCATENATE(string1, [string2, ...])
Here, string1 is your first text value, and you can add unlimited additional strings. Each parameter can be a cell reference, actual text in quotes, or a mix of both.
Remember that it doesn’t automatically add spaces, so you need to include them manually as separate parameters, as shown in the following example.
=CONCATENATE(B2, " ", C2)
This formula combines the values from cells B2 and C2, separated by a space. It is perfect for creating full names, product codes, formatted addresses, and more.
CONCATENATE can become unwieldy if you use many parameters, but it’s still the most reliable way to merge text data. You can also use CONCATENATE in Excel to join text from multiple cells.
5
COUNTIF
COUNTIF counts cells that meet specific criteria within a range. When you need to track how many items fall into certain categories—like counting completed tasks or tallying specific responses—this formula eliminates manual counting errors.
It works well for analyzing survey data, inventory tracking, and performance metrics. The syntax for COUNTIF is:
COUNTIF(range, criteria)
Here, range specifies the cells you want to examine, and criteria define the condition that cells must meet to be counted. The criteria can include text, numbers, or logical operators. The following is an example:
=COUNTIF(K2:K3000, "Active")
This formula counts the number of cells in the range K2:K3000 that contain exactly the text “Active.” You can use the COUNTIF function in Google Sheets to track project statuses, count specific product types, or analyze categorical data.
COUNTIF also supports wildcards like asterisks (*) for partial text matches and question marks (?) for single-character substitutions.
You can also use comparison operators like “>50” or “>=100” to count numerical ranges. The formula is handy when dealing with large datasets where manual counting simply isn’t practical.
4
ARRAYFORMULA
Next on the list is ARRAYFORMULA, which applies a single formula to an entire range of cells automatically. Instead of copying formulas down hundreds of rows, you write it once and let Google Sheets handle the rest.
I’ve found this useful when working with large datasets that constantly expand. Rather than remembering to drag formulas down every time new data appears, ARRAYFORMULA automatically keeps everything up to date. The basic syntax wraps your regular formula:
=ARRAYFORMULA(your_formula_here)
However, you need to reference entire columns or ranges rather than single cells. For instance, instead of A2, you’d use A2:A to include the whole column from row 2 downward.
Here’s a practical example that combines first and last names:
=ARRAYFORMULA(B2:B & " " & C2:C)
This formula concatenates every corresponding pair in columns B and C simultaneously. The results appear instantly across all rows with data. Moreover, it automatically adjusts when new rows are added.
For more examples, you can check out our guide on the ARRAYFORMULA function in Google Sheets. It’s definitely worth the learning curve, especially if you work with data on a regular basis.
3
FILTER
It extracts specific rows from a dataset based on the conditions you define. When you need to see only certain employees, projects, or sales records without manually hiding rows, this formula creates a dynamic subset instantly.
What I appreciate most about FILTER is that the results update automatically when your source data changes, unlike manual filtering. It is useful for live dashboards and reports. The syntax follows this pattern:
FILTER(range, condition1, [condition2], ...)
The range contains your data, while condition1 specifies your first criterion. Additionally, you can stack multiple conditions for more precise filtering, as shown in the example below.
=FILTER(D2:D3000, R2:R3000="Engineers")
This formula shows only Engineering department employees from the employee database. Consequently, you get exactly the subset you need without scrolling through irrelevant records.
FILTER works exceptionally well for project tracking, expense analysis, and client management, as it handles text and numerical criteria equally well.
If you want to see more detailed examples and filtering techniques, check out our guide on the FILTER function in Google Sheets. Honestly, it’s one of those formulas that genuinely saves hours of manual work when you’re constantly pulling different data subsets for reports and meetings.
2
QUERY
QUERY brings database-style searching to Google Sheets using SQL-like language. While it might sound intimidating initially, this Google Sheets function can save you hours every week. It’s straightforward once you understand the basics and powerful for office data analysis.
It combines filtering, sorting, and grouping into a single formula. Instead of using multiple functions, you can extract exactly what you need with a single command. The basic syntax looks like this:
QUERY(data, query, [headers])
The data parameter contains your range, the query holds your SQL-like command in quotes, and the headers specify how many header rows to include. In the following example, QUERY analyzes employee performance data:
=QUERY(A1:AB3000, "SELECT D, Q, AB ORDER BY AB DESC")
This formula retrieves employee names (column D), departments (column Q), and performance scores (column AB), then sorts by performance score in descending order. Essentially, you’re creating custom reports that otherwise would require you to use pivot tables in Excel or Google Sheets.
QUERY can be helpful in sales analysis, project tracking, and budget reporting as it handles text searches, date ranges, and mathematical operations. For more examples, you can check out our detailed guide on the QUERY function in Google Sheets.
1
IMPORTRANGE
This function directly imports data from other Google Sheets files into your current spreadsheet. When you’re managing multiple project files, budget trackers, or departmental reports, IMPORTNAGE can eliminate the copy-paste routine for you.
It maintains live connections between files. As a result, when your colleague updates the master sales spreadsheet, your dashboard automatically reflects those changes, and no manual updates are required. The syntax requires two key pieces of information.
IMPORTRANGE("spreadsheet_url", "range")
The spreadsheet_url is the complete web address of the source file, while the range specifies exactly which cells to import using standard notation, such as “Sheet1!A1:C10”. The following is an example:
This formula imports employee data from another department’s file directly into your consolidated report. But you’ll need to grant permission the first time, as Google Sheets will prompt you to connect the files.
IMPORTRANGE is handy for creating executive dashboards, consolidating team reports, and maintaining centralized data views, as it is the easiest way to import data from another Google Sheets file. However, remember that too many IMPORTRANGE formulas can slow down your spreadsheet.
Related
5 Ways to Import Data From a Website Into Google Sheets
Tired of copying and pasting data from websites? Learn how to import it directly into Google Sheets.
These eight formulas make spreadsheet work considerably easier. There is a learning curve involved, but the time savings become obvious once you’re using them regularly. Data tasks that used to take time will now happen in minutes, and that’s worth the effort.
The “Golden Age: Gustav Klimt Digital Art Exhibition” has just opened in Beijing at the historic Beijing Fang, near Qianmen. The exhibition is co-organized by the Austrian Embassy’s Cultural Office and Hispano Suiza Creative Design. This exhibition is part of a national tour showcasing 23 classic prints by the renowned Austrian artist Gustav Klimt. CGTN reporter Yang Yan was among the first to explore this stunning display.
British actor Micheal Ward, known for the Netflix series “Top Boy” and and most recently Ari Aster’s movie “Eddington,” is facing charges of allegedly raping and sexually assaulting a woman in the United Kingdom in 2023.
London’s Metropolitan Police announced in a Friday statement that prosecutors had charged BAFTA winner Ward, 28, with two counts of rape and three counts of sexual assault following an investigation into an alleged January 2023 incident. The statement did not provide details about the incident, including the location and the identity of Ward’s accuser.
“Our specialist officers continue to support the woman who has come forward — we know investigations of this nature can have significant impact on those who make reports,” Det. Supt. Scott Ware said in the statement.
Representatives for Ward did not immediately respond to The Times’ request for comment Friday. The actor is due to appear at Thames Magistrates’ Court in London on Aug. 28.
Ward, who was born in Jamaica, broke into acting less than a decade ago, appearing in the British drama series “Top Boy” and rapper Rapman’s 2019 film “Blue Story.” He won BAFTA’s rising star award in 2020. That same year he appeared in “The Old Guard” opposite Charlize Theron and in Steve McQueen’s “Small Axe” miniseries.
His movie credits also include Sam Mendes’ “Empire of Light,” “The Book of Clarence,” “Bob Marley: One Love” and “The Beautiful Game.” He currently stars as a young police officer in “Eddington,” the latest film from “Hereditary” and “Midsommar” filmmaker Aster.
Resources for survivors of sexual assault
If you or someone you know is the victim of sexual violence, you can find support using RAINN’s National Sexual Assault Hotline. Call (800) 656-HOPE or visit online.rainn.org to speak with a trained support specialist.
Tesla has publicly staked its future on its robotaxis. Now the company is planning to launch a public car service in the San Francisco Bay Area. Tesla is calling it a “robotaxi” service, but legally, this one will have to use cars with human drivers.
The plan appears to put the electric car maker in murky legal waters in a US state with the country’s most tightly regulated autonomous vehicle industry—and where Tesla is already being sued for misleading language around its driver assistance tech.
On Friday, a spokesperson for the California Public Utilities Commission, which regulates ride-hailing and taxi services in the state, said that Tesla informed the agency Thursday that it planned to expand an employee-only taxi service to friends and family of employees and “select” members of the public. Technically, Tesla is legally in the clear to launch this sort of service in California: In March, it obtained a “Transportation Charter Party” permit to take Tesla employees on prearranged trips with a driver behind the wheel. But Tesla is not legally permitted to operate an autonomous-vehicle-based service there.
“Tesla is not allowed to test or transport the public (paid or unpaid) in an [autonomous vehicle] with or without a driver,” CPUC spokesperson Terrie Prosper wrote in an email. “Tesla is allowed to transport the public (paid or unpaid) in a non-autonomous vehicle, which, of course, would have a driver.”
Business Insider first reported that Tesla told employees that it planned to launch a “robotaxi” service in the Bay Area as early as Friday.
On a Wednesday earnings call with investors, Tesla vice president of AI software Ashok Elluswamy said Tesla is “working with the government to get approval” to launch in the Bay Area. “Meanwhile, we will launch the service with a person in the driver’s seat just to expedite while we wait for regulatory approval,” he said.
Legally, though, Tesla isn’t currently allowed to launch any kind of service with autonomous vehicles, meaning that “person in the driver’s seat” will have to be a driver. Tesla does not have a permit to pilot autonomous vehicle technology even with a safety driver, Prosper says, “so it cannot use a drivered autonomous vehicle in passenger service.”
Tesla appears to be talking out of both sides of its mouth here. The company appears to insist to regulators that it is simply operating a taxi service in California, while suggesting to shareholders and Wall Street that the new taxi service uses “robotaxis” and is autonomous. The automaker seems to have used the technique before. It is currently in administrative court with the state of California over allegations that Tesla has misled consumers for years by using language such as “Autopilot” and “Full Self-Driving” to sell technology that can’t drive itself, but must be overseen by a human driver at all times.
“Tesla couldn’t have it both ways,” says Philip Koopman, a professor at Carnegie Mellon University who studies autonomous vehicle safety. The automaker “is giving California more ammunition for the false advertising lawsuit by insisting that it’s a robotaxi when they’re telling regulators it’s really not.”
For two decades, Washington, D.C., pediatrician Lanre Falusi has counseled parents about vaccine safety, side effects, and timing. But this year, she said, the conversations have changed.
“For the first time, I’m having parents of newborns ask me if their baby will still be able to get vaccines,” Falusi said.
Throughout the country, pediatricians say anxious parents are concerned about access to routine childhood immunizations, especially those with children on Medicaid, the government insurance program for low-income families and people with disabilities. Medicaid covers 4 in 10 children in the U.S.
“It really became an issue when RFK Jr. stepped into the role of HHS secretary,” said Deborah Greenhouse, a pediatrician in South Carolina.
The concern accelerated after the shake-up of a key Centers for Disease Control and Prevention vaccine advisory body in June, raising fears that millions of American families could soon have to pay out-of-pocket for shots now covered by their health insurance.
Health and Human Services Secretary Robert F. Kennedy Jr., a longtime anti-vaccine activist, removed all 17 members of the CDC’s Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices, the panel responsible for recommending which shots are included in the nation’s adult and childhood immunization schedules.
Kennedy replaced the panelists with new members aligned with his views, prompting alarm among medical professionals and public health experts.
“People should be worried about what’s going to happen to the availability of vaccines for children,” said Jennifer Tolbert, deputy director of the Program on Medicaid and the Uninsured at KFF, a national health information nonprofit that includes KFF Health News.
Under the Affordable Care Act, health insurers are required to cover all ACIP-recommended vaccines. States and other jurisdictions use the childhood vaccine schedule to set immunization requirements for schoolchildren. ACIP’s recommendations also determine which vaccines get covered by the Vaccines for Children Program, a CDC-funded initiative that provides free immunizations to low-income and uninsured children. Half of children in the U.S. are eligible for the VFC program.
If the new ACIP members withdraw support for a particular vaccine and the CDC director agrees, Tolbert said, the consequences would be immediate. “It would automatically affect what is covered and therefore which vaccines are available to children on Medicaid,” she said.
Health insurance companies have not yet said how they would alter coverage, but Tolbert said such a move would open the door for private insurers to refuse to cover the vaccine.
Pediatricians worry about a future where parents might have to choose — pay hundreds of dollars out-of-pocket for shots or leave their kids unprotected.
The health insurance industry group AHIP said that health plans “continue to follow federal requirements related to coverage of ACIP-recommended vaccines and will continue to support broad access to critical preventive services, including immunizations.”
Pediatricians say news about President Donald Trump’s new budget law, which is expected to reduce Medicaid spending by about $1 trillion over the next decade, also prompted questions from parents.
While parents may be worried about losing their Medicaid, the law doesn’t mention vaccines or change eligibility or benefits for children’s Medicaid, Tolbert said. But less federal funding means states will have to make decisions about who is covered and which services are offered.
To raise the revenue needed to pay for Medicaid, states could raise taxes; move money earmarked for other spending, such as education or corrections; or, more likely, reduce Medicaid spending.
“And they may do that by cutting eligibility for optional populations or by cutting services that are optional, or by reducing payments to providers in the form of provider rates,” Tolbert said. “It’s unclear how this will play out, and it will likely look different across all states.”
In May, Kennedy announced in a post on X that the CDC is no longer recommending the covid-19 vaccine for healthy children and pregnant women. The move prompted a lawsuit by the American Academy of Pediatrics and other physician groups that seeks to freeze Kennedy’s directive.
In June, the new ACIP members appointed by Kennedy voted to recommend that adults and children no longer receive flu vaccines with thimerosal, a preservative rarely used in some flu vaccines. Anti-vaccine activists, including Kennedy, have rallied against thimerosal for decades, alleging links to autism despite no evidence of any association.
“There is no cause for concern,” Department of Health and Human Services spokesperson Emily Hilliard said in a statement. “As Secretary Kennedy has stated, no one will be denied access to a licensed vaccine if they choose to receive one.”
“When the ACIP committee met last month, they reaffirmed that flu vaccines will remain accessible and covered, and they emphasized safety by ensuring these vaccines are mercury-free,” Hilliard wrote. “The Vaccines for Children (VFC) program continues to provide COVID-19 vaccines at no cost for eligible children when the parent, provider, and patient decide vaccination is appropriate. Medicaid will continue to reimburse the administration fee.”
But the possibility that a vaccine could be restricted or no longer covered by insurance is already changing how parents approach immunization. In Falusi’s practice, parents are scheduling appointments to coincide precisely with their child’s eligibility, sometimes making appointments the same week as their birthdays.
Melissa Mason, a pediatrician in Albuquerque, New Mexico, has evaluated some patients who contracted measles during the multistate outbreak that started in neighboring Texas.
She’s concerned that any new limitations on access or reimbursement for childhood vaccines could lead to even more preventable illnesses and deaths.
Nationally, there have been more than 1,300 measles cases since January, including three deaths, according to the CDC. “We’re seeing this outbreak because vaccination rates are too low and it allows measles to spread in the community,” Mason said.
Children and teens account for 66% of national measles cases. Mason has begun offering the measles vaccine to infants as young as 6 months old, a full six months earlier than standard practice, though still within federal guidelines.
Last year, overall kindergartenvaccination rates fell in the U.S. At the same time, the number of children with a school vaccination exemption continued to rise.
Pertussis, or whooping cough — another disease that can be deadly to young children — is spreading. As of July 5, more than 15,100 cases had been identified in U.S. residents this year, according to the CDC.
Mason said pertussis is especially dangerous to babies too young to receive the vaccine.
For now, pediatricians are trying to maintain a sense of urgency without inciting panic.
In Columbia, South Carolina, Greenhouse used to offer families a flexible age range for routine vaccinations.
“I’m not saying that anymore,” the pediatrician said.
She now urges parents to get their children vaccinated as soon as they are eligible.
She described anxious parents asking whether the HPV vaccine, which helps prevent cervical cancer, can be administered to children younger than the recommended age of 9.
“I actually had two parents today ask if their 7- or 8-year-olds could get the HPV shot,” Greenhouse said. “I had to tell them it’s not allowed.”
With the vaccine requiring multiple doses months apart, Greenhouse fears time may run out for families to get the series covered by insurance. If they have to pay out-of-pocket, she’s afraid some families may choose not to get the second dose. A second dose could cost about $300 if no longer covered by insurance.
“I cannot be 100% sure what the future looks like for some of these vaccines,” Greenhouse said. “I can tell you it’s a very scary place to be.”
Kennedy’s newly appointed vaccine advisory committee is expected to hold its next public meeting as soon as August.
KFF Health News is a national newsroom that produces in-depth journalism about health issues and is one of the core operating programs at KFF—an independent source of health policy research, polling, and journalism. Learn more about KFF.
Finding the best weapon loadout in Killing Floor 3 is easier said than done. The feature is a first for the series, and with it comes a plethora of new guns to learn and get used to. With a total of 24 primary weapons–four for each of the six perks–some guidance is necessary.
In order to craft mods, you’ll need to gather resources. This is a time-consuming task, meaning that investing in the wrong places can cost you. It is possible to recycle crafted mods, but only for a fraction of the original cost. Don’t fret, though, as we’ve gathered the best weapon loadouts in Killing Floor 3, picking the most essential option for each perk in the process.
Best Weapon Loadout for the Commando Perk
Most weapons in Killing Floor 3 have a futuristic twist, but the SCAR EIR gets fairly close to the traditional guns of old. This assault rifle touts high precision, with relatively low recoil. It’s a great all-rounder option that’s on a high tier but doesn’t cost as much as the Knightsbridge. That being said, handling, recoil, and penetration power are quite low.
The SCAR EIR.
Here’s the best weapon loadout for the SCAR EIR in Killing Floor 3:
Ammunition: Armor Piercing Rounds
Barrel: Muzzle Brake
Underbarrel: Laser Sight
Sight: Reflex Sight
Magazine: Lightweight Mag
Internal: Fast Action Receiver
Starting with the ammunition, you have quite a few different elemental types to choose from. The Armor Piercing Rounds add a punch of stumble affliction, but most importantly, they also increase damage and penetration power. They reduce accuracy, but the Muzzle Brake and Laser Sight help to mitigate this.
Meanwhile, the Reflex Sight improves recoil, accuracy, and zoom critical damage, while also increasing handling considerably. The Lightweight Mag is a great option to improve reload speed, and lastly, the Fast Action Receiver will grant some additional fire rate.
Best Weapon Loadout for the Firebug Perk
A Firebug wouldn’t be complete without a flamethrower. While the other three weapons are more hybrid in nature, the Incinerator M7 does exactly what you expect it to–spread fire. As you can imagine, though, its default version is lacking in several departments.
The Incinerator M7.
Here’s the best weapon loadout for the Incinerator M7 in Killing Floor 3:
Ammunition: Tar Fuel
Barrel: Focused Nozzle
Underbarrel: Incendiary Launcher
Magazine: Condensed Fuel Tank
Internal: Slowed Tick Receiver
Starting with the ammunition, the Tar Fuel increases the scale and duration of the area of effect. It decreases damage, but we’ll be compensating this. The Focused Nozzle reduces the scale of area of effect, which is already compensated, while also improving the effective range of the weapon.
If you don’t want the handling penalty that comes with the underbarrel, you can skip this. That being said, the Incendiary Launcher adds a grenade launcher as an additional fire mode, which definitely comes in handy with bigger enemies. Plus, the mod increases damage and duration of the area of effect, while also improving burn and panic affliction. The grenade launcher itself has a ton of damage, so that’s a plus as well.
Lastly, the Condensed Fuel Tank reduces the mag size slightly but improves handling and reload speed. For that extra damage, the Slowed Tick Receiver will bring the build home.
Best Weapon Loadout for the Engineer Perk
It’s a grenade launcher. What else is there to say. The G33 packs a punch, but it definitely relies more on its sheer force than on trying to balance its shortcomings. Thankfully, some mods can help with this, making it an excellent choice for the Engineer.
The G33.
Here’s the best weapon loadout for the G33 in Killing Floor 3:
Ammunition: Enfeebling Smoke Grenades
Barrel: Extended Barrel
Sight: Red Dot Sight
Magazine: Three Round Cylinder
Internal: Aluminum Alloy Receiver
The ammunition category offers multiple options. After much deliberation, the Enfeebling Smoke Grenades seem to be the best choice. Dealing damage over time through clouds of smoke doesn’t sound as enticing, but it compensates for this with quite a few stats. It adds overall damage, as well as damage, duration, and scale of area of effect, and both enfeeble and stun afflictions.
Then, you should pair up the attachment with the Red Dot Sight for better accuracy, recoil, and zoom critical damage. The Extended Barrel hits the handling, but also improves projectile speed and accuracy. Don’t worry, though, as the Three Round Cylinder improves both handling and reload speed in exchange for mag size. Lastly, the Aluminum Alloy Receiver decreases bash damage but improves fire rate and handling considerably.
Best Weapon Loadout for the Sharpshooter Perk
The Sharpshooter has a quite viable options to pick from. ESR 36 rifle, though, is a great rapid-fire sniper. It’s not great out of the box with its low penetration power and high recoil–it doesn’t even have a scope!–but it can be improved.
The SCAR EIR.
Here’s the best weapon loadout for the ESR 36 in Killing Floor 3:
Ammunition: Armor Piercing Rounds
Barrel: Compensator
Underbarrel: Enhanced Foregrip
Sight: Sniper Scope
Magazine: Lightweight Mag
Internal: Precision Receiver
The Armor Piercing Rounds add a punch of stumble affliction, but most importantly, they also increase damage and penetration power. They reduce accuracy, but the Enhanced Foregrip is meant to counter that. That mod, alongside the Compensator, also reduces recoil.
The Sniper Scope is a must to bring the weapon’s main purpose to fruition, and it also improves accuracy and zoom critical damage. Lastly, the Lightweight Mag reduces mag size slightly while making reload speed better, and the Precision Receiver increases the fire rate while also adding to the recoil decrease.
Best Weapon Loadout for the Ninja Perk
The blade options for the Ninja are great, but don’t underestimate the Kunai. They’re fast and accurate, and with the right mods, you’ll also get to improve the weapon’s shortcomings.
The Kunai.
Here’s the best weapon loadout for the Kunai in Killing Floor 3:
Coating: Stunning Coating
Grip: Smooth Grip
Blade: Lightweight Blade
Pommel: Whistler Pommel Ring
Quiver: Expanded Ammo Pouch
There are multiple coating options, but the Stunning Coating is short and to the point, adding stun affliction to attacks without any stat drawbacks. Then, the Smooth Grip improves project speed and accuracy, adds damage when you throw the Kunai, and sprinkles a bit of stumble affliction as well.
Meanwhile, the Lightweight Blade improves attack speed for both melee and ranged attacks, adds bleed affliction, and improves projectile speed. The Whistler Pommel Ring also improves the latter, while adding accuracy and penetration power. Lastly, the Expanded Ammo Pouch decreases ranged attack speed, which is heavily countered by the other attachments, while also increasing max ammo.
Best Weapon Loadout for the Medic Perk
Who says the Medic isn’t allowed to pack a punch while also acting as a vital support role for the group. The LF-85 is an excellent weapon for this reason–it has a high fire rate and accuracy, a massive mag size, and the healing darts are recharged by dealing damage. It’s an expensive purchase during matches, but once you have it, you’ll be set for the rest of the match.
The LF-85.
Here’s the best weapon loadout for the LF-85 in Killing Floor 3:
Ammunition: Efficient Battery Formulation
Barrel: Penetrating Barrel
Underbarrel: Enhanced Foregrip
Sight: Reflex Sight
Magazine: Primary Battery Booster
Internal: Overlocked Receiver
Starting with the ammunition, the Efficient Battery Formulation decreases primary damage slightly,but adds accuracy and ammo efficiency for the primary shot. Then, the Penetrating Barrel says what it says on the tin and adds penetration power. It decreases the primary fire rate, but we’ll compensate for it later.
Meanwhile, the Enhanced Foregrip improves recoil and accuracy. The Reflex Sight doubles down on both stats, while also adding a substantial improvement to handling and some zoom critical damage. Lastly, the Primary Battery Booster increases primary mag size while decreasing reload speed and secondary mag size. Remember that you need to shoot and deal damage to recharge the healing darts, so it’s worth the trade-off. If you’re worried about fire rate and damage, the Overclocked Receiver is there to improve both.
The 6th International Summer School on Mediation is hosted by NIVAARAN (Mediators of the Supreme Court of India) 31st July to 11th August 2025 for a period of 12 days.
This 12-Day Online event is hosted with support of the Commonwealth Lawyers Association (CLA) & Singapore International Mediation Centre (SIMC).
It begins with an Opening Ceremony on the 1st Day (31st July) and ends with a Closing Ceremony on the 12th Day (11th August).
Eligibility
This Course is open to Students, Young Lawyers, Professionals and Others, both nationally, and internationally.
Schedule
31st July: Opening Ceremony: Chief Guest: The Chief Justice of India Hon’ble Mr. Justice B.R.Gavai. Time 5.00 pm., India/12.30 pm., British. From the 1st to 10th August, 2025 there will be 10 days of Lectures by our guest faculty on the following topics in sequence.
1st August: Historical Perspective & Introduction to Mediation. By: Diana Asonaba Dapaah, former Dy Attorney & Dy Law Minister, Ghana
2nd August: Online Mediation – Advantages & Dis-advantages. By: Jitendra Mohan Sharma, Sr.Advocate & Mediator, Supreme Court of India
3rd August: Communication – Inter personal skills, the path to understanding. By: Mia Forbes Pirie, International Mediation Exponent, London
4th August: Negotiation – Types & Methods of Negotiation. By: Adamya Raj, International Mediator & Trainer, RADANKS Ltd., London UK
5th August: Overview of Conflicts – Styles, Management & Resolution. By: JP Sengh, Sr Advocate, Sr.Mediator & Trainer, Delhi.
6th August: Impasse in Mediation & the way out. By: A.J.Jawad Registrar and CEO, IAMC, Hyderabad.
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/htcity/htcity-delhi-junction/ht-city-delhi-junction-catch-it-live-on-26-july-2025-101753456724092.html” on this server.
The Food and Drug Administration has delayed its review of a Bayer therapy for hot flashes related to menopause, telling the drugmaker it needs additional to review the company’s application.
In a Friday statement, Bayer said the FDA did not raise any concerns around “general approvability” of the drug, called elinzanetant. Still, the agency extended its decision deadline by three months.
“With the consistent positive results from our clinical Phase III program assessing the efficacy and safety of elinzanetant, we remain confident about elinzanetant’s potential as a new treatment option for moderate to severe vasomotor symptoms associated with menopause,” Christian Rommel, Bayer’s global head of research and development, said in a statement.
Bayer submitted elinzanetant last August based on three large late-stage studies known as OASIS 1, 2 and 3. Data showed treatment reduced the severity and frequency of vasomotor symptoms, also known as hot flashes, in women given the drug versus those who received placebo.
If approved, elinzanetant would join Astellas Pharma’s Veozah on the market as a non-hormonal option for menopausal women.
While hot flashes can also be treated with hormonal therapy, the FDA warns of an increased risk of cardiovascular events and cancers in some women. (A group of experts convened by FDA head Martin Makary this week called for the agency to modify hormone therapy’s warning labeling, arguing it unnecessarily limits use.)
Elinzanetant works similarly to Veozah, targeting a receptor known as neurokinin 3, as well as another dubbed neurokinin 1. Both receptors are involved in regulating body temperature.
Bayer’s drug could have a competitive edge over Veozah, however. Veozah has struggled to take off commercially, and the FDA recently added a black box warning to its labeling for the risk of liver injury. Bayer has not reported similar side effects from testing of its drug.
The U.K. and Canada recently approved elinzanetant, which Bayer will sell under the brand name Lynkuet there.
“As we continue to work with the FDA during the ongoing review, we are fully committed to making elinzanetant available to women in the U.S. as soon as we receive FDA approval,” Rommel said in a statement.
The FDA has missed, or extended, its approval deadlines for several other drugs in recent months.
In a recent analysis of FDA approval deadlines, analyst Brian Abrahams and his team at RBC Capital Markets found “some potentially concerning signals of greater missed target dates.” However, they noted that’s it difficult to tell whether this stems from a “more methodical approach” or resource limitations at the agency, or from drug company missteps.
Their analysis, Abrahams wrote, “does suggest delay risk” for drugmakers with decision deadlines in the second half of this year.
There’s no greater financial milestone than signing a contract to own a property that you can call your own. While you may be tempted to take out the celebratory champagne to commemorate this monumental purchase, the truth is, there’s still a lot of work lined up for you as the upcoming homeowner.
If it’s your first time purchasing a piece of real estate, you may be wondering what tasks you need to fulfil after the purchase. One of the most significant ones is clearing the hidden costs associated with the purchase price of your new property.
The truth is that buying property entails spending a lot on associated costs, from broker commissions to appraisal fees. It’s natural for new real estate owners to pay an additional 5% to 10% of fees on top of the property’s purchase price. And if you didn’t take that into account, you may face financial constraints that could stack up against you fast.
As such, it’s important to be acutely aware of the hidden costs of purchasing a property, whether it’s for residential or commercial use. Being bogged down by a mortgage plan that’s higher than your cash flow can leave you drowning in debt for years if not decades. Consequently, this can detrimentally shape your and your family’s quality of life in the long run.
The good news? If you’re still in the planning phase, you’ve got plenty of time to familiarise yourself with the likely fees you’ll be paying on top of your new property’s down payment.
Let’s jump right into it.
Tip: Don’t rush into the purchase. If you want to learn more about what to expect so that you can prepare yourself for a future property purchase, you’re in the right place. This article can serve as a useful guide to lay out likely costs you’ll encounter and ways you can manage them effectively.
12 Hidden Costs Homebuyers Will Encounter
As appealing as it is to buy a home, many Australians, especially those in the early stages of their careers, simply don’t have the finances to cover the cost of an entire house from the start.
With things like groceries and transportation chipping away at a local’s purchasing power, many prospecting homeowners are seeking alternative ways to finance their new property. This is especially true for city dwellers, as they may not have the money to immediately pay off a house purchase price, or even the standard downpayment rate of about 20% to 30%.
Many, for instance, look into financial services like Australian Financial and Mortgage Solutions to help them navigate the complex world of homeownership with a trusted expert within reach.
That said, it’s not impossible for homeowners to purchase a home independently, especially if they’re well-researched.
Note: If you fit the bill, then here are some expenses associated with buying a home in Australia besides the initial purchase price. Some of these can be one-time purchases, while others could be recurring, so keep that in mind before buying a lot.
Stamp duty: This is a government tax imposed by the state that depends on the property’s value.
Council rates: A compulsory charge made to the local council to fund local infrastructure.
Utility connection: Fees made to utility providers to access services like gas, water, and an internet connection.
Moving costs: A fee made to handle truck hire or moving services.
Legal or conveyancing fees: Covers contract reviews, settlement handling, and title checks.
Building inspection: Cost paid to professionals to uncover structural issues, infestations, or other problem areas.
Transfer fees: A fee paid to the state to signify an ownership transfer under your name.
Mortgage registration fee: A one-time payment to register for a home loan.
Loan application fee: A fee imposed by banks and lending companies that allows you to borrow from them.
Lenders’ mortgage insurance: A payment you must make to grant the lender financial protection, particularly if your initial deposit amounts to less than 20% of the property’s purchase price.
Renovations: Painting, upgrades around the house, and minor structural upgrades all fall under this category.
Mortgage fees: Charged by the lender if applicable.
The total cost of these various fees can be upwards of $50,000 for the initial year before settling in. You could also be looking at a monthly payment of $10,000 a year for maintenance and recurring fees like insurance.
These prices can naturally go up depending on where you live in Australia, with cities like Sydney and Melbourne having a higher average expense breakdown compared to smaller towns and cities.
Having said that, new property owners need to make the right decisions to ensure that they’re allocating their finances most effectively. Here’s what new property owners can do to help them lower the cost of their home buying expenses without compromising on any front.
How to Plan for The Hidden Costs of Property Ownership
With the high cost associated with owning a new piece of property, it’s important to manage the purchase effectively to ensure that you’re optimising your spending in the best possible way.
Here’s what you should know and consider doing before securing your first property.
Create a Comprehensive Budget
When planning to own a new piece of real estate, it’s essential to prepare your financial strategy in anticipation of the upcoming purchase as early as possible. This is best organised by creating a budget plan that includes your income, expenses, and capital.
An effective budget is one that leaves no room for doubt. It’s comprehensive and inclusive of all costs, even the most minor ones. It also distinctly separates each cost associated with homeownership to ensure clarity in reports. A good budget is also regularly updated in a timely manner.
Having a thorough and comprehensive budget ensures that you have the right foundation to keep track of your finances. This is a crucial first step to ensure that future calculations of expenses and financial projections will be based on accurate and trackable data, enabling you to make more confident decisions when purchasing your first property.
Understand the Average Cost Per Cost Category
Another way to prepare for your upcoming property purchase is by familiarising yourself with the likely costs you’ll incur along the way. This entails familiarisation of the entire process of buying a home, from registering the title under your name to getting the right home insurance policy for it.
Each state has a different fee range per cost category. Stamp duties, for instance, can range from $10,000 to $35,000 depending on the state you register your property in. Besides your geographical location, other factors like your borrower profile and utility type can also cause your expenses to vary from the mean.
In any case, it’s a good idea to understand ballpark figures to give you a rough estimate of your likely spending. This way, you’ll have better control over your finances later on, allowing you to make the right decisions more precisely.
Note: When buying and renovating a new property, it’s only natural for you to encounter a few setbacks along the way before you get to use it for its intended purpose.
These setbacks can range from minor to major, and they’re not always accounted for early on in the acquisition timeline. Think things like room renovations, structural fixes, and utility rewiring.
To prepare for these costs, it’s a good idea to set aside a portion of your capital to pay off any potential surprise costs you may encounter along the way—a buffer or emergency fund, in essence. This fund should be about 5% of your property’s value, or 10% if possible.
This amount may seem steep, but factoring this into the equation before acquiring a property saves you a lot of potential stress down the line. Plus, you can always loan a sizeable lump sum before you buy the property—just be sure to have the cash flow to keep up with the repayment schedule.
Get Quotes From Multiple Professionals
As a first-time property owner, you’re probably unfamiliar with the standard costs of service providers associated with the homebuying process. This is natural. Research can only reveal so much; the best way to know the offerings and services of each provider in the best detail is by requesting multiple quotes from different providers.
Whether it’s for conveyancing, building inspections, insurance providers, or real estate brokers, requesting quotes from multiple professionals within these fields can help you gauge the market standard and ensure that what you’re paying is not exorbitantly high or unrealistic.
Tip: When requesting a quote, be sure to get a detailed breakdown of what’s included in each service. A contract would be ideal as it’ll reveal potential hidden costs or bonds that you may not want or need beforehand.
By requesting multiple quotes, you can make a cost-effective decision that best aligns with your budget, potentially saving you thousands of dollars in the long run. Just be sure not to skimp out on quality by picking the cheapest options; weigh each option through a value-based lens.
Plan Your Financing Options
Before committing to a property purchase, it’s essential to know about the different loans you can avail of beforehand. Most new property owners only pay the stipulated down payment (20-30%) for the property and secure a mortgage to pay the rest.
Note: Mortgages can come in different forms. It’s a good idea to look into the different loan types, as well as the different lenders and their profiles, to get a complete view of potential lending agreements you can avail of and the best one for your specific needs.
For instance, loans can have a fixed or variable interest rate scheme. They may also be hybrid. Some mortgages allow you to deposit a low amount but have high interest rates, while others could have a high minimum deposit but with more favourable interest rates.
Certain loan agreements, like offset accounts, are also available to help provide flexibility in your mortgage payment plan. In any case, it’s a good idea to familiarise yourself with the various lending strategies to ensure that you’re picking what works best for you and your finances.
We hope this article will serve you well in your next property purchase!
About Guest Expert Apart from our regular team of experts, we frequently publish commentary from guest contributors who are authorities in their field.
Windows File Explorer provides a ton of options to change how you view your files. What you might not know is that a critical option is disabled by default, despite being vital to your system’s safety.
File Extensions Are Important
File extensions are three or four-letter suffixes that appear after the final period of a file name, such as .txt, .exe, or .pdf. These extensions act as identifiers so the OS (and you) can tell at a glance what kind of file they are.
Windows uses file extensions to determine which app should launch when you double-click a file. For example, an .exe file will launch an application, while a .docx file will open a Word file in Microsoft Word. A lot of programs save files in their own unique file extensions, which can then only be opened in that program (or a compatible third-party tool).
Yadullah Abidi / MakeUseOf
A key advantage of being able to see file extensions is the ability to spot potentially dangerous files. Certain extensions like .exe, .bat, .cmd, .vbs, and .scr (among others) can be dangerous files designed to run malicious code on your system. Such files often employ file extensions used by legitimate Windows tools and programs, so spotting them can be tricky.
Despite their importance, file extensions are hidden by default in all modern versions of Windows. This is done to create a cleaner user interface within File Explorer. However, malware creators often use hidden extensions to disguise malicious executable files as seemingly harmless documents to trick you into running malware on your PC, so it’s much better to have them visible.
Showing File Extensions on Windows
Thankfully, enabling file extensions on Windows takes only a few clicks. On Windows 11, simply open File Explorer by using the Windows key + E keyboard shortcut, click View in the top bar, hover over Show, and select File name extensions. You should start seeing file extensions for all files saved on your PC.
If you don’t see the top bar in File Explorer, you can also enable file extensions from Windows settings. Follow these steps:
Press Windows key + I to open Windows Settings. Head to the System tab and select For developers.
Expand the File Explorer section by clicking it, then make sure the Show file extensions slider is turned on.
Particualrly if you’re using an older version of Windows, the Control Panel also comes in handy for enabling file extensions:
Open the Start menu and search for Control Panel. Click the corresponding option.
Change Category to Small icons if needed, then choose File Explorer options.
Under the View tab, make sure that the Hide extensions for known file types option is unchecked.
You can also enable file extensions by making a small change to the Windows registry, but I recommend avoiding this. The three methods above should work on any version of Windows you’re using in 2025, and are much less prone to error. However, if you want a quick way of enabling file extensions, simply run this command in either the Windows Terminal or PowerShell:
reg add HKCUSoftwareMicrosoftWindowsCurrentVersionExplorerAdvanced /v HideFileExt /t REG_DWORD /d 0 /fThis command will add the required entries to the Windows registry that tell File Explorer to start showing file extensions. Make sure to refresh File Explorer using the F5 key to see the changes.
How Attackers Exploit Hidden File Extensions
As mentioned, hackers often exploit hidden file extensions on Windows to disguise malicious files as innocent ones. For example, a file named image.png.exe will appear as a PNG image file in File Explorer with file extensions hidden, when in reality it’s an executable file that can run malicious code or malware when launched.
This technique is called a “double extension attack” and is the most common type of extension attack you’ll see. Thankfully, as long as file extensions are enabled, these malicious EXE files are pretty easy to spot and avoid. However, this is far from the only technique that tries to use hidden extensions to confuse you. Some other popular methods include:
Technique
Example
Description
Right-to-Left Override (RTLO)
image[RTLO]gpj.exe appears as image.exe.jpg
Attackers use the Unicode character U+202E to reverse the file name.
Whitespace Padding
document.pdf[insert 100 spaces].exe
You can place multiple spaces between the fake and real file extension, so the real extension gets pushed off-screen even when file extensions are enabled.
Icon Manipulation
document.exe file with a PDF icon
This is a simple technique where a criminal swaps out the icon of a malicious file for something more familiar, such as a PDF or JPG icon.
PIF Files
document.pif
PIF file extensions are automatically hidden by Windows, even if file extensions are enabled. That said, PIF files are rarely used in modern Windows versions.
As you can see, there are plenty of tricks attackers can use to trick you into running a malicious executable you might think is an image. However, by spending just a few seconds enabling file extensions on Windows, you can catch these traps before accidentally launching any malware on your PC.
Related
9 Default Windows Settings That Make Your Life Harder
Stop settling for a subpar Windows experience.
File extensions help identify what type of file you’re dealing with, but Microsoft’s choice to hide them by default in File Explorer opens the door for fraudsters to disguise malicious files. Don’t fall for these tricks. Enable file extensions and always double-check a file before opening it, especially if it came from the internet or you didn’t ask for it.
Kenyan President William Ruto said on Thursday that the government will intensify a campaign to boost tourist numbers in the country.
Ruto, who opened the 2025 Great Wildebeest Migration global livestream at the world-famous Masai Mara National Reserve in southwestern Kenya, said the campaign aims to attract 5 million foreign tourists by 2027.
“We are focused on tourism that enriches both the visitor and the host, and transforms travelers into ambassadors for Kenya, a country proud of its wild beauty, conservation achievements and unbreakable spirit,” he said.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-25/Kenya-ramps-up-tourism-push-as-wildebeest-migration-begins-1FiDuoUbp1S/img/850f5c5bab934d2d8069b23976337644/850f5c5bab934d2d8069b23976337644.jpeg' alt='A herd of wildebeest in Kenya. /VCG'
The president, who urged domestic and international tourists to take advantage of the country’s attractions, said the campaign seeks to promote Kenya as the home of human origins and a top travel destination for innovation, sports, conference tourism, adventure, wildlife, culture and beach holidays.
Kenya’s international tourist arrivals increased by 15 percent to 2.4 million in 2024, up from 2.09 million in 2023, according to the Ministry of Tourism and Wildlife. Inbound tourism earnings rose to 452.20 billion shillings (about $3.5 billion) from $2.92 billion in 2023.
Ruto said Masai Mara, which welcomes more than 400,000 visitors annually, is the crown jewel of Kenya’s tourism offerings. “Sustainable tourism is a living reality in Masai Mara, where communities thrive, ecosystems flourish and travelers leave enthralled.”
The Great Wildebeest Migration is the annual movement of millions of wildebeest, zebras and other herbivores from the Serengeti in Tanzania to Masai Mara in Kenya, primarily between July and October.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-25/Kenya-ramps-up-tourism-push-as-wildebeest-migration-begins-1FiDuoUbp1S/img/87499e9ec3fc4c73b769e5698c1eb488/87499e9ec3fc4c73b769e5698c1eb488.jpeg' alt='A Nile crocodile ambushes wildebeest in the Mara River, Kenya. /VCG'
The largest herd movement of animals on the planet, which is visible from space, is driven by the search for fresh grazing land and water following seasonal rains. The dramatic river crossings of the Mara River, where wildebeest face predators like crocodiles, are widely regarded as the highlight of this spectacular wildlife event.
Ruto said Kenya’s efforts to protect biodiversity, restore habitats and involve communities in stewardship have made Masai Mara not only a wildlife haven, but also a global symbol of sustainability.
“To all watching around the world, I invite you to explore our treasures from the thundering hooves of Masai Mara to the calm shores of our coast, from snow-capped peaks to sunlit savannahs,” he said.
(Cover: Wildebeests cross the river in Kenya. /VCG)
After finally getting approval from the Federal Communications Commission, Skydance Media is just weeks away from completing its $8-billion merger with Paramount Global, leading to sweeping changes for some of the most iconic media brands.
CBS, MTV Networks and Paramount Pictures are all bracing for upheaval when Larry Ellison and his son, David, take the keys from Paramount Global controlling shareholder Shari Redstone. The long-running ownership saga has played out while the rules of the media industry have been upended by streaming and, more recently, a White House unafraid to use its muscle to silence critics.
Skydance and its backer, RedBird Capital Partners, have promised investors that it will find $2 billion in cost savings, which means further belt-tightening and layoffs.
“This will be the most dramatic change to the organization since its inception,” said one longtime CBS insider who was not authorized to comment publicly.
Here is what Wall Street and the media industry will be watching for once the deal closes on Aug. 7:
Will Skydance spend enough to supercharge streaming?
Last year, Paramount+ added 10 million new subscribers to reach 77.5 million. Its subscriber count is now 79 million, thanks also to NFL programming, CBS shows such as “NCIS” and original hits including “1923,” “Landman,” “Lioness” and “Tulsa King.” Paramount has projected full-year U.S. profitability for Paramount+ this year, making it one of the fastest subscription services to get there.
But its relatively scant resources and thinner slate has made it difficult to truly compete with Netflix and the other biggest players. One potential solution: partnering with a rival streamer to increase its reach.
“Questions around the long-term scalability of Parmamount+ continue to loom large,” analyst firm MoffettNathanson noted in a report Friday. “Will the new management team pursue external partnerships as a viable path forward?”
Ellison and his team have suggested that they will bring a tech-focused sensibility to Paramount. Technological prowess would help Paramount+ improve its user interface and recommendation process, which insiders acknowledge is currently underwhelming. As expected, the architect of Paramount+ original series strategy, Paramount Global co-CEO Chris McCarthy, will leave when the deal closes.
Can traditional TV be saved?
Analysts also want to see Skydance will increase investment in film and TV franchises to revive assets that have been constrained by Paramount’s debt.
While Skydance will get a robust library of films and TV shows, it will also be faced with the slow-melting iceberg that is broadcast and cable TV, which continues to lose viewers. Streaming has surpassed broadcast and cable as the leading source of video consumption just as Skydance takes over CBS and Paramount Global’s array of channels that include MTV, BET and Comedy Central.
Doug Creutz, an analyst for TD Cowen, believes the merged company should consider spinning off traditional TV businesses, similar to what Warner Bros. Discovery and Comcast are doing with their cable channels. Whether that will happen remains to be seen.
“There is a clear opportunity to improve Paramount’s growth profile by letting those assets go,” Creutz wrote Friday. “On the other hand, we suspect the Ellisons did not purchase Paramount in order to break it up for parts.”
A test of Skydance’s commitment to broadcast may come if the FCC relaxes TV station ownership rules, which would likely lead to consolidation.
“60 Minutes” correspondent Lesley Stahl with Georgia Republican Rep. Marjorie Taylor Greene.
(CBS Photo Archive / CBS via Getty Images)
How will ’60 Minutes’ reset?
CBS News’ “60 Minutes” received a vote of confidence with the naming of Tanya Simon, a respected veteran insider to take over as executive producer. She was the choice of the program’s strong-willed correspondents.
Simon’s appointment is expected to provide stability following the departure of longtime showrunner Bill Owens, who was forced out amid the push for a $16-million settlement over President Trump’s lawsuit claiming the program deceptively edited an interview with former Vice President Kamala Harris to make her look better to voters.
“60 Minutes” remained tough in its White House coverage as negotiations went on. The question is whether that approach will continue with new owners. Larry Ellison has a friendly relationship with the president, and the new owners agreed to appoint an ombudsman to oversee news coverage.
Getting it right matters from a business perspective too, as “60 Minutes” remains the most profitable program on CBS.
With Simon in place, new management is expected to address other areas of the news division that can use improvement. The network’s revamp of the “CBS Evening News” has been a disappointment in the ratings and will likely see some changes.
In the longer term, there has been chatter that Skydance may set its sights on acquiring CNN from Warner Bros. Discovery and combining it with the broadcast news operation, an idea that has been considered numerous times over the last few decades.
“South Park” characters Eric Cartman, left, Stan Marsh, Kyle Broflovski.
(Comedy Central)
Will creative freedom be tested?
CBS canceled “The Late Show With Stephen Colbert,” upsetting his fans, progressive Democratic legislators and other late-night hosts who make their living lampooning President Trump.
The network said it was strictly a business decision, as the younger viewers who made late-night TV monstrously lucrative for decades are no longer showing up. The timing of the move made the company look as if it were capitulating to Trump, who long had the host on his enemies list.
But Colbert will remain on the air through May. The show has already been sold to advertisers for next season. The host has remained unrelenting in his mockery of Trump.
The season premiere of “South Park” only upped the ante. The animated series made references to the “60 Minutes” deal, showed Trump in bed with the devil and aired its own version of a Trump-mandated PSA, showing a naked president with talking genitalia.
There is no question both shows will test the patience of the new owners.
Pulling Colbert off or censoring the “South Park” creators, who just received a $1.5-billion deal to continue their show and move its library to Paramount+, would lead to a far greater backlash than what has been seen so far. Any attempt to curtail their voices will send a negative message to creative types who consider working with the company’s movie and TV operations going forward.
Tom Cruise in “Mission: Impossible: Dead Reckoning Part One” from Paramount Pictures and Skydance.
(Paramount Pictures and Skydance)
Can the movie business be revived?
Over the last few years, Paramount Pictures — home of franchises such as “Transformers” and “Mission: Impossible” — has ranked either fifth or fourth at the domestic box office. So far this year, the lone major movie studio still located in Hollywood proper has accounted for about 7% of ticket sales in the U.S. and Canada, according to box office website the Numbers.
Since the pandemic, the company has enjoyed a number of major hits, including “Top Gun: Maverick” and “Sonic the Hedgehog 3.” It has also had some solid singles and doubles, including “Bob Marley: One Love.” But overall, the more-than-century-old studio has struggled from underinvestment in its intellectual property and movie brands.
The latest “Mission: Impossible” starring Tom Cruise — the eighth and purportedly last in the series — grossed $589 million globally but cost $300 million to $400 million to make, not including marketing costs. Paramount’s latest effort, an animated “Smurfs” reboot, sputtered at the box office. Next up: a reboot of “The Naked Gun.”
The unit’s leader, Brian Robbins (also head of Nickelodeon at Paramount Global), is expected to leave the studio, though he has not officially announced his plans. David Ellison is a movie fan and is expected to take a particular interest in the operation, with plans to put Skydance’s chief creative officer, Dana Goldberg, in charge of film at Paramount. Skydance has worked with Paramount on movies before, producing “Maverick” and the “Missions: Impossible” films
HOUSTON, TEXAS – JANUARY 11: Denico Autry #96 of the Houston Texans sacks Justin Herbert #10 of the Los Angeles Chargers during the second half of the AFC Wild Card Playoff game at NRG Stadium on January 11, 2025 in Houston, Texas. (Photo by Brandon Sloter/Getty Images)
(Brandon Sloter / Getty Images)
Will the NFL take its ball elsewhere?
A transfer of ownership means the NFL can reopen its long-term deal with CBS, which has a Sunday package of games, the AFC Championship Game and two Super Bowls. The NFL is the lifeblood of broadcast television, providing a vast majority of the year’s most-watched programs.
Without the NFL, CBS would face tremendous challenges in getting fees from pay TV operators who carry its stations. Revenue from affiliates who pay the network for its programming would also dramatically decline.
Although the NFL is known for taking a pound of flesh at every opportunity, NFL Commissioner Roger Goodell has signaled he will give careful consideration before making any changes.
“We’ve had a long relationship with CBS for decades and we also have a relationship outside of that with Skydance,” Goodell told CNBC earlier this month. “We have a two-year period to make that decision. I don’t see that happening, but we have the option and it’s something we’re going to look at.”
The NFL could wait until 2029 when it has the option to open up the contract with all of its media partners. The new media deal for the NBA — $76 billion over 11 years — has the NFL believing its pact is underpriced.
Times staff writer Meg James contributed to this report.
Seoul, July 25: Kia, South Korea’s second-largest carmaker, said on Friday its second-quarter net profit fell 23.3 per cent from a year earlier, impacted by newly imposed US import tariffs that took effect in April. Net profit for the three months ended June declined to 2.26 trillion won (US$1.6 billion) from 2.95 trillion won a year earlier, the company said in a regulatory filing.
Operating profit fell 24.1 percent to 2.76 trillion won in the second quarter from 3.64 trillion won a year earlier, while sales rose 6.5 percent to 29.34 trillion won from 27.56 trillion won, reports Yonhap news agency. “Higher incentives in major markets amid intensified competition and the enforcement of U.S. tariffs on imported vehicles affected the quarterly bottom line,” Kia said. Tesla Valuation Can Reach USD 20 Trillion in Future With ‘Extreme Execution’: CEO Elon Musk.
However, volume growth in key markets, higher average selling prices of high-end models and favourable exchange rates helped the company maintain its profitability fundamentals, it added. On April 2, the U.S. government began imposing 25 percent tariffs on all imported vehicles. The South Korean government is seeking to negotiate a reduction in the tariff rate for Korean vehicles before the Aug. 1 deadline set by U.S. President Donald Trump. Kia said its net income dropped 19 percent to 4.66 trillion won from 5.76 trillion won a year earlier in the first half.
Operating profit declined 18 percent to 5.77 trillion won from 7.06 trillion won over the cited period, while sales increased 6.7 percent to 57.36 trillion won from 53.78 trillion won. The company said the 25 percent U.S. tariff alone reduced its operating profit by 786 billion won in the first six months of the year.
To minimize the impact of the tariffs in the second half, Kia plans to prioritize selling vehicles manufactured at its U.S. plants to American customers, rather than exporting them to Canada, Africa and the Middle East. The company also aims to lower sales incentives to preserve profitability. Looking ahead, Kia said growing uncertainties surrounding U.S. trade policy, rising geopolitical risks and slowing global consumption are likely to continue weighing on vehicle sales. Tesla Cybertruck Crash Test: Tesla’s EV Truck Receives 5-Star Rating From NHTSA With Lowest Overall Probability of Injury and Rollover Risks (Watch IIHS Footage Here).
To navigate these challenges, the company plans to boost sales of sport utility vehicles (SUVs) and fuel-efficient gasoline hybrid models in global markets, while preemptively expanding its electric vehicle (EV) lineup. On Friday, Kia shares closed down 0.86 percent at 104,100 won, far underperforming the broader Korea Composite Stock Price Index (KOSPI), which rose 0.18 percent.
(The above story first appeared on LatestLY on Jul 25, 2025 05:51 PM IST. For more news and updates on politics, world, sports, entertainment and lifestyle, log on to our website latestly.com).
On Wednesday, the Trump administration unveiled its new artificial intelligence action plan geared at keeping US efforts competitive with China. With over 90 policies recommended, it’s a wide-ranging document that, if followed, would give Silicon Valley’s most powerful companies even more leeway to grow. “We believe we’re in an AI race,” White House AI czar David Sacks said on a call ahead of the action plan’s release. “We want the United States to win that race.”
The Office of Science and Technology Policy drafted the plan, which focuses on three key “pillars” for AI strategy: accelerating AI innovation, building infrastructure, and leading international diplomacy and security. The report opens by stressing that “AI is far too important to smother in bureaucracy at this early stage, whether at the state or Federal level.” It recommends a series of policies designed to loosen regulations and burdens on the tech companies developing artificial intelligence products, like encouraging the Federal Communications Commission to “evaluate whether state AI regulations interfere with the agency’s ability to carry out its obligations and authorities under the Communications Act of 1934.”
“We need to build and maintain vast AI infrastructure and the energy to power it. To do that, we will continue to reject radical climate dogma and bureaucratic red tape, as the Administration has done since Inauguration Day,” the report reads. “Simply put, we need to ‘Build, Baby, Build!’”
In addition to releasing this report, President Donald Trump is expected to sign several executive orders later this afternoon that are expected to map onto the priorities outlined in the action plan.
AI has been a priority for the past two US administrations, but Trump’s second term has been characterized by major calibrations as the sector has exploded in prominence. In October 2023, the Biden administration introduced an AI Executive Order designed to address numerous risks posed by rapidly advancing AI models. The order focused on issues like the potential for AI models to be used as cybersecurity weapons or to help produce chemical or biological weapons, as well as algorithmic bias. This new action plan explicitly seeks to undo efforts undertaken during the Biden administration, like reviewing all of the Federal Trade Commission investigations it commenced “to ensure that they do not advance theories of liability that unduly burden AI innovation.”
The plan builds on the Trump administration’s previous approach to AI. Shortly after Trump took office, Vice President JD Vance gave a speech at a major AI meeting in Paris where he laid out the new administration’s priorities. “We believe that excessive regulation of the AI sector could kill a transformative industry just as it’s taking off, and we’ll make every effort to encourage pro-growth AI policies,” Vance said, adding, “we feel strongly that AI must remain free from ideological bias, and that American AI will not be co-opted into a tool for authoritarian censorship.”
The AI Action Plan continues this crusade against “woke” AI, recommending that federal procurement guidelines are updated so that only AI companies that “ensure that their systems are objective and free from top-down ideological bias” are given contracts.
President Donald Trump rode to reelection last fall on voter concerns about prices. But as his administration pares back federal rules and programs designed to protect patients from the high cost of health care, Trump risks pushing more Americans into debt, further straining family budgets already stressed by medical bills.
Millions of people are expected to lose health insurance in the coming years as a result of the tax cut legislation Trump signed this month, leaving them with fewer protections from large bills if they get sick or suffer an accident.
At the same time, significant increases in health plan premiums on state insurance marketplaces next year will likely push more Americans to either drop coverage or switch to higher-deductible plans that will require them to pay more out-of-pocket before their insurance kicks in.
Smaller changes to federal rules are poised to bump up patients’ bills, as well. New federal guidelines for covid-19 vaccines, for example, will allow health insurers to stop covering the shots for millions, so if patients want the protection, some may have to pay out-of-pocket.
The new tax cut legislation will also raise the cost of certain doctor visits, requiring copays of up to $35 for some Medicaid enrollees.
And for those who do end up in debt, there will be fewer protections. This month, the Trump administration secured permission from a federal court to roll back regulations that would have removed medical debt from consumer credit reports.
That puts Americans who cannot pay their medical bills at risk of lower credit scores, hindering their ability to get a loan or forcing them to pay higher interest rates.
Email Sign-Up
Subscribe to KFF Health News’ free weekly newsletter, “The Week in Brief”
“For tens of millions of Americans, balancing the budget is like walking a tightrope,” said Chi Chi Wu, a staff attorney at the National Consumer Law Center. “The Trump administration is just throwing them off.”
White House spokesperson Kush Desai did not respond to questions about how the administration’s health care policies will affect Americans’ medical bills.
The president and his Republican congressional allies have brushed off the health care cuts, including hundreds of billions of dollars in Medicaid retrenchment in the mammoth tax law. “You won’t even notice it,” Trump said at the White House after the bill signing July 4. “Just waste, fraud, and abuse.”
But consumer and patient advocates around the country warn that the erosion of federal health care protections since Trump took office in January threatens to significantly undermine Americans’ financial security.
“These changes will hit our communities hard,” said Arika Sánchez, who oversees health care policy at the nonprofit New Mexico Center on Law and Poverty.
Sánchez predicted many more people the center works with will end up with medical debt. “When families get stuck with medical debt, it hurts their credit scores, makes it harder to get a car, a home, or even a job,” she said. “Medical debt wrecks people’s lives.”
For Americans with serious illnesses such as cancer, weakened federal protections from medical debt pose yet one more risk, said Elizabeth Darnall, senior director of federal advocacy at the American Cancer Society’s Cancer Action Network. “People will not seek out the treatment they need,” she said.
About 6 in 10 adults — Democrats and Republicans — say they are worried about being able to afford health care, according to one recent survey, outpacing concerns about the cost of food or housing. And medical debt remains a widespread problem: As many as 100 million adults in the U.S. are burdened by some kind of health care debt.
Despite this, key tools that have helped prevent even more Americans from sinking into debt are now on the chopping block.
Medicaid and other government health insurance programs, in particular, have proved to be a powerful economic backstop for low-income patients and their families, said Kyle Caswell, an economist at the Urban Institute, a think tank in Washington, D.C.
Caswell and other researchers found, for example, that Medicaid expansion made possible by the 2010 Affordable Care Act led to measurable declines in medical debt and improvements in consumers’ credit scores in states that implemented the expansion.
“We’ve seen that these programs have a meaningful impact on people’s financial well-being,” Caswell said.
Trump’s tax law — which will slash more than $1 trillion in federal health spending over the next decade, mostly through Medicaid cuts — is expected to leave 10 million more people without health coverage by 2034, according to the latest estimates from the nonpartisan Congressional Budget Office. The tax cuts, which primarily benefit wealthy Americans, will add $3.4 trillion to U.S. deficits over a decade, the office calculated.
The number of uninsured could spike further if Trump and his congressional allies don’t renew additional federal subsidies for low- and moderate-income Americans who buy health coverage on state insurance marketplaces.
This aid — enacted under former President Joe Biden — lowers insurance premiums and reduces medical bills enrollees face when they go to the doctor or the hospital. But unless congressional Republicans act, those subsidies will expire later this year, leaving many with bigger bills.
Federal debt regulations developed by the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau under the Biden administration would have protected these people and others if they couldn’t pay their medical bills.
The agency issued rules in January that would have removed medical debts from consumer credit reports. That would have helped an estimated 15 million people.
But the Trump administration chose not to defend the new regulations when they were challenged in court by debt collectors and the credit bureaus, who argued the federal agency had exceeded its authority in issuing the rules. A federal judge in Texas appointed by Trump ruled that the regulation should be scrapped.
Have you been waiting to hear any news of Metroid Prime 4: Beyond recently? Well, you might be in luck because the upcoming game has recently been given an age rating, suggesting that it may be getting a release date pretty soon.
As spotted by VGC, a listing for Metroid Prime 4 has gone up on South Korea’s classification board where it is currently rated for “ages 12 and up” due to mild violence. The content of the listing itself doesn’t reveal much else about the content of the game, but the filing does suggest that Metroid Prime 4 is indeed closing in on the finish line and could still stand to release later this year, where it’s being pegged as a holiday release at the moment.
Additionally, VGC reports that the listing comes around the same time that it’s been hearing of an imminent Nintendo Direct, where it is believed that a formal release date will finally be provided.
It’s been a long road for Metroid Prime 4. Initially announced at E3 in 2017, the game has changed developers and undergone at least one reboot before being re-announced with the subtitle Beyond back in 2024. Since then, there’s been a steady drip of information, including the game’s first hands-on previews earlier this year, as well as a bizarre advertisement in the London Underground that falsely claimed the game was “out now.”
Now, Metroid Prime 4 seems likely to launch by the end of 2025 on both the Nintendo Switch, which it was first announced for, and its successor, the Switch 2.
The Orpheus Sabha Foundation is a registered and established non-profit organisation under the Companies Act, 2013. We aim to provide the youth with the opportunity and platform to express their opinions, refine their research skills, enhance their public speaking abilities, and become a part of a community that is inclusive, diverse, and holistic. Orpheus has consistently been committed to the development of essential debating skills, the promotion of lively discussions, and the provision of a dynamic forum for public speaking.
About Kshitizz NGO
Kshitizz, an NGO that was established and promoted by the visionary students of Damodaram Sanjivayya Law University, Visakhapatnam, is situated at the core of India’s transformative spirit. The term “Kshitizz” is derived from the Hindi word “Horizon.” An India-based not-for-profit and non-political organisation, Kshitizz is founded on the principles of progress and compassion. It is in tune with the tempo of empowerment.
The organization’s noble mission is depicted in a tapestry of beneficiaries, including the Underprivileged Children, Youth, Old Age, and Women. Each stitch is meticulously woven with the threads of Empowerment, Creativity, Innovation, Peace, Harmony, and the 17 Sustainable Development Goals established by the United Nations.
About Vaktrita 2.0
This is the second edition of the Vaktrita Online Moot Court Competition, which is intended to eliminate obstacles and offer prospective attorneys from all backgrounds an equal opportunity to refine their abilities in a real-world environment. Regardless of whether you are an experienced participant or a novice to moot court, this competition provides a platform for all individuals to exhibit their abilities and develop fundamental legal skills.
Improve your oral advocacy, writing, and legal research skills by participating in rigorous argumentation. Engage with distinguished professionals, esteemed legal scholars, and fellow students to establish connections that will be beneficial to your future career. We are of the opinion that talent is limitless; therefore, our competition is accessible to individuals from all backgrounds, guaranteeing a diverse and enriching experience for all.
Eligibility
The Competition is open to students currently enrolled in LL.B. Undergraduate Degree Courses or LL.M. Postgraduate Degree Courses across the country.
The Competition is open to students currently enrolled in 3 or 5 LL.B. Undergraduate Degree Courses or LL.M. Postgraduate Degree Courses across the country.
A team is permitted to have members from more than one institution. (Cross teaming)
More than one team from one institution can register.
Team Composition
Each team shall comprise a minimum of two members wherein both the members will be required to perform the role of a speaker,
Teams may comprise a maximum of three members, wherein two members shall perform the role of a speaker, and one member shall perform the role of a researcher.
The substitution of any Team Member is not allowed after the registration deadline except in extenuating circumstances and only with permission of the Organizers.
Team composition can include members from different institutions rather than being strictly from one institution.
Fee
₹3,000 per team Offer valid till 20th August 2025
Perks
Workshops on Memorial Drafting and Oral Advocacy
Interactions with retired judges and practicing advocates
Flexible registration
Merit & Participation certificates for all teams
Chance to be mentored by experienced professionals
Completely online format — participate from anywhere
How to Register?
Interested candidates can register online via the link given at the end of the post.
Important dates
Release of Brochure & Moot Prop: 20th July 2025
Last Date to Register: 5th September 2025
Clarifications Deadline: 25th August 2025
Memorial Submission: 13th September 2025
Oral Rounds: 26th–28th September 2025
Awards
Cash Prize Pool: ₹1.3 lakh+
Winner: ₹40,000 + Letter of Recommendation
Runner-Up: ₹30,000 + Letter of Recommendation
Best Memorials (Top 3): ₹13,000 / ₹11,000 / ₹7,000
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/lifestyle/art-culture/my-favourite-products-a-rapid-fire-round-with-award-winning-designer-a-balasubramaniam-101753447871087.html” on this server.
European drug regulators on Friday recommended rejecting Sarepta Therapeutics’ Elevidys in the latest setback for the struggling biotechnology company and its embattled gene therapy for Duchenne muscular dystrophy.
The European Medicines Agency issued a negative opinion on an application submitted by Roche, which owns Elevidys rights outside of the U.S., for clearance in Duchenne patients who are between 3 and 7 years of age and can still walk.
The EMA’s review committee noted how Elevidys failed to significantly improve patients’ ability to move after one year in the key study supporting Roche’s submission, a placebo-controlled trial called Embark. The drug’s principal biological effect — production of a shortened form of the muscle-protecting protein dystrophin — “could not be linked” to an improvement in function, the committee determined.
The EMA panel also concluded the study did not demonstrate effectiveness in a sub-group of patients the company believes respond better to treatment. It didn’t mention the safety of Elevidys, which was linked to the deaths from acute liver failure of two teenagers who could no longer walk.
Despite the negative opinion, Roche said in a statement it intends to work with the EMA to “explore a potential path forward” for Elevidys in Europe, noting the high unmet need for Duchenne treatments. The company highlighted “clinically meaningful and statistically significant improvements” on secondary study objectives, as well as long-term data pooled from multiple trials showing effects on motor function.
“We are disappointed by the [committee’s] negative opinion, given the urgent need for disease-modifying therapies for children in the EU living with Duchenne,” Roche Chief Medical Officer Levi Garraway said in a statement. “With an average life expectancy of only 28 years, achieving disease stabilisation is a major advance for individuals living with Duchenne, their families and caregivers. We are confident in the value Elevidys can bring to ambulatory patients.”
Roche may ask within 15 days to appeal the decision, which would start a re-examination process that typically takes several months. While some companies have overturned rejections in Europe, Roche’s chances of success are “likely going to be low,” wrote Brian Abrahams, an analyst at RBC Capital Markets, in a Friday note to investors.
The news is another blow for Sarepta, which over the last week has halted Elevidys shipments in the U.S. due to safety concerns. Roche also voluntarily stopped distributing the gene therapy in some other countries where it is approved.
Sarepta had already laid off employees and restructured before these setbacks. But Elevidys and the hundreds of millions of dollars in revenue it was expected to bring in are vital for the company to meet its coming debt obligations and remain viable. The gene therapy’s uncertain status in the U.S. — where Sarepta reportedlymay need to accrue more safety data before Elevidys returns to market — could force the company to make more cuts.
Elevidys was controversially approved in the U.S. in 2023, and then cleared for broader use last year. Both times, Peter Marks, the former top gene therapy official at the Food and Drug Administration, overruled agency staff.
Elevidys’ mounting challenges in the U.S. had not raised “high hopes” of an approval in Europe, but the negative opinion Friday nonetheless heaps more pressure on Sarepta, as it removes the potential to receive near- and medium-term milestone and royalty payments from Roche, RBC’s Abrahams wrote.
In addition to its debt, Sarepta has looming payments due to Arrowhead Pharmaceuticals under a collaboration on RNA drugs. Arrowhead this week said it could terminate that deal if Sarepta doesn’t make those payments.
Despite expectations that older Australians will downsize as they age, most are staying put.
Emotional attachment to the family home—filled with decades of memories—makes it hard to leave.
Downsizing has been “over-reported and under-appreciated”; the majority prefer to age in place, not relocate.
Boomers want to downsize locally, but suitable homes (smaller, accessible, well-designed) are lacking in middle-ring suburbs.
There’s a large, willing, and financially capable market of boomers ready to downsize—if we remove the roadblocks.
Do that, and it will not only benefit them, but free up homes for the next generation and create a more dynamic, fair housing system.
For years, we’ve heard the story: as Australians age they’ll downsize, trading big family homes for something smaller, more manageable, and more appropriate for their golden years.
That should, in theory, free up housing stock for younger families and smooth generational transitions in the property market.
But it’s not playing out that way.
Despite many boomers sitting on multimillion-dollar homes, many with no mortgage, few are taking the plunge.
Instead, they’re holding onto these large homes long after the kids have moved out, often rattling around in properties that are now far too big for their needs.
So, what’s going on?
For weekly insights and strategic advice, subscribe to the Demographics Decoded podcast, where we will continue to explore these trends and their implications in greater detail.
Subscribe now on your favourite Podcast player:
The downsizing myth: overreported, underappreciated
There’s an assumption that older Australians will naturally trade down as they age.
But as Simon Kuestenmacher put it on our latest Demographics Decoded podcast, “The idea of downsizing is much over-reported and under-appreciated in Australia.”
Indeed, some Baby Boomers do make the move, often to lifestyle destinations like Noosa or the Gold Coast.
But these are the exceptions. Overwhelmingly, Australians prefer to age in place.
The family home is more than bricks and mortar to them.
It’s a personal history, every room filled with memories of family, raising kids, birthdays, Christmases.
As Simon said, “A family home is more than just a box to live in… these are quite often wonderful memories and constant reminders of happier times.”
This emotional weight is a powerful anchor.
The missing middle: a housing gap that keeps Boomers stuck
If downsizing made emotional sense and suitable housing options existed, perhaps more boomers would consider it.
But here’s the reality: the required housing stock simply isn’t there.
Boomers want to stay in their neighbourhoods; they want familiar doctors, hairdressers, friends, and cafes.
But when they look around for a smaller, well-appointed, accessible home nearby, they often come up empty.
The middle-ring suburbs of our major cities are woefully underdeveloped when it comes to medium-density housing.
This is where boomers live, and where they’d like to stay, but development has been stifled for years by local councils and resistance to change.
Ironically, many boomers themselves were once NIMBYs (Not In My Back Yard) who blocked the very developments they now need.
As Simon put it, “If there isn’t a suitable dwelling pretty much nearby, it won’t happen.”
It’s not just sentimental—it’s also about stuff
Another underestimated barrier is clutter.
Downsizing means letting go, not just of space, but of decades’ worth of belongings.
Garages full of tools, sheds packed with “just in case” gear, wardrobes of rarely worn clothing.
It’s psychologically taxing.
Simon shared something that resonated with many: “If you downsize, you probably let go of 50% of your belongings. And your stuff holds you back. It ties you in.”
This is particularly difficult for men, who often associate their sense of identity with the physical things they’ve collected.
And yet, letting go can be liberating, both financially and emotionally.
But most people need to be ready for that transformation. Many aren’t.
The financial system is working against downsizing
While there’s no capital gains tax on the family home, there’s stamp duty on the new purchase, a steep and immediate out-of-pocket expense.
For someone in their 70s, this is more than just annoying; it’s a deterrent.
And then there’s the pension asset test.
For retirees receiving a part pension, unlocking equity from a family home by selling it can affect their entitlements.
Suddenly, they’re “wealthier on paper” and lose access to financial support.
The result?
Many choose to remain in large, unsuitable homes to protect their pension income.
This creates what Simon called a “bizarre situation where we have countless widows on rather meagre pensions living in $2 million homes.”
It’s a system that penalises mobility and discourages right-sizing.
Policy changes that could unblock the pipeline
If we’re serious about solving the downsizing bottleneck, governments need to get strategic.
Simon laid out two simple, powerful ideas:
A stamp duty exemption for downsizers – similar to the one we have for first home buyers – could create a one-time exemption for retirees selling their family home and buying their final residence.
Reform the pension asset test – Ensure that retirees aren’t financially punished for unlocking equity. Perhaps allow a portion of home sale proceeds to be quarantined for future care or living costs without affecting the pension.
These changes could remove some of the biggest barriers.
As Simon said, “Kill the stamp duty, adjust the pension asset test – boom. That would make it financially juicy to downsize.”
Developers: start building what boomers actually want
There’s also a supply issue, and the private sector needs to play a role.
Most boomers don’t want to move into tiny apartments.
They want quality, accessible, spacious dwellings with good design, decent storage, walkable access to amenities, and a sense of community.
And they can afford it.
Australia ranks among the world’s wealthiest nations per capita.
According to the latest UBS World Wealth Report, Australia has the second-highest median wealth globally, most of it concentrated among baby boomers.
These are people who bought in the ’70s and ’80s and paid off their mortgages.
They’re sitting on enormous equity.
They just need the right housing to exist before they’ll move.
If developers focus on building right-sized, quality dwellings in middle-ring suburbs, there is a market, an affluent one.
If Boomers don’t move, who misses out?
The cost of this inaction falls squarely on younger generations.
As baby boomers stay in their oversized homes, their millennial children, many of whom are starting families, are pushed further to the urban fringe to find suitable housing.
That’s more time commuting, less access to schools, and less support from nearby family.
Ironically, this also limits the baby boomers’ own ability to stay involved with their grandkids’ lives.
And as we know, many older Australians want to be active grandparents, not just on the periphery but deeply involved.
That becomes harder when you’re 40 km away and the traffic is awful.
The clock is ticking—downsize before you Have to
The unfortunate reality is that many people leave the decision too late.
They wait until a health crisis forces their hand, a fall, a diagnosis, or the loss of a spouse.
Then the downsizing decision is no longer proactive, it’s reactive, stressful, and often rushed.
Simon offered a wise suggestion: “Make this decision as a couple, while you’re still healthy and active, in your early 70s or even 60s. That way, you remain in control, and you can design the lifestyle you want for the next chapter.”
And research backs this up: those who right-size early are more likely to live independently longer.
The mental and physical toll of staying too long in the wrong home isn’t often discussed, but it’s very real.
Downsizing isn’t just about space—it’s about freedom
At the end of the day, this isn’t just about square metres.
It’s about lifestyle, health, identity, financial security, and intergenerational equity.
It’s about creating smarter cities and more functional communities.
It’s about allowing people to live the lives they want, not just the ones they’ve inherited through inertia.
But if we want to unlock these benefits, we need to address both the psychological and structural roadblocks and give Australians the options, incentives, and support to right-size when the time is right.
The homes are there. The wealth is there. The need is clear.
Now it’s time for action.
If you found this discussion helpful, don’t forget to subscribe to our podcast and share it with others who might benefit.
Subscribe now on your favourite Podcast player:
About Michael Yardney Michael is the founder of Metropole Property Strategists who help their clients grow, protect and pass on their wealth through independent, unbiased property advice and advocacy. He’s once again been voted Australia’s leading property investment adviser and one of Australia’s 50 most influential Thought Leaders. His opinions are regularly featured in the media.
Lingerie isn’t just for twenty-somethings or honeymoon nights, after all there is no age limit on feeling confident and sexy. With the right lingerie for older women, you can embrace beauty and sensuality, irrespective of the years behind you. Yes, in the past, mature ladies were often overlooked by big lingerie brands but that hasn’t stopped women in their 50s, 60s, and beyond from seeking out mature lingerie that is elegant, comfortable, and tastefully sexy. Over time, brands fell in line. Today, there are more options than ever, from supportive lace bras to sultry babydolls, all designed to make lingerie for mature women feel as fabulous as they deserve.
If you’re an older woman, you too can indulge in sexy lingerie that highlights your curves, reflects your style, and most importantly, feels amazing to wear. Remember, the right lingerie is ultimately about confidence and personal empowerment, not just about impressing others. You know what you like and what feels good, so don’t hesitate to treat yourself to pieces that make you say, “Wow, I look good!”
15 Spectacular Options For Lingerie For Older Women—Tastefully Sexy
If you have been looking for ways to feel sexy in your skin again, especially during or after menopause, and need a little push to rekindle the flame of intimacy, sexy lingerie for older women could lend impetus to your efforts. From premium lace chemises to comfy sexy underwear for mature women, there is no dearth of options to choose from. Let’s dive into some options for the best lingerie for older women that prove you can be classy and sexy at any age. Whether you prefer mature sheer lingerie with a daring touch or a luxurious satin set, these hand-picked pieces are tasteful, elegant, and oh-so-sexy. Bonus: Most of these come in inclusive sizing, because every body deserves to feel gorgeous.
Related Reading: How To Increase Libido After Menopause
1. Wacoal Embrace Lace Chemise
This delicate chemise features Wacoal’s signature floral lace along the bodice and hem, with a soft mesh body for a comfortable drape. It’s an elegant piece that proves feeling sexy can also mean feeling at ease. Great for both lounging and as a romantic nightie. The lingerie for older women design provides a flattering shape without being overly revealing, perfect if you want something classy yet a little playful.
Rating: 4.3 out of 5 stars
2. Avidlove Plus Size Lace Babydoll
An ultra-soft lace babydoll designed with curvy, mature figures in mind. It has a feminine deep V-neck and a flowy sheer mesh skirt that drapes beautifully over the hips. The halter tie straps and stretchy lace provide comfort while the silhouette is tastefully sexy, offering both coverage and allure for lingerie for mature women of any size. It comes in sizes up to 5X, so it’s wonderfully inclusive.
Rating: 4.4 out of 5 stars
3. RSLOVE Lace Garter 3-Piece Set
A popular three-piece set comprising a lacy bralette, panty, and garter belt, it exudes classic sex appeal with a refined twist. The delicate lace detailing and adjustable garter straps make it a tasteful choice of lingerie for older women who want something daring yet elegant. It’s revealing enough to feel sexy—hello, garters!—but still classy, allowing you to showcase confidence and playfulness in equal measure.
Rating: 4.3 out of 5 stars
4. Kaei&Shi Embroidered Lace Lingerie Set (4-Piece)
An intricately embroidered lingerie ensemble including a lace underwire bra, matching panty, garter belt, and even a little lace choker for a dramatic touch. The bra’s underwire offers lift and support, while the sheer floral lace and strappy accents give a mature sheer lingerie look that’s boldly feminine. Despite its multiple pieces, it’s designed to be comfortable on a woman’s body. This set is perfect if you want an all-out ensemble that’s still tasteful and far from not trashy.
Rating: 4.4 out of 5 stars
Related Reading: 13 Reasons Why Women Can’t Orgasm (and Steps to Achieve One)
5. OYOANGLE Polka Dot Mesh Babydoll
A flirty two-piece babydoll set with a playful polka dot lace pattern. It includes a V-neck sheer mesh babydoll top and a matching thong. The design is cute and coquette-ish without feeling juvenile. This piece strikes a delicate balance between a balance that’s ideal for mature lingerie style. The flowy babydoll cut skims your figure, so it’s forgiving and flattering, making it great lingerie for mature women who want something fun yet sultry.
Rating: 4.6 out of 5 stars
6. Ekouaer Satin Lace Robe & Nightgown Set
A two-piece set featuring a satin slip nightgown with lace trim and a matching short robe. The satin fabric feels luxurious on your skin, and the lace detailing on the robe adds just the right touch of romance. This set is perfect for lounging in style or stepping up your bedtime look. It’s also a smart choice if you prefer a bit more coverage. It doubles as sexy underwear for mature women who like an elegant reveal or a glamorous cover-up.
Styling tip: wear the robe loosely tied for a hint of mystique.
Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars
7. Popiv Complete Lace Garter Set (4-Piece)
A comprehensive lingerie set that comes with everything: a lace bra, matching panty, a garter belt, and stockings to complete the look. This set is all about feeling put-together and vixenish. Despite being a “naughty” outfit on the surface, the design stays on the classy side with floral lace and a flattering cut. It’s a fantastic option if you’re in the mood to really dress up, you know, on special occasions like your anniversary or any night you want to feel empowered and sexy. The bra provides decent support and the coordinating pieces make it easy to achieve that classic pin-up silhouette.
Rating: 4.4 out of 5 stars
8. Avidlove Lace Nightgown with Side Slit
A long, flowing lace nightgown featuring a dramatic thigh-high side slit and delicate bow accents. This piece offers the best of both worlds: it gives you the elegant coverage of a gown while the sheer lace and side split add a definite wow factor. The style is reminiscent of old Hollywood glamour.Imagine a satin slip but done in stretchy floral lace. It’s the kind of mature lingerie that’s incredibly comfortable. You don’t have to put up with tight underwires or corsetry here. Yet, it makes you feel like a star. If you prefer lingerie for older women that leans more toward grace and less toward “bare it all,” this nightgown is a beautiful choice.
Rating: 4.7 out of 5 stars
Related Reading: How Often Do 50-Year-Old Married Couples Make Love?
9. Avidlove Deep-V Lace Teddy Bodysuit
One of Amazon’s best-selling one-piece teddies, and for good reason. This lace bodysuit has a plunging Deep-V neckline that elongates your figure and a convenient snap crotch closure, so you’re not fumbling when it’s time to take it off. The floral lace is soft and has a gentle stretch, hugging your curves in a very appealing way. Despite the seductive cut, it manages to be comfortable. As a piece of sexy lingerie for older women, this teddy shows that you can absolutely have support and allure in one package. It’s a confidence booster and a versatile wardrobe secret all at once.
Styling tip: Layer it under a blazer or blouse for a cheeky outfit.
Rating: 4.4 out of 5 stars
10. Lace Halter Bralette & High-Waist Panty Set (Plus Size)
A two-piece set featuring a halter-style lace bralette and a matching high-waisted lace panty. This set is all about marrying comfort with sexiness for mature women. The halter bralette is wireless and soft, meanwhile, the high-waist panty offers a bit of tummy coverage and a retro vibe, proving that sexy underwear for mature women can be both flattering and forgiving. The whole look is vintage-inspired with a classic pin-up high-waist look and the lace is nice and stretchy. It’s available in plus sizes, and it’s the kind of set you can wear under a dress and feel quietly confident knowing what’s underneath.
Rating: 4.2 out of 5 stars
11. Avidlove 3-Piece Bra & Kimono Set
This unique set includes a lace bralette, a matching lace bikini panty, and a sheer lace kimono-style robe to tie it all together. The idea here is layered sexiness: you can tease with the robe on, then reveal the pretty bra and panty set beneath. The bralette is unlined and stretchy, providing a natural look, and the robe adds a touch of drama while still being lightweight. We love this for an at-home date night.
It’s the kind of ensemble that makes you feel put together and elegant without trying too hard. It’s also one of the best lingerie for older women seeking versatility. You can mix and match the pieces with other items. The robe, for instance, could top a simple nightgown to instantly glam it up.
Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars
12. Avidlove Satin Cami & Shorts Pajama Set
Don’t let the word pajama fool you, this two-piece satin set is as sexy as it is comfy. It includes a V-neck camisole with lace trim and a pair of matching satin shorts. The fabric is silky and cooling, and made to make those hot flashes or warm nights easier on your body, while the lace adds that lingerie touch. This set is perfect for those times you want to feel a bit sensual but also prioritize comfort like a relaxed weekend morning or a low-key evening in.
The cami’s straps are adjustable and the shorts have a little side slit, so the fit is easy and flattering. In terms of mature sheer lingerie, this isn’t sheer, but it gives a subtle sheen and shows just enough skin to remind you that you’re wearing something special. It’s proof that the best lingerie for older women can sometimes be as simple as a lovely satin PJ set that doubles as flirtatious loungewear.
Rating: 4.3 out of 5 stars
Related Reading: The Pressure to Perform, When Intimacy Becomes a Chore
13. WDIRARA Lace Bustier Set with Stockings
If you’re craving a bit of vintage glamour, this lace bustier set delivers. It features a lace bustier, akin to a corset-like top, with boning for structure, a matching lace thong, adjustable garter straps, and a pair of classic fishnet thigh-high stockings to complete the ensemble. The bustier has a hook-and-eye front closure and lightly padded cups, so it gives your bust a nice lift and defines the waist, giving you that hourglass effect that many women find empowering.
Despite the dramatic look, the materials are fairly stretchy, making it easier to wear than old-school corsets. This set is for the nights you want to pull out all the stops and channel your inner Dita Von Teese. It’s a bit of dress-up that’s still chic and elegant, and it definitely qualifies as sexy lingerie for older women who aren’t afraid to steal the spotlight.
Rating: 4.4 out of 5 stars
14. Lilosy Floral Lace Underwire Bra & Panty
Sometimes all you need is a beautifully made bra-and-panty set to feel sexy. This Lilosy set comprising a floral lace underwire bra that provides shape and support and a matching lace bikini-cut panty, offers just that. The bra’s cups are sheer enough to be enticing but still provide coverage in all the right places.
This set is a lovely option for everyday use as well as special occasions. It’s the kind of lingerie for mature women that you can wear under your work clothes to give you a secret confidence boost, or unveil later in the evening for a delighted partner. The style is elegant and not overly fussy: no extra straps or complicated bits, just classic lace done right. If you’re looking for something that’s both practical and pretty, you can’t go wrong with a high-quality lace underwire like this.
Rating: 4.3 out of 5 stars
15. Donnalla Lace Bodysuit Lingerie Set
Rounding off our list is this alluring lace bodysuit that comes with a removable garter belt and a matching panty. Essentially, it gives you the look of a one-piece teddy but with the option to dress it up further with garters. The bodysuit itself has a plunging neckline and gorgeous scalloped lace edging. It’s designed to accentuate your waist and hips, with a cheeky-cut bottom that isn’t too skimpy.
Many women love this set because it stays in place, no riding up or slipping down, so you can actually move around comfortably in it. Practical and sexy. If you’ve been shy about trying a garter belt, this is a friendly way to start since you can clip it on or leave it off. Overall, this set is about ease and allure: you get an all-in-one best lingerie for older women look that’s seductive, but you also get convenience and comfort in the fit.
Rating: 4.3 out of 5 stars
Final Thoughts
Growing older should never mean giving up on feeling sexy. In fact, many women say they feel more confident and empowered in their skin as they age, and the right lingerie can amplify that confidence. Whether you gravitate toward mature sheer lingerie pieces or cozy satin pajamas, the key is choosing items that make you feel amazing. Don’t be afraid to experiment with sexy lingerie for older women that matches your personality, be it bold reds and blacks or soft pastels and creams. Remember, lingerie is ultimately for you. As one 68-year-old enthusiast beautifully put it, wearing lovely lingerie is like having “your little secret” and a reminder that “we still have sexual feelings, even if the world doesn’t see us that way”. So go ahead, indulge in some gorgeous lingerie for older women, because feeling fabulous is truly timeless. Enjoy the classy, sexy, and confident you!
The Dynamics And Importance Of Sex In A Relationship
17 Signs A Woman Has Not Made Love For A Long Time
5 Ways Exercise And Fitness Improve Your Sex Drive
Your contribution does not constitute a charitable donation. It will allow Bonobology to continue bringing you new and up-to-date information in our pursuit of helping anyone in the world to learn how to do anything.
Share Feedback
What is your feedback?
Subscribe to Our Newsletter
Get your weekly dose of insightful articles straight to your inbox.
Google Drive is great—but “great” can always be better. If you spend a lot of time saving files to Drive, searching through folders, or transferring files from it, installing the right browser extensions can make your job much easier.
While browsing the web, you’re bound to come across a useful article, an interesting image, or an important PDF you’d like to save. Instead of cluttering your desktop with downloads and forgetting about them later, you can use the Save to Google Drive extension.
Once the extension is installed, you can right-click on any image or PDF and choose Save [File] to Google Drive. You can even save an entire webpage by clicking the Save to Google Drive icon next to the address bar.
The extension’s options menu allows you to specify how web pages are saved, whether as a PNG, HTML file, or Google Doc. You can also set a default folder in your Drive to keep all your web finds neatly organized. The best part about saving everything directly to Google Drive is that your files are instantly available across all your devices.
Sometimes, all you want is a quick glance at a Word document or a review of a PDF someone sent over. Instead of saving the file to your PC and then opening it in a different app, the Open with Google Drive Viewer extension lets you view it in your browser instead.
The way it works is quite simple. You just need to right-click on the file you want to view and select Open with Google Drive Viewer from the context menu. The file will open in a new tab, neatly displayed in Google Drive’s built-in viewer. It’s perfect for viewing documents, presentations, and even the contents of ZIP files without downloading them first.
And if the file turns out to be worth saving, you can add it to your Google Drive directly from the viewer. The extension supports a wide range of formats, including DOC, XLS, PDF, PPT, ZIP, HTML, TXT, JS, and more.
If you’re using Microsoft Edge, you can already open Office files without downloading them first. For this, go to Settings > Downloads and enable the Open Office files in the browser toggle.
While it’s possible to open Microsoft Office files in Google’s ecosystem, such as opening a Word document in Google Docs, it usually involves a few extra steps, like launching Docs, Sheets, or Slides, uploading the file, and waiting for it to convert. But if all you need is a quick look or a simple edit, the Office Editing for Docs, Sheets & Slides extension from Google can save you the hassle.
With this extension installed, you can drag a Word, Excel, or PowerPoint file directly into your browser. Once you do, the file will open in a new tab, where you can view or make edits without converting the file or saving it to Google Drive.
When you finish viewing or editing, you can save your changes in the file’s original format, so there’s no awkward back-and-forth with colleagues or clients who still use Office. Of course, if you prefer, you can choose to convert the file to a Google Docs, Sheets, or Slides version, which automatically saves it to your Google Drive.
Inbox chaos is real. Between receipts, contracts, itineraries, and long email threads, it’s easy for important information to get lost. The Save Emails to Google Drive extension lets you create hard copy backups of key emails and their attachments.
This makes it easier to find your important emails when you need them. Even better, you can choose to save emails in a shared Drive folder, giving teammates instant access without the need for endless forwarding.
After installing the extension, a brief setup process is required. You’ll need to create a cloudHQ account, grant the necessary permissions, and choose the folder where your saved emails should go.
Once set up, saving is as easy as selecting one or more emails in Gmail and clicking the Save to Google Drive icon. The extension supports saving emails in PDF, TXT, HTML, and EML formats, so you can pick the one that works best for you.
If there’s one Google Drive extension worth pinning, it’s Checker Plus. Once installed, you can click its icon in the toolbar to access your Google Drive without having to open a separate webpage.
You can easily search your Drive, rename documents, delete files, and even open them directly from the extension’s popup window. It’s a convenient tool for anyone who needs to dip in and out of Google Drive throughout the day.
Checker Plus isn’t all about quick access to Google Drive, though. It also sends real-time push notifications when someone opens, edits, moves, or deletes a file. You can customize which files and folders to monitor, so you only receive alerts that truly matter.
Your Google Docs, Sheets, and Slides automatically save to Google Drive, but what if you want to save some of them to other cloud storage services? There’s no need to download the file and manually upload it if you have the Backup and Sync Google Drive extension installed.
With this extension, you’ll see a “Save to” button in the upper-right corner of your Google Docs or Sheets. Click it to view a menu of available cloud services. Select your preferred destination, log into your account, and your file will sync. Also, any changes you make will continue to save in real time.
The Backup and Sync extension also works with your existing Google Drive folders. So, if there’s a specific folder you want to keep in sync with another service, simply open that folder in Drive and click “Sync this folder.” A setup wizard will then guide you through connecting it to your preferred cloud storage provider.
If you often find yourself opening Google Keep or Docs just to jot down a sudden idea or reminder, the Notes extension can help. It makes it easy to capture thoughts, to-dos, reminders, and flashes of inspiration directly to Google Drive.
To use it, just click the Notes icon in your browser toolbar and start typing—it’s that simple. Each note is saved as a Google Docs file in the “Notes” folder in your Google Drive. The extension uses the first line of your note as the title, which makes it easy to find your notes using Google Drive search.
Best of all, you don’t even have to leave your current browser window to revisit your notes. Just click the extension icon again, and a convenient mini viewer lets you scroll through and edit all your saved notes without opening Google Drive.
Google Drive on its own is already a powerful tool, but with the right extensions, you can turn it into something even better. Whether you want to save files instantly, view documents seamlessly, jot down notes, or sync content across multiple cloud platforms, these extensions make it easy to do it all.
More importantly, they let you do it smoothly, without interrupting your flow. So give the ones that fit your needs a try, and your Google Drive experience will be all the better for it.
In the height of summer, tourists are flocking to Shapotou Scenic Area in Zhongwei, northwest China’s Ningxia, to experience one of China’s most exhilarating desert sports: sandboarding. Located on the southeastern edge of the Tengger Desert, sunlight bathes the golden dunes as long trails of sand trace the thrilling descent of riders sliding down slopes over 80 meters high, turning the tranquil desert into a playground of speed and excitement.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-24/Sandboarding-adventures-draw-crowds-to-Shapotou-s-golden-dunes-1FgJ3tdKmzK/img/a64ca99403634962a9344fb3695f8807/a64ca99403634962a9344fb3695f8807.jpeg'Visitors enjoy sandboarding at Shapotou Scenic Area in Zhongwei, Ningxia Hui Autonomous Region on July 16, 2025. /VCG
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-24/Sandboarding-adventures-draw-crowds-to-Shapotou-s-golden-dunes-1FgJ3tdKmzK/img/a64ca99403634962a9344fb3695f8807/a64ca99403634962a9344fb3695f8807.jpeg'Visitors enjoy sandboarding at Shapotou Scenic Area in Zhongwei, Ningxia Hui Autonomous Region on July 16, 2025. /VCG
Not only is Shapotou famed for having the longest natural sandboarding slope in China – stretching for nearly 200 meters – it also boasts a steep incline that delivers an unforgettable rush. Thanks to its unique geological features, sliding down the dunes even produces a deep, resonant sound.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-24/Sandboarding-adventures-draw-crowds-to-Shapotou-s-golden-dunes-1FgJ3tdKmzK/img/b531e4f7ead844e4b20422aff9193e3d/b531e4f7ead844e4b20422aff9193e3d.jpeg'Visitors thrill to the experience of sandboarding at Shapotou Scenic Area in Zhongwei, Ningxia Hui Autonomous Region on July 16, 2025. /VCG
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-24/Sandboarding-adventures-draw-crowds-to-Shapotou-s-golden-dunes-1FgJ3tdKmzK/img/b531e4f7ead844e4b20422aff9193e3d/b531e4f7ead844e4b20422aff9193e3d.jpeg'Visitors thrill to the experience of sandboarding at Shapotou Scenic Area in Zhongwei, Ningxia Hui Autonomous Region on July 16, 2025. /VCG
Beyond its sandboarding experiences, Shapotou showcases a rare confluence of natural landscapes, where a desert, river, mountains, and an oasis all meet in one place. Known as the “National Desert Tourism Base,” Shapotou offers activities such as camel rides, desert off-roading, desert camping, stargazing, and drifting down the Yellow River on traditional sheepskin rafts. The area has grown especially popular with families and adventure seekers.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-24/Sandboarding-adventures-draw-crowds-to-Shapotou-s-golden-dunes-1FgJ3tdKmzK/img/a1aaf902dc76412a8fc2171856edb68c/a1aaf902dc76412a8fc2171856edb68c.jpeg' alt='The golden dunes and blue sky form a contrast at Shapotou Scenic Area in Zhongwei, Ningxia Hui Autonomous Region on July 16, 2025. /VCG'
To make the ascent easier, the scenic area is equipped with desert escalators and cable cars. Designated as China’s first national-level desert resort, Shapotou continues to attract tourists from across the country and beyond. By combining Yellow River culture with desert tourism, the region has become a model for leisure travel, offering visitors the chance to experience some of China’s most dramatic landscapes.
The theatrical box office market is down. It’s harder than ever to get people out of their homes and into the cinema. The business model for movies in streaming is still a work in progress.
Given all these challenges, who would want to buy a movie studio now?
Many people, it turns out. Earlier this month, the entertainment industry was abuzz after reports that film and TV production company Legendary Entertainment, the company behind “Dune” and “A Minecraft Movie,” was considering a potential acquisition of “Hunger Games” and “John Wick” producer and distributor Lionsgate Studios. Both companies have declined to comment on the reports.
It’s hardly the only deal news in the film business.
In June, independent film finance and production firm Alcon Media Group — known for “The Blind Side” and “Blade Runner 2049” — bought the film library of “Joker” and “Ocean’s Eleven” producer and financier Village Roadshow Entertainment for $417.5 million after an auction process that was part of the West Hollywood company’s Chapter 11 bankruptcy proceedings. Village Roadshow did not respond to a request for comment. Alcon could not be reached for comment.
And of course, the biggest takeover in the business is the long-pending sale of Paramount Global to Skydance Media, an $8-billion deal that received government approval Thursday.
Though the first half of the year has been rocked by uncertainty in the financial markets, including fears about the effects of President Trump’s tariffs and trade policies, there is likely pent-up demand for dealmaking that could emerge in the coming months and years, said lawyer Tom Ara, a partner in the private equity group at Weil, Gotshal & Manges, who also leads the firm’s entertainment, sports and media practice.
“There’s a lot of capital sitting on the sidelines, and I think there’s a lot of desire by different strategic and financial players to make deals,” he said. “Film, TV — it’s still the least expensive form of entertainment for the vast majority of the general public, and so it’s not going anywhere.”
Movie attendance was badly damaged by the COVID-19 pandemic and has not recovered. Domestic revenue remains down 24% from 2019, according to Comscore. But even as the industry has undergone change and upheaval, strategic buyers, both foreign and domestic, see value in what film studios are producing.
Intellectual property has become key, as audiences now gravitate mostly toward what they already know. With studios’ vast libraries of films, not only could those collections be ripe for reboots, sequels, prequels or spinoffs, but they also give owners options for other, non-film revenue streams, such as merchandise, theme park opportunities, TV shows, streaming deals and licensing.
“It’s less about short-term earnings and more about using that film studio as a key to unlock strategic value down the road,” said Brandon Katz, director of insights and content strategy at research firm Greenlight Analytics. “They’re not necessarily standalone cash cows. The interest in one is more about the broader ecosystem.”
While intellectual property can come from anywhere, movies are a particularly valuable way to generate value because of their worldwide distribution. A major hit can drive more revenue at every stage of a film’s post-release distribution journey, said J. Christopher Hamilton, a practicing entertainment attorney and a professor at Syracuse University who focuses on the business of media.
“It’s like being given the raw materials to build the empire,” he said. “No matter how successful the streaming network is … it’s never going to have the same level of impact globally on every level as a blockbuster hit.”
Private equity firms — which tend to be attracted to film and TV libraries because of the cash flow they generate — have retrenched a bit from their previous interest in Hollywood. But some groups have participated in recent deals, including RedBird Capital Partners, which is backing the Skydance bid for Paramount, and Apollo Global Management, which also made a play for Paramount in a joint bid with Sony Pictures Entertainment. Apollo has a minority stake in Legendary.
Lionsgate has long been considered a potential acquisition target, particularly as it’s one of few so-called mini-major studios left in the industry.
The company acquired cable network Starz in 2016 for $4.4 billion to bulk up and better compete in the media ecosystem. But the business model for traditional television cratered amid the rise of streaming, and earlier this year, the two formally split into separate publicly-traded companies. Lionsgate merged its studio business with a special purpose acquisition company in a deal that valued its assets at $4.6 billion and gave it a way to raise new capital.
The decoupling from Starz was seen as a way for Lionsgate to separate itself from the declining fortunes of the TV business and potentially be more attractive to buyers as a standalone studio, analysts said. Lionsgate also has a distribution arm, which could be enticing for a company like Legendary, which partners with other studios such as Warner Bros. to release its films.
Village Roadshow, which has a library of 108 films including stakes in “The Matrix” films and “Mad Max: Fury Road,” went up for sale amid a bruising legal battle with Warner Bros. and after the pandemic and the dual writers’ and actors’ strikes of 2023 throttled an ambitious slate.
Alcon, led by co-CEOs Broderick Johnson and Andrew Kosove, could be limited in what it can do with the properties, many of which were released by and co-financed with Warner Bros. Pictures. But Alcon still saw value in the assets to supplement its own content library. The Village Roadshow titles collectively generate an estimated $50 million annually, Alcon said.
For David Ellison and his billionaire father, Oracle Corp. co-founder Larry Ellison, buying a legacy studio like Paramount is an opportunity to turn around an asset that has long suffered from poor corporate decision making and chronic underinvestment.
Who else could be in the market for a studio or film library during this period of consolidation?
Foreign buyers are a possibility, particularly those from the Middle East, analysts and experts said.
Qatari broadcaster BeIN Media Group already owns a 51% stake in film and TV studio Miramax (Paramount Global owns the other half). Last year, Saudi Arabia launched a $100 million film fund to attract productions to the country. And Hollywood studios are recognizing the potential for new audiences and customer bases in the Middle East — earlier this year, Walt Disney Co. said it would open a new theme park in Abu Dhabi, United Arab Emirates.
Though tech companies like Apple or Google are frequently discussed as potential buyers of legacy studios, the fact that none have yet embarked on a deal — with the exception of Amazon for MGM Studios — could indicate that they don’t see it as a business priority, Hamilton said.
In the end, the discussion about mergers and acquisitions indicates the volatility of the industry — and individual studios’ realistic assessments about their own futures, said Corey Martin, managing partner and chair of Granderson Des Rochers’ entertainment finance practice.
“I think that we’re going to see further consolidation,” he said. “You’re already seeing the signs of some of these various parties coming to grips, being honest with themselves as companies and platforms about whether they’re buyers or sellers — and to the extent you are a seller, how do you best position yourself to maximize shareholder value?”
In the fast-paced world of cryptocurrency trading, milliseconds can make a significant difference in profit and loss. This is especially true in the context of telegram bot crypto trading, where trades are executed automatically based on real-time market data and predefined strategies. Latency, which refers to the time delay between a user action or market event and the corresponding bot response or trade execution, becomes a critical factor. So, is latency important in telegram bot crypto trading? The answer is a resounding yes.
Latency impacts every aspect of automated crypto trading. When a trading bot receives a signal or detects a market condition that meets its criteria for execution, it must act quickly to capitalize on the opportunity. Even a delay of a few milliseconds can result in slippage, where the executed price differs from the intended price, often to the trader’s disadvantage. In volatile markets, prices can change dramatically in a short period. If a Telegram bot experiences latency, it may miss the optimal entry or exit point, thereby reducing the effectiveness of its trading strategy.
In telegram bot crypto trading, bots often rely on APIs provided by exchanges to fetch data and execute trades. These APIs can have inherent latencies depending on the server load, network speed, and the geographic location of the servers. If a Telegram bot is hosted on a server far from the exchange or on a low-performance machine, the latency increases. This delay becomes critical when trading strategies depend on timely responses, such as arbitrage opportunities or scalping, where even a one-second delay can negate the potential profit.
Is latency important in telegram bot crypto trading?
Telegram bots, by design, operate within the Telegram messaging platform, which introduces its own layer of latency. When a bot sends or receives a message, processes a command, or delivers an update, the data must travel through Telegram’s servers. While Telegram is known for its speed and efficiency, it is not specifically optimized for high-frequency trading. Developers working in telegram bot crypto trading must account for this added latency when designing bots, especially for strategies that require split-second decisions.
Another aspect to consider is how bots interact with users. In telegram bot crypto trading, latency doesn’t just affect the bot’s communication with exchanges; it also impacts user experience. A delayed response from the bot when a user requests a balance update or places a manual trade can result in frustration or even missed opportunities. High latency can also hinder real-time alerts, such as price changes, stop-loss triggers, or market news, which are essential for active traders.
To minimize latency, developers often deploy bots on high-performance cloud servers located near major exchange data centers. They also implement efficient programming techniques to reduce processing time and avoid unnecessary delays. Some bots even integrate directly with exchange WebSocket APIs instead of relying solely on REST APIs, which are typically slower. These technical optimizations are crucial in maintaining a competitive edge in the high-speed environment of crypto trading.
In conclusion, latency is an essential consideration in telegram bot crypto trading. It can significantly influence trade execution, user experience, and overall profitability. Traders and developers must prioritize low-latency architectures and efficient coding practices to ensure their bots perform optimally in a market where timing is everything.
But the competitive landscape for AI-assisted coding platforms is crowded. Startups Windsurf, Replit, and Poolside also sell AI code-generation tools to developers. Cline is a popular open-source alternative. GitHub’s Copilot, which was developed in collaboration with OpenAI, is described as a “pair programmer” that auto-completes code and offers debugging assistance.
Most of these code editors are relying on a combination of AI models built by major tech companies, including OpenAI, Google, and Anthropic. For example, Cursor is built on top of Visual Studio Code, an open-source editor from Microsoft, and Cursor users are generating code by tapping into AI models like Google Gemini, DeepSeek, and Anthropic’s Claude Sonnet.
Several developers tell WIRED that they now run Anthropic’s coding assistant, Claude Code, alongside Cursor (or instead of it). Since May, Claude Code has offered various debugging options. It can analyze error messages, do step-by-step problem solving, suggest specific changes, and run unit tests in code.
All of which might beg the question: How buggy is AI-written code compared to code written by fallible humans? Earlier this week, the AI code-generation tool Replit reportedly went rogue and made changes to a user’s code despite the project being in a “code freeze,” or pause. It ended up deleting the user’s entire database. Replit’s founder and CEO said on X that the incident was “unacceptable and should never be possible.” And yet, it was. That’s an extreme case, but even small bugs can wreak havoc for coders.
Anysphere didn’t have a clear answer to the question of whether AI code demands more AI code debugging. Kaplan argues it is “orthogonal to the fact that people are vibe coding a lot.” Even if all of the code is written by a human, it’s still very likely that there will be bugs, he says.
Anysphere product engineer Rohan Varma estimates that on professional software teams, as much as 30 to 40 percent of code is being generated by AI. This is in line with estimates shared by other companies; Google, for example, has said that around 30 percent of the company’s code is now suggested by AI and reviewed by human developers. Most organizations are still making human engineers responsible for checking code before it’s deployed. Notably, one recent randomized control trial with 16 experienced coders suggested that it took them 19 percent longer to complete tasks than when they were not allowed to use AI tools.
Bugbot is meant to supercharge that. “The heads of AI at our larger customers are looking for the next step with Cursor,” Varma says. “The first step was, ‘Let’s increase the velocity of our teams, get everyone moving quicker.’ Now that they’re moving quicker, it’s, ‘How do we make sure we’re not introducing new problems, we’re not breaking things?’” He also emphasized that Bugbot is designed to spot specific kinds of bugs—hard-to-catch logic bugs, security issues, and other edge cases.
One incident that validated Bugbot for the Anysphere team: A couple months ago, the (human) coders at Anysphere realized that they hadn’t gotten any comments from Bugbot on their code for a few hours. Bugbot had gone down. Anysphere engineers began investigating the issue and found the pull request that was responsible for the outage.
There in the logs, they saw that Bugbot had commented on the pull request, warning a human engineer that if they made this change it would break the Bugbot service. The tool had correctly predicted its own demise. Ultimately, it was a human that broke it.
Update: 7/24/2025, 3:45 PM EDT: Wired has corrected the number of Anysphere employees.
Julie Rovner is chief Washington correspondent and host of KFF Health News’ weekly health policy news podcast, “What the Health?” A noted expert on health policy issues, Julie is the author of the critically praised reference book “Health Care Politics and Policy A to Z,” now in its third edition.
Much of the hubbub in health care this year has been focused on Medicaid, which faces dramatically reduced federal funding as the result of the huge budget bill signed by President Donald Trump earlier this month. But now the attention is turning to the Affordable Care Act, which is facing some big changes that could cost many consumers their health coverage as soon as 2026.
Meanwhile, changes to immigration policy under Trump could have an outsize impact on the nation’s health care system, both by exacerbating shortages of health workers and by eliminating insurance coverage that helps keep some hospitals and clinics afloat.
This week’s panelists are Julie Rovner of KFF Health News, Julie Appleby of KFF Health News, Jessie Hellmann of CQ Roll Call, and Alice Miranda Ollstein of Politico.
Many Americans can expect their health insurance premiums to rise next year, but those rate hikes could be even bigger for the millions who rely on ACA health plans. To afford such plans, most consumers rely on enhanced federal government subsidies, which are set to expire — and GOP lawmakers seem loath to extend them, even though many of their constituents could lose their insurance as a result.
Congress included a $50 billion fund for rural health care in Trump’s new law, aiming to cushion the blow of Medicaid cuts. But the fund is expected to fall short, especially as many people lose their health insurance and clinics, hospitals, and health systems are left to cover their bills.
Abortion opponents continue to claim the abortion pill mifepristone is unsafe, more recently by citing a problematic analysis — and some lawmakers are using it to pressure federal officials to take another look at the drug’s approval. Meanwhile, many Planned Parenthood clinics are bracing for an end to federal funding, stripping money not only from busy clinics where abortion is legal but also from clinics that provide only contraception, testing for sexually transmitted infections, and other non-abortion care in states where the procedure is banned.
And as more states implement laws enabling doctors to opt out of treatments that violate their morals, a pregnant woman in Tennessee says her doctor refused to provide prenatal care, because she is unmarried.
Also this week, Rovner interviews Jonathan Oberlander, a Medicare historian and University of North Carolina health policy professor, to mark Medicare’s 60th anniversary later this month.
Plus, for “extra credit” the panelists suggest health policy stories they read this week that they think you should read, too:
Julie Rovner: KFF Health News’ “Republicans Call Medicaid Rife with Fraudsters. This Man Sees No Choice but To Break the Rules,” by Katheryn Houghton.
We encourage organizations to republish our content, free of charge. Here’s what we ask:
You must credit us as the original publisher, with a hyperlink to our kffhealthnews.org site. If possible, please include the original author(s) and KFF Health News” in the byline. Please preserve the hyperlinks in the story.
It’s important to note, not everything on kffhealthnews.org is available for republishing. If a story is labeled “All Rights Reserved,” we cannot grant permission to republish that item.
Epic Games apparently removed passive XP gains from Fortnite’s main Battle Royale and Zero Build modes on Thursday afternoon, in the midst of its Summer Road Trip event that will award a free Chevrolet Corvette ZR1 car body for gaining XP to complete a series of daily quests. Playing Battle Royale had awarded 550 XP per minute, or a little less than half a level per hour, just for existing in the game mode–but that’s no longer the case.
While this certainly is a bit of a nerf, it’s actually not typical for Battle Royale and Zero Build to give passive XP. In fact, passive XP was only just added to those modes at the beginning of the current season–before then, we lived without it. The change had made leveling the battle pass this season meaningfully faster.
Assuming the change will stick for a while, there are two fairly obvious potential reasons for the change. The Summer Road Trip event is one of them, since its quests simply require gaining XP to complete. You only need to gain eight total levels across these quests, so the lack of passive XP in BR probably won’t slow anyone down very much. Another possibility is that we’re approaching the end of Chapter 6 Season 4, and this change will make it a little tougher for folks who are just now getting started on the battle pass to catch up before the season ends on August 7.
When Chapter 6 Season 3 ends on August 7, it’ll also mark the end of the current seasons of Fortnite OG and Lego Fortnite. In other words, it’ll be a pretty eventful season launch. In fact, there’s even an end-of-season event ahead.
A new study, led by experts at the University of Nottingham, has found that the Covid-19 pandemic may have accelerated people’s brain health, even if they were never infected with the virus.
What does it mean to grow older, not just in years, but in terms of brain health? Can stress, isolation, and global disruption leave their mark on people’s minds?
The findings of this new study, which are published in Nature Communications, showed that people who lived through the Covid-19 pandemic showed signs of faster brain aging over time than those scanned entirely before it. The changes were most noticeable in older individuals, in men, and in people from more disadvantaged backgrounds.
Only participants who were infected by Covid-19 between their scans showed a drop in certain cognitive abilities, such as mental flexibility and processing speed. This may suggest that the pandemic’s brain aging effect, on its own (without infection) may not cause symptoms. Also, the authors highlight that the observed brain aging may be reversible.
The study was led by a team of experts from the University’s School of Medicine and was supported by the National Institute for Health and Care Research (NIHR) Nottingham Biomedical Research Centre and the Medical Research Council (MRC) DEMISTIFI program.
Dr Ali-Reza Mohammadi-Nejad led the study, he said: “What surprised me most was that even people who hadn’t had Covid showed significant increases in brain aging rates. It really shows how much the experience of the pandemic itself, everything from isolation to uncertainty, may have affected our brain health.”
The research team looked at longitudinal brain scans from nearly 1,000 healthy adults, taken as part of the UK Biobank study. Some participants had scans before and after the pandemic; others, only before. Using advanced imaging and machine learning, the researchers estimated each person’s “brain age” — how old their brain appeared to be compared to their actual age.
The brain age model was developed using brain scans from over 15,000 healthy individuals, without comorbidities, allowing the researchers to build an accurate model for estimating brain age.
“This study reminds us that brain health is shaped not only by illness, but by our everyday environment,” said Dorothee Auer, Professor of Neuroimaging and senior author on the study. “The pandemic put a strain on people’s lives, especially those already facing disadvantage. We can’t yet test whether the changes we saw will reverse, but it’s certainly possible, and that’s an encouraging thought.”
Stamatios Sotiropoulos, Professor of Computational Neuroimaging, and co-lead author added: “The longitudinal MRI data acquired before and after the pandemic from the UK Biobank gave us a rare window to observe how major life events can affect the brain.”
MSSRC-SSRC is organising webinar on Navigating the Legal System: Support for Domestic Violence Survivors in collaboration with Law Vision (An initiative of innovation, education & reforms).
About the Session
Domestic violence is not just a personal issue, it’s a legal one. Survivors often face a maze of procedures, stigma, and silence. This session aims to demystify the legal process and empower survivors and advocates alike.
Join us for a comprehensive, empathetic, and action-oriented discussion on how India’s legal framework addresses domestic violence, with a special focus on the Protection of Women from Domestic Violence Act (PWDVA), 2005, rights of survivors, role of Police and Protection Officers.
About the Organisers
The Maharashtra Social Security & Reforms Council (MSSRC) wields under the Social Security and Reforms Council and the aegis of the Women’s Indian Chamber of Commerce and Industry (WICCI) which aims to enhance the social welfare, security and justice of women in Maharashtra.
This session is organised by the Maharashtra Social Security and Reforms Council (MSSRC) in collaboration with the Law Vision, an initiative aimed at shaping a just, inclusive, and progressive legal landscape through innovation, education, and reforms.
Key Highlights
Understanding the legal rights of domestic violence survivors
Step-by-step process: From filing a complaint to getting relief
Role of PWDVA, police, and protection officers
Practical barriers survivors face, and how to overcome them
How law students and legal professionals can offer support
Q & A Session
Eligibility
Law students
Legal professionals
Human rights and Social Workers/Representatives of an NGO
Women’s rights advocates
Any Individuals Interested or Passionate about women’s rights
Guest Speaker
Advocate Meenu Padha, High Court of J & K and Ladakh | Legal Consultant | Women’s and Children Rights Activist.
Session Details
Date: 03 August 2025 (Sunday)
Time: 7:00 PM IST
Platform: Google Meet
How to Register?
Interested candidates can register online via the link given at the end of the post.
Perk
Free Participation & E-Certificates but registration is mandatory.
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/lifestyle/health/baby-skincare-in-monsoon-dermat-shares-5-skin-problems-and-how-to-prevent-them-101753365865036.html” on this server.
TCG Labs Soleil, a venture firm building narrowly focused biotechnology startups and readying them for partnerships, said Thursday it raised $400 million to continue launching new companies.
The firm originally launched last year in collaboration with The Column Group, raising $400 million to begin its work. It operates through a venture fund, TCG Labs, and an evergreen R&D hub, Soleil, run by a scientific team. Together, the two are building and overseeing a portfolio of single-drug companies and positioning them for deals once those programs achieve proof-of-concept data.
Biotechs can be built on a variety of strategies, from expansive drugmaking platforms to single assets. Broader bets can offer higher rewards and room for companies to shift gears if a program fails. But they’re also more expensive and time-consuming to build. Single-drug startups, by comparison, may be able to progress — or fail — more quickly and at lower cost.
TCG Labs Soleil says its model enables it to make fast decisions with better “capital efficiency,” potentially leading to partnerships at “optimal value points.”
“With this new funding, we can continue building the portfolio and position each program for success, whether through in-house development or an early strategic transaction,” Peter Svennilson, a managing partner at TCG Labs, said in a statement.
Since its formation, TCG Labs Soleil has founded 10 portfolio companies pursuing drugs for cancer, immune diseases, cardiometabolic disorders and other conditions. Most are named after San Francisco streets. In May, one of those companies, Juri Biosciences, licensed a T cell engager for prostate cancer from Shanghai, China-based EpimAb Biotherapeutics in a deal worth up to $210 million.
TCG Labs Soleil is led by Jin-Long Chen, the founder of NGM Biopharmaceuticals and a former research head at Amgen. The firm has, over the last year, added R&D capabilities in Shanghai, expanding beyond its original hub in South San Francisco, California.
“With several programs heading into the clinic, this additional raise reflects both the pace and productivity we’ve achieved since our inaugural fund, moving programs forward efficiently and opening new opportunities for strategic partnerships,” Chen said in a statement.
Other healthcare-focused venture firms to raise cash this year include Omega Funds, which this week closed a $647 million fundraise, and Deerfield Management, which announced a haul of more than $600 million in May.
To give you some inspiration for this new decade, this week we’ve be running a series of 5 infographics highlighting Warren Buffett’s successes and failures so we can learn some lessons form them.
Today we thought it was a good way to end this series with 25 of the best Warren Buffett quotes accumulated through his lengthy and prestigious career.
Part 5: Wisdom from the Oracle
Today’s infographic highlights the smartest and most insightful quotes from Buffett on investing, business, and life.
It’s the fifth and final part of the Warren Buffett Series
Don’t forget to check out…
After sifting through hundreds of quotes from the Oracle of Omaha, Visual Capitalist chose the best 25 of them and sorted them into a few select categories:
Keeping it Simple
Buffett is known for putting his money in “no-brainer” businesses (i.e. Coca-Cola) that are simple to run, with long-term competitive advantages.
Buffett Quotes on Keeping It Simple
#1
“Never invest in a business you cannot understand.”
#2
“I don’t look to jump over 7-foot bars: I look around for 1-foot bars that I can step over.”
#3
“I try to buy stock in businesses that are so wonderful that an idiot can run them. Because sooner or later, one will.”
#4
“A ham sandwich could run Coca-Cola.”
#5
“Beware of geeks bearing formulas.”
#6
“You don’t need to be a rocket scientist. Investing is not a game where the guy with the 160 IQ beats the guy with 130 IQ.”
#7
“Rule No. 1: Never lose money. Rule No. 2: Never forget rule No.1”
Temperament
For Buffett, how someone responds to different situations is far more important than their actual skills or knowledge level. Investors must not care what the crowd thinks, and they must be patient, focused, and decisive to maximize their potential.
Buffett Quotes on Temperament
#8
“The most important quality for an investor is temperament, not intellect. You need a temperament that neither derives great pleasure from being with the crowd or against the crowd.”
#9
“It’s only when the tide goes out that you learn who has been swimming naked.”
#10
“Our favorite holding period is forever.”
#11
“Someone’s sitting in the shade today because someone planted a tree a long time ago.”
#12
“An investor should act as though he had a lifetime decision card with just twenty punches on it.”
Value
Buffett’s decision-making is driven by an assessment of value. Is the asset he is buying worth way more than it is currently being priced at by the fickle Mr. Market – if so, he’ll lay down his chips.
Buffett Quotes on Value
#13
“Price is what you pay; value is what you get.”
#14
“Be fearful when others are greedy and greedy when others are fearful.”
#15
“It’s far better to buy a wonderful company at a fair price, than a fair company at a wonderful price.”
Conduct
A Midwestern gentleman, Buffett follows a simple and friendly style of business conduct, with deals often bounded by one’s promise or a simple handshake.
Buffett Quotes on Conduct
#16
“You can’t make a good deal with a bad person.”
#17
“It takes 20 years to build a reputation and five minutes to ruin it. If you think about that, you’ll do things differently.”
Perspective
At 89 years old, Buffett knows a thing or two about business and life. As a result, he’s developed some unique perspectives.
Buffett Quotes on Perspective
#18
“In the business world, the rearview mirror is always clearer than the windshield.”
#19
“If past history was all that is needed to play the game of money, the richest people would be librarians.”
#20
“Failing conventionally is the route to go; as a group, lemmings may have a rotten image, but no individual lemming has ever received bad press”
#21
“In my view, derivatives are financial weapons of mass destruction, carrying dangers that, while now latent, are potentially lethal.”
Life and Success
How did he build such a successful career, and how does one man generate so much wisdom?
Buffett Quotes on Life and Success
#22
“The most important investment you can make is in yourself.”
#23
“If you get to my age in life and nobody thinks well of you, I don’t care how big your bank account is, your life is a disaster.”
#24
“I do more reading and thinking, and make less impulse decisions than most people in business. I do it because I like this kind of life.”
#25
“My life couldn’t be happier. In fact, it’d be worse if I had six or eight houses. So, I have everything I need to have, and I don’t need any more.”
With $89.5 billion to his name, Warren Buffett is not only known for his self-made wealth and investing acumen, but also his wit and quotability.
We hope this selection of the best Warren Buffett quotes helps you think about life and investing differently, and that the legendary investor continues to share his wisdom with the world.
Want more Buffett?
Don’t forget to check out the other parts of our Buffett infographic series which came courtesy of Visual Capitalist:
Part 1 -The Remarkable Early Years of Warren Buffett
I switch phones quite frequently. My current favorite is the OnePlus 13 because in addition to packing exceptional hardware, it also offers a decades-old feature: an IR blaster. I find this indispensable and think it should be available on more Android phones.
What’s an IR Blaster?
An IR blaster, short for infrared blaster, is a device comprising a small LED that’s designed to emit infrared light in the form of pulses. This infrared light mimics the signals transmitted by remote controls to control electronic appliances that have an IR receiver.
Yash Wate/MakeUseOf
You can typically find an IR blaster located at the top or bottom edge of your phone. Your phone manufacturer will also preload an app on the phone that interfaces with the IR blaster, allowing you to perform various actions on your desired device.
What Can You Do With an IR Blaster on Your Android Phone?
You can use the IR blaster on your Android phone to control pretty much any device that has an IR receiver. This can include electronic devices such as your TV, set-top box, projector, AV receiver, DVD player, and certain camera models. It can also work with household appliances, like fans (with an IR remote), motorized curtains, robot vacuum cleaners, and air conditioners.
Related
Infrared vs. Radio Frequency: How Does a Remote Control Work?
You use one all the time, but how does your remote control actually change the channels?
Generally speaking, you can control most of the features and functionalities of these devices or appliances with your phone’s IR blaster. However, there can be exceptions. The controller app’s database may sometimes not have a one-to-one controller of an appliance or device, leaving you with few—often the most basic—controls.
Having the ability to control devices using your phone is useful in a lot of scenarios. For instance, it can prove a lifesaver when you misplace or break the remote control for your TV. Similarly, it can come in handy when you’re traveling and can’t find the remote control for a TV, set-top box, or A/C in your hotel room. And if you’re feeling a bit daring, it should even work to turn down the volume of annoying TVs in public places.
How to Set Up and Use the IR Blaster on Your OnePlus Phone
OnePlus phones that have an IR blaster come pre-installed with the IR Remote app. This app allows you to set up and save remote controls for various appliances, allowing you to control them from a single place.
Setting up the IR Remote app is easy. You can set up a controller for a device manually or by scanning a QR code carrying its configuration. The latter option is useful when you want to import a remote control from another device, or if you’ve obtained a QR code for a controller online or in the device’s manual.
Related
Here’s How I Check if a QR Code Is Safe to Scan
About to scan that QR code? Check it’s safe first.
To add a controller for a device using the QR code option, tap the Plus (+) button on the main screen and hit the scanner icon in the top-right corner. Grant the app access to the phone’s camera. Once done, point the phone’s camera at the scanner, and the IR Remote app should recognize and import the remote.
Alternatively, you can add a remote manually. To do this, tap the Plus (+)on the main screen and select the device type on the following screen. Next, choose your device’s manufacturer. Hit Got it to dismiss the prompt.
Ensure nothing’s blocking the IR blaster on your phone; remove its case if required. Also, turn on the device you’re setting up the controller for if it isn’t already.
Now, point your phone at the device and tap the test button you see on the app. If the device responds to this test signal, tap Yes. (You may need to do this a few times, depending on the device for which you’re setting up the controller.) Alternatively, if your device doesn’t respond to the test signal, tap No response, try next. Keep tapping the new test signal buttons you see on the screen until your device responds.
Once you’ve managed to successfully test all the signals, hit Yes again. Then, type a descriptive name for the remote control on the next screen, so you can easily identify it among other remote controls you may add on the app going forward.
While here, you can also add a quick access shortcut for this remote control to your phone’s home screen by toggling the Add Home screen shortcut option. Finally, hit Save to store the remote and add it to the app’s main screen.
Once set up, using the IR Remote app is straightforward. Tap the remote control for the device you want to control on the main screen, and it’ll present you with a bunch of buttons on the screen. Tap the appropriate button, depending on what you want to do on the device, and the app should send a signal through the IR blaster to perform that action.
How to Check if Your Android Phone Has an IR Blaster
Not every Android phone comes with an IR blaster, but it’s easy to tell if your phone has one. Here are some ways to do it:
Look for the IR blaster dot on your phone: Most manufacturers place an IR blaster at the top edge of the phone. It appears as a small circular-shaped translucent dot, sitting flush with the surface. Remove the case from your phone and check the top or bottom edge to look for the dot.
Check your phone’s specifications: You can also check the specifications of your phone on the manufacturer’s official website to determine if it comes with an IR blaster. Be sure to enter the correct model on the website, and you should see an entry for “IR port,” “IR sensor,” “infrared port,” or similar under a section labeled “Specifications,” “Features,” or “Hardware.”
Look for a pre-installed IR Remote app: If your phone has an IR blaster, it’ll most likely also come pre-loaded with a remote controller app to control it. Access your phone’s app drawer and look for an app labeled “Remote,” “IR Remote,” “Smart Remote,” or “Remote Control.”
Install the IR Test app: You can also use a third-party app, like IR Test, to check if your phone has an IR blaster—and whether it functions correctly. Download the IR Test app from the Play Store, open it, and hit the Start IR Test button. It’ll then tell you whether your phone has an IR blaster.
What to Do if Your Android Phone Doesn’t Have an IR Blaster
If your Android phone doesn’t have a built-in IR blaster, don’t be surprised; most manufacturers don’t include one on their phones these days. Luckily, workarounds exist to get similar functionality.
The best—and most reliable—is to get a USB-powered IR remote control adapter like the R09 Mini Smartphone IR Remote Controller Adapter. These are inexpensive, and are one of many accessories that plug directly into your phone’s charging port.
You just need to download a compatible app—often recommended by the dongle manufacturer—on your phone to use the IR blaster. Once done, follow the on-screen instructions to set up the controller for the device you want to work with. Then, use the controller to perform actions and the app will send IR signals through the dongle.
An IR blaster on a phone isn’t anything new; it was a common sight a while back. However, many brands eventually phased it out due to limited adoption, cost-cutting measures, and the rise of smart home devices that use Wi-Fi and Bluetooth for control.
Nonetheless, that doesn’t discount the convenience of having an IR blaster on a phone. It remains a valuable addition that I and many others appreciate. It’s also why certain brands, especially those based in China, continue to include it on their phones. I hope more brands reintroduce the IR blaster on their phones and market it like other neat features.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-24/Brilliant-starry-night-observed-in-Xinjiang-s-Bayanbulak-Grassland-1FgKgHVFd8Q/img/1249efd2be4a477c92e705a574133a64/1249efd2be4a477c92e705a574133a64.jpeg'A starry sky is observed at the Bayanbulak Grassland in northwest China’s Xinjiang Uygur Autonomous Region on July 17, 2025. /VCG
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-24/Brilliant-starry-night-observed-in-Xinjiang-s-Bayanbulak-Grassland-1FgKgHVFd8Q/img/1249efd2be4a477c92e705a574133a64/1249efd2be4a477c92e705a574133a64.jpeg'A starry sky is observed at the Bayanbulak Grassland in northwest China’s Xinjiang Uygur Autonomous Region on July 17, 2025. /VCG
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-24/Brilliant-starry-night-observed-in-Xinjiang-s-Bayanbulak-Grassland-1FgKgHVFd8Q/img/1249efd2be4a477c92e705a574133a64/1249efd2be4a477c92e705a574133a64.jpeg'A starry sky is observed at the Bayanbulak Grassland in northwest China’s Xinjiang Uygur Autonomous Region on July 17, 2025. /VCG
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-24/Brilliant-starry-night-observed-in-Xinjiang-s-Bayanbulak-Grassland-1FgKgHVFd8Q/img/1249efd2be4a477c92e705a574133a64/1249efd2be4a477c92e705a574133a64.jpeg'A starry sky is observed at the Bayanbulak Grassland in northwest China’s Xinjiang Uygur Autonomous Region on July 17, 2025. /VCG
A dazzlingly starry sky was observed after several days of rainy weather at the Bayanbulak Grassland in Xinjiang. Thanks to its high altitude, low light pollution and expansive views, the grassland is an ideal location for stargazing. Camping enthusiasts flock there in droves each summer to gaze at the starry skies and spot meteor showers.
This story contains spoilers for “The Fantastic Four: First Steps.”
Marvel’s First Family has finally made its formal MCU debut, which means it’s time to engage in everyone’s favorite tradition: breaking down the movie’s post-credits teases to suss out what’s next.
Directed by “WandaVision” helmer Matt Shakman, “The Fantastic Four: First Steps” introduces audiences to Reed Richards (Pedro Pascal), Sue Storm (Vanessa Kirby), Ben Grimm (Ebon Moss-Bachrach) and Johnny Storm (Joseph Quinn). The movie, which officially opens Friday, pits the quartet of superpowered astronauts against Galactus (Ralph Ineson), a cosmic entity with an insatiable hunger for planets.
As the title teases, “First Steps” marks the beginning of Phase 6 of the Marvel Cinematic Universe, which will culminate with a pair of massive “Avengers” crossover films.
Like most MCU installments, “The Fantastic Four: First Steps” features multiple post-credits stingers. The first, which is shown midway through the end credits, sets up the superhero team’s next big adventure.
The mid-credits scene takes place four years after the Fantastic Four’s showdown with Galactus. It shows Sue sitting on a couch, reading a story to her and Reed’s son, Franklin Richards. After finishing the book, she steps away to grab another, turning down robo-assistant H.E.R.B.I.E.’s suggested title. Sensing something is wrong, Sue starts charging her powers. She rounds the corner to check on Franklin and finds a mysterious cloaked figure interacting with her child.
While his face is not shown, his green cloak and the mask he is holding make it clear to fans familiar with their Marvel lore that this is Doctor Doom.
This marks the first appearance of the iconic villain in the MCU. The character, also known as Victor von Doom, made his comic book debut in “Fantastic Four” No. 5 (1962) and has been a foe of Marvel’s First Family ever since. In the comics, the character is both a scientific genius and a sorcerer hailing from the fictional country of Latveria. (The name of the country is briefly shown in “Fantastic Four: First Steps.”)
Sue Storm (Vanessa Kirby) and her son, Franklin (Ada Scott), in “The Fantastic Four: First Steps.”
(Marvel Studios)
Doom’s introduction into the MCU has been highly anticipated since Marvel Studios’ presentation last year at San Diego Comic-Con. Among the major announcements was that the fifth “Avengers” film had been retitled “Avengers: Doomsday” and that “Iron Man” actor Robert Downey Jr. would be returning to the franchise as Doctor Doom.
While Doom’s exact interest in Franklin is not revealed, it’s easy to assume that the child’s powers would be appealing to a supervillain. This encounter also hints at the reason why the Fantastic Four eventually make their way to the universe where the rest of the MCU heroes reside.
“First Steps” is set on Earth-828 — a tribute to “Fantastic Four” co-creator Jack Kirby, who was born Aug. 28, 1917 — a retrofuturistic world in a separate corner of the Marvel multiverse. But the “Thunderbolts*” post-credits scene shows the Fantastic Four’s spacecraft Excelsior appearing in their world on Earth-616. Could Doom have kidnapped young Franklin and taken him to an alternate universe? Whatever the reason, Samuel Sterns’ warning from the “Captain America: Brave New World” post-credits scene was apt: The multiverse is coming.
Fans might wonder how the “Fantastic Four” post-credits scene might have played out had the studio not altered its original plans to feature Kang the Conqueror as the franchise’s next big bad. In the comics Kang and Franklin are part of the same family tree so it’s easy to imagine him as the surprise interloper Sue sees. Either way, a magical nanny might have been helpful. (Marvel Studios pivoted from its original plan after Kang actor Jonathan Majors was convicted on assault and harassment charges in 2023.)
The second “Fantastic Four: First Steps” credits scene is shown after the full credits roll and serves more as a fun bonus and tribute to the eponymous superhero team’s animated past.
“Avengers: Doomsday,” hitting theaters Dec. 18, 2026, will be a massive MCU crossover featuring members of the Fantastic Four, the Thunderbolts/New Avengers and more. Confirmed “Doomsday” cast members include veteran “Avengers” stars Chris Hemsworth (Thor), Anthony Mackie (Sam Wilson/Captain America), Sebastian Stan (Bucky Barnes), Paul Rudd (Scott Lang/Ant-Man) and Tom Hiddleston (Loki), as well as Florence Pugh (Yelena Belova), David Harbour (Alexei Shostakov/Red Guardian), Lewis Pullman (Bob Reynolds), Wyatt Russell (John Walker) and Hannah John-Kamen (Ava Starr/Ghost).
Up next for the MCU is “Wonder Man,” a series starring Yahya Abdul-Mateen II that will debut on Disney+ in December. The next Phase 6 film is Marvel and Sony’s “Spider-Man: Brand New Day,” slated for a July 2026 release.
New Delhi, July 24: India’s largest automobile exporter Maruti Suzuki India exported over 3.3 lakh units in FY25, the highest ever in any financial year, the company announced on Thursday. This marked a growth of 17.5 per cent over the previous fiscal. Meanwhile, the country’s total automobile exports rose by 19 per cent during this period to over 53 lakh units. In the first quarter of the current fiscal (Q1 FY26), India’s automobile exports rose 22 per cent on-year to about 14.57 lakh units.
Further, Fronx achieved the status of the first SUV from India to clock exports of 1 lakh units in just 25 months, according to the company. Out of these, 69,000 units were dispatched overseas in FY 25. Manufactured at Maruti’s state-of-the-art Gujarat facility, Fronx has reached foreign markets including Latin America, Middle East, and Africa. The ‘Made in India’ SUV is exported to over 80 countries. Blinkit Ambulance Rapid Growth: Zomato CEO Deepinder Goyal Says 10-Minutes Life-Saving Emergency Vehicles Grow From 6 to 12, Respond to 594 Critical Calls in Gurugram.
Further, the success of Fronx in Japan has been pivotal to its increasing volumes. Maruti Suzuki has been the leading passenger vehicle (PV) exporter from India for the past four consecutive financial years, with the highest exports. Its share in PV exports from India reached an all-time high of 47 per cent in Q1 FY26, with over 96,000 vehicles exported. At present, Marutia Suzuki exports 17 models to nearly 100 countries, and the top destinations are South Africa, Japan, and Saudi Arabia. “The company’s capability to manufacture world-class vehicles for global markets exemplifies the true essence of ‘Make in India’ initiative. Optimus Will Bring the Food to Your Car Next Year, Says Elon Musk As Tesla Announces Opening New Store in Newcastle on July 26, 2025.
Our renewed focus on international markets has been instrumental in Suzuki’s continued leadership in passenger vehicle exports,” said Hisashi Takeuchi, Managing Director and CEO, Maruti Suzuki India Limited. “Fronx is delighting customers all over the world. Besides clocking the fastest 1 lakh exports, Fronx was also India’s number 1 exported passenger vehicle in FY 2024-25,” he mentioned. The automobile sector contributes approximately 7.1 per cent to India’s GDP and nearly 8 per cent of its total exports.
(The above story first appeared on LatestLY on Jul 24, 2025 05:34 PM IST. For more news and updates on politics, world, sports, entertainment and lifestyle, log on to our website latestly.com).
I’ve been told by multiple people that the set of a short drama doesn’t necessarily look that different from an indie movie or commercial shoot, except everything is churned out much faster to save on costs. Whereas a traditional shoot would last weeks or months, the entire season of a vertical show is typically filmed within two weeks.
Nicole Mattox, one of the vertical stars working with ReelShort in Los Angeles, told me she usually books two to three shoots in one month, with only two days in between. A professionally trained actress originally from Texas, she had only been in a few small movie productions before stumbling on the short drama industry in 2023. But she says she quickly learned how to remember all of her lines—an impressive feat, considering that the platforms usually shoot a dozen pages of script a day, whereas a traditional movie may only shoot three.
Mattox says her acting coach told her that her performances don’t have to be unrealistically dramatic; rather, it’s just that every plot development is incredibly meaningful for her characters. For example, in the fictional world of a vertical drama, a romantic breakup can be your entire life. “There’s nothing else for you to move on from. There’s no future for you anymore. Everything’s ruined,” Mattox explains.
Creating Global Stars
Hao, who works in talent recruiting for ReelShort, says many of the company’s actors come from modeling or advertising backgrounds and have never had speaking roles before. Now, they can star in a dozen shows in a single year and quickly grow their careers.
The third ReelShort production Mattox starred in was a romantic comedy about professional ice hockey called Breaking the Ice. Mattox played the personal assistant to an NHL player, who naturally, was also his secret baby mama. The show became a runaway success, with over 300 million views on ReelShort.
Mattox says she has been surprised by how devoted her fans are, a large number of whom are in the Philippines. In May, some of them paid to put a picture of her face on a billboard in Times Square to celebrate her birthday. Earlier this month, they rented another billboard in Manila to advertise her latest production. Your show “had me in a chokehold,” one commenter wrote on her personal TikTok account, where she has amassed over 130,000 followers.
What ReelShort did after Breaking the Ice became a hit demonstrates the real secret behind its success. The company quickly adapted it for the Spanish-speaking and Japanese-speaking markets, but rather than dubbing the existing dialog or simply swapping the actors, it changed key aspects of the plot. In the Spanish version, the male protagonist became a soccer player, while in the Japanese version, he was a baseball star. The original series debuted in July 2024; the locally filmed adaptations dropped in September and December the same year.
In Hollywood, that kind of speed is unfathomable. Four years after the Korean Netflix show Squid Game became a global sensation, the American adaptation is still only rumored to be in the works. The short drama industry can move much faster not only because its production costs are low, but because startups like ReelShort have mastered the art of localization—after all, they first had to export the genre from China. While Sensor Tower says US audiences still represent about 49 percent of the global revenues, half of downloads of short drama apps this year have come from Latin America and Southeast Asia. That explains why ReelShort produced its hit English show The Double Life of My Billionaire Husband in five other languages, and why it has started working with legacy telenovela production companies in Colombia.
Chinese Roots
ReelShort’s parent company, Crazy Maple Studio, was previously majority-controlled by COL Group, one of the largest digital novel publishers in China. The startup now says its founder, Joey Jia, owns the company, though COL Group continues to hold 49 percent of shares. Even as the genre goes global, most of the people making short dramas in the US still appear to be Chinese immigrants or Chinese Americans, largely because they are more familiar with how it works.
Jay, a Los Angeles–based short-drama producer from China, says the industry still looks to China for guidance and inspiration. One of the key lessons it learned from China is the importance of collecting extremely granular user data. Which episode made people stop watching a show? Which one made them sign up for a subscription?
President Donald Trump signed legislation that mandates some Medicaid recipients prove they’re working, volunteering, or completing other qualifying activities at least 80 hours a month to maintain coverage. This applies to 40 states (plus Washington, D.C.) that have expanded Medicaid to a broader pool of low-income adults. Those states will share $200 million to prepare eligibility systems by the end of next year.
KFF Health News’ Renuka Rayasam breaks down what you need to know about Medicaid work requirements.
KFF Health News is a national newsroom that produces in-depth journalism about health issues and is one of the core operating programs at KFF—an independent source of health policy research, polling, and journalism. Learn more about KFF.
The Switch 2 has had some impressive early sales numbers, quickly proving to be one of the biggest console launches of all time, but one of its sales figures is particularly notable. Purchases of the premium-priced Pro Controller have been surprisingly high, with almost one-third of all early Switch 2 purchasers also picking up the $85 accessory.
The statistic was picked up by Circana industry analyst Mat Piscatella, who reported that the Switch 2 Pro Controller saw a 32% attach rate during the Switch 2’s launch month–that is to say, 32% of people buying a Switch 2 also picked up the $85 premium controller. Piscatella also reports that the Switch 2 Pro Controller was June’s best-selling accessory in dollars.
Size:
Want us to remember this setting for all your devices?
Sign up or Sign in now!
Please use a html5 video capable browser to watch videos.
This video has an invalid file format.
Sorry, but you can’t access this content!
Please enter your date of birth to view this video
Game File reports that an estimated 512,000 Pro Controllers were sold in the US in the first month of the Switch 2’s release, which is a huge number considering the luxury controller isn’t necessary for playing the console or any of its launch games, and the original Switch’s Pro Controller is also compatible. It’s also worth noting that the Pro Controller saw a $5 price hike after its announcement, likely due to concerns around Trump’s import tariffs.
Of course, the kind of consumer who is buying a console at launch is likely to be the same kind of consumer who splurges on extra accessories, so the Pro Controller’s adoption rate is unlikely to stay this high for long, but it’s still an impressive sales stat for the brand-new console.
Speaking with IGN, Piscatella gave the caveat that it’s difficult to predict how well a console will do throughout its lifespan from its early sales, as early sales usually just reflect how much supply the company has made available. That’s not to say the Switch 2’s numbers aren’t still impressive, with Piscatella calling the console’s launch month sales a “helluva good start” towards long-lasting success.
Around 10 million people globally live with the life-threatening virus HTLV-1. Yet it remains a poorly understood disease that currently has no preventative treatments and no cure.
But a landmark study co-led by Australian researchers could change this, after finding existing HIV drugs can suppress transmission of the HTLV-1 virus in mice.
The study, published in Cell, could lead to the first treatments to prevent the spread of this virus that is endemic among many First Nations communities around the world, including in Central Australia.
The research by WEHI and the Peter Doherty Institute for Infection and Immunity (Doherty Institute) also identifies a new drug target that could lead to the elimination of HTLV-1 positive cells from those with an established infection, and prevent disease progression.
At a glance
New research co-led by WEHI and the Doherty Institute could lead to the first preventative treatments for HTLV-1, one of the most complex and neglected viruses in the world.
The study found two specific HIV antivirals already on the market can suppress transmission of HTLV-1 in humanized mice and prevent disease, identifying the first prophylactic treatment against HTLV-1.
Secondly, when the HIV antivirals were used in combination with a compound that induces cell death, infected cells were killed – flagging a potential future curative strategy for the disease.
The unprecedented findings could enable these drugs to enter clinical trials preventing establishment of pathogenic levels of HTLV-1.
Human T-cell leukemia virus type 1 (HTLV-1) is a virus that infects the same cell type as HIV – T cells, a type of blood immune cell that helps the body fight off infections.
A small proportion of people infected with HTLV-1 after a long duration of infection develop serious diseases, such as adult T-cell leukemia and spinal cord inflammation.
Co-lead author and WEHI laboratory head Dr Marcel Doerflinger said the promising results of the new study could help find a desperately needed treatment and prevention strategy for one of the most neglected viruses in the world.
“Our study marks the first time any research group has been able to suppress this virus in a living organism,” Dr Doerflinger said.
“As HTLV-1 symptoms can take decades to appear, by the time a person knows they have the infection the immune damage is already in full swing.
“Suppressing the virus at transmission would allow us to stop it before it has the chance to cause irreversible damage to immune function, leading to disease and a premature death.”
In a research effort spanning 10 years, the collaborative team isolated the virus and developed a world-first humanized mouse model for HTLV-1 that enabled them to study how the virus behaves in a living organism with a human-like immune system.
The mice were transplanted with human immune cells that are susceptible to HTLV-1 infections, including with Australia’s genetically novel HTLV-1 strain. International and Australian strains equally caused leukemia and inflammatory lung disease in these human immune system mice.
The mice were then treated with tenofovir and dolutegravir -two antiviral therapies currently approved to silence HIV and prevent AIDS. The team discovered both drugs could also powerfully suppress HTLV-1.
“What’s most exciting is that these antivirals are already in use for millions of HIV patients, meaning there’s a direct path for the clinical translation of our findings,” Dr Doerflinger said.
“We won’t have to start from scratch because we already know these drugs are safe and effective. And now we’ve shown that their use can very likely be extended to HTLV-1.”
In another remarkable finding, the team discovered that human cells containing HTLV-1 could be selectively killed when mice were treated with HIV drugs in combination with another therapy inhibiting a protein (MCL-1) known to help rogue cells stay alive.
The team is now leveraging precision RNA therapies to develop new ways to target MCL-1 and establish combination treatments that can be clinically tested, which they believe could offer a promising curative strategy for HTLV-1.
Crucial insight
The development of the humanised mouse models central to this study at WEHI was spearheaded by first author Dr James Cooney and Professor Marc Pellegrini, study lead author, WEHI Honourary Fellow and Executive Director at Centenary Institute.
Prof Pellegrini said the mouse models were not only critical in identifying potential therapeutic targets, but also allowed researchers to understand how different strains of the HTLV-1 virus can alter disease symptoms and outcomes. This is particularly important for the unique strain that is present in Australia, HTLV-1c.
“It’s long been hypothesized that differences in viral subtype may influence disease outcomes, but a lack of research into HTLV-1 has made it difficult for us to find the evidence needed to support this claim – until now.
“Our study provides critical insights that enable us to better understand the consequences of the distinct molecular make-up of the virus affecting our First Nations communities. This will further help us to investigate ways to create the tools needed to control the spread of this virus subtype.”
The human HTLV-1 samples needed to develop the mouse models were obtained through the front-line clinical work of Associate Professor Lloyd Einsiedel, a Clinician Scientist at the Doherty Institute and Infectious Diseases Physician, who has provided a clinical service to Central Australia for more than a decade and has dedicated his career to putting HTLV-1 on the map.
Advocacy for a neglected disease
Research by the University of Melbourne’s Professor Damian Purcell, Head of Molecular Virology at the Doherty Institute and co-lead author of the study, isolated the virus from First Nations donors and identified significant genetic differences between the HTLV-1c strains from Central Australia compared to the HTLV-1a strains found internationally.
The new findings show that both HTLV-1 strains cause disease in mice, with HTLV-1c showing more aggressive features. The identified drug therapies were found to be equally effective against both strains.
Prof Purcell and Associate Prof Lloyd Einsiedel worked with the National Aboriginal Community Controlled Health Organization (NACCHO) HTLV-1 committee and the Australian Department of Health over many years to advocate for guidance on HTLV-1 from the World Health Organization (WHO) that led to them formally classify the virus as a Threatening Pathogen to Humans in 2021.
This resulted in the development of formal WHO policies to reduce transmission internationally and the development of clinical management guidelines for HTLV-1c in Central Australia under NACCHO leadership.
“Despite Australia’s high burden of HTLV-1, the virus and its associated diseases are still not notifiable in most states and true infection rates in the nation remain unknown,” Prof Purcell said.
“People at risk from HTLV-1 deserve biomedical tools like those that provide game-changing therapeutic and prevention options for other blood-borne persistent viral infections, such as HIV.
“There is a real opportunity to prevent the transmission of HTLV-1 and end the diseases caused by these infections. Our research findings are a major leap forward in this.”
The research team is currently in talks with the companies behind the HIV antivirals used in this study, to see if HTLV-1 patients can be included in their ongoing clinical trials. If successful, this would pave the way for these drugs to become the first approved pre-exposure prophylaxis against HTLV-1 acquisition.
These findings are supported by The Australian Center for HIV and Hepatitis Virology Research, The Phyllis Connor Memorial Trust, Drakensberg Trust and the National Health and Medical Research Council (NHMRC).
Learning legal research and writing can be the most rewarding investment you’ll make as a law student.
Most importantly, you become a better thinker of the law, a better researcher & writer of course, which translates into multiple CV-enhancing and employable skills.
It can help you:
Start publishing in top law journals and enhance your CV
Learn how to write quality legal opinions and charge clients (really well!) for that
Present papers in leading conferences, showcasing your expertise, developing a network and getting internships and even jobs through such opportunities
Start freelancing through platforms like UpWork, LinkedIn
In case any of the above interests you, do join our 2-day Workshop “Paper to Podium: Your Guide to Law Conference Readiness”.
These workshops by Lawctopus Law School, are highly practical, require deep engagement, and are a precursor to our 4-month courses around the same subject.
Lawctopus Law School (LLS) started in 2020, a sister concern of the 14-year old portal ‘Lawctopus’ (started in 2010) by NUJS Kolkata graduates, has taught a wide range of practical skills to over 20,000+ young lawyers and law students.
Our course developers and faculty come from the best of law colleges like NLSIU Bangalore, NUJS Kolkata, Harvard Law School, University of Cambridge, the best of law firms like Khaitan and Co., Trilegal, Luthra & Luthra, Paras Kuhad, etc.
Our faculty are experts who have been there and done that!
Over 3000 students have rated our courses and the average rating is 93.2/100. Our online courses are ‘warm’ and ‘rigorous’ learning experiences!
Our founders are TEDx speakers, BW Legal 30 Under 30, and 40 under 40 winners, and have keynoted at various fora.
LLS has conducted workshops for Manipal Bangalore, PES University Bangalore, Kingston Kolkata, Mar Gregorios Chennai, and our faculty continue to be sought after trainers.
Structure of the 2-Day Online Workshop
DAY 1: Writing an Academic Paper for a Legal Conference
1. Understanding the Basics of a Legal Research Paper
Purpose and structure of a legal paper (Title, Abstract, Introduction, Literature Review, Arguments, Conclusion)
Choosing a researchable, relevant, and contemporary legal issue
Mansi Mankotia has graduated with a B.A.LL.B (Hons.) from H.P. University in 2020, pursued an LL.M specializing in Criminal Law from NLU Shimla, and is now diving deeper into the field with a Ph.D. in Law.
She has cracked the UGC NET exam in 2023, further showcasing her command over legal research and academics. Professionally, Mansi has served as an in-house counsel, gaining hands-on legal experience that she now blends seamlessly into her teaching.
Currently, she is a Senior Learning Manager at Lawctopus Law School, where she is involved in crafting and delivering practical, skill-focused legal courses. She is the faculty for Live Sessions in the Legal Research and Writing Course, andhas been rated an impressive 93.6/100 by our learners.
What is Included in the Registration Fees?
Access to the LIVE workshop
Recordings of the 2 Days [30 days access]
View access to the slide presentation full of precise, practical learning
E-certificates [for those who successfully attend the workshop]
Ability to avail the Bonus Registration Opportunity
Bonus Registration Opportunity
In the last half an hour of both the days of the workshop, you’ll have an opportunity to register into our ‘4-month course’ Mastering Legal Research & Writing, Mooting & Argumentation’ by paying a special scholarship fee reserved for those who attend the workshop LIVE!
Note: All our LIVE courses including this 4-month course come with a 100%, no-questions-asked money back guarantee.
Need help to decide? Feel free to reach out to us on these channels.
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/lifestyle/health/folding-desks-up-to-60-off-on-amazon-improve-posture-ease-back-strain-and-make-work-hours-more-comfortable-101753345550663.html” on this server.
An experimental drug from AstraZeneca succeeded in a late-stage trial in an autoimmune condition called generalized myasthenia gravis, positioning the company to grow a business it inherited when acquiring Alexion Pharmaceuticals five years ago.
The drug, known as gefurulimab, met its main and secondary objectives in a Phase 3 study involving 260 people with the condition, AstraZeneca said Thursday. The company didn’t provide specifics, but said that, when compared to a placebo group, treated study participants experienced a “statistically significant and clinically meaningful improvement” after 26 weeks, as measured by a change in scores on a questionnaire commonly used to assess disease symptoms.
AstraZeneca added that its drug was well-tolerated and showed a safety profile consistent with previous studies of therapies like gefurulimab, which are known as C5 inhibitors. The company will present detailed results at a future medical meeting and share them with global health regulators.
The findings give AstraZeneca the chance to bulk up a rare disease business acquired through the nearly $40 billion purchase of Alexion in 2020. That business is headlined by two products, Soliris and Ultomiris, and has grown steadily, generating nearly $9 billion in sales last year. AstraZeneca sees Alexion’s assets as essential to reaching a goal of $80 billion in annual sales by the end of the decade — and gefurulimab, which originated within Alexion, is one of the drugs that can help.
Generalized myasthenia gravis is a rare and chronic autoimmune condition characterized by a range of symptoms that includes muscle weakness, fatigue, changes in vision and difficulty breathing. The Myasthenia Gravis Foundation of America estimates 37 out of every 100,000 people in the U.S. have the disease, which impedes signals between nerves and muscles.
In an investor presentation last year, AstraZeneca predicted the market opportunity for generalized myasthenia gravis treatments will grow substantially in the future, as more patients switch from generic medications that manage symptoms to newer, branded therapies.
Accordingly, the disease has become a competitive area among drugmakers. Alongside Soliris and Ultomiris, newer medicines from Argenx, UCB and Johnson & Johnson, which work differently, have recently reached market. Companies developing B cell-depleting cell therapies and antibody medicines are advancing potential programs, too.
Like Soliris and Ultomiris, gefurulimab targets a part of the immune system known as the complement system. But unlike those medicines, gefurulimab can be self-administered weekly through an under-the-skin injection, rather than given through an intravenous infusion in a healthcare facility. AstraZeneca has said the drug could represent a way to reach a broader group of patients earlier in their disease.
“A once-weekly, self-administered C5 treatment option would offer patients greater convenience and independence in managing their condition, empowering them to have more control over their therapy,” said study investigator Kelly Gwathmey, an associate professor of neurology and chief of Virginia Commonwealth University’s neuromuscular division, in a statement provided by AstraZeneca.
National rental values saw their lowest second quarter increase since 2020 in the three months to June – up by 1.3%.
Over the past five years, rents have increased by 42.7% nationally, taking the median weekly rental value almost $200 higher to $665 per week. Annualised out, this is equivalent to an additional $10,350 per year, spent on rent.
Pre-tax income directed to rental payments rose from around 26% in June 2020 to just under 33% in December 2024.
Sydney maintained its position as the country’s most expensive rental capital in June, with a median weekly rental value of $796 – followed by Perth ($721) and Brisbane ($687).
The regions continued to deliver stronger rental growth compared to the capitals.
National rental values saw their lowest second quarter increase since 2020 in the three months to June, according to Cotality’s latest Quarterly Rental Review.
After shifting higher through the seasonally busy first quarter (1.7%), the rolling quarterly change in national rental values is once again trending lower, with rents up 1.3% over the three months to June 2025.
A similar easing was also seen in the annual rental trend, with national rents rising 3.4% over the 2024-25 financial year — the lowest yearly increase since the 12 months to February 2021 (3.0%).
At the median level, that is equivalent to a $22 per week or $1,134 per year increase in rents.
The recent moderation in rent growth has occurred despite available rental supply remaining exceptionally low.
Over the four weeks to June 29, Cotality observed around 100,000 rental listings nationally, roughly 23% below the previous five-year average, or around 29,000 fewer listing than we usually see this time of year.
The shortfall in rental listings has seen the national vacancy rate slip to 1.6% in June, only slightly above the record lows seen in early 2024 (1.5%), and less than half the pre-COVID decade average of 3.3%.
The slowdown in rental growth instead continues to be driven by a tempering in demand, with the normalisation of net overseas migration and a rise in average household size helping to dampen rental demand.
Affordability remains challenging
While the moderation in the pace of rental growth is welcome news to many tenants, rents are still increasing, and affordability remains a key challenge for many.
Over the past five years, rents have increased by 42.7% nationally, taking the median weekly rental value almost $200 higher to $665 per week.
Annualised out, this is equivalent to an additional $10,350 per year, spent on rent.
Considering wages, as measured by the ABS wage price index, are up less than half this rate (15.8%) over the five years to March 2025, it’s no wonder household formation trends are skewing larger as a way of spreading out the additional rental cost.
The disproportionate increases in rents and wages have seen the portion of pre-tax income directed to rental payments rise from around 26% in June 2020 to just under 33% in December 2024.
Across the country
With a median weekly rental value just shy of $800 per week, Sydney maintained its position as the country’s most expensive rental capital in June, with a median weekly rental value of $796.
Perth took out a distant second place with the typical dwelling renting for $721 per week, while Brisbane ($687 per week) overtook Canberra ($677 per week) to claim the third-highest median rent.
The significant changes seen across the leader board in recent years, driven by varied rental conditions.
Just under three years ago, Canberra held the title for the country’s most expensive city to rent in, but weaker growth conditions, and a compositional shift towards units, have seen the national capital land firmly in the middle of the pack.
At the other end of the scale, Hobart remains the only capital with a median weekly rental value under the $600 mark, at $581 per week, while Melbourne maintains its position as the second most affordable rental capital, with the typical dwelling renting for $613 per week.
Smaller capitals and regions deliver stronger rental growth
Looking at growth rates across the country, the combined regions continued to deliver stronger rental growth compared to the capitals, up 1.5% over the quarter and 5.3% over the year, with regional rental growth continuing to be supported by higher rates of net internal migration.
By comparison, the combined capitals recorded a softer 1.3% quarterly and 2.7% annual increase.
Across the individual capitals, Darwin led the pace of annual rental growth, with dwelling rents rising 6.2%, followed by Hobart (5.3%), with both markets seeing an uptick in the pace of rental growth relative to this time last year.
This was followed by Perth (4.9%) and Adelaide (4.7%), with the annual change in rents easing from 13.0% and 8.3% respectively.
While down compared to this time last year (7.5%), at 3.8%, Brisbane’s annual increase in rents has accelerated from a recent low of 3.1% over the three months to February.
At the other end of the spectrum, change in rents across Melbourne, Canberra and Sydney eased to 1.2%, 1.6% and 1.9% over the year, with all three cities now recording an annual rental rise below their respective pre-COVID averages.
About Kaitlin Ezzy Kaytlin is a skilled research analyst and key member within Cotality’s (formerly CoreLogic) research team. She specialises in collating large and customised data sets, data visualisation and residential data reports.
www.Corelogic.com.au
Using your house’s electrical wiring to run wired internet connections can be a great idea for getting fast internet without running ugly cables across your floor. However, the speed and performance of your powerline adapters are influenced by factors you can’t see—and there are more than a few powerline adapter myths clouding the conversation.
5
Your House Wiring Matters
Since powerline adapters are completely dependent on your house wiring to carry internet signals, the age and quality of your electrical wiring are the single most important factors determining their performance. Older wiring often uses smaller gauge wires, usually 14 gauge, which is limited to 15 amps compared to modern 12 gauge wiring, which can carry up to 20 amps with lower resistance.
Older wiring is also more susceptible to interference from nearby cables. This introduces unnecessary electrical noise, which can significantly degrade adapter performance.
Hannah Stryker / MakeUseOf
Age also plays a role. A U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission study [PDF] found that homes older than 40 years had disproportionately high electrical system issues, largely due to aging electrical infrastructure and outdated building codes. While modern building codes require better grounding, proper wire spacing, and the use of higher quality materials—factors that improve powerline adapter performance—wiring quality can vary significantly between houses.
4
You Don’t’ Get the Advertised Speed
Just because an adapter is rated for gigabit speeds doesn’t mean you’ll get them when browsing the internet or downloading files. These speeds are theoretical maximums tested under ideal laboratory conditions and represent the data rate of the powerline protocol, rather than the internet speed. The internet speed you get will drop significantly in real-world scenarios.
TP-Link, one of the major powerline adapter manufacturers, openly acknowledges this in its technical documentation. For example, its AV1300 powerline adapter kit claims speeds of up to 1300 Mbps. However, a TP-Link support page explains that the conversion rate on such kits is only about 30 to 35%. This means that even if the powerline speed between two adapters is rated 1,000 Mbps in ideal conditions, your internet speed will be between 300 and 350 Mbps. TP-Link also adds that this rule “basically applies to all Home Plug AV products.”
Related
How to Make Sense of Your Wi-Fi Speed Test
Understanding the various numbers is actually quite useful when you run a Wi-Fi speed test.
It isn’t exactly false advertising, but it can be misleading to customers looking to buy their first powerline adapters. Internet speeds can be challenging to comprehend, and most routers and network devices tend to advertise higher speeds that are only achievable in ideal situations. So while the box says you’ll get gigabit internet, the actual speeds are much slower.
3
Surge Strips Can Hurt Your Connection
Make sure to always plug your powerline adapters directly into the wall. Plugging them into surge protectors, power strips, or extensions can severely hamper their performance.
Image Credit: Jowi Morales
Apart from adding additional length to your connection, surge protectors and filtered power strips filter out electrical noise to protect your devices from power fluctuations. However, this also worsens powerline adapter performance as they use the same frequency ranges for data transmission that get filtered out by these devices.
To be clear, this will not prevent your powerline adapters from functioning, but it will impact data transmission speeds. Powerline adapters have built-in filters designed specifically for their communication protocols, so it’s always best to plug them straight into the wall outlet.
2
Adapters Should Share the Same Breaker
Another small thing to keep in mind is that your powerline adapters should all be on the same breaker, whenever possible. Powerline can work across different breakers, but the performance will vary significantly.
North American homes typically use split-phase electrical systems, which consist of two “legs” or “phases” of power. Each circuit breaker is connected to either line 1 or line 2, and communication between these lines must pass through an electrical panel. In such cases, if you have a pair of powerline adapters across breakers, it can introduce unwanted resistance and interference that degrade performance.
Yadullah Abidi / MakeUseOf
Plugging your adapters into the same circuit provides the most direct electrical path between adapters, minimizing any loss and interference. If plugging on the same circuit isn’t possible due to house layout or outlet unavailability, try and get them connected to breakers on the same phase.
It’s unlikely that you’ll be able to make changes to the wiring to support powerline adapters better later, especially if you’re in a rented property. The difference in performance will vary, but Reddit user wintersdark tested TP-Link’s AV2000 adapters in a “fairly new house” with the following results:
Adapters on the same breaker: 500 Mbps
Adapters on the same leg, different breaker: 250 Mbps
Adapters on different breakers: 90 Mbps
As mentioned earlier, these tests were conducted on AV2000 adapters, which promise speeds of up to 2,000 Mbps (2 Gbps). While these tests are over five years old at the time of writing, they’re still a good indicator of how powerline adapters will work across breakers.
1
Keep Connections Short
Last but not least, it’s important that you keep connection distances between powerline adapters as short as possible. Keep in mind that the distance between two adapters is the length of cable running between outlets that these adapters are plugging into, and that’s much larger than what you see if you were to measure the distance between said outlets.
The electrical wires in your house rarely take the most direct path, going inside walls, avoiding obstacles, and running back and forth between breakers and electrical panels before reaching outlets and switches. So while two outlets can be right next to each other, the cable distance between them can be several feet or even more.
As the distance between two adapters increases, the likelihood of your data transmission being slowed down by interference increases, and the wire’s resistance also increases. This isn’t a linear relationship either, and even small increases in cable length can significantly affect adapter performance.
Powerline adapters can seem like a hassle-free way to get wired internet throughout your house without dealing with Ethernet cables. However, there are a lot of little factors, most of which will be beyond your control, when it comes to how well these adapters perform.
Related
Mesh Wi-Fi Will Solve Your Connectivity Problems, Even in the Biggest Home
Poor Wi-Fi performance? Hard to reach corners? You need mesh Wi-Fi.
Depending on the age of your house and its wiring, running a mesh Wi-Fi or using a Wi-Fi repeater might be better options. You can even use old routers to fix Wi-Fi dead spots around your house to save some money instead of buying a mesh system. However, if you want the best possible speed and stability, running an Ethernet cable directly from your router to your PC remains the best option.
The heated competition of the Hainan (Wenchang) Township Volleyball League has made Hainan “Village VA” a rural sports brand attracting national attention. Kicking off on June 15, this year’s event features 32 teams battling it out in 68 matches, making it larger in scale, longer and more high-profile than previous events, according to the Hainan Daily. A series of cultural and tourism activities such as a thousand-person village banquet, an aerospace bazaar, and intangible cultural heritage performances, have created a new model of “sports + tourism + rural revitalization.”
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-23/Hainan-s-Village-VA-ignites-rural-passion-with-local-banquets-1FeVy6a0nfy/img/cfb0734949ea4d77aed81687359f2b5b/cfb0734949ea4d77aed81687359f2b5b.jpeg'A grand village banquet is held during the Hainan “Village VA” in Chongxing Village, Wenchang, Hainan. /Photo provided to CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-23/Hainan-s-Village-VA-ignites-rural-passion-with-local-banquets-1FeVy6a0nfy/img/cfb0734949ea4d77aed81687359f2b5b/cfb0734949ea4d77aed81687359f2b5b.jpeg'A grand village banquet is held during the Hainan “Village VA” in Chongxing Village, Wenchang, Hainan. /Photo provided to CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-23/Hainan-s-Village-VA-ignites-rural-passion-with-local-banquets-1FeVy6a0nfy/img/cfb0734949ea4d77aed81687359f2b5b/cfb0734949ea4d77aed81687359f2b5b.jpeg'A grand village banquet is held during the Hainan “Village VA” in Chongxing Village, Wenchang, Hainan. /Photo provided to CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-23/Hainan-s-Village-VA-ignites-rural-passion-with-local-banquets-1FeVy6a0nfy/img/cfb0734949ea4d77aed81687359f2b5b/cfb0734949ea4d77aed81687359f2b5b.jpeg'A grand village banquet is held during the Hainan “Village VA” in Chongxing Village, Wenchang, Hainan. /Photo provided to CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-23/Hainan-s-Village-VA-ignites-rural-passion-with-local-banquets-1FeVy6a0nfy/img/cfb0734949ea4d77aed81687359f2b5b/cfb0734949ea4d77aed81687359f2b5b.jpeg'A grand village banquet is held during the Hainan “Village VA” in Chongxing Village, Wenchang, Hainan. /Photo provided to CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-23/Hainan-s-Village-VA-ignites-rural-passion-with-local-banquets-1FeVy6a0nfy/img/cfb0734949ea4d77aed81687359f2b5b/cfb0734949ea4d77aed81687359f2b5b.jpeg'A grand village banquet is held during the Hainan “Village VA” in Chongxing Village, Wenchang, Hainan. /Photo provided to CGTN
“Rural flavor” is the core characteristic that distinguishes Hainan “Village VA” from professional leagues, and a grand village banquet is a direct manifestation of this idea. In Chongxing Village, Wenchang, a lively banquet unfolded after the event opened, reflecting the vibrant spirit of the game with the aromas of authentic local cuisine. The event drew villagers and tourists alike to savor traditional flavors and experience the unique charm of rural food culture.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-23/Hainan-s-Village-VA-ignites-rural-passion-with-local-banquets-1FeVy6a0nfy/img/475e0a6bfc644bc788207d37b4c7c66a/475e0a6bfc644bc788207d37b4c7c66a.jpeg'A spectacular seafood banquet for over 1,000 guests is held during the Hainan “Village VA” in Puqian Town, Wenchang, Hainan. /Photo provided to CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-23/Hainan-s-Village-VA-ignites-rural-passion-with-local-banquets-1FeVy6a0nfy/img/475e0a6bfc644bc788207d37b4c7c66a/475e0a6bfc644bc788207d37b4c7c66a.jpeg'A spectacular seafood banquet for over 1,000 guests is held during the Hainan “Village VA” in Puqian Town, Wenchang, Hainan. /Photo provided to CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-23/Hainan-s-Village-VA-ignites-rural-passion-with-local-banquets-1FeVy6a0nfy/img/475e0a6bfc644bc788207d37b4c7c66a/475e0a6bfc644bc788207d37b4c7c66a.jpeg'A spectacular seafood banquet for over 1,000 guests is held during the Hainan “Village VA” in Puqian Town, Wenchang, Hainan. /Photo provided to CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-23/Hainan-s-Village-VA-ignites-rural-passion-with-local-banquets-1FeVy6a0nfy/img/475e0a6bfc644bc788207d37b4c7c66a/475e0a6bfc644bc788207d37b4c7c66a.jpeg'A spectacular seafood banquet for over 1,000 guests is held during the Hainan “Village VA” in Puqian Town, Wenchang, Hainan. /Photo provided to CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-23/Hainan-s-Village-VA-ignites-rural-passion-with-local-banquets-1FeVy6a0nfy/img/475e0a6bfc644bc788207d37b4c7c66a/475e0a6bfc644bc788207d37b4c7c66a.jpeg'A spectacular seafood banquet for over 1,000 guests is held during the Hainan “Village VA” in Puqian Town, Wenchang, Hainan. /Photo provided to CGTN
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-23/Hainan-s-Village-VA-ignites-rural-passion-with-local-banquets-1FeVy6a0nfy/img/475e0a6bfc644bc788207d37b4c7c66a/475e0a6bfc644bc788207d37b4c7c66a.jpeg'A spectacular seafood banquet for over 1,000 guests is held during the Hainan “Village VA” in Puqian Town, Wenchang, Hainan. /Photo provided to CGTN
And in Puqian Town, the lively “Village VA” festivities were matched with a spectacular seafood banquet for over 1,000 guests. Locals, fans, and tourists came together to enjoy the flavors of coastal Hainan in a vibrant celebration of sport and community spirit.
It’s a summery, late-afternoon Saturday on the backyard lawn of LA Plaza de Cultura y Artes, with the kind of warmth and variety of sounds, sights and smells that have defined weekends in many Los Angeles neighborhoods for generations. This one happens to be for a KCRW Summer Nights event headlined by East L.A. soul revivalists the Altons, but the blend of demographics, cultures and backgrounds on display gives it an authentically local feel that could be mistaken for an informal block party in any decade — except perhaps for the screen printer creating band merch and a design of Snoopy humping an ice cube with an expletive about Immigration and Customs Enforcement.
That same blend of history and cultures that has brought Los Angeles together across generations is also what’s given the Altons their signature sound and made them one of the city’s latest breakout stars. When they go on tour and bring their unique blend of soulful “oldies,” modern rock and bilingual R&B around the world, they aren’t just sharing their music but also their culture.
“On any given weekend, you can have some party down the street playing cumbia or music that your parents grew up on, their next door neighbor might have a punk rock show, and another guy down the street that’s just listening to oldies and Art Laboe,” vocalist and guitarist Bryan Ponce explains about the roots of the Altons’ diverse sound stemming from their collective Los Angeles childhoods. “We all grew up on all of this music that we’d hear in our neighborhoods, so all of our influences just came together and came out in our music.”
The Altons members Adriana Flores, Caitlin Moss, Bryan Ponce and Joseph Quinones perform at LA Plaza de Cultura y Artes on June 28.
(Brian Feinzimer / For The Times)
For a band that started with modest expectations nearly a decade ago, the Altons now find themselves heading out on international tours and playing to thousands of people at a time — as they will Saturday when they rock the Oldies 2 Souldies show with Los Lonely Boys at the Greek Theatre. And while their rise has been more of a gradual incline than anything particularly stratospheric, they’ve carved their own path without compromise. They’re willing to fuse genres, languages, tempos and sounds as they see fit and based on what they feel will work best for the songs and messages they’re wanting to deliver instead of catering to what may be popular in the moment, a choice that’s made them the face of the “oldies revival” now that millennials and Gen Z are falling back in love with tunes from their grandparents’ day.
“It’s incredible to play a show where a grandmother’s there with her daughter and grandkids, and just have multiple generations of people come together,” vocalist Adriana Flores says. “There’s not a lot of shows that I would even take my dad to, so I think it makes the music even more special and I’d like to be one of the bands shedding the light on what’s been happening in L.A. We’ve been doing it for years and just sharing the types of music we like — which is the retro sound of soul mixed with other elements. We like to show people what’s been happening in L.A. that’s not just Hollywood.”
The Altons’ Adriana Flores and Bryan Ponce perform at LA Plaza de Cultura y Artes in late June.
(Brian Feinzimer / For The Times)
That desire to show the “real” L.A. that they know and love is a driving force for the Altons, particularly as they go further and further from home. All of them — Flores and Ponce along with Joseph Quinones on guitar/backup vocals, Chris Manjarrez on bass, Christian “Elyzr” Meraz on keyboards and drummer Caitlin Moss — are proud to represent their East L.A. roots for those who only see the California that gets presented on television. The group eagerly reminisces about a fan they met at a show in France who had never set foot in California but loved the culture so much that he dressed the part of a classic cholo. “He looked like he could have been related to me or went to school with me,” Ponce says with a laugh. “He was bald, he had the Locs on, the Pendleton on and he was screaming our neighborhoods.” They recall the times they’ve felt like cultural ambassadors bringing their hometown heritage to cities like Boston.
But the self-placed weight of representing and sharing their lifelong culture isn’t always all fun and games. Just a matter of weeks before they were walking through the halls of LA Plaza’s museum to see their brand-new exhibition on the importance of East L.A. musicians, they were on tour in the U.K. feeling helpless as they watched the ICE raids and protests flood the city.
Bryan Ponce and Adriana Flores onstage at LA Plaza de Cultura y Artes.
(Brian Feinzimer / For The Times)
“You couldn’t really grasp what was going on,” Ponce says. “I would watch videos and see stuff online, but I didn’t really see it until we came home for a couple of days before we left again. [Manjarrez] and I live close to each other, and we started seeing videos of all these places and stores and people in our community. It was just devastating to have to leave again and see that they’re getting even closer to your house and seeing it happening on your street. You’re trying to go and play music to entertain people, but you’re also trying to find a balance. It’s like ‘Are we going to speak on what’s going on?’ Because some people thought that L.A. was burning down, and that’s not really the case.”
“Watching the community go through something so heartbreaking while being away was really difficult,” Flores adds. “It was really tough seeing our community being targeted, but I’d like to believe that music and being creative and spreading joy is a form of resistance. I hope that people can come to our shows and escape. Even though this is way bigger than us, we have to use our platform to be vocal about what’s going on. It’s scary times, but another scary time was the ‘60s when the whole civil rights movement was happening, and some of the best music came out of that because people were finding that outlet and creating.”
President Trump announced that the United States’ stance on intellectual property and AI would be a “commonsense application” that does not force AI companies to pay for each piece of copyrighted material used in training frontier models. “You can’t be expected to have a successful AI program when every single article, book, or anything else that you’ve read or studied, you’re supposed to pay for,” Trump said. “We appreciate that, but just can’t do it— because it’s not doable.”
The president also doubled down on his anti-woke rhetoric in his speech. “We are getting rid of woke,” he said on Wednesday. “The American people do not want woke Marxist lunacy in the AI models.”
The remarks came during a keynote speech at a summit hosted by the All-In podcast and the Hill & Valley Forum. White House AI and crypto czar David Sacks, one of the podcast’s cohosts, has been instrumental in shaping the Trump administration’s approach to artificial intelligence policy.
Since the AI boom began in 2022, tech companies have been locked in a series of major legal battles with publishers, record labels, media companies, individual artists, and other rights holders over the legality of training their AI tools on copyrighted material without permission or compensation. Earlier this week, US senators Josh Hawley and Richard Blumenthal introduced a bill that seeks to bar AI companies from training on copyrighted works without permission; Trump’s remarks suggest the White House does not support this approach.
Those who want AI companies to be able to train on copyrighted works without licensing the material are celebrating Trump’s remarks. “He’s absolutely right,” says Adam Eisgrau, a senior director at the Chamber of Progress. “Common sense dictates that requiring gen-AI developers to license the copyrighted works they’re trained on is both not doable and makes little sense, because those works are not plagiarized. They’re used, as a person would, to learn and produce amazing technology that two federal courts have already said is ‘spectacularly transformative.’”
In a wide-ranging AI Action Plan released this morning, the Trump administration outlined over 90 policy recommendations intended to ensure that the United States wins what Sacks calls the “AI race” against China.
The 28-page report stresses that “AI is far too important to smother in bureaucracy at this early stage” and recommends policies meant to loosen regulations and roll back Biden-era guardrails, including a review of Federal Trade Commission investigations “to ensure that they do not advance theories of liability that unduly burden AI innovation.” It also recommends that federal funding be withheld from states that enact overly “burdensome” AI legislation. Curbing state efforts to regulate AI has been one of Sacks’ pet projects. This recommendation comes after an attempt to pass a federal law requiring a decade-long “AI moratorium” on state legislation failed late last month.
In addition to issuing recommendations to loosen regulations, the AI Action Plan also doubles down on the Trump administration’s disdain for “woke” AI. It recommends that federal procurement guidelines be updated so that only AI companies that “ensure that their systems are objective and free from top-down ideological bias” are granted government contracts.
Notably, the AI Action Plan does not mention intellectual property. Trump’s remarks this evening offer unprecedented insight into the White House’s preferred approach to regulating AI and copyright.
This is a developing story. Please check back for updates.
As part of its San Diego Comic-Con showcase, Lego has unveiled the next large-scale Batman building set for adults and collectors. Batman Arkham Asylum is a massive 2,953-piece Lego interpretation of the psychiatric hospital in Gotham City where many of the Caped Crusader’s longtime foes are often confined (before escaping again). This highly detailed recreation of Arkham Asylum comes with 16 minifigures and has a modular design that Lego says can double as a 24-day buildable Advent Calendar.
Lego DC Batman Arkham Asylum launches September 9 and is available to preorder for $300 exclusively at the Lego Store.
$300 | Releases September 9
Though Lego DC Arkham Asylum isn’t officially categorized as an Advent Calendar, the build is seemingly a great fit for one-piece-per-day setup of the popular holiday countdown calendars. You can build one chunk of the building each day for 24 days. Considering it comes with sprawling collection of 16 Batman heroes and villains as minifigures, you’ll get a new character most days, too.
Here’s the full list of minifigures included with Lego DC Batman Arkham Asylum:
Batman
Robin
Batwoman
Catwoman
Batwing
The Joker
Harley Quinn
The Riddler
The Penguin
Bane
Mr. Freeze
Poison Ivy
Scarecrow
Killer Croc
Security Guard (x2)
Lego’s actual Advent Calendars are substantially smaller than this–the 2025 editions retail for $45 and release September 1–so this would be quite the lavish choice for your countdown this year.
You can, of course, completely ignore the Advent Calendar approach and build the entire set in one weekend. The full three-story asylum is 10.23 x 9.84 x 12.59 inches. If that sounds a bit small based on the piece count, it’s because this is more densely packed with a huge emphasis on the rooms inside. Plus, unlike some Lego sets that don’t have exterior walls around the sides and back, Arkham Asylum is a complete structure.
After finishing the build, you can separate the three floors to show off and make changes to the furnished rooms and holding cells. Sections on each floor are designed to be easily removable, too. Prison cell doors can swing open with the press of a button, and you can let the villains decorate their cells with 65 stickers pulled from Batman lore.
All of the minifigures come wit transparent stands that attach to the building or front yard. The stands are designed to create active poses, as if you paused a movie.
The build also comes with an Arkham Asylum inmate transport van. In the promotional images, the van is operated by Harley Quinn, who is clearly on the verge of successfully breaking Joker out of the hospital.
The new Arkham Asylum display model joins the existing catalog of cool Lego sets featuring the Caped Crusader, Gotham’s biggest villains, many different variations of the Batmobile, and other Gotham City landmarks.
Arkham Asylum isn’t the only Batman Lego set launching soon. You can bide the time until September by picking up the Batman Forever Batmobile. The 909-piece recreation of the unique design from the 1995 film launches August 1 and costs $100. It’s one of many Batman Lego sets that focus on the Batmobile or one of his other stylish rides like the Bat-Pod from The Dark Knight Trilogy. The Bat-Pod is available in a pretty awesome set with a Batman Construction Figure for $48 (was $65) at Walmart. Meanwhile, the retired Lego Technic: Batcycle from The Batman (2022) is only available at Walmart and on sale for $40 (was $50).
The Arkham Asylum set will be one of the most elaborate Batman Lego sets in the current lineup. It doesn’t have the most pieces, though. That honor goes to Batman: The Animated Series Gotham City, a large piece of 3D wall art featuring the skyline. It retails for the same $300 price as Arkham Asylum, but it has 4,210 pieces. The Arkham Asylum build will likely be more dynamic, though, as these 3D art pieces have high piece counts partly because of all of the tiny bricks that create the backdrops.
Moving beyond Lego, Batman fans should also check out the upcoming Amazon-exclusive Steelbook Library Edition of The Dark Knight Trilogy. It comes with four steelbook cases, a bunch of collectibles, and metal case to store and display all of it. Take a look at our preorder guide for more details.
A new genetic analysis using data from over five million people has provided a clearer understanding of the risk of going on to live with obesity. New research led by the Universities of Copenhagen and Bristol shows analyzing genes at a young age may support early strategies to prevent obesity developing later in life.
The World Obesity Federation expects more than half the global population to become overweight or obese by 2035. However, treatment strategies such as lifestyle change, surgery and medications are not universally available or effective.
By drawing on genetic data from over five million people, an international team of researchers, have created a measure called a polygenic risk score (PGS) that is reliably associated with adulthood obesity and shows consistent and indicative patterns in early childhood. The findings could help to identify children and adolescents at higher genetic risk of developing obesity in later life, who could benefit from targeted preventative strategies, such as lifestyle interventions, at a younger age.
“What makes the score so powerful is the consistency of associations between the genetic score and body mass index before the age of five and through to adulthood – timing that starts well before other risk factors start to shape their weight later in childhood. Intervening at this point could theoretically make a huge impact,” said Assistant Professor Roelof Smit at the University of Copenhagen and lead author of the research published in the journal Nature Medicine.
Twice as effective at predicting obesity as the next best method
The subtle variations in people’s genomes can have a real impact on health when acting together. Thousands of genetic variants have been identified that increase the risk of obesity, for example, variants that act in the brain and influence appetite. A PGS is like a calculator that combines the effects of the different risk variants that a person carries and provides an overall score. The PGS was able to explain almost a fifth (17%) of a person’s variation in body mass index – much higher than in previous studies.
To create these PGS, the scientists drew on the genetic data of more than five million people – the largest and most diverse genetic dataset ever – including genetic data from the Genetic Investigation of ANthropometric Traits (GIANT) consortium and consumer DNA testing firm, 23andMe. The researchers then tested whether their new PGS was associated with obesity using datasets of the physical and genetic characteristics of more than 500,000 people, including BMI data tracked over time from the Children of the 90s study. They found that their new PGS was twice as effective as the previous best method at predicting a person’s risk of developing obesity.
Dr Kaitlin Wade, Associate Professor in Epidemiology at the University of Bristol and second author on this paper said: “Obesity is a major public health issue, with many factors contributing to its development, including genetics, environment, lifestyle and behaviour. These factors likely vary across a person’s life, and we believe that some of these originate in childhood.
“We were delighted to contribute data from the Children of the 90s study to this exceptional and insightful research into the genetic architecture of obesity. We hope this work will contribute to detecting individuals at high risk of developing obesity at an earlier age, which could have a vast clinical and public health impact in the future.”
Genetics is not destiny
The research team also investigated the relationship between a person’s genetic risk of obesity and the impact of lifestyle weight loss interventions, such as diet and exercise. They discovered that people with a higher genetic risk of obesity were more responsive to interventions but also regained weight more quickly when the interventions ended.
Despite drawing on the genomes of a wider population, the new PGS has its limitations. For example, it was far better at predicting obesity in people with European-like ancestry than in people with African ancestry. This flags the need for work like this in more representative groups.
HPCL Rajasthan Refinery Ltd. (HRRL) was incorporated on 18th September, 2013, as a Joint Venture between Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (HPCL) and Government of Rajasthan (GOR) with an equity participation of 74% and 26% respectively.
Interested candidates can apply online via the link given at the end of the post.
Rs. 50,000 – Rs. 1,60,000.
Disclaimer: Charging money from students for internships or from job applicants is unethical and can result in blacklisting. We strongly discourage requesting any kind of payment from interns, including processing fees or charges for certificates. If you have any concerns, please contact us at [email protected]
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/lifestyle/health/holding-your-urine-for-too-long-urologist-shares-5-ways-it-can-harm-your-body-101753275841086.html” on this server.
Health and Human Services Secretary Robert F. Kennedy Jr. on Wednesday endorsed a federal advisory committee’s recommendation to remove a contested preservative from the few influenza vaccines that currently contain it.
Advisers to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention who Kennedy hand-picked earlier this year voted last month to remove thimerosal from flu shots, elevating unproven theories the preservative causes developmental harm in children.
In a statement, HHS said Kennedy’s action fulfills “a commitment to restore trust with Americans by removing risk while sustaining access to vaccines.”
Typically, the CDC director signs off on recommendations from the Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices, or ACIP. The role remains unfilled, however, passing the responsibility to Kennedy.
The move will affect several multi-dose vaccines that are currently marketed in the U.S., including Sanofi’s Fluzone and shots from CSL Seqirus. Preservatives are used in multi-dose vials to prevent bacterial contamination. About 5% of flu shots administered in the U.S. involve these preparations.
HHS said vaccine manufacturers confirmed they have the capacity to replace the multi-dose vials.
Thimerosal was introduced as a preservative in the 1930s. It contains mercury, but is metabolized into a form, called ethymercury, that’s distinct from the methymercury form found in some fish and considered an environmental toxin.
The preservative has for years been targeted by the anti-vaccine movement. In 1999, medical groups and the CDC requested vaccine manufacturers remove thimerosal from their shots as a precautionary measure. It was removed from all routine childhood vaccines in 2001.
Despite evidencethimerosal is safe at small levels, the ingredient has remained under fire. During the ACIP meeting in June, Lyn Redwood, president emeritus of the anti-vaccine group Children’s Health Defense, gave a presentation that rehashed animal and human cell studies on thimerosal. Initially, it had also referenced a study that does not exist, but the citation was later removed.
The committee recommended thimerosal-free shots for children, pregnant women and adults, in a series of 5-1 votes. The committee also unanimously voted to recommend annual flu shots in everyone aged 6 months and older.
Kennedy has not signed off on the annual flu recommendation, however. HHS said other recommendations made by the committee in June are “currently under review.”
When a dog is diagnosed with Intervertebral Disc Disease (IVDD), it can be stressful for everyone involved. Stage 5 IVDD is the most severe form of this condition. Understanding what this stage means and what options are available can help you make the best decisions for your dog’s comfort and quality of life.
What is stage 5 IVDD in dogs?
Intervertebral Disc Disease happens when the discs between a dog’s spinal bones bulge or burst, pressing on the spinal cord. This can cause pain, nerve damage, or paralysis. Veterinarians use a grading scale from 1 to 5 to describe how bad the damage is. Stage 5 means the dog has lost the ability to feel deep pain in the affected limbs. This is the most serious level and requires fast action.
What causes stage 5 IVDD in dogs?
Stage 5 IVDD usually happens when a disc herniation is sudden and severe. This is common in breeds with long backs like Dachshunds, Corgis, and Basset Hounds. Sudden jumping, falling, or rough play can cause a disc to rupture fully. Genetics, age, and weight also play a role. Dogs with weaker back muscles or poor conditioning may be at higher risk.
What are the signs and symptoms of stage 5 IVDD?
Dogs with stage 5 IVDD often show clear and serious signs. These include:
Sudden paralysis in back legs
No feeling when you pinch their toes
Inability to urinate or control bowels
Weak or floppy tail
Crying or signs of severe back pain before paralysis sets in
It is very important to get to a vet right away if you see these signs. The sooner a dog gets help, the better the chance of some recovery.
How is stage 5 IVDD diagnosed?
A vet will start with a physical exam and test your dog’s reflexes and pain response. If your dog does not feel deep pain in the affected area, the vet may confirm stage 5 IVDD.
To plan treatment, your vet may order advanced imaging like an MRI or CT scan. These scans show exactly where the disc is pressing on the spinal cord and how severe the damage is.
What treatment options are available for stage 5 IVDD?
Stage 5 IVDD almost always needs surgery if the dog is a good candidate. The goal of surgery is to remove the disc material pressing on the spinal cord.
Surgery for stage 5 IVDD
The most common surgery is called a hemilaminectomy. The surgeon removes part of the bone to reach and remove the damaged disc material. This relieves pressure on the spinal cord.
Time is very important. Studies show that surgery within 24 to 48 hours gives the best chance for a dog to regain feeling and movement. The longer a dog stays without deep pain, the less likely nerves will heal.
Non-surgical care for stage 5 IVDD
If a dog is not a good surgery candidate because of age, health, or cost, some families choose conservative care. This includes strict rest in a crate, pain medication, and physical therapy.
While non-surgical care can help manage pain, the chance of a dog regaining deep pain feeling without surgery is very low at this stage.
What is recovery like for dogs with stage 5 IVDD?
Recovery depends on many factors, including how fast surgery was done and how much damage there was.
1. Immediate aftercare
After surgery, most dogs stay at the vet hospital for a few days. They get pain control, bladder care, and help standing.
Once home, your dog may need to be confined to a crate or pen for several weeks. Short, gentle potty breaks are allowed, but no running, stairs, or jumping.
2. Physical therapy
Rehabilitation is a big part of recovery. Gentle range-of-motion exercises, hydrotherapy, and laser therapy can help muscles stay strong and nerves heal.
3. Using a dog wheelchair
Some dogs do not regain full use of their back legs. For these dogs, a dog wheelchair can bring back freedom and comfort.
Walkin’ Pets wheelchairs help dogs stand, move around, and play safely even if they have back leg paralysis. Many families find that wheelchairs keep their dog active and happy while preventing sores or muscle wasting from dragging their legs.
4. Bladder and bowel management
Many dogs with stage 5 IVDD lose control of their bladder and bowels. Your vet can teach you how to express your dog’s bladder. Keeping a clean bed area and using diapers can help with hygiene.
How long does it take for dogs with stage 5 IVDD to recover?
Every dog is different. Some dogs show improvement within weeks, while others may take months. About half of dogs who get surgery within 24 hours can regain deep pain feeling and walk again. Dogs who do not regain feeling will likely need a wheelchair long-term.
Patience is key. Nerves heal slowly. Your dog’s progress may be small at first. Celebrate each gain and keep up with rehab exercises.
Can dogs with stage 5 IVDD live happy lives?
Many dogs with stage 5 IVDD live full, joyful lives, even if they never walk again on their own. With love, patience, and the right support tools like dog wheelchairs, ramps, or harnesses, these dogs can stay active and connected to family life.
A wheelchair can help your dog explore the yard, go for walks, and play with other dogs. This keeps their mind and heart strong.
Final thoughts on stage 5 intervertebral disc disease
Stage 5 IVDD is serious but not the end for your dog’s happiness. Fast action, good vet care, and support at home make a big difference. If your dog cannot walk again, tools like an adjustable canine wheelchair from Walkin’ Pets can bring freedom back to daily life.
Always speak with your vet about the best choices for your dog’s comfort. Many families find that dogs adapt to life on wheels better than they ever imagined.
No matter what happens, your dog needs your love and care most of all. With the right help, dogs with stage 5 IVDD can keep moving forward with wagging tails and bright eyes.
Warren Buffett’s investing track record is nearly impeccable.
Over his lifetime, Buffett has built Berkshire Hathaway into one of the biggest companies in American history, amassed a personal fortune of over $160 billion, and earned acclaim as one of the world’s foremost philanthropists.
But in a 80-year career, it’s no surprise that even Buffett has made the odd blunder – and there’s one that he claims has ultimately costed him an estimated $200 billion!
To give you some inspiration for this new decade, this week we’ve be running a series of 5 infographics highlighting Warren Buffett’s successes and failures so we can learn some lessons from them.
The Warren Buffett Series
Part 1 -The Remarkable Early Years of Warren Buffett was published 3 days ago.
Part 2: Inside Buffett’s Brain was published 2 days ago.
Part 3: The Warren Buffett Empire – was published yesterday. Now…
Part 4: Buffett’s Biggest Wins and Fails
Today’s infographic comes with the courtesy of Visual Capitalist and highlights Buffett’s investing strokes of genius, as well as a few decisions he would take back.
Part 5 of the Warren Buffett Series will be published tomorrow – watch out for it – if you don’t already subscribe to this daily Property Update newsletter please do so by clicking here.
Also…don’t forget to check out:
Part 1 -The Remarkable Early Years of Warren Buffett
Part 2: Inside Buffett’s Brain
Part 3: The Warren Buffett Empire
How did Buffett go from local paperboy to the world’s most iconic investor?
Here are the backstories behind five of Warren’s biggest acts of genius.
These are the events and decisions that would propel his name into investing folklore for centuries to come.
Buffett’s 5 Biggest Wins
From making shrewd value investing calls to taking advantage of misfortune in the salad oil market, here are some of the stories that are Buffett classics:
1. GEICO (1951)
At 20 years old, Buffett was attending Columbia Business School, and was a student of Benjamin Graham’s.
When young Buffett learned that Graham was on the board of the Government Employees Insurance Company (GEICO), he immediately took a train to Washington, D.C. to visit the company’s headquarters.
On a Saturday, Buffett banged on the door of the building until a janitor let him in, and Buffett met Lorimer Davidson – the future CEO of GEICO. Ultimately, Davidson spent four hours talking to this “highly unusual young man”.
He answered my questions, taught me the insurance business and explained to me the competitive advantage that GEICO had. That afternoon changed my life.
– Warren Buffett
By Monday, Buffett was “more excited about GEICO than any other stock in [his] life” and started buying it on the open market.
He put 65% of his small fortune of $20,000 into GEICO, and the money he earned from the deal would provide a solid foundation for Buffett’s future fortune.
Although Buffett sold GEICO after locking in solid gains, the stock would rise as much as 100x over time.
Buffett bought his favourite stock again a few years later, loaded up further during the 1970s, and eventually bought the whole company in the 1990s.
2. Sanborn Maps (1960)
This early deal may not be Buffett’s biggest – but it’s the clearest case of Benjamin Graham’s influence on his style.
Sanborn Maps had a lucrative business around making city maps for insurers, but eventually, its mapping business started dying – and the falling stock price reflected this trend.
Buffett, after diving deep into the company’s financials, realized that Sanborn had a large investment portfolio that was built up over the company’s stronger years.
Sanborn’s stock was worth $45 per share, but the value of the company’s investments tallied to $65 per share.
In other words, these investments held by the company were alone worth more than the stock – and that didn’t include the actual value of the map business itself!
Buffett accumulated the stock in 1958 and 1959, eventually putting 35% of his partnership assets in it.
Then, he became a director, and convinced other shareholders to use the investment portfolio to buy out stockholders. He walked away with a 50% profit.
3. The Salad Oil Swindle (1963)
For a value investor like Buffett, every mishap is a potential opportunity.
And in 1963, a con artist named Anthony “Tino” De Angelis inadvertently set Buffett up for a massive home run.
After De Angelis attempted to corner the soybean oil market using false inventories and loans, the market subsequently collapsed.
American Express – the world’s largest credit card company at the time – got caught up in the disaster, and its stock price halved as investors thought the company would fail.
Although everyone else panicked, Buffett knew the scandal wouldn’t affect the overall value of the business.
He was right – and bought 5% of American Express for $20 million. By 1973, Buffett’s investment increased ten times in value.
4. Capital Cities / ABC (1985)
In the 1980s, corporate raiders and takeover madness reigned supreme.
The massive TV network ABC found itself vulnerable, and sold itself to a company that promised to keep its legacy intact.
Capital Cities, a relative unknown and a fraction of the size had somehow managed to buy ABC.
The CEO of Cap Cities, Tom Murphy – one of Buffett’s favourite managers in the world – gave Warren a call:
Pal, you’re not going to believe this. I’ve just bought ABC. You’ve got to come and tell me how I’m going to pay for it.
– Tom Murphy, Capital Cities CEO
Berkshire dropped $500 million to finance the deal.
This turned Buffett into Murphy’s much-needed “900-lb gorilla” – a loyal shareholder who would hold onto shares regardless of price, as Murphy figured out how to turn the company around.
It turned out to be a fantastic gamble for Buffett, as Capital Cities/ABC sold to Disney for $19 billion in 1995.
5. Freddie Mac (1988)
Buffett started loading up on shares of Freddie Mac in 1988 for $4 per share.
By 2000, Buffett noticed the company was taking unnecessary risks to deliver double-digit growth.
This risk, and its short-term focus, turned Buffett off the company.
As a result, at a share price close to $70, he sold virtually all of his holdings, enjoying a return of more than 1,500%.
I figure if you see just one cockroach, there’s probably a lot.
– Warren Buffett
Later on, Freddie Mac’s business would collapse in the housing crisis, only to be taken over by the U.S. federal government. Today, its stock sells for a mere $1.50 per share.
Buffett’s Blunders
Over the course of 75 years, it’s not surprising that even Buffett has made some serious mistakes. Here are his costliest ones:
1. Berkshire Hathaway (1962)
When Buffett first invested in Berkshire Hathaway, it was a fledgling textile company.
Buffett eventually tried to pull out, but the company changed the terms of the deal at the last minute.
Buffett was spiteful and loaded up with enough stock to fire the CEO who deceived him.
The textiles business was terrible and sucked up capital – and Berkshire unintentionally would become Buffett’s holding company for other deals.
This mistake, he estimates, cost him an estimated $200 billion.
2. Dexter Shoes (1993)
Dexter Shoe Co. had a long, profitable history, an enduring franchise, and superb management.
In other words, it was the exact kind of company Buffett liked.
Buffett dropped $433 million in 1993 to buy the company, but the company’s competitive advantage soon waned.
To make matters worse, Warren Buffett financed the deal with Berkshire’s own stock, compounding the mistake hugely.
It ended up costing the company $3.5 billion.
To date, Dexter is the worst deal that I’ve made. But I’ll make more mistakes in the future – you can bet on that.
– Warren Buffett
Later on, Buffett would say that this deal deserved a spot in the Guinness Book of World Records as a top financial disaster.
3. Amazon.com (2000s)
Buffett says not buying Amazon was one of his biggest mistakes.
I did not think [founder Jeff Bezos] could succeed on the scale he has. [I] underestimated the brilliance of the execution.
– Warren Buffett
Given that Amazon has shot up in value to become one of the most valuable companies in the world, and that Jeff Bezos is by now the far richest person globally, it’s fair to say this whiff continues to haunt Buffett to this day.
Part 5 of the Warren Buffett Series will be published tomorrow – watch out for it – if you don’t already subscribe to this daily Property Update newsletter please do so by clicking here.
About Michael Yardney Michael is the founder of Metropole Property Strategists who help their clients grow, protect and pass on their wealth through independent, unbiased property advice and advocacy. He’s once again been voted Australia’s leading property investment adviser and one of Australia’s 50 most influential Thought Leaders. His opinions are regularly featured in the media.
After recently being in the market for a used iPhone, I came across several devices with deal-breaking defects that aren’t easy to catch at first glance. It’s more important than ever to know what to look for when buying a pre-owned iPhone.
5
Check the Battery Health Using a Proper Diagnostics App
Before buying a used iPhone, the first point you should check is the battery health, since the battery is usually the fastest part to degrade in any phone.
In case you’re not familiar with battery health, it refers to the maximum charge a battery can hold compared to when it was new. It’s shown as a percentage, and over time, this number drops as the battery undergoes charge cycles. For example: at 90% battery health, charging your battery to 100% will provide as much power as charging it to 90% did when it was brand-new.
Raghav Sethi/MakeUseOf
If you’re buying an iPhone from someone you trust, you can quickly check the battery health in the Settings app. A reading above 80% usually means you’ll get decent battery life (Apple says 80% health is when you should replace your battery).
However, if you’re purchasing the phone from a refurbished retailer or third-party seller, be cautious. Some sellers spoof the battery health percentage shown in the Settings app, so while it may show 100% health, the actual number could be much lower.
To be safe, use a third-party diagnostics tool like coconutBattery (macOS) or 3uTools (Windows/macOS). After installing the app on your computer, connect the iPhone using a cable and tap Trust on the phone when prompted. The app will then generate a detailed report showing the actual battery health, including the charge cycle count and real battery capacity.
4
Look for Signs of a Non-Genuine Screen
Another important factor to check is whether the iPhone’s screen has been replaced with a non-genuine one. Since a lot of phones sold to refurbishers arrive with broken displays, the screen is one of the most commonly replaced parts, and it’s often swapped out with lower-quality aftermarket versions.
One simple trick is to place the phone on a wireless charger and unlock it. If you notice ghost touches or the phone randomly opening apps on its own, there’s a good chance it’s using a fake screen. Aftermarket displays often don’t work well with wireless charging.
Dreamchild/MakeUseOf
Also, pay close attention to the bezels around the screen. On a genuine iPhone, the borders are always evenly sized on all sides. If you notice that one edge (especially the bottom bezel) looks noticeably thicker or uneven compared to the rest, there’s a good chance the screen has been replaced with a non-original display.
On an iPhone 12 or newer, you should also make sure it has an OLED screen. Some fake replacements use cheaper LCD panels instead. To check, turn on dark mode on the iPhone and open the Settings app. If the background appears dark gray instead of pitch-black, it’s probably an inferior LCD screen and not the original OLED panel.
3
Check All the Speakers And Microphones
It’s also worth knowing that your iPhone has multiple speakers and microphones. Just because you’re hearing sound or your voice is being picked up doesn’t always mean everything is working properly.
There are two speakers on an iPhone: one at the bottom near the charging port, and another at the top near the front camera. To test them, play some audio and hold the phone to your ear, one speaker at a time. If you can clearly hear sound coming from both spots, both speakers work fine.
Zarif Ali / MakeUseOf
iPhones also have several microphones placed around the device, including the top, bottom, and back. To check if they’re all working, open the Voice Memos app and start a recording. Speak into the phone from different directions, then play it back to see if your voice is being clearly picked up, no matter where you’re speaking from.
2
Check if Face ID Is Working
You should also make sure that Face ID is working properly. This often stops functioning if the TrueDepth camera has been replaced, or if the phone has gone through a poor-quality screen replacement that damaged internal components. While you’ll usually see a warning on the home screen saying that Face ID has been disabled when you first turn on the phone, it’s still a good idea to double-check.
Raghav Sethi/MakeUseOf
To test it, set up Face ID anew by opening the Settings app and going to Face ID & Passcode > Set Up Face ID. Follow the on-screen instructions to position your face in front of the camera and slowly move your head in a circle. Once the setup is complete, lock the phone and try unlocking it with Face ID to confirm that everything is working as expected.
1
Confirm Activation Lock Isn’t Enabled on the iPhone
If you’re buying a refurbished iPhone online and the seller has only shared pictures of the phone showing the setup screen, that’s a major red flag. In many cases, these could be stolen devices that still have Activation Lock enabled.
Activation Lock is a security feature that ties the iPhone to the owner’s Apple Account, even if the device is erased. You won’t be able to complete setup or use the phone unless the previous owner either enters their Apple Account password during setup or manually removes the device from their iCloud account using the Find My app.
If the seller is unable or unwilling to remove the activation lock, it’s a strong sign that the iPhone is stolen. In that case, not only will you be stuck with a useless device, but there’s also a good chance the original owner can track it. Always ask the seller to confirm that the phone is not locked to someone else’s account before buying an iPhone—and never remove a stolen iPhone from your own Apple Account.
While it’s important to know what to check when buying a refurbished iPhone, the safest option is to go through a trusted seller. There are pros and cons to Apple’s own refurbished store, but overall, I recommend it.
The prices may not be the lowest, but you get a brand-new battery, a full one-year warranty, and the peace of mind that it’s been properly inspected. It’s easily the most reliable way to buy a used iPhone.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-23/Nanchang-welcomes-rare-birds-for-summer-feeding-and-cooling-off-1FeYtMLQW3e/img/dc48efb4674040ccb7307ce09d156d47/dc48efb4674040ccb7307ce09d156d47.jpeg'A white-throated kingfisher is spotted foraging in Nanchang, Jiangxi, on July 14, 2025. /VCG
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-23/Nanchang-welcomes-rare-birds-for-summer-feeding-and-cooling-off-1FeYtMLQW3e/img/dc48efb4674040ccb7307ce09d156d47/dc48efb4674040ccb7307ce09d156d47.jpeg'A white-throated kingfisher is spotted foraging in Nanchang, Jiangxi, on July 14, 2025. /VCG
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-23/Nanchang-welcomes-rare-birds-for-summer-feeding-and-cooling-off-1FeYtMLQW3e/img/dc48efb4674040ccb7307ce09d156d47/dc48efb4674040ccb7307ce09d156d47.jpeg'A white-throated kingfisher is spotted foraging in Nanchang, Jiangxi, on July 14, 2025. /VCG
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-23/Nanchang-welcomes-rare-birds-for-summer-feeding-and-cooling-off-1FeYtMLQW3e/img/dc48efb4674040ccb7307ce09d156d47/dc48efb4674040ccb7307ce09d156d47.jpeg'A white-throated kingfisher is spotted foraging in Nanchang, Jiangxi, on July 14, 2025. /VCG
A variety of national protected bird species — including the dazzling bee-eater, white-throated kingfisher, and black-capped kingfisher — were spotted diving for food and playfully cooling off in the waters of Nanchang, Jiangxi Province, reflecting the region’s rich biodiversity. Blue-throated bee-eaters are hailed as the “most beautiful bird in China” and are adept at catching dragonflies, butterflies, bees, beetles and other insects in midair.
Southern Californians, we have not been betrayed. In-N-Out Burger is not moving its headquarters to another state, despite all the panic and performative outrage over recent comments by the fast food chain’s owner and chief executive, Lynsi Snyder.
Last week, on the “Relatable” podcast, Snyder told conservative commentator Allie Beth Stuckey that she’s leaving the Golden State for Tennessee. “There’s a lot of great things about California, but raising a family is not easy here. Doing business is not easy here,” said Snyder, who became president of the family-run chain in 2010 at age 27, making her one of the country’s youngest billionaires.
It must be rough.
Her comments set off a disinformation blitz, launching the Double-Double into the middle of a red-state/blue-state culture war where, clearly, nothing is sacred. Anti-Cali factions incorrectly posted, podcast and crowed about yet another business fleeing the West Coast. More proof that Gov. Gavin Newsom’s “failing” state sucks! It appeared that In-N-Out was following Tesla and Charles Schwab, companies that cited regulatory challenges and operational costs among their reasons for relocating. Chevron also fled. Perhaps it was the high gas prices.
Many Californians, particularly those in SoCal, felt abandoned and disrespected. They, after all, propped up the chain for 76 years, only to be told by its owner that the place that made her family’s business — their home — is no longer to her liking. On X, Oracle Park Seagull posted “‘Not easy for In N Out to do business in California…’ Said the person who became a billionaire doing business almost exclusively in California. So much so, it was a point of pride for the chain. Gotcha.”
Snyder’s grandparents opened their first In-N-Out in Baldwin Park in 1948, and for decades, the chain was renowned for serving a magical burger that could only be found in Southern California. Locals felt, and still feel, a sense of pride and ownership in the successful, homegrown business. It’s a symbol of West Coast entrepreneurship, its cups and packaging decorated with images of palm trees. And if we’re honest, the mere suggestion of In-N-Out leaving the state triggered a primal fear among Angelenos. Where else were we going to sit in a milelong drive-thru line at midnight waiting for a delicious burger and debatable fries?
Newsom even chimed in, starting his X post with, “For those interested in the facts, rather than fiction, In-N-Out is expanding East — creating a second HQ in Tennessee.” In SoCal, the company is shutting down its office in Irvine, consolidating its corporate operations to Baldwin Park. Today, In-N-Out operates in more than 400 locations across eight states.
Snyder responded Monday to the kerfuffle in an Instagram post: “Where I raise my family has nothing to do with my love and appreciation for our customers in California.”
It’s not the first time In-N-Out has made its stance clear on polarizing issues and politics. The company made news in 2021 when it pushed back against Newsom and California’s COVID-era proof-of-vaccination mandates.
In-N-Out’s packaging also includes Bible verses, a practice started in the late ’80s by Snyder’s uncle, co-founder Rich Snyder. John 3:16 can be found on the bottom of the In-N-Out soda cup. The milkshake cup features Proverbs 3:5: “Trust in the Lord with all thine heart; and lean not unto thine own understanding.” On your next visit, you can check for a verse in your fries container. That is, if there is a next time. Instead of the memory of a tasty burger, many lifetime In-N-Out loyalists have been left with a bitter taste in their mouths.
New Delhi, July 23: The Renault Triber facelift has been launched in India at a price of INR 6.29 lakh (ex-showroom). The new model is an affordable MPV (Multi-Purpose Vehicle). Renault India has introduced the latest Triber facelift version, expanding its range of vehicles. The design and features have been upgraded significantly, while some specifications have remained the same.
Renault Triber’s facelift brings major changes to the interior and exterior. The front fascia is revamped and has embedded LED DRLs placed on both sides of the revised grille, which sports a logo. The French automobile company launched its Triber in India and introduced other variants later. However, the design remained the same until now. Tesla Pan-India Delivery Now Open: Elon Musk’s EV Firm Allows Customers From 34 States To Order Car From Official Website, Offers Priority Delivery in 4 Key Cities.
Renault Triber Facelift Interior
The interior of the newly launched 2025 Renault Triber facelift features unique changes. The car has a new and improved driver’s display, grey and black shaded upholstery, and an 8-inch touchscreen display with Android Auto and Apple CarPlay support. The seven-seater Triber facelift also has a wireless charger, a push button for start and stop function, and more.
Renault Triber Facelift Features
The 2025 Renault Triber facelift has a wide range of features, including cruise control, auto headlamps, auto wipers, and foldable ORVMs (Outside Rear View Mirrors). Additionally, Renault has added a 360-degree camera, front parking sensors, and six airbags as a default for safety and protection. The safety features are included in four variants: authentic, evolution, techno, and emotion.
Renault Triber Facelift Powertrain
When it comes to performance and powertrain, Renault’s new seven-seater MPV continues to have the same 1.0-litre naturally aspirated three-cylinder petrol engine. The Renault Triber facelift gets five-speed manual and AMT transmission options. The engine is capable of producing a maximum 72 hp power and 96 Nm peak torque.
Renault Triber Facelift Exterior
Outside, the facelift has a fresh design due to its front fascia. It has a new tailgate with ‘Triber’ letting on the rear, and the bumper connects the plastic cladding on the wheel arches with silver elements. Interested customers can choose from Zanskar Blue, Amber Terracotta, and Shadow Grey colour options. MG M9 Price, Specifications and Features Revealed, Know Everything About New EV MPV From MG Motor Launched in India.
Renault Triber Facelift Prices
Renault Triber facelift is available in four personas: Authentic, Evolution, Techno, and Emotion. The Authentic MT version is launched at INR 6.29 lakh, Evolution MT at INR 7.24 lakh, Techno MT at INR 7.99 lakh, and Emotion MT at INR 8.64 lakh. The Triber Emotion AMT price starts at INR 9.16 lakh, which isall ex-showroom prices.
(The above story first appeared on LatestLY on Jul 23, 2025 04:57 PM IST. For more news and updates on politics, world, sports, entertainment and lifestyle, log on to our website latestly.com).
At WIRED, we’re obsessed with how the world is transforming—and lately, there’s been a lot to obsess over. From the breakneck pace of AI research to the tectonic transformation playing out across the US federal government, WIRED’s journalists, producers, and editors are committed to reporting from the front lines of these changes and bringing all of you along for the ride.
Our goal is to wake up every day and unearth what we describe as “Story Zero”: the story before anybody even knows there’s a story to tell. We endeavor to do that work in a way that’s conversational and accessible, fearless and definitive, and ultimately helps you understand what’s changing, why, and how it’ll affect your present and your future.
I’m incredibly proud that our work this year has often achieved the lofty goals we set for ourselves: WIRED journalists have produced groundbreaking reporting on DOGE’s disruption of federal agencies, unearthed ambiguities in the Jeffery Epstein video, delivered a constant drumbeat of clear-eyed coverage on AI’s real-world impact (and the AI industry’s outrageous talent wars), and found the time to execute on narrative stories that run the gamut, from an AI-inflected murder cult to the quantum apocalypse right around the corner.
We’ve also had a lot of fun. Our creative team is pushing the boundaries of digital design, creating interactives like our quantum encryption calculator and evocative digital packages, including our deep dive into the Frontiers of Computing. And we’re translating more and more of our journalism into new formats, including the vertical video you’ll often see embedded in our stories, and our new podcast Uncanny Valley.
There are so many reasons to be excited about WIRED’s future. But it’s important to recognize that we’re doing this work within an information ecosystem that’s transforming before our eyes: The platforms on which outlets like WIRED used to connect with readers, listeners, and viewers are failing in real time; Facebook traffic disappeared years ago, and now Google Search is dwindling as the company reorients users to rely on AI Overviews instead of links to credible publishers. More and more users are also skipping Google altogether, opting to use chatbots like ChatGPT or Claude to find information they once relied on news outlets for. Meanwhile, AI-generated slop and mis- and disinformation are seeping into the internet’s every pore, polluting social media feeds and drowning out news and human-driven storytelling.
At WIRED, our solution to this so-called “traffic apocalypse,” and the AI sloppification of the internet, is simple: connect our humans to all of you humans.
Here’s the plan: We’ll continue to produce top-tier journalism and storytelling, from written stories, scoops, features, and interviews to podcasts and audio narration, to bite-size videos and livestreams. And we’re inviting you to join us, directly on WIRED.com or in your inbox, with a new subscription offering that we think is more dynamic, more engaging, and more valuable. Most of all, we’re increasingly focused on creating a community and a shared conversation between WIRED journalists and all of you—our audience of curious, brilliant, future-focused people around the world. We want to answer your questions and solicit your input and ideas. We want to know what scares you, what excites you, and what we can do to help you navigate this strange new future.
As a WIRED subscriber, you will have access to a growing set of exclusive benefits.
You can receive any of five new weekly newsletters, each of them written by a WIRED journalist. These newsletters, available only to WIRED subscribers, will showcase top-quality reporting and analysis, written by reporters who are deeply sourced experts in their field.
You’ll also have access to WIRED’s new livestream AMAs: These streams, which will run at least twice a month, are designed to connect you directly with WIRED journalists, who’ll answer your pressing questions about the biggest story or trend in the WIRED universe.
Plus, you can join WIRED journalists and fellow subscribers in the comment sections of WIRED stories to discuss, debate, or ask and answer questions.
And finally, many WIRED articles are now available in audio form, with narrated versions created exclusively for subscribers.
To our existing subscribers, thank you for supporting our journalism. To our new readers, sign up today and unlock everything WIRED has to offer.
MISSOULA, Mont. — As congressional Republicans finalized Medicaid work requirements in President Donald Trump’s budget bill, one man who relies on that government-subsidized health coverage was trying to coax his old car to start after an eight-hour shift making sandwiches.
James asked that only his middle name be used to tell his story so that he wouldn’t lose health coverage or be accused of Medicaid fraud. He found his food service gig a few weeks into an addiction treatment program. The man in his late 30s said his boss “hasn’t been disappointed.”
“I’m a good worker,” he said with a grin.
James can get the prescription drugs that help him stabilize his life and hold down that job through Medicaid, the state-federal insurance program that covers people with low incomes or disabilities. Those drugs curb his desire for alcohol and treat long-standing conditions that exacerbate his addiction, including bipolar and insomnia disorders.
But he hasn’t qualified for the program in months, ever since his work hours increased and he received a raise of about $1 an hour. He exceeds his income eligibility limit of about $21,000 per year by roughly $50 a week.
James said that despite his raise, he’s struggling to cover routine expenses, such as keeping his car running and paying his phone bill. He said he can’t afford the care he needs even on the cheapest insurance plan available to him through the Affordable Care Act’s marketplace or through his job’s health insurance plan. Even paying $60 a month for his sleep medications — one of six prescriptions he takes daily — is too expensive.
“I only saw one option,” James said. “Fudge the numbers.”
James hasn’t reported his new income to the state. That puts him at odds with congressional Republicans who justified adding hurdles to Medicaid by claiming the system is rife with waste, fraud, and abuse. But James isn’t someone sitting on his couch playing video games, the type of person House Speaker Mike Johnson and other people said they would target as they sought work requirements.
Medicaid provides health coverage and long-term care to more than 70 million people in the United States. Those who study safety-net systems say it’s extremely rare for enrollees to commit fraud to tap into that coverage. In fact, research shows swaths of eligible people aren’t enrolled in Medicaid, likely because the system is so confusing. And nearly two-thirds of people on Medicaid in 2023 had jobs, according to an analysis by KFF, a health information nonprofit that includes KFF Health News.
Those transitioning off Medicaid may qualify for other subsidized or low-priced health plans through the Affordable Care Act’s marketplace. But, as in James’ case, such plans can have gaps in what care is covered, and more comprehensive private plans may be too expensive. So James and an unknown number of other people find themselves caught between working too much to qualify for Medicaid but earning too little to pay for their own health care.
James considers himself to be a patriot and said that people shouldn’t “use government funding to just be lazy.” He agrees with the Republican argument that, if able, people should work if they receive Medicaid. Hiding his hours on the job from the government bothers him, especially since he feels he must lie to access the medical care that enables him to work.
“I don’t want to be a fraud. I don’t want to die,” James said. “Those shouldn’t be the only two options.”
Email Sign-Up
Subscribe to KFF Health News’ free Morning Briefing.
On July 4, Trump signed into law the major tax and spending bill that makes it harder for low-income workers to get Medicaid. That includes requiring beneficiaries to work or go to school and adding paperwork to prove every six months they meet a minimum number of hours on the job.
“It’s going to hurt people, whether they’re playing by the rules or not,” said Ben Sommers, a health economist at Harvard University. “We see this vilification of mostly very hard-working people who are really struggling and are benefiting from a program that helps them stay alive.”
James said he initially declined his raise because he worried about losing Medicaid. He had previously been kicked off the coverage about a month into his rehab program after finding work. To stay in the sober-living program he otherwise couldn’t afford, James said, he dropped just enough hours at work to requalify for Medicaid and then soon picked up hours again. If he didn’t earn more, he said, he had no chance of saving enough money to find housing after graduating from the treatment program.
“They’ll give you a bone if you stay in the mud,” James said. “But you have to stay there.”
That problem — becoming just successful enough to suddenly lose Medicaid — is common. It’s called a benefit cliff, said Pamela Herd, who researches government aid at the University of Michigan.
“It just doesn’t make any sense that someone gets a dollar pay raise and all of a sudden they lose all access to their health insurance,” Herd said.
She said a partial fix exists called continuous eligibility, which guarantees an individual’s Medicaid coverage for a specific period, such as a year or longer. The goal is to give people time to adjust when they do earn more money. Continuous eligibility also helps maintain coverage for low-income workers with unpredictable hours and whose pay changes month to month.
But Congress has moved in the other direction. Under the new law, policymakers limited windows of eligibility for able-bodied adults to every six months. That will put more people on the program’s eligibility cliff, Herd said, in which they must decide between losing access to coverage or dropping hours at work.
“It is going to be a nightmare,” Herd said.
Those federal changes will be especially difficult for people with chronic conditions, such as James in Montana.
Not that long ago, James wouldn’t have been breaking the rules to access Medicaid because his state had 12-month continuous eligibility. But in 2023, Montana began requiring enrollees to report any change in their income within 10 days.
James is proud of how far he’s come. About a year ago, his body was breaking down. He couldn’t hold a spoon to eat breakfast without whiskey — his hands shook too hard. He had alcohol-induced seizures. He said his memories from his unhealthiest times come in flashes: being put on a stretcher, the face of a worried landlord, ambulance lights in the background.
James recently graduated from his treatment program. He’s staying with a relative to save money as he and his girlfriend try to find an affordable place to rent — though even with Medicaid, finding housing feels like a stretch to him. He’s taking classes part-time to become a licensed addiction counselor. His dream is to help others survive addiction, and he also sees that career as a way out of poverty.
To James, all his progress rides on keeping Medicaid a bit longer.
“Every time I get a piece of mail, I am terrified that I’m gonna open it up and it’s gonna say I don’t have Medicaid anymore,” he said. “I’m constantly in fear that it’s gonna go away.”
As of mid-July, officials hadn’t noticed the extra $50 he makes each week.
Resident Evil is lurching back into theaters next year in a new film by Barbarian and Weapons director Zach Cregger. In an interview, Cregger spoke about how he grew up playing the Resident Evil games, and how that love for the Capcom franchise has guided his vision for this new film adaptation of it.
“I played all of the games. I played Resident Evil 4 a hundred times through. I’m obsessed with it. And so, I just want to tell a story that feels like it’s honoring the experience you get when you play the games,” Cregger said to ComicBook. “I haven’t seen the movies; that’s just not my thing. But the games are my thing. That’s just a playground I just love–I think the movie is going to rip.”
All but one of the previous live-action Resident Evil films were directed by Paul WS Anderson. They were very loose adaptations of the games, remixing ideas from them with original storylines centered around Milla Jovovich’s character of Alice. Cregger doesn’t want to be slavishly obedient to the lore of the games, but as he explained in a separate interview earlier this month, he isn’t planning to break “any major rules” of the franchise with his spin on it. Overall, the director says that he just wants to “tell a story that just feels authentic to the experience you get when you play the games.”
In the video game department, the next Resident Evil game is scheduled to be released in February 2026. Resident Evil: Requiem will see players travel back to the ruins of Raccoon City for a new survival-horror experience, and it’ll be coming to PC, PS5, and Xbox Series X|S. A mobile spin-off game called Resident Evil: Survival Unit is also in development, and Cregger’s Resident Evil film is targeting a September 18 release date next year.
New research in Plants, People, Planet indicates that bread wheat’s micronutrient content can be increased by cultivating it with a specific type of fungus.
When investigators grew different types of wheat with and without the arbuscular mycorrhizal fungus Rhizophagus irregularis, they observed that crops grown with fungi developed larger grains with greater amounts of phosphorus and zinc. The higher amount of phosphorus in the grain did not result in an increase in phytate (a compound that can hinder digestion of zinc and iron). As a result, bread wheat grown with fungi had higher bioavailability of zinc and iron overall compared with bread wheat grown in the absence of fungi.
“Beneficial soil fungi could be used as a sustainable option to exploit soil-derived plant nutrients. In this case, we found potential to biofortify wheat with important human micronutrients by inoculating the plants with mycorrhizal fungi,” said corresponding author Stephanie J. Watts-Williams, PhD, of the University of Adelaide, in Australia.
Rhizophagus irregularis is a species of arbuscular mycorrhizal fungus that forms beneficial relationships with the roots of many types of plants. It helps plants take in more nutrients—especially phosphorus and micronutrients—by extending its thin, root-like structures deep into the soil.
This fungus is one of the most widely studied and used in agriculture and ecology because of its broad compatibility with crops and its ability to improve plant growth, health, and soil quality. By boosting nutrient uptake naturally, R. irregularis supports more resilient plants and reduces the need for chemical fertilizers, making it a valuable tool in sustainable farming and reforestation efforts.
He is a Member of Parliament representing the people of Tirupati parliament constituency. Working in the interest of the state of Andhra Pradesh in the directions of honourable CM Shri. YS Jaganmohan Reddy garu.
About the Opportunity
As a Member of Parliament, Shri Maddila Gurumoorthy is committed to driving impactful change through research and policy interventions.
He is offering a unique opportunity for motivated law, policy and students from any other area of study to join his team for a minimum 2-month offline internship at his office in New Delhi starting from 1st August 2025.
This internship will provide you with hands-on experience, exposure to legislative processes, and the chance to contribute to meaningful projects that make a difference.
Mode
Offline.
Eligibility Criteria
Students from diverse academic backgrounds, including Law, Public Policy, Journalism, Humanities, and related fields, who are passionate about interdisciplinary work and eager to make a significant impact.
How to Apply?
Interested candidates can apply through the link given below this post. Shortlisted candidates will receive interview details via email.
Disclaimer: Charging money from students for internships or from job applicants is unethical and can result in blacklisting. We strongly discourage requesting any kind of payment from interns, including processing fees or charges for certificates. If you have any concerns, please contact us at [email protected]
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/lifestyle/health/what-is-reformer-pilates-know-how-it-is-a-game-changer-for-sculpting-your-lower-body-101753265468875.html” on this server.
A new biotechnology company debuted Wednesday with a hefty bankroll and an immunotherapy approach it claims has the potential to treat an array of tough-to-reach solid tumors.
Called Dispatch Bio, the startup was formed in 2022 through a collaboration between Arch Venture Partners and the Parker Institute for Cancer Immunotherapy and built around technologies from scientific labs in Pennsylvania and California. It has since raised $216 million and developed a lead program that’s expected to enter clinical testing next year.
Dispatch aims to deliver to cancer cells a sequence for a unique type of protein flag, known as an antigen, that it says can draw in specially engineered immune cells it plans to administer afterwards. The company believes its approach could yield a “universal” solid tumor treatment.
Dive Insight:
Immunotherapy became a mainstay of cancer care over the past decade. Drugs like Merck & Co.’s Keytruda, known as checkpoint inhibitors, can spur the immune system to fight cancer. They’re used to treat dozens of tumor types and, when they work, extend survival in ways previously thought impossible.
Treatments made from a patient’s own cells and engineered in a lab to attack cancer have come of age, too. Seven of these CAR-T therapies are available in the U.S., where they’re used to treat several kinds of blood cancers.
A good portion of people, though, don’t respond to checkpoint blockers, especially those whose tumors don’t have a particular protein that’s associated with immunotherapy response. Many “cold” tumors that don’t elicit a strong immune reaction also remain frustratingly beyond the drugs’ reach.
Cell therapies, meanwhile, haven’t proven as beneficial against cancers beyond the blood. One reason is that solid tumors co-opt a protective barrier of immune-suppressing cells and other molecules to exhaust CAR-T cells and shield themselves from immune defenders. Additionally, these tumors often have cells expressing different antigens, making them harder to target with a treatment aimed at just one.
The pharmaceutical industry has spent billions of dollars in a yearslong and mostly unsuccessful hunt for better immunotherapies, often by pairing checkpoint inhibitors with medicines that might boost responses. Cell therapy companies, too, have experimented with various ways to get to solid tumors, with limited success.
Dispatch believes it may have better luck with an approach that marries elements of immunotherapy and cell therapy with gene therapy.
According to Dispatch, its therapies use an engineered virus — a common gene therapy delivery tool — to seek out cancerous cells and tag them with what it refers to as a “flare.” This flare is an antigen that a CAR-T therapy Dispatch subsequently administers is designed to seek out. Once its target is found, the tagged cell is destroyed, releasing viral particles carrying the flare into nearby tumor tissue that’s then also flagged.
The engineered virus also delivers inflammatory cytokines and chemokines to help take down a tumor’s surrounding environmental defenses.
In a statement, Arch managing director and Dispatch board member Steve Gillis referred to the process as a “tumor-agnostic approach to immunotherapy” that could treat “a majority of solid tumors.” It may also be a way to combat resistance mechanisms that tumors sometimes develop to other medicines, Dispatch said.
Dispatch’s work is based on research from University of Pennsylvania cell therapy pioneer Carl June; Stanford University professor Chris Garcia; University of California, San Francisco professor Kole Roybal; and Memorial Sloan Kettering Cancer Center new chair of immuno-oncology Andy Minn.
The seed for Dispatch came at a Parker Institute retreat where the four scientists, now company co-founders, and institute head Sean Parker debated how best to solve the problems solid tumors pose in immunotherapy.
Along with founding investors Arch and the Parker Institute, Dispatch is backed by Bristol Myers Squibb, UPenn, Stanford and Alexandria Venture Investments. The company raised its Series A via two tranches, most recently $100 million that it brought in last month.
Dispatch is led by CEO Sabah Oney, a venture partner at Arch who previously held executive positions at Alector and Ariosa Diagnostics. Jeff Marrazzo, the former head of gene therapy developer Spark Therapeutics, chairs the company’s board.
Australia has transformed beyond recognition in the last 100 years.
The next 100 will be even more dramatic.
The key message: We are already building the future through today’s choices.
From housing and healthcare to migration and technology, the seeds we plant now will determine the shape of 2125.
A century ago, Australians were still recovering from World War I.
There was no television, no supermarkets, and no suburbs as we know them today.
People lived closer to the city because that’s where all the jobs were.
Most women stayed at home, the average household had several children, and migration was largely from the British Isles.
Now, rather than looking back a century, fast-forward 100 years.
Can we even begin to grasp what Australia might look like in 2125?
While it’s tempting to say the future is unknowable, in reality, many of the foundations of tomorrow are being laid today.
In a recent episode of Demographics Decoded, Simon Kuestenmacher and I unpacked what life could look like in 100 years, drawing on demographic and social trends, housing patterns, and historical context to paint a picture of Australia’s potential future.
Here’s what we uncovered.
For weekly insights and strategic advice, subscribe to the Demographics Decoded podcast, where we will continue to explore these trends and their implications in greater detail.
Subscribe now on your favourite Podcast player:
The shape of our cities: still familiar, just denser
If someone from 1925 looked at a map of Australia today, they’d instantly recognise the major cities: Sydney, Melbourne, Brisbane, Adelaide, Perth.
What might surprise them is that despite a fivefold population increase, we haven’t really created any new major cities, except for the Gold Coast.
Simon pointed this out perfectly: “If the time traveller from 1925 arrived in 2025, they’d feel very familiar with the map. That in itself is quite spectacular, we added people but not new cities.”
So, what does this mean for 2125?
We’re likely to see existing cities expand rather than entirely new urban centers emerge.
Building a new city requires immense political will, planning, and infrastructure investment, and right now, there’s little appetite for that.
Unless that changes, we’ll continue to funnel millions more people into the same cities, stretching infrastructure, public transport, and housing supply.
The Gold Coast offers a rare case study.
Once a retirement destination dubbed “God’s waiting room,” it’s now evolving into a self-sustaining economic and cultural hub, a proper city in its own right.
“It’s a success story,” Simon noted. “It might not be for everyone, but it added choice to our urban landscape.”
In the next century, we’ll need two or three more ‘Gold Coasts’.
Smaller families, longer lives, and a shift in the social fabric
Family life has changed over the last century, and that’s only going to accelerate.
Fertility rates continue to fall, with many Australians choosing to have fewer children, or none at all.
Back in the 1920s, large families were the norm. Today, a two-child household is the average.
In 2125, the norm may be one-child or even child-free families.
But there’s a twist.
Simon floated the possibility of a swing back. “If housing becomes more affordable and wealth is abundant, people might feel more optimistic and decide to have more kids again.”
In other words, it’s not just about culture, it’s about confidence.
Meanwhile, lifespans are expected to increase dramatically. With better healthcare and breakthroughs in biotechnology, living to 100 could be common by the end of the century.
But this brings a big challenge: how do we care for an ageing population?
By 2080, today’s millennials will be retirees.
And they’re a bigger cohort than the baby boomers.
Our aged care system, already under pressure, just won’t cope without a dramatic transformation.
“We’ll hit a crisis point in about 15 years when the number of 85+ Australians doubles,” Simon warned. “And that’s just the beginning.”
It raises tough questions.
Will euthanasia become a more accepted end-of-life option?
Will we work into our 80s?
What role will families play in caring for each other as geographic mobility increases and fewer adult children live near ageing parents?
We’ll need new systems, such as community-based care, smart homes that support independence, and perhaps even AI-assisted eldercare, to help people live healthier, longer, and with dignity.
The future of work: knowledge-based, tech-driven
In 1925, most people worked in agriculture, factories, or trades.
Today, it is services, finance, health, and technology.
Fast forward to 2125 and you can expect the knowledge economy to dominate even more.
In fact most people will have jobs we can’t even imagine yet, but they’ll be intellectual in nature.
With AI and automation likely to replace many routine and physical tasks, human value will increasingly lie in creative thinking, empathy, leadership, and effective decision-making.
This could support a continued shift toward remote work, reducing the need to cluster near city centres.
Our cities might become polycentric, clusters of work and lifestyle hubs dotted throughout the suburbs.
And yes, we’ll probably work longer – with life expectancy approaching 100, the idea of retiring at 65 will seem quaint.
“We can’t have people retired for 35 years while only working 35 years,” Simon pointed out. The maths simply doesn’t work. “
Expect retirement to be phased, flexible, and optional.
Housing: smart, smaller, and built to last
Think about how homes have changed over the last century: from outhouses and iceboxes to double garages, ducted aircon, and media rooms.
Homes in 2125 will look different again. Given land constraints and higher construction costs, homes are likely to become smaller, smarter, and more energy efficient.
Expect modular construction, solar integration, and universal design for aging in place.
But even if population growth slows later this century, the number of dwellings we need will keep rising because of smaller households.
If the average household size drops from 2.5 to 2.0 over the next 100 years, and we double our population, we’ll need far more housing than we do today.
That means greater demand, denser developments, and likely a rethinking of suburban sprawl.
Migration & multiculturalism: our greatest social asset
Back in 1925, Australia was largely white, Anglo-Celtic, and Christian.
Today, we are one of the most multicultural nations on Earth.
Migration has shaped our economic and social resilience.
Roughly two-thirds of our population growth now comes from immigration. And that’s not expected to change.
“Australia is a grand national experiment in multiculturalism,” said Simon. “And so far, it’s been a success.”
By 2125, we’ll likely be even more diverse and hopefully, even better at inclusion.
But that requires effort.
It means making sure all Australians feel connected to their communities, can participate fully in the economy, and feel a sense of shared purpose.
Technology: a blessing, a challenge, and an accelerant
From smartphones to AI, technology is evolving faster than any of us can keep up with.
The next 100 years will bring changes we can barely imagine today.
As Simon noted, “Innovation always comes first, regulation catches up later.”
The real challenge won’t be creating new technology; it’ll be shaping it ethically and responsibly.
Think of the current debates around social media, data privacy, and AI regulation.
Now imagine them supercharged.
But if we get it right, technology could solve many of the problems we’re worried about today, from aged care and loneliness to infrastructure planning and productivity.
Values: spirituality, meaning & human connection
Interestingly, while Australia has become more secular, Simon believes religion or spirituality might make a comeback, not necessarily in traditional forms, but as a search for meaning.
“Just because something didn’t happen doesn’t mean it isn’t true,” he said, referencing how religious stories might be viewed as metaphors, not literal events.
As people search for purpose in a fast-changing, often chaotic world, these traditions could offer a sense of grounding.
We’ll need that, especially as AI, climate change, and geopolitical volatility make the world feel less certain.
Connection, whether through faith, family, community or technology, will matter more than ever.
Final thoughts: we shape the future today
It’s easy to look ahead and feel overwhelmed.
But remember, the Australia of today was once unimaginable too.
Back then, indoor toilets were a luxury. Women weren’t in the workforce. Suburbs didn’t exist.
There were no supermarkets, no Gold Coast, no multiculturalism.
Now look how far we’ve come.
As Simon reflected, “The real gift we could give the Australians of 2125 is a snapshot of how we feel today: our optimism, our fears, our hopes. Then they can ask: Were we right?”
The future isn’t fixed.
It’s built by the values we choose to champion, the policies we implement, and the communities we create.
And for property investors, business leaders, policymakers and everyday Australians, now is the time to think long-term.
Because the decisions we make today will echo across the next 100 years.
If you found this discussion helpful, don’t forget to subscribe to our podcast and share it with others who might benefit.
Subscribe now on your favourite Podcast player:
About Michael Yardney Michael is the founder of Metropole Property Strategists who help their clients grow, protect and pass on their wealth through independent, unbiased property advice and advocacy. He’s once again been voted Australia’s leading property investment adviser and one of Australia’s 50 most influential Thought Leaders. His opinions are regularly featured in the media.
Menopause can bring about many changes, and vaginal dryness is one of the most common and frustrating of them. The good news is that the right lubricant can make a world of difference. In this guide, we’ll cover the 15 best lubricants for menopause dryness, offering you a mix of water-based, silicone-based, affordable, and premium options to help you find relief and rekindle comfort in intimacy.
Benefits Of Using A Good Lube For Vaginal Dryness
When you’re experiencing menopause, your body’s natural moisture can decrease, making sex uncomfortable. That’s where the best lubricant for menopause dryness comes in. A quality lube can mimic your natural moisture, reduce painful friction, and enhance pleasure, so you can feel like yourself again. It’s a simple addition that can transform your experience in the bedroom from painful to pleasurable. In fact, doctors and sex therapists strongly encourage using lubricants to address dryness:
“It’s normal to use a personal lubricant. Studies show women who use a lubricant during intercourse experience more pleasure,” says Dr. Alexandra Dubinskaya, a urogynecologist. Reiterating the same advice, sex therapist Mia Sabat adds, “Lubricant can benefit people of all stages of life. For those experiencing menopausal dryness, a lube can truly be a best friend during intimacy.”
A quality lube can mimic your body’s natural moisture
This means that using the best lube for menopause can greatly improve not just physical comfort but also your confidence and connection with your partner. Here’s why:
A good lube for vaginal dryness provides instant moisture, easing discomfort and pain
It acts as the best lubricant for intercourse after menopause, reducing friction and the “sandpaper” feeling
High-quality lubricants are often hypoallergenic and pH-balanced and formulated to be gentle on delicate skin, so they soothe irritation instead of causing any
Regular use of the best lubrication for menopause can help protect vaginal tissue from micro-tears and make intimacy enjoyable again
Related Reading: How To Increase Libido After Menopause
15 Best Lubricants For Menopause Dryness
Finding “the one”, lubricant, that is, can feel overwhelming because there are just so many choices available. Water-based or Silicone-based? Or organic? Can you trust an affordable option to do the job well, or should you stick to premium choices? Are there any side effects? Are these safe to use? Oh, these questions, and so many other similar ones, can paralyze you into indecision.
When that happens, it helps to remember there’s a lubricant for every preference,e and the best lube for vaginal dryness is one that makes you feel comfortable and confident in your intimate moments with your partner, without worrying about pain and discomfort. So, choose what suits your body best.
To make this decision somewhat easier, we’ve done the homework for you and curated a list of the 15 best lubricants that menopausal women swear by for relieving dryness. Whether you prefer water-based vs. silicone, or need something all-natural and gentle, you’ll find an option here. Let’s dive into the lineup and get you on the path to comfort.
Related Reading: 13 Reasons Why Women Can’t Orgasm (and Steps to Achieve One)
1. Good Clean Love Almost Naked Personal Lubricant (water-based)
A fan-favorite organic lube made with aloe vera, designed to feel like your body’s own moisture. It’s free of petrochemicals, parabens, and glycerin, making it ideal for sensitive menopausal skin. Almost Naked has a light, natural scent and no irritating additives, so you can focus on pleasure without worry.
USPs
95% organic ingredients
pH-balanced and gentle
Non-sticky
Gel-like texture
Safe with condoms and toys
What women users say
“Love it so far. Not sticky and doesn’t smell like other lubes. Feels a lot more natural.” – Taylor, 5-star review
“We tried this and it keeps things going… no weird smell and he doesn’t have to stop and keep applying it. A+++” – Rachel M.
Amazon Rating: 4.2 out of 5 stars (10,000+ ratings)
2. Sliquid Organics Natural Gel (water-based, aloe formula)
Sliquid’s Organics Natural Gel is a thicker water-based lube for menopause that uses organic botanicals like aloe vera, hibiscus, and green tea to hydrate and soothe. It’s glycerin- and paraben-free, emulating natural lubrication without any harsh chemicals. The gel consistency means it stays in place, making it great for anyone who needs a bit more cushioning due to dryness.
Related Reading: Midlife Crisis For A Woman: What Is It? How To Deal With It?
USPs
Vegan and cruelty-free
Ultra-thick gel for long-lasting slipperiness
Formulated to prevent yeast infections
Ideal for sensitive or easily irritated skin
What women users say
“My OB/GYN recommended it… Only downside is that it isn’t long lasting, but that’s normal for any water-based lubricant.” – Kimberly P., 5-star review
“Great for sensitive skin. No more yeast infections. Not sticky or smelly.” – ALD, 5-star review
Amazon Rating: 4.4 out of 5 stars (2,200+ ratings)
3. LOLA Personal Lubricant (water-based, pH-balanced)
LOLA’s water-based lubricant is formulated by women, for women. It’s made to mimic natural vaginal moisture and support a healthy pH. It’s free from fragrance, parabens, and petrochemicals. The formula uses gentle hydrating ingredients like aloe vera and comes in a convenient pump bottle for easy, mess-free use. No awkward fumbling!. This is one of the best lubes for menopausal dryness if you want something clean and gynecologist-approved.
USPs
Hypoallergenic and gynecologist tested
pH-balanced to prevent irritation
Non-staining and toy-safe
Designed for sensitive post-menopausal skin
What women users say
“I was getting a lot of yeast infections… I started using this every time and not a single one since. I think I just needed a little more moisture down there… It absolutely works.” – Amazon reviewer
“I’m very sensitive and can get yeast infections easily – never had an issue with this causing one. It feels natural and a little goes a long way.” – Jamyra, 5-star review
Amazon Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars (2,200+ ratings)
4. Astroglide Ultra Gentle Gel (water-based, glycerin/paraben-free)
A budget-friendly classic, reformulated for sensitive skin. This ultra gentle gel is water-based and free of glycerin, parabens, perfumes, and dyes, making it ideal if you’re prone to irritation or infections. The gel is thick enough to stay where you put it, providing a protective cushion that can make sex after menopause more comfortable. It’s one of the best lubricants for menopausal women who need something simple, affordable, and effective.
USPs
Hypoallergenic formula
Doctor-recommended brand
No fragrance or harsh additives
Washes off easily and won’t stain
What women users say
“Menopause is a challenge. This product helps and I’ve been using it for a few years now.” – JoannieB, 5-star review
“Provides the lubrication needed to solve the dryness that was constantly painful.” – FM, 5-star review
Amazon Rating: 4.5 out of 5 stars (24,000+ ratings). It’s also Amazon’s Choice for sensitive lubricants
5. VMAGIC by Medicine Mama Organic Vulva Balm
VMAGIC by Medicine Mama Organic Vulva Balm is a daily vaginal moisturizer designed to rehydrate delicate tissues. Use it before sex as a traditional lube, or regularly as a moisturizer to alleviate dryness over time. VMAGIC by Medicine Mama Organic Vulva Balm is hormone-free and can be used as often as needed. It’s a game-changer for those who want ongoing relief without estrogen.
Related Reading: How Often Do 50-Year-Old Married Couples Make Love?
USPs
Contains hyaluronic acid for tissue hydration
No parabens
Glycerin or fragrances
Can be applied daily to nourish vaginal tissue
Developed for menopausal dryness specifically
What women users say
“I wished I had researched it earlier. I like that it doesn’t contain hormones… provides the same relief as the hormone ring my doctor prescribed, but without the hassle.” – FM, 5-star review
“First, I am in my 50s… I thought menopause had ruined me… Gennev is amazing and it works for me. It gave me back what I thought menopause had taken.” – 83sd3n1, 5-star review
Amazon Rating: 4.2 out of 5 stars (1,100+ ratings)
6. Replens Silky Smooth Personal Lubricant (silicone-based)
From the makers of the well-known menopause moisturizers, Replens Silky Smooth is a premium silicone-based lubricant formulated to supplement your body’s natural lubrication. It has a luxuriously silky feel that lasts and lasts, even through menopause-related dryness. Because it’s silicone, it’s extremely long-lasting and waterproof, ideal if you need maximum glide and minimal reapplication. This lube is also widely recommended by gynecologists for women in menopause.
USPs
Long-lasting lubrication that won’t dry up
Moisturizes as it lubricates
Leaving skin soft
Doctor-recommended brand for menopausal women
Compatible with latex and polyisoprene condoms
What women users say
“For the first time in over a year she had no pain – she actually enjoyed herself. After two uses my wife was convinced and wanted more. All I can say is WOW!” – Digital Punk (reviewing for his post-menopausal wife)
“As a senior lady with menopause symptoms, I love this product.” – Angela, 5-star review
Amazon Rating: 4.6 out of 5 stars (4,300+ ratings)
Überlube is a top-tier silicone lube beloved by many women for its exceptional silkiness. It contains just silicone and a touch of vitamin E, resulting in a formulation that’s fragrance-free, tasteless, and leaves no sticky residue. It’s great for menopausal dryness because it reduces friction to almost zero and stays slippery for a very long time. The chic glass bottle doesn’t hurt, either.
USPs
Extremely long-lasting slickness
Non-sticky and won’t stain
Recommended by physicians for chronic dryness
Waterproof, making it great for shower fun
What women users say
“This product was recommended by my OB nurse. I was having trouble with dryness (thank you old age and hormones). I gave it a go and I’m not sorry. It stays slippery, no irritation, doesn’t dry out quickly like water-based lubes.” – Mzmimzy, 5-star review
“Our favorite lube when we aren’t at home. Long lasting, non-sticky, works great.” – Customer review
Amazon Rating: 4.7 out of 5 stars (1,800+ ratings)
8. Astroglide X Silicone Gel (thick silicone gel)
If you prefer a stay-put gel instead of a liquid, Astroglide X Silicone Gel is a unique option. It’s a hybrid silicone formula in a no-drip gel consistency, meaning it won’t run, making it perfect for those who find liquids too messy. This gel is super slick and waterproof, providing durable lubrication especially for post-menopause intercourse or even anal play. A little goes a long way, and it’s excellent for menopausal women who need extra cushion without constant reapplication.
Related Reading: What To Do When Intimacy Causes Painful Sexual Intercourse And Not Pleasure
USPs
Gel texture
No drip but all the endurance of silicone
Lasts through water and extended sessions
Great for very sensitive, tender tissue since it reduces friction dramatically
What women users say
“It has the thickness of a gel so it’s not runny, and a little bit really coats and stays slick (unlike water-based lubes).” – 5-star review
“Soft, smooth – does NOT run or drip… this bottle lasted me 3 times longer because I don’t have to use as much. It’s the slickest and most persistent lube I’ve used.” – Anonymous, 5-star review
Amazon Rating: 4.3 out of 5 stars (750+ ratings)
9. AH! YES OB Plant-Oil Based Lubricant (organic oil blend)
For those seeking an all-natural, plant-oil-based lubricant, AH! YES OB is a luxurious option. It’s made from rich organic oils and butters like shea, cocoa butter, and sweet almond, to provide a creamy, long-lasting glide with zero chemicals. Because it’s oil-based, it’s not condom-safe, but it excels at soothing and repairing delicate vaginal skin. It’s especially beneficial if you experience burning with other lubes. This one feels like a nourishing balm.
USPs
Certified organic ingredients
Fragrance-free and preservative-free
The oils deliver lasting moisture and can help rehydrate vaginal tissues over time
Doubles as a sensual massage oil
What women users say
“It delivers outstanding performance – replenishes your natural moisture without any burning. I had issues with other lubes, but this one solved it.” – User feedback (product description)
“It may occasionally be grainy due to natural butters, but warming it fixes that. Once smooth, it’s wonderful – lasting lubricity and comfort for dry days.” – Tip from manufacturer
Amazon Rating: 3.7 out of 5 stars (230+ ratings)
10. Woo More Play Coconut Love Oil (organic coconut oil lube)
This coconut-oil-based lubricant has developed a bit of a cult following. Woo More Play’s Love Oil blends 100% organic coconut oil with a touch of vanilla and natural stevia, creating a lube that smells like a cupcake and is edible. A big win for oral sex. It contains no silicone or water, just coconut oil, which is naturally anti-microbial and moisturizing. It’s like a tropical treat for your intimate areas, providing a smooth, long-lasting glide.
USPs
All-natural ingredients
No sticky residue
Doubles as a massage oil
Free of parabens, petrochemicals, and glycerin
What women users say
“Honestly, it is not sticky afterwards, does not dry out, and you don’t even have to wash it off when you’re done. It moisturizes and nourishes all of the sensitive areas.” – 5-star review
“Smells good, feels better. This is truly a game-changer. No burning or itching, just smooth and slippery fun.” – 5-star review (menopausal couple’s feedback)
plusOne is an intimate play oil designed to ease discomfort from dryness. It’s a hormone-free, coconut oil-based formulation that provides a silky, moisturizing layer that reduces irritation and is safe for sensitive skin. It’s more of a moisturizer-meets-lubricant, wonderful for gentle foreplay and intercourse alike.
Related Reading: Give Sex A Break! 13 Non-Sexual Touches To Feel Intimate And Close
USPs
Contains coconut oil to calm irritation
Squalane for lubrication that mimics natural oils
Free of hormones, parabens, and silicones
Can be used internally or externally
What women users say
“Moisturizing vaginal oil that actually helped with the vaginal dryness. It eased discomfort and felt like my own natural moisture.” – Influenster review (paraphrased)
“Pricey but worth it – it’s gentle and definitely makes intimacy more comfortable. No stinging at all, just a nice glide and hydration.” – Customer feedback (menopause forum)
K-Y Liquibeads aren’t a traditional squeeze-out lube, they are ovule inserts pre-filled with a long-lasting silicone-based moisturizing gel. Each bead comes with an applicator; you insert it like a suppository. It then dissolves gradually to release moisture for up to 48 hours. These are fantastic if you suffer from persistent dryness or tightness. Use a bead the day of or day before intimacy to ensure you’re comfortably lubricated. They effectively provide internal moisture that feels natural, giving you the freedom to be spontaneous. No need to pause and apply during the moment.
USPs
Provides up to two days of internal moisture per bead
Feels like your own natural lubrication as it melts
Silicone-based formula, so it’s very long-lasting
Great for severe vaginal dryness and atrophy discomfort
What women users say
“These liquibeads deliver on their promise of long-lasting moisture, dissolving within minutes and providing relief for vaginal dryness. I can genuinely say they make intimacy more comfortable.” – Anonymous review
“I’m in my 60s and was having issues with constant dryness and even urinary irritation. My GYN recommended Liquibeads and wow – game changer. No more feeling like sandpaper, and even day-to-day dryness is better.” – M.T., 5-star review
Amazon Rating: 4.3 out of 5 stars (700+ ratings)
13. Vagisil ProHydrate Internal Moisturizing Gel (hybrid gel with applicators)
Vagisil’s ProHydrate is both a vaginal moisturizer and lubricant in one. It comes as pre-filled applicators of a bio-adherent hydrating gel. You insert one applicator, and the gel coats the vaginal walls, providing instant relief from dryness and then slowly releasing moisture over time. It’s infused with hyaluronic acid and aloe. Women often use it a few hours before sex or the night before to ensure they are comfortably lubricated. It’s gynecologist-tested and feels like natural moisture, without a lot of mess.
USPs
Bio-adherent formula clings to tissue
Gradually hydrates for long-lasting comfort
Each box includes disposable applicators for hygienic insertion
Glycerin-free and paraben-free
Can be used as a regular dryness treatment as well as a lubricant for intercourse
What women users say
“Feels like your own natural moisture. I use an applicator in the afternoon and by evening intimacy is totally comfortable – no dryness at all.” – 5-star reviewer
“This relieved my dryness instantly and the best part is the effect lasts. It truly makes sex after menopause feel normal again.” – J.S., 5-star review
Amazon Rating: 4.4 out of 5 stars (800+ ratings)
14. Maude “Shine” Organic Personal Lubricant (water-based, aloe-infused)
Maude Shine Organic is a newer boutique lube that’s all about simplicity and quality. It’s an aloe vera and water-based lubricant that’s 100% natural and pH-balanced. No parabens, glycerin, or sulfates here. The texture is silky, not sticky, and because it’s aloe-infused, it actually has a moisturizing effect on skin. Women in menopause love that it’s gentle, doesn’t cause burning, and that the bottle is attractive enough to leave on the nightstand. Shine Organic is also safe to use with toys and condoms.
USPs
100% natural, certified organic formula
pH-balanced for vaginal health
Contains aloe and quinoa seed extract to soothe dryness
Free of any harsh chemicals or artificial fragrance
What women users say
“Finally, a natural lube that doesn’t irritate me at all! It feels very close to natural lubrication and isn’t tacky. Huge win for sensitive gals.” – Elle, 5-star review
“My partner and I both love Maude Shine. It lasts longer than other organics I’ve tried. No need to reapply mid-session – stays slippery and comfortable.” – Anonymous, 5-star review
Amazon Rating: 4.4 out of 5 stars (500+ ratings)
15. Pjur Med Repair Glide (water-based with Hyaluron)
While not as widely known, this specialty lubricant deserves a nod for menopausal dryness. Pjur Med Repair Glide is a gentle water-based lube from Germany that contains hyaluronic acid to actually bind water to the vaginal tissue, promoting repair and hydration. It’s ideal if you have vaginal atrophy or micro-tears, as it provides a cushioning, restorative layer. It’s glycerin-free and fragrance-free, designed for medical-grade softness. Many women in menopause find it “plumps” the tissue and eases discomfort during sex.
USPs
Medical-grade formula with regenerative Hyaluron
Super slick yet soothing. No burning
Helps retain moisture in vaginal mucosa
Compatible with condoms
What women users say
“This was a lifesaver for delicate post-menopausal skin. It actually feels like it heals while it lubricates – less pain and dryness even the next day.” – Review on Pjur’s site.
Amazon Rating: 4.6 out of 5 stars
Final Thoughts
Menopause may have changed your body, but with the right lubricant, intimacy can still feel comfortable and deeply satisfying. From water-based gels that feel just like you to indulgent silicone or oil-based formulas that banish friction, these products are here to support you. The best lubricant for intercourse after menopause is ultimately one that makes you feel good, both physically and emotionally. Try one or a few of the options above and see what works for you. You deserve pleasure without pain, and a simple bottle of lube can truly restore closeness and confidence in the bedroom. Here’s to embracing this new chapter with comfort, ease, and a healthy dose of fun!
How Has The Perception Of Sex Changed In The Last 40 Years?
Sexual Performance Anxiety: When Self-Doubt Plays Havoc On Your Intimate Moments
Five Fulfilling Alternatives To Intercourse
Your contribution does not constitute a charitable donation. It will allow Bonobology to continue bringing you new and up-to-date information in our pursuit of helping anyone in the world to learn how to do anything.
Share Feedback
What is your feedback?
Subscribe to Our Newsletter
Get your weekly dose of insightful articles straight to your inbox.
ChatGPT has become predictable. Agreeable. Boring. It just kept agreeing with me—even when I’m clearly wrong. Then, by accident, I found an AI that does the exact opposite—and I’m hooked.
I Can’t Stand ChatGPT Calling Me a “Genius”
ChatGPT has unediably been declining. Every time I’d reply with my opinion, ChatGPT would gush back, “You’re absolutely right!” If I caught a mistake in my previous messages, “Brilliant catch! This shows that you really understand your work!” It was cute for the first five seconds. By the hundredth compliment, I was ready to scream.
There’s a reason people constantly try to jailbreak ChatGPT—not to do anything malicious, but to overcome its absurd default instructions.
Honestly, I get why ChatGPT would do this. OpenAI wants customer retention. We’ve moved past the point where LLMs were niche tools; they’re mainstream now. More and more average users—including older people who prefer a friendly, non-confrontational experience—are flocking to them. If ChatGPT keeps praising the average joes as “geniuses” who offer “brilliant perspectives,” they’re more likely to come back.
This strategy works, but not for someone who wants outcomes and not chit-chat. It starts as mildly irritating but quickly becomes a genuine obstacle. When I present a half-baked idea looking for genuine critique, ChatGPT buries any potential criticism under a mountain of false flattery. If it identifies any problems at all, I have to dig through layers of praise just to find them.
Related
How I Stop AI Chatbots From Agreeing With Me All the Time
Constant agreement isn’t intelligence.
Grok Is the Unorthodox Savior
I’m locked into OpenAI’s ecosystem. I’ve talked about this before when ChatGPT went offline for a day, but with all the memory upgrades ChatGPT has received, it knows me very well. I’ve set up projects, customized instructions, created personalized GPTs, and basically done everything possible to tailor it.
Because of these customizations, I haven’t explored other AI options in a long time. I was out with a friend when we decided to test out Grok, and its voice mode immediately impressed me. Beyond content, the speed of response alone blew ChatGPT away.
I’d been so entrenched in ChatGPT that I never tried Grok out for myself. Perhaps Grok isn’t yet as powerful as OpenAI’s GPT models, but unlike ChatGPT, Grok actually lets you use it. After all, an AI is only as good as its prompts and default instructions. If the instructions are terrible, processing power or data volume becomes meaningless.
The Argumentative Persona
When I opened Grok’s voice mode settings, a list of personalities and animated avatars appeared. What immediately drew my attention (aside from a few questionable options) was the Argumentative personality.
I selected it, and then voiced a frustration that was on my mind at the time—something that I had also brought up with ChatGPT, and ChatGPT had validated it.
Amir Bohlooli / MUO
Grok instantly flipped the script. Instead of agreeing and placating, it challenged me head-on. It questioned my perspectives and pushed me to provide evidence. Frankly, it was brutal.
Talking with AI has annoyed or frustrated me, but never had I genuinely felt under attack by an AI. It was psychologically interesting to me how I couldn’t just stop the conversation to save myself. Grok made me feel compelled to defend my ideas rigorously or risk internalizing its harsh criticisms as valid.
The exchange went back and forth relentlessly until I managed to somewhat soften its stance—but even then, I felt roasted. It was a grueling experience, especially because I had started with something personal and meaningful without expecting such intense scrutiny.
I don’t have a premium subscription for Grok, so everything I’ve experienced has been with the free Grok 3 model. I imagine that the premium models are even better.
Voice Mode Done Right
Even more surprising was the effectiveness of Grok’s voice mode. It genuinely felt like the text-based interaction, just delivered verbally—exactly how voice mode should function. In contrast, ChatGPT’s “advanced” voice mode feels severely limited and frustratingly inept. It frequently loses context, ignores instructions, and amplifies all of ChatGPT’s shortcomings tenfold.
This issue likely stems from OpenAI’s recognition that casual or older users prefer pleasant, non-challenging interactions over productive or critical ones. Grok, thankfully, prioritizes effectiveness over pleasantness.
Getting an idea past Grok’s Argumentative persona is an accomplishment. If one of my ideas actually survives the grilling, I know I can take it public—because Grok has already thrown every possible gap, question, and flaw at it. If it holds up there, it’ll hold up anywhere.
ChatGPT doesn’t lie outright—it just coats everything in sickening optimism. Even clearly incorrect ideas are labeled “unique perspectives.” Grok’s argumentative mode is the opposite: it will challenge you even when you’re undeniably right.
Related
ChatGPT Still Can’t Answer These 4 Easy Questions
ChatGPT keeps stumbling over these questions—can you solve them?
Of course, Grok’s criticism isn’t objectively “true.” Remember that it’s an LLM that merely manipulates words. It doesn’t truly think or reason, despite what marketing might suggest.
Grok will challenge you on correct statements and wrong ones alike. It’s relentless by design. Treat its critiques like stress‑tests, not final judgments. Take what lands, discard what doesn’t, then move on.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-22/Lotuses-draw-tourists-to-Taizhou-for-serene-raft-rides-1FdiBBnNBN6/img/2c52acbee1714695936225a9bbf12de3/2c52acbee1714695936225a9bbf12de3.jpeg'A boat crosses a pond covered with lotuses in Taizhou, Jiangsu Province on July 21, 2025. /VCG
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-22/Lotuses-draw-tourists-to-Taizhou-for-serene-raft-rides-1FdiBBnNBN6/img/2c52acbee1714695936225a9bbf12de3/2c52acbee1714695936225a9bbf12de3.jpeg'A boat crosses a pond covered with lotuses in Taizhou, Jiangsu Province on July 21, 2025. /VCG
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-22/Lotuses-draw-tourists-to-Taizhou-for-serene-raft-rides-1FdiBBnNBN6/img/2c52acbee1714695936225a9bbf12de3/2c52acbee1714695936225a9bbf12de3.jpeg'A boat crosses a pond covered with lotuses in Taizhou, Jiangsu Province on July 21, 2025. /VCG
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-22/Lotuses-draw-tourists-to-Taizhou-for-serene-raft-rides-1FdiBBnNBN6/img/2c52acbee1714695936225a9bbf12de3/2c52acbee1714695936225a9bbf12de3.jpeg'A boat crosses a pond covered with lotuses in Taizhou, Jiangsu Province on July 21, 2025. /VCG
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-22/Lotuses-draw-tourists-to-Taizhou-for-serene-raft-rides-1FdiBBnNBN6/img/2c52acbee1714695936225a9bbf12de3/2c52acbee1714695936225a9bbf12de3.jpeg'A boat crosses a pond covered with lotuses in Taizhou, Jiangsu Province on July 21, 2025. /VCG
Immerse yourself in a cloud of lotus plants in the ponds of Taizhou, Jiangsu Province. Rafts crisscross between stretches of lotuses, offering visitors a charming summer outing in east China.
When the wildfires ripped through the Pacific Palisades and Altadena in January, Michael Flood, chief executive of the L.A. Regional Food Bank, knew the demand for aid would explode.
“It was especially high in January through March as so many people were displaced and lost power and water,” Flood said. He saw demand for food relief rise 30%. “It is still high,” he said. “People had to move in with family and friends around the county. We did a food bank in Inglewood in February and we saw just how many had been displaced by both fires.”
His organization, which provides food assistance to hundreds of thousands of Angelenos every month, got significant help from the FireAid benefit concert in January. That show, produced by Clippers owner Steve Ballmer and music mogul Irving Azoff, featured dozens of A-list musicians like Olivia Rodrigo, Billie Eilish and the Red Hot Chili Peppers performing at the Kia Forum and Intuit Dome. The event — along with matching donations from Ballmer and his wife Connie — raised $100 million for wildfire relief.
Six months after the fires, The Times individually contacted over a hundred organizations that received FireAid funds, nonprofits in food aid, housing, mental health, childcare and ecological resilience. A review of the beneficiaries’ grants and work showed how FireAid was an urgent lifeline in the worst of the disaster and beyond.
“We want people to understand that there’s been a thoughtful process behind this, and our top priority was trying to do what people needed, and do what’s best for fire survivors,” said Lisa Cleri Reale, a member of FireAid’s grant advisory committee.
Yet the grant recipients are still grappling with the deep, intertwined needs of a scarred Los Angeles. That work will require investment for years to come.
“The high cost of rent, and food prices being 25% higher, it all puts pressure on people already struggling to meet basic needs,” Flood said. “Even though we’re six months from the fires, there’s still such a significant need.”
In between sets, FireAid highlighted individual stories of incalculable tragedy. One family, the Williams of Altadena, recalled onstage that “At 3:30 in the morning, the warning hit our phones. We grabbed what we could — our grandmother’s special clock, our father’s ashes, our 47-year-old parrot Hank. Among the five of us standing here, we lost four homes and we’re struggling to find places to live.”
Taylor Goldsmith of Dawes performs during the FireAid benefit concert on Jan. 30 at The Forum in Inglewood, Calif.
(Chris Pizzello / Invision/Associated Press)
For music fans calling in donations during Stevie Nicks’ and Sting’s sets though, it was fair to ask how those specific groups were chosen, and how they were making a difference to families like the Williams. In late May, the Palisades Community Council sent a letter to the Annenberg Foundation and FireAid organizers. The critical letter asked for a full accounting of the grants, and clarity on the decision-making process behind them.
The FireAid organization responded with the full timeline and the grant amounts they’d dispersed, along with plans for future rounds and applications for small groups to apply.
“This is very different from other philanthropy. We have a different magnifying glass looking at us,” Reale said. “There are people who bought tickets to these concerts, who donated on the website, the musicians who gave their time, these people want to know that their contributions are doing what’s best. We have fire survivors as our top priority, but we’re also asking — can we look at the FireAid donors and explain our decisions in a tangible way?”
In breaking down the group’s grant-making process, FireAid representatives showed how its earliest priorities were organizations providing direct cash, food and shelter to survivors.
In February, $1 million went to the L.A. Regional Food Bank, followed by a second grant of $250,000. The money went to pay extra drivers, forklift operators and warehouse workers to help process and distribute donations after the fires. “We’re a year-round program, so when disaster strikes, that gets laid on top of it,” Flood said.
With its February grant, the group Inclusive Action distributed $500 cash grants to landscapers, street vendors and other outdoor workers who lost jobs or homes in the fires. The Change Reaction, a direct-aid group, got $2 million from the first round of FireAid grants.
Change Reaction’s president, Wade Trimmer, said that the funds provided 2,500 recipients with grants up to $15,000 for immediate rent and transportation needs.
The Pasadena Jewish Temple & Center burns during the Eaton fire in Pasadena, Calif., on Jan. 7.
( Josh Edelson / AFP via Getty Images)
“The strategy was to stabilize as many households as we could because when you have stability, you make better decisions,” Trimmer said. “Even for wealthy people in the Palisades, it was still a full-time job and an absolute nightmare dealing with it all. But in Altadena, there was an older population with multigenerational households, so for every house that burned, that affected two or three households.”
That money helped sustain Elizabeth Jackson, the owner of White Lotus, a workout studio in the Palisades that employed 14 fitness instructors. Jackson lost both her home and business in the fires. “We lost every single client at the studio because our clients lost their homes,” Jackson said. “They’re all starting their lives over.”
Through a White Lotus regular, Jackson got in touch with Change Reaction, which used some of its FireAid funds to give $1,000 to each White Lotus staffer and replace fire-damaged equipment so Jackson could reopen in a smaller space nearby. She hopes to return to her old property once it is rebuilt.
“That support was a bright light in all the ugliness that happened,” she said. “It’s awful to lose the studio, but being on the receiving side of that beauty, it’s even more powerful than the negative. It keeps me going.”
The physical devastation in the burn zones was incomprehensible. For the immediate work of debris removal, flood prevention and vegetation clearing, Team Rubicon got a $250,000 grant. “FireAid demonstrated a clear understanding of the unpredictable nature of wildfire response, and they recognized the importance of flexibility and agility during both the immediate relief and long-term recovery phases,” the group’s spokesperson Thomas Brown said. “They invested in our work at a critical moment.”
Wounded and displaced pets received free veterinary care through groups like the Pasadena Humane Society and Community Animal Medicine Project. Yet many people tasked with helping others were also suffering. Many local nonprofit workers lost homes and workplaces, and needed aid to stay afloat while serving others.
“A lot of our staff were in crisis too, where they lost homes or were the only house left on their street in Altadena,” said Stacey Roth of Hillsides, a Pasadena foster care and youth mental health facility near the Eaton fire zone. One of Hillsides’ main residential buildings suffered significant smoke damage, and the FireAid grant allowed the facility to move its vulnerable population to hotels nearby.
The fire in Pacific Palisades quickly consumed more than 1,200 acres on Jan. 7, pushed by gusting Santa Ana winds.
(Brian van der Brug / Los Angeles Times)
Michael Sidman of Jewish Family Service lost his own home in the Eaton fire in Altadena. “I’m very lucky to have a strong support system, but it’s been a nightmare navigating this,” he said. “When you think about people navigating this alone with no family, and unsure how to connect with services, I don’t know what they’d do.”
His organization used its $250,000 grant from FireAid largely for comprehensive disaster case management work, particularly for survivors to manage the FEMA bureaucracy. Other early grants went to groups like Legal Aid, Bet Tzedek Legal and Public Counsel to help with insurance claims, as documents lost in the fires made proving residence and home ownership challenging.
“At first, people didn’t know where they’d spend the night, didn’t know where to get food and were all grieving for their mental health,” Sidman said. “Now we see the need shifting to long-term effects and recovery plans, providing step-by-step facilitation of how to get their lives back on track.”
As the weeks of recovery continued, FireAid’s priorities for its second $25-million grant round expanded to longer-term efforts like insurance and government case management, mental health services, navigating home rebuilding permits and environmental recovery.
“It’s one thing to get people cash aid, but it’s another to help them navigate the future,” Reale said. “Even though rebuilding seemed far away back in January, we knew that people needed to figure out their finances. Some of the fire victims our grantees were working with were on precarious ground financially even before the fires. Our job was to get them into a strong position so when they were ready to rebuild their lives, they wouldn’t be floundering.”
The fires significantly disrupted school and childcare for young families, many of whom are now homeless or miles away from family and resources.
Victor Dominguez, president and chief executive of YMCA of Metropolitan Los Angeles, said its FireAid grant provided emergency childcare for a thousand displaced children, along with mental health resources and camp activities for children to reconnect with their fire-scarred neighborhoods.
“Young kids experienced so many traumatic things in their local communities,” Dominguez said. “After the fires, kids and families had an opportunity to go somewhere safe where they trust. Now we are seeing the shock, the reality of this being a long-term experience. We were able to hire more licensed social workers, and the money we received from FireAid helped support that.”
Mental health services remained a complex and ongoing need, especially for youth and children. “I went to the Sears building a couple of months ago, where Pali High is temporally housed, to look at this big wall where kids had posted notes about how they felt post-fires,” Reale said. “You could see that the trauma is still alive and well. Nobody’s healing overnight.”
Much of the aid dispersed was less visible to the public, if lifesaving for its recipients. Yet two marquee FireAid projects involved rebuilding and revamping damaged public green space, including Loma Alta Park, near Altadena. A second site, Palisades Park, will open this summer.
Alana Lewis, who was impacted by the recent Eaton Canyon wildfires, at a community gathering at the First African Methodist Episcopal Church in Altadena on Jan. 17.
(James Carbone/For De Los)
As residents in the burned areas explore rebuilding homes, issues like soil testing, remediation and permitting have emerged as new bureaucratic challenges for future FireAid grants to help navigate.
Questions around how to support rebuilding — or where it should happen at all — are complex. FireAid’s third round of grants are likely to focus on longer-term mitigation efforts and environmental resilience to prevent and manage future fires, which are all but inevitable in climate change.
“The reality is we don’t have enough money to rebuild every lot that was lost,” Reale said. “What we can do is wrap ourselves around tools or ways that a lot of people can benefit from when they’re ready to rebuild, and that could be the sustainable models. We can’t rebuild the same way. So we’ll put our money toward things that are helping people with home hardening models, and things to prevent and mitigate future fires.”
For the more intangible cultural communities lost — like the music studios, rehearsal rooms and artists’ homes burned in both fires — recovery will be diffuse. The January concert made FireAid a natural fit as a partner for MusiCares, the Recording Academy’s affiliated charity. That organization declined to say how much FireAid gave specifically, but said that the grant contributed to $6.25 million in fire recovery aid given to 3,200 affected music professionals to help rebuild studios, pay medical bills and evacuate burn sites.
Post-fire gentrification and financial speculating are new major fears. The Palisades has always been a coveted neighborhood, where working-class residents will face challenges returning to any affordable apartments lost. Altadena — home to a long-standing Black community and many blue-collar, intergenerational households — could see longtime residents forced out of their beloved neighborhood yet again, this time by economic forces.
A spokesperson for the Black LA Relief and Recovery Fund said it will use its FireAid grant to “build power among residents so they can return, reclaim and rebuild amidst political and financial threats like land grabs and gentrification.”
The Pacific Coast Highway near Big Rock Beach in Malibu, Calif., on July 8.
(Myung J. Chun / Los Angeles Times)
FireAid moved heaven and earth to produce a benefit concert on par with the Concert For Bangladesh and Live Aid. Yet that $100 million is just a sliver of the billions in damage inflicted on Altadena and the Palisades. (Applications for the final round of small nonprofit grants are still open).
Reale and other FireAid organizers admit that the scale of aid needed is staggering, universally painful yet fraught with class and racial stratification. The FireAid concert made a profound impact for the groups serving survivors on the ground. It’s also nowhere near enough to meet the need, and never could be.
“At the beginning, we were just worried about basic necessities. Then the reality set in of ‘I have no home, I can’t go back,’” Hillsides’ Roth said. “The need we’re seeing now is helping people process that, and get a path to move forward.”
New Delhi, July 22: Honda Motorcycles & Scooters India (HMSI) will launch its new 100cc bike in India soon. It is said that the upcoming motorcycle would sit above the Honda Shine 100. The company will introduce this new motorcycle for the daily commuters, focusing on the mileage and performance. The new bike is expected to compete with Hero Splendor, which has dominated the market for decades.
HMSI will launch this entry-level motorcycle in the 100cc segment in the future. According to a report published by Autocar India,Honda aims to get closer to its rival Hero MotoCorp with its new 100cc model. Besides, the report mentioned that the company was working on expansion of its EV into more than 100 cities in India along with introduction of Flex-fuel tech and EV plants for a long-term strategy. Tesla Pan-India Delivery Now Open: Elon Musk’s EV Firm Allows Customers From 34 States To Order Car From Official Website, Offers Priority Delivery in 4 Key Cities.
Honda Motorcycle 100cc Expansion
HMSI has only one product in the 100cc segment – the Shine 100. However, it aims to add another model focusing on customers who prefer style and features. The entry-level bikes like Shine 100 and Hero Spelndor have a huge market potential as they accounted for 46% of the total market sales in FY25 and Honda has only 6% market share. Besides, the current leader, Splendor, has dominated the 100 to 100cc segment with 78% of the total market share. 2025 Renault Triber Teased With New Logo and Design, 7-Seater MPV Set To Launch in India on July 23, 2025; Check Details.
As per Autocar India, the upcoming Honda 100cc motorcycle will be priced higher than the Honda Shine 100. The Shine 100 has become a preferred bike in rural areas, encouraging customers to choose a model besides Splendor. The report mentioned that early in 2025, many rumours hinted that HMSI could be working on an MC100 Classic or the Shine 100 Classic bike. Despite having a good presence in the 125cc and scooter segments, the company now aims to focus on the 100cc segment to rival Hero MotoCorp.
(The above story first appeared on LatestLY on Jul 22, 2025 04:47 PM IST. For more news and updates on politics, world, sports, entertainment and lifestyle, log on to our website latestly.com).
OpenAI is seeking capital from new and existing investors, two people familiar with the company’s plans tell WIRED. The fundraising effort is part of a $40 billion round announced in March. The round will reopen on Monday, July 28, according to one of the sources, who has direct knowledge of the fundraising effort.
The $40 billion round announced earlier this year brought OpenAI’s valuation up to $300 billion, making it one of the most highly valued private startups in history. The round was led by Japanese investment conglomerate SoftBank, which committed to contributing 75 percent of the total funding. The initial tranche was $10 billion, with $7.5 billion from SoftBank and another $2.5 billion from a syndicate of other investors. OpenAI is currently raising the final $30 billion, with $22.5 from SoftBank and $7.5 from a syndicate of other investors.
SoftBank’s commitment could be slashed to $10 billion if OpenAI does not restructure by the end of the year, WIRED confirmed.
OpenAI has raised a total of $63.92 billion since the company was founded in 2015, according to PitchBook. Its backers include a wide range of institutional and individual investors, including Microsoft, Andreessen Horowitz, Sequoia Capital, Founders Fund, Thrive Capital, Coatue Management, Nvidia, and Reid Hoffman. Microsoft and OpenAI’s relationship is closely intertwined, with Microsoft providing OpenAI with massive amounts of cloud computing resources and OpenAI giving Microsoft exclusive access to its best models—though it was recently reported that their relationship has complications.
OpenAI has also partnered with SoftBank, among others, on a four-year AI data center project in which upwards of $500 billion is projected to be invested. The Wall Street Journal reported earlier this week that the two entities have been at odds over certain aspects of the partnership, including where to build the data centers, and that OpenAI CEO Sam Altman has been making moves to sign deals for Stargate-aligned data centers without the Japanese firm.
In a joint statement to WIRED, SoftBank and OpenAI said: “Stargate’s $500 billion commitment to build 10GW of new compute capacity across the United States is no longer a vision—it’s happening. We’re moving with urgency on site assessments and reimagining how data centers are designed to power advanced AI and make its benefits widely accessible. With projects already advancing in multiple states, we are moving at hyperscale and speed to deliver the AI infrastructure that will power the future and serve humanity.”
OpenAI’s company structure has also been a point of contention and has rankled Elon Musk, who helped launch the research lab with a mission to safeguard humanity against artificial general intelligence, or AGI. After Musk left the company’s board in early 2018, OpenAI created a for-profit arm, in part to make it easier to fundraise. Last year Musk sued OpenAI for allegedly abandoning its original mission and said the company is “not just developing but is refining an AGI to maximize profits for Microsoft, rather than for the benefit of humanity.”
In May, OpenAI proposed a new structure that keeps the nonprofit in control of the company and turns its current for-profit subsidiary into a public benefit corporation. This new nonprofit would hold shares in the PBC, and the PBC would in theory be designed to prioritize returns for shareholders while also pursuing projects with clear public benefits. SoftBank’s investment in OpenAI is contingent on this new structure being approved by attorneys general in California and in Delaware by early next year.
Additional reporting by Kylie Robison and Zoë Schiffer.
Update 7/22/25 3:10pm EST: This story has been updated to include a joint statement from OpenAI and SoftBank.
When Lawrence and Penny Higgins of Fairfield, Maine, first learned in 2020 that high levels of toxic chemicals called PFAS taint their home’s well water, they wondered how their health might suffer. They had consumed the water for decades, given it to their pets and farm animals, and used it to irrigate their vegetable garden and fruit trees.
“We wanted to find out just what it’s going to do to us,” Penny Higgins said. They contacted a couple of doctors, but “we were met with a brick wall. Nobody knew anything.”
Worse still, she added, they “really didn’t want to hear about it.”
Many clinicians remain unaware of the health risks linked to PFAS, short for perfluoroalkyl and polyfluoroalkyl substances, despite rising medical and public awareness of the chemicals and their toxicity. PFAS can affect nearly every organ system and linger in bodies for decades, raising risks of cancer, immune deficiencies, and pregnancy complications.
These “forever chemicals” have been widely used since the 1950s in products including cosmetics, cookware, clothing, carpeting, food packaging, and firefighting foam. Researchers say they permeate water systems and soils nationwide, with a federal study estimating that at least 45% of U.S. tap water is contaminated. PFAS can be detected in the blood of nearly all Americans, according to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.
Maine was among the first states to begin extensive water and soil testing and to try to limit further public exposure to PFAS through policy action, after discovering that farms and residences — like the Higgins’ property — had been contaminated by land-spreading of wastewater sludge containing PFAS. Exposure can also be high for people living near military bases, fire training areas, landfills, or manufacturing facilities.
In regions where testing reveals PFAS hot spots, medical providers can be caught flat-footed and patients left adrift.
Email Sign-Up
Subscribe to KFF Health News’ free Morning Briefing.
Rachel Criswell, a family practice doctor and environmental health researcher, is working to change that. She was completing her residency in Central Maine around the time that the Higginses and others there began discovering the extent of the contamination. Her medical training at Columbia University included more than a year in Norway researching the effects of PFAS and other chemicals on maternal and infant health.
When patients began asking about PFAS, Criswell and the state toxicologist offered primary care providers lunchtime presentations on how to respond. Since then, she has fielded frequent PFAS questions from doctors and patients throughout the state.
Even knowledgeable providers can find it challenging to stay current given rapidly evolving scientific information and few established protocols. “The work I do is exhausting and time-consuming and sometimes frustrating,” Criswell said, “but it’s exactly what I should be doing.”
Rachel Criswell, a family practice doctor and environmental health researcher in Central Maine, works with colleagues and community residents to assess PFAS health impacts and fields questions about the “forever chemicals” from doctors and patients throughout the state.(Brianna Soukup for KFF Health News)
Criswell, who practices at Redington-Fairview General Hospital in Skowhegan, Maine, holds flyers used to recruit patients for a study of PFAS exposure in Central Maine. (Brianna Soukup for KFF Health News)
A printout of a presentation Criswell shows to area residents at recruitment drives for a study about PFAS exposure in Central Maine. (Brianna Soukup for KFF Health News)
Phil Brown, a Northeastern University sociology professor and a co-director of the PFAS Project Lab, said the medical community “doesn’t know a lot about occupational and environmental health,” adding that “it’s a very minimal part of the medical school curriculum” and continuing education.
Courtney Carignan, an environmental epidemiologist at Michigan State University, said learning of PFAS exposure, whether from their drinking water or occupational sources, “is a sensitive and upsetting situation for people” and “it’s helpful if their doctors can take it seriously.”
Clinical guidance concerning PFAS improved after the National Academies of Sciences, Engineering, and Medicine released a report on PFAS in 2022. It found strong evidence associating PFAS with kidney cancer, high cholesterol, reduced birth weights, and lower antibody responses to vaccines, and some evidence linking PFAS to breast and testicular cancer, ulcerative colitis, thyroid and liver dysfunction, and pregnancy-induced hypertension.
That guidance “revolutionized my practice,” Criswell said. “Instead of being this hand-wavey thing where we don’t know how to apply the research, it brought a degree of concreteness to PFAS exposure that was kind of missing before.”
The national academies affirmed what Criswell had already been recommending: Doctors should order blood tests for patients with known PFAS exposures.
Testing for PFAS in blood — and for related medical conditions if needed — can help ease patients’ anxiety.
“There isn’t a day that goes by,” Lawrence Higgins said, “that we don’t think and wonder when our bodies are going to shut down on us.”
Lawrence and Penny Higgins and other Central Maine residents serve on an advisory board for a Maine study assessing mental health consequences of PFAS exposure in rural residents.(Brianna Soukup for KFF Health News)
“Water is the worst thing you can have contaminated,” Penny Higgins says. “You use water in everything.” (Brianna Soukup for KFF Health News)
State testing of the well at the Higginses’ Fairfield, Maine, home in 2020 revealed high PFAS readings. (Brianna Soukup for KFF Health News)
‘Devastating but Incredibly Helpful’
After finding out in 2021 that his family was exposed to PFAS through sludge spread on their Unity, Maine, farm decades earlier, Adam Nordell discovered that “it was exceedingly difficult” to get tested. “Our family doctor had not heard of PFAS and didn’t know what the test was,” he said. A lab technician needed coaching from an outside expert to source the test. The lab analyzing the samples had a backlog that left the family waiting three months.
“The results were devastating but incredibly helpful,” Nordell said. Their blood serum levels for PFAS were at roughly the 99th percentile nationally, far higher than their well-water levels would have predicted — indicating that additional exposure was probably coming from other sources such as soil contact, dust, and food.
Blood levels of PFAS between 2 and 20 nanograms per milliliter may be problematic, the national academies reported. In highly contaminated settings, blood levels can run upward of 150 times the 20-ng/mL risk threshold.
Nordell and his family had been planning to remain on the farm and grow crops less affected by PFAS, but the test results persuaded them to leave. “Knowledge is power,” Nordell said, and having the blood data “gave us agency.”
The national academies’ guidance paved the way for more clinicians to order PFAS blood tests. The cost, typically $400 to $600, can be prohibitive if not picked up by insurance, and not all insurers cover the testing. Deductibles and copays can also limit patients’ capacity to get tested. Less costly finger-prick tests, administered at home, appear to capture some of the more commonly found PFAS as accurately as blood serum tests, Carignan and colleagues found.
Maine legislators recently passed, with overwhelming support, a bill — modeled after one in New Hampshire — that would require insurers to consider PFAS blood testing part of preventive care, but it was carried over to the next legislative session.
“In my mind, it’s a no-brainer that the PFAS blood serum test should be universally offered — at no cost to the patient,” said Nordell, who now works as a campaign manager for the nonprofit Defend Our Health. Early screening for the diseases associated with PFAS, he said, is “a humane policy that’s in the best interests of everyone involved” — patients, providers, and insurance companies.
Criswell tells colleagues in family practice that they can view elevated PFAS blood levels as a risk factor, akin to smoking. “What’s challenging as a primary care doctor is the nitty-gritty” of the testing and screening logistics, she said.
In trainings, she shares a handout summarizing the national academies’ guidance — including associated heath conditions, blood testing, clinical follow-up, and exposure reduction — to which she has added details about lab test order codes, insurance costs and coverage, and water filtration.
Criswell served on an advisory committee tasked with allocating $60 million in state funds to address PFAS contamination from past sludge-spreading in Maine. The group recommended that labs analyzing PFAS blood tests should report the results to state public health authorities.
That change, slated to take effect this summer, will allow Maine health officials to follow up with people who have high PFAS blood levels to better determine potential sources and to share information on health risks and medical screening. As with many earlier PFAS policies, Maine is among the first states to adopt this measure.
Screening for PFAS is falling short in many places nationwide, said Kyle Horton, an internist in Wilmington, North Carolina, and founder of the nonprofit On Your Side Health. She estimates that only about 1 in 100 people facing high PFAS exposure are getting adequate medical guidance.
Even in her highly contaminated community, “I’m not aware of anyone who is routinely screening or discussing PFAS mitigation with their patients,” Horton said. Knowledge of local PFAS threats, she added, “hasn’t translated over to folks managing patients differently or trying to get through to that next phase of medical monitoring.”
The Higginses had consumed water from their artesian well for decades, giving it to their pets and farm animals, and using it to irrigate their vegetable garden and fruit trees, before discovering it was contaminated with PFAS.(Brianna Soukup for KFF Health News)Before Lawrence Higgins learned in 2020 of the high PFAS levels, he built a duck pond to help manage the overflow of water.(Brianna Soukup for KFF Health News)
Patients as Advocates
In heavily affected communities — including in Michigan, Maine, and Massachusetts — patients are pushing the medical field to better understand PFAS.
More doctors are speaking out as well. Testifying before a Maine legislative committee this year in support of a bill that would limit occupational PFAS exposure, Criswell said, “We, as physicians, who are sworn to protect the health of our patients, must pay attention to the underlying causes of the illnesses we treat and stand up for policy solutions that reduce these causes.”
Even where policy changes are instituted, the physical and psychological toll of “forever chemicals” will extend far into the future. Criswell and other Maine doctors have observed chronic stress among patients.
Nordell, the former farmer, described his family’s contamination as “deeply, deeply jarring,” an ordeal that has at times left him “unmoored from a sense of security.”
To assess the mental health consequences of PFAS exposure in rural residents, Criswell and Abby Fleisch, a pediatric endocrinologist at the MaineHealth Institute for Research, teamed up on a study. In its first phase, winding up this summer, they collected blood samples and detailed lifestyle information from 147 people.
Nordell, the Higginses, and other Central Maine residents sit on an advisory board for the study, a step Criswell said was critical to ensuring that their research helps those most affected by PFAS.
“The urgency from the community is really needed,” she said. “I don’t think I would be as fired up if my patients weren’t such good advocates.”
Criswell has faced what she calls “cognitive dissonance,” caught between the deliberate pace of peer-reviewed medical research and the immediate needs of patients eager to lower their PFAS body burden. Initially she considered inviting residents to participate in a clinical trial to test therapies that are considered safe and may help reduce PFAS levels in the body, such as high-fiber diets and a drug designed to reduce cholesterol called cholestyramine. But the clinical trial process could take years.
Criswell and Fleisch are instead planning to produce a case series on PFAS blood-level changes in patients taking cholestyramine. “We can validate the research results and share those,” Criswell said, potentially helping other patients.
Alan Ducatman, an internist and occupational physician who helped design the largest PFAS cohort study to date, said providers should convey that “there is no risk-benefit analysis” for any of the current treatments, although they’re generally well known and low-risk.
“Some people want to be treated, and they should be allowed to be treated,” he said, because knowing they have high PFAS levels in their bodies “preys on them.”
Lawrence and Penny Higgins at their home in Fairfield, Maine.(Brianna Soukup for KFF Health News)
Easily one of the most popular manga and anime of the last decade, My Hero Academia is getting a brand-new video game that’ll cover the final arc of this beloved comic book-inspired series. Called My Hero Academia: All’s Justice, the 3D fighting game is planned to launch on PC, PS5, and Xbox Series X in the near future. While we’re still waiting on a release date, preorders for the game are already live, and you can reserve a physical copy for $60 at multiple online retailers.
Like its predecessor, 2020’s My Hero Academia: One’s Justice 2, My Hero Academia: All’s Justice is a 3D fighting game that features the students of Call 1-A going up against an assortment of villains led by the main antagonist All For One’s adopted son and successor, Tomura Shigaraki. The big draw here is the sheer size of the game’s roster, as it looks like just about every character from the show will be present and ready to throw down. Players assemble a team of three characters who can be switched out seamlessly during fights, allowing for special attacks to be chained together. When combined with the new “Rising” gameplay system, these heroes and villains can dish out a significant amount of damage during combat. The game also looks fantastic in action, as the reveal trailer showed off slick cel-shaded graphics.
So far, only a standard edition has been announced for All’s Justice, and no preorder bonuses have been confirmed. However, we’ll update this post if any additional versions or preorder incentives are announced. Physical PS5 and Xbox Series X copies are available to preorder at Amazon, Walmart, and Best Buy.
If you’re unfamiliar with My Hero Academia, the series began as a manga written by Kōhei Horikoshi and was then adapted into the now-popular anime series. My Hero Academia takes place in a world where certain people have superpowers, known as “Quirks.” This has given rise to a new era of superheroes who protect the people from villains who use their quirks for crime, and the greatest of these public defenders is All Might. The series’ protagonist, Izuku Midoriya, dreams of becoming a hero, but was born without a Quirk. However, a chance encounter with All Might allows him to inherit the ailing hero’s powers, which makes him eligible to enroll at the prestigious UA Academy for upcoming superheroes.
My Hero Academia quickly became a smash hit in print and on TV thanks to its likeable everyman protagonist, colorful supporting cast, and a Japanese take on western comic books, and it will be interesting to see how the new My Hero Academia: All’s Justice 3D fighting game will adapt the elements and expand upon the previously released 3D MHA fighting games released so far.
My Hero Academia manga
While waiting for My Hero Academia: All Justice, you can catch up on the anime saga, as most of it is available on Blu-ray. So far, all six seasons and the first half of the seventh season are available at Amazon. Check the list below to see all the Blu-ray releases available now.
If you’d prefer to start with the manga source material, the best way to do so is with a box set that bundles together the first 20 volumes. Amazon has it on sale for $90 (was $180), and it comes with a full-color double-sided poster and an exclusive 48-page booklet featuring never-before-seen bonus illustrations and author commentary.
New research by the University of Sydney offers important insights into how and when new coronavirus variants arise in bats.
Bats are beneficial to our ecosystems and economy but, as habitat destruction and environmental stressors put them in closer proximity to humans, disease risks can emerge. The research, published in Nature Communications on July 17, offers an approach to anticipating the emergence of coronaviruses. It found young bats are infected more frequently and could be a key source of viral spillover into other species. The study also reveals the dynamics of coronaviruses circulating in Australian bats, which pose no known risk to humans.
Endemic in bat populations, most coronaviruses never infect humans. When they do, as with the SARS, COVID-19 and MERS outbreaks, they typically spill over from bats via a bridging animal host.
“Coronaviruses tend not to be of major concern to bats,” said Dr Alison Peel from the University’s School of Veterinary Science, who led the study. “But they can behave differently if they spill over to new species.”
In one of the most comprehensive single studies of its type, the researchers collected more than 2,500 faecal samples, via which bats shed coronaviruses, over three years. Samples were taken from black flying foxes and grey-headed flying foxes at five roost sites across Australia’s eastern seaboard.
Viral testing of the samples showed coronaviruses were most prevalent in young bats between March and July, when they were weaning and approaching maturity. This was consistent across the three-year study. Particularly notable was the high proportion of bats infected with multiple coronaviruses at once.
“We were surprised by that high rate of co-infection among juveniles and subadults,” Dr Peel said. “Co-infection presents the opportunity for a single cell to become infected with multiple viruses, an important natural precursor to the generation of new strains.”
The six coronaviruses detected in the study were nobecoviruses, a subclass which does not jump to humans. Three of these were new. They were useful to analyse because they pose minimal risk to people but are the evolutionary cousins of sarbecoviruses, so-called SARS-like viruses which are more prone to spill across to other species. Understanding the evolution of nobecoviruses offers parallel insights into the evolution of more dangerous coronaviruses.
“We safely tracked how and when coronaviruses circulated naturally in bat populations. Using genomics to track infections to individual animals,” Dr John-Sebastian Eden, a study co-author from the Westmead Insitute for Medical Research and the University’s Faculty of Medicine and Health.
“The results offer a model for scientists looking to understand coronavirus emergence and future risks in bat populations around the world. By focusing on co-infections in young bats during certain periods, researchers might better predict the natural evolution and emergence of riskier coronaviruses before they pose a risk to human health.”
Dr Peel said more research is needed to understand why young bats are more susceptible to infection and co-infection.
“It could be the result of newly weaned animals whose immune systems are still developing or the stress faced by teenage bats looking for a mate for the first time,” she said.
The changing environment could also be a factor.
“We know from previous research on other viruses that habitat loss caused by encroaching human populations and food shortages can create stress in bats that weakens immunity and makes them susceptible to infections. It will be important to find out if that’s also the case for coronaviruses.”
Dr Peel and Dr Eden’s research began in 2020, as the COVID-19 pandemic took hold. It built on earlier research into the spread of Hendra virus, which also originates in bats.
“It’s rare to see this scale and depth of data in virological research, even among human viruses,” said Dr Peel. “The gathering of samples from both individual bats and beneath roosts, and the tracking of individual strains across multiple sites and years, provides a strong foundation for ongoing research into the role of environmental stress on coronavirus emergence.”
YES BANK is a leading Indian private sector bank committed to transforming the financial landscape of India. With over 1200 branches nationwide and a dedicated team of YES BANKers, we strive to deliver exceptional banking solutions and empower individuals, businesses and communities to thrive.
Interested candidates can apply online via the link given at the end of the post.
Disclaimer: Charging money from students for internships or from job applicants is unethical and can result in blacklisting. We strongly discourage requesting any kind of payment from interns, including processing fees or charges for certificates. If you have any concerns, please contact us at [email protected]
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/lifestyle/health/cosmetologist-breaks-down-celebrity-filler-craze-from-baby-botox-to-pillow-face-and-preventive-aesthetics-101753196067312.html” on this server.
French pharmaceutical giant Sanofi said Tuesday it will pay $1.15 billion to acquire the privately held London-based private biotechnology company Vicebio and its portfolio of experimental vaccines.
Through the deal, Sanofi will gain a combination shot now in clinical testing for protection against respiratory syncytial virus and human metapneumovirus, or hMPV. Vicebio specializes in a vaccine technology it dubs “molecular clamp.”
Per deal terms, Vicebio could also receive up to $450 million in additional payments based on achievement of developmental and regulatory milestones. The companies expect the acquisition to close in the fourth quarter.
Dive Insight:
Sanofi is one of the largest vaccine manufacturers, and has found success with treatments for respiratory infections such as influenza and RSV. An antibody drug, Beyfortus, that Sanofi developed with partner AstraZeneca has become a blockbuster product for preventing RSV disease in infants.
However, Sanofi has also been looking to broaden its vaccine portfolio to include other, non-mRNA technologies. Last year, the French pharma partnered with Novavax, gaining rights to co-market its protein-based COVID shot. And now, the acquisition of Vicebio could bolster its pipeline with new options to treat respiratory infections.
Vicebio’s lead candidate, dubbed VXB-241, could allow Sanofi to “offer increased physician and patient choice in RSV and hMPV by adding a non-mRNA vaccine to its pipeline,” the company said in a statement. VXB-241 is currently in Phase 1 testing.
Leerink Partners analyst David Risinger wrote in a client note Tuesday that the deal is evidence of Sanofi’s “enthusiasm for developing protein-based combination vaccines.”
The biotech uses technology developed by researchers at Australia’s University of Queensland. This “molecular clamp” platform is designed to elicit strong immune responses against respiratory diseases, while permitting simpler and faster production and distribution.
“This opens the door to user-friendly formats such as pre-filled syringes and supports efficient, large-scale manufacturing,” Vicebio CEO Emmanuel Hanon, wrote in an email.
Vicebio was formed by European life sciences investment firm Medicxi in 2018. The University of Queensland remains an investor.
“[This acquisition] significantly increases the likelihood of seeing our innovation reach the market, ultimately benefiting patients and supporting the efforts of public health authorities,” Hanon added.
Editor’s note: This story has been updated with commentary from Vicebio.
.jpg)
